Bangor University Postgraduate Prospectus 2015 by Bangor University

BANGOR UNIVERSITY POSTGRADUATE PROSPECTUS 2015

39450 BU PG Cover_Layout ola 2014-09-10 10:51 AM Page 2

39450 BU PG Cover_Layout ola 2014-09-10 10:51 AM Page 1

CONTENTS

If you find it difficult to read the size of print in this prospectus, please look at our website www.bangor.ac.uk for details of our courses and facilities.

USEFUL CONTACTS BANGOR UNIVERSITY GWYNEDD LL57 2DG Tel: 01248 351151 Website: www.bangor.ac.uk

INTRODUCTION

1 Introduction to the University 2 About the University 4 International Research Excellence

LIVING & STUDYING IN BANGOR 6 8 9 12 13 14

Living and Studying in Bangor Accommodation Student Support Library and Archives Service Information Technology Services Social Life and Entertainment

INTERNATIONAL STUDENTS

16 Information for International Students and English Language Requirements

STUDENT FINANCE & APPLYING 18 Student Finance and Fees 20 Applying and Entry Requirements 21 Study Options

GENERAL INFORMATION 173 Useful Contacts

@BangorUni facebook.com/bangoruniversity

22 25 29 35 39 43 47 53 57 61

COLLEGE OF ARTS AND HUMANITIES School of Creative Studies and Media School of English School of History, Welsh History and Archaeology School of Linguistics and English Language School of Modern Languages School of Music School of Philosophy and Religion School of Welsh School of Lifelong Learning

64 COLLEGE OF BUSINESS, LAW, EDUCATION & SOCIAL SCIENCES 65 Bangor Business School 81 Bangor Law School 91 School of Social Sciences 97 Bangor Business School London Centre 103 School of Education 108 111 115 123

COLLEGE OF NATURAL SCIENCES School of Biological Sciences School of Environment, Natural Resources and Geography School of Ocean Sciences

128 131 139 143 151

COLLEGE OF HEALTH AND BEHAVIOURAL SCIENCES School of Healthcare Sciences School of Medical Sciences School of Psychology School of Sport, Health and Exercise Sciences

158 161 165 169

COLLEGE OF PHYSICAL AND APPLIED SCIENCES School of Chemistry School of Computer Sciences School of Electronic Engineering

UK/EU PG ADMISSIONS Tel: +44 (0)1248 388484 E-mail: postgraduate@bangor.ac.uk INTERNATIONAL PG ADMISSIONS Tel: +44 (0)1248 382028 E-mail: international@bangor.ac.uk ENGLISH LANGUAGE AND FOUNDATION COURSES Tel: +44 (0)1248 382252 E-mail: elcos@bangor.ac.uk HALLS OFFICE Tel: +44 (0)1248 382667 E-mail: halls@bangor.ac.uk MONEY SUPPORT UNIT Tel: +44 (0)1248 383566/383637 E-mail: moneysupport@bangor.ac.uk STUDENT HOUSING OFFICE Tel: +44 (0)1248 382034 E-mail: studenthousing@bangor.ac.uk THE MILES DYSLEXIA CENTRE Tel: +44 (0)1248 383843 E-mail: dyslex-student@bangor.ac.uk PROSPECTUS AND OTHER UNIVERSITY LITERATURE Tel: +44 (0)1248 383561/382005 E-mail: prospectus@bangor.ac.uk STUDENT SERVICES Tel: +44 (0)1248 382024 E-mail: studentservices@bangor.ac.uk

@prifysgolbangoruniversity

POSTGRADUATE COURSES FAIR: www.bangor.ac.uk/pgfair

DESIGN/IMAGES: COWBOIS/HAMILTON PRINT: W.O. JONES PRINTERS LTD Bangor University Registered Charity No: 1141565

BANGOR UNIVERSITY POSTGRADUATE PROSPECTUS 173

39450 BU PG Prospectus 2015_2018 2014-09-10 10:34 AM Page 1

INTRODUCTION TO THE UNIVERSITY Established in 1884, Bangor University has a long tradition of excellence and exceeds expectations, both for academic standards and student experience. Bangor University today is a thriving, forward-looking institution offering excellent postgraduate opportunities in both taught courses and research degrees. We enjoy an excellent track record for research and teaching quality. The most recent UK-wide Research Assessment Exercise identified world-leading research in all of our 19 assessed subject areas with nearly 50% given the top grading of 3* and 4*. Coupled with the high calibre of research activity, students on taught postgraduate courses can enjoy teaching of a high standard delivered by true experts in their field. Bangor has a strong research base across a spectrum of academic disciplines engaging in research at national and international levels. Research is carried out either directly in the Schools or in Research Centres and Institutes associated with one or more School. Bangor University is recognised regionally, nationally and internationally as a centre of excellence for a varied portfolio of academic programmes and for the high quality of the experience it provides for its students and staff. We have a range of national and international partnerships with a number of other universities which provide an opportunity to work collaboratively, as well as for joint working, research and study. The University has a clear commitment to provide a quality student experience through teaching, learning and student support. Our ratio of teaching staff to students enables us to focus on each student’s individual needs. We are committed to encouraging each and every individual student to reach their full potential.

“Bangor is a genuinely caring and supportive university community, and we take great pride in the first class services we offer our students. These include academic, financial, career and personal advice support. The quality of our teaching and research is worldclass, attracting students and staff from around the globe. In addition, there are numerous opportunities for students to get involved in a wide variety of activities. The stunning mountains of Snowdonia and miles of coastline provide the backdrop to a university experience which cannot be matched.” Prof JOHN G. HUGHES Vice-Chancellor, Bangor University

BANGOR UNIVERSITY POSTGRADUATE PROSPECTUS 1

39450 BU PG Prospectus 2015_2018 2014-09-10 10:34 AM Page 2

ABOUT THE UNIVERSITY With over 10,000 students from all over the world, Bangor offers you the chance to become part of a vibrant student community situated in one of the most attractive study locations in the UK and to study at a well-established university with an excellent reputation for both teaching and research. The University is also situated in one of the most vibrant bilingual areas in the UK and promoting the Welsh language is integral to the University’s vision. The University is proud of the area’s rich cultural and linguistic heritage and plays a leading role in fostering this cultural vitality. While the University remains an important resource for local people, over half our students come from outside Wales. This is a higher proportion than the average for all Welsh universities and colleges. Our full-time students come from 28 EU and 87 countries worldwide. We recruit students from all sorts of backgrounds being particular popular with students who value the smaller community feel which the University and city of Bangor offer. All our courses are taught in English, although for Welsh speakers there are opportunities to study a number of courses through the medium of Welsh. Over 20% of our students speak both Welsh and English, while 58% of staff are bilingual or are learning Welsh. Bangor is recognised as one of the world’s leading universities in terms of research on bilingualism and language technologies. Why study at Bangor? Bangor University has recently had great success in the Times Higher Education World University rankings 2013-14 and is placed among the world’s top 350 universities based on key factors such as teaching, research performance and citations, and international outlook. Bangor University prides itself on the quality of teaching offered and has been rated top in Wales for teaching (2014 National Student Survey). A recent review by the UK Quality Assurance Agency (QAA) resulted in the highest possible endorsement of the University’s academic standards. The ‘confidence’ judgement by the QAA confirms the University’s academic standing and profile. The University also performs well in a variety of student surveys rating satisfaction levels and overall experience. The 2014 National Student Survey results placed Bangor University top in Wales and amongst the UK’s top ten universities* for student satisfaction. The Times Higher Education Student Experience Survey also rated Bangor within the top 20 universities in the UK for student experience.

*excluding specialist institutions

2 BANGOR UNIVERSITY POSTGRADUATE PROSPECTUS

“I would say the university deﬁnitely looks after postgraduate students. There are lots of easily accessible student services, both university wide and department speciﬁc that makes for a great postgraduate experience.”

39450 BU PG Prospectus 2015_2018 2014-09-10 10:34 AM Page 3

RATED IN THE TOP 20 IN THE UK FOR STUDENT EXPERIENCE (THE Student Experience Survey)

STUDY SOMEWHERE SPECIAL “Because I would be studying miles away from home, I wanted the University to be like a second home and I really felt it was my home away from home. The warm welcoming culture of the people around, the greenery and the structure; everything was so perfect that I fell in love with the place.”

BANGOR UNIVERSITY POSTGRADUATE PROSPECTUS 3

39450 BU PG Prospectus 2015_2018 2014-09-10 10:34 AM Page 4

INTERNATIONAL RESEARCH EXCELLENCE A Research-intensive University Bangor has a strong research base across a spectrum of academic disciplines engaging in research at national and international levels. The University provides strong support for research activities including encouraging links with commercial and industrial bodies in the UK and overseas. The University also aims to be responsive to local and regional needs and is particularly conscious of its north Wales location and role as a research resource and a training base for Wales. Investment in Your Future An on-going multi-million pound investment programme has already resulted in new student residences and academic facilities such as the Management Centre and the Environment Centre Wales building. An on-going investment in facilities and support services is further enhancing the Bangor student experience. An exciting new Arts and Innovation Centre, new halls of residence, and improved sports facilities are amongst recent developments. Bangor’s Research and You Bangor’s teaching and research combined with high-quality facilities offer you world-class research and learning opportunities. Whether studying a taught postgraduate course or a postgraduate research degree, you will contribute to our research excellence. You’ll benefit from teaching of a high standard delivered by true experts in their field and be directly involved with cutting-edge research.

The Research Assessment Exercise The Research Assessment Exercise (RAE) measures the quality of research conducted in universities and other higher education institutions in the UK. The results are used by the higher education funding bodies to determine the level of research grant given to institutions. The assessment categories are as follows: 4* = world-leading in terms of originality, significance and rigour 3* = internationally excellent in terms of originality, significance and rigour, but falls short of the highest standard of excellence 2* = recognised internationally in terms of originality, significance and rigour 1* = recognised nationally in terms of originality, significance and rigour Unclassified = falls below the standard of nationally recognised work The most recent UK-wide RAE identified world-leading research in all of our 19 assessed subject areas with nearly 50% given the top grading of 3* and 4*. Areas of particular excellence include Accounting and Finance within the Business School which is rated as the best in the UK and Electronic Engineering which is rated second in the UK. In addition, Sports Science and Welsh are placed in the top 10 in the UK in their respective units of assessment and Psychology 11th in the UK. In the Arts and Humanities, the School of Music for example had 90% of its research staff rated as world-leading or of international quality. Also, 90% of research staff in the Earth Systems and Environmental Sciences field which includes Ocean Sciences were rated as worldleading or of international quality.

4 BANGOR UNIVERSITY POSTGRADUATE PROSPECTUS

39450 BU PG Prospectus 2015_2018 2014-09-10 10:34 AM Page 5

AN INTERNATIONAL UNIVERSITY FOR THE REGION “Academically, Bangor has a long tradition of excellence. Founded in 1884, the University’s position as a first-class institution of higher education was reaffirmed by the most recent Research Assessment Exercise, when 19 subjects were identified as having world-leading elements in their work.” SUNDAY TIMES UNIVERSITY GUIDE

BANGOR UNIVERSITY POSTGRADUATE PROSPECTUS 5

39450 BU PG Prospectus 2015_2018 2014-09-10 10:34 AM Page 6

LIVING AND STUDYING IN BANGOR Where is Bangor? Bangor is located on the coast of north Wales, situated between the mountains of Snowdonia and the sea. Bangor is one of the most attractive study locations in the UK and the size and nature of the City means that it is easy to get to know people and our students settle in immediately. The City of Bangor Bangor is an ancient cathedral city set in an area of outstanding natural beauty on the north Wales coast, where the Snowdonia mountains meet the sea. It is considered one of the most cost effective cities in the UK in which to live and study. The area offers fantastic opportunities for students interested in the outdoors including sailing, hiking, climbing, surfing, rowing, kayaking and windsurfing. The city has a vibrant shopping centre boasting the longest high street in Wales. There is a good mix of national chain stores and smaller local businesses. Bangor also has a good choice of supermarkets and a few minutes outside the city centre there is a retail park with a mix of national stores.

Travelling to Bangor The A55 expressway along the north Wales coastline provides fast and easy access to and from the main UK motorway network. Manchester International Airport is within a one-and a-half hour drive along the Expressway/Motorway. Rail connections to Crewe and London are direct and ferry connections from nearby Holyhead to Ireland are fast and frequent. If you are travelling to Bangor from outside the UK, you will be pleased to hear that travelling to the UK is very easy, the transport system is one of the most developed in Europe and it is possible to take a relaxing bus or train journey from almost any city to another. It is also possible to catch flights to other cities and many low cost airlines in nearby airports offer competitive last minute deals. We are located close to Manchester, Liverpool and Birmingham with direct trains from London (around 3.5 hours) and Cardiff (around 4 hours). There is also a low cost National Express coach services which operates from Bangor to many city centre locations throughout the UK. For information about our free airport pick-up service for international students, please see page 16.

The compact size of the city itself means that student facilities – including university buildings, accommodation, the Sports Centre and the Students’ Union – are within easy walking distance of the main University buildings. High Street shops, banks, supermarkets, restaurants and bars are also close by. Student surveys show that a high proportion of students choose Bangor because of the small and friendly nature of the University and the town. The cost of living is lower than in most urban areas, so you can make the most of your money in what is a very pleasant environment in which to live and study. The opportunity to ﬁnd part-time work is important to some students and the University's Student Employment Bureau (JobZone) within the Careers and Employability Service can help you ﬁnd suitable work.

Glasgo Glasgow w Edinburgh Edinburgh

Newcastle Newcastle stle Belfast Belfast

Holyheadd Holyhead

Manchester nch er

Liverpoool Liverpool A55

Dublin Dun Laoghaire Laoghaire

Holyheadd Holyhead

Manchester anch er

Liverpool Liv erpoool M56 M5

A55

BBANGOR ANGOR AN NGOR Wrexham Wrexham

M56 M

BANGOR BANGOR AN W Wrexham rexham x

A470 A470

Birmingham i gham ha M1 M

A5 Car Cardiff diff iff

LLONDON ONDON M4

Bristol

A470 A470

6 BANGOR UNIVERSITY POSTGRADUATE PROSPECTUS

Birmingham i gham ha

M3 M

39450 BU PG Prospectus 2015_2018 2014-09-10 10:34 AM Page 7

“…the best thing about Bangor is being so close to the coast and mountains as well as being in such a student environment, which is so friendly and where you always bump into someone you know!” EMMA DIXON, MSc in Consumer Psychology with Business

There are lots of reasons to fall in love with Bangor, besides the excellent teaching and world-class research. Relax on beautiful beaches, explore stunning mountain trails, or enjoy taking part in some of the student activities on oﬀer. It all makes for a university experience that can’t be matched…

Beyond Bangor While Bangor itself is compact and convenient, the surrounding area offers plenty of wide open spaces. The mountains and coastline of Snowdonia is an area of outstanding natural beauty, offering you wonderful recreational opportunities whether you’re interested in outdoor activities or just want to enjoy the scenery. Historical towns such as Beaumaris, Conwy and Caernarfon (which all have their own castles) or picturesque places such as Beddgelert, Llanberis and Betws y Coed are well worth a visit. As a popular holiday destination, north Wales has much to offer in terms of tourist attractions and sights such as the Snowdon Mountain Railway and Thomas Telford’s famous Suspension Bridge. For day trips, the Victorian resort town of Llandudno and historical Chester are both easy car or train journeys away, while the fast ferry service from Holyhead to Ireland means a day trip to Dublin is also a popular option.

BANGOR UNIVERSITY POSTGRADUATE PROSPECTUS 7

39450 BU PG Prospectus 2015_2018 2014-09-10 10:34 AM Page 8

ACCOMMODATION TOP 10-RATED ACCOMMODATION (WHAT UNI? Student Choice Awards)

A limited number of rooms are available for postgraduate students in University managed accommodation. All of the University accommodation is self-catered and kitchens are shared with fellow halls students. Equipment provided in the kitchens varies from residence to residence, but all will have basic facilities such as cookers, fridges and freezers. Our accommodation sites are situated throughout the city so you are never far from shops, pubs and cafes of all types. Many postgraduates prefer to live in the private sector, and information about lodgings, flats, cottages and houses can be provided by the Student Housing Office. Student Housing Office staff are available to give help and advice and all of the properties are advertised on our website where you can search our database for your ideal property to rent. We also provide a Student Guide to Private Accommodation, which is designed to help you when looking for your first house in the private rented sector, pointing out the things to look out for and your rights as a tenant. For further information please visit: www.bangor.ac.uk/studentservices/studenthousing or e-mail studenthousing@bangor.ac.uk Family Accommodation The Student Housing Office in Student Support Services can assist students to look for suitable family accommodation in the private rented sector.

“I live in private accommodation in a nice house. My bedroom looks out over the Menai Straits and everyday I wake up to a beautiful view. I’m so lucky. I share it with two of my friends, who are also postgraduates and we share the common areas which is great for socialising.” CHARLOTTE WILKIN, from Maidstone in Kent, studying a PhD in Psychology

Places to Eat A range of eating venues, which are open to all, are available in various locations around the campus. These are situated on the main Ffriddoedd accommodation site (Bar Uno), the Normal Site (Y Bistro), in the Main Arts Building (Café Teras), the Environment Centre Wales Building (Caﬃ Glas) and in the Management Centre. All our catering outlets use local and Fairtrade products whenever possible. If you prefer to eat out, there are several restaurants and take-aways (Italian, Chinese and Indian) close to the main University buildings. New Development A new development of 600 rooms will open on the St Mary’s site in 2015. Situated on a hill overlooking the centre of Bangor, the new St Mary’s Student Village is ideally situated for a range of shops, and is centrally located for Bangor city centre. The range of accommodation will include studio apartments and townhouses and there will also be a café bar, shop, laundrette, common rooms and sports and ﬁtness facilities on site. Please see our website for up-to-date information: www.bangor.ac.uk/accommodation

“I am living in University accommodation and I am very glad I chose to live here because being a postgraduate, I very much appreciate the quiet and serenity of our halls. What’s more is that the halls are located in a beautiful area and living with the other hall mates is an adventure by itself.” SHEEBA NAIR, from India, studying an MSc in Foundations of Clinical Neuropsychology

8 BANGOR UNIVERSITY POSTGRADUATE PROSPECTUS

39450 BU PG Prospectus 2015_2018 2014-09-10 10:34 AM Page 9

STUDENT SUPPORT

Academic Support In order to equip postgraduate research students with the broad portfolio of skills needed during all stages of their Doctorate and develop the skills increasingly demanded by employers, we provide an annual programme of training and development. The Early Researcher Development Programme (ERDP) supports your development and knowledge as a researcher and also enables you to access tools and skills which can improve your employability, whether in academia or industry. The Programme is offered free of charge to all postgraduate research students at Bangor, regardless of their source of funding. The training is delivered in a variety of formats, from half day workshops, lunch time or drop in sessions and residentials. The ERDP is designed to help postgraduate research students at Bangor University to meet the requirements of the Researcher Development Framework. We offer a flexible programme that students, in consultation with their supervisors, can tailor to their individual needs and to the needs of their research projects. More details can be found at: www.bangor.ac.uk/adu/grad_prog.php.en The PGCertHE Programme The PGCertHE Programme is offered to anyone who wishes to develop their knowledge and skills in the areas of teaching, learning and assessment, including academic staff, research assistants and postgraduate students. For more details, please see: www.bangor.ac.uk/adu/the_scheme/the.php.en Study Skills The University's Study Skills Centre provides generic advice on all aspects of study including topics such as note taking, planning and writing dissertations, oral presentations and mathematics, statistics and numeracy. One-to-one consultations are available along with group workshops and online resources. More details can be found at: www.bangor.ac.uk/studyskills

At Bangor, we place a high priority on caring for and supporting our students. Whether you need help with a ﬁnancial, personal, academic or administrative issue, we have experienced staﬀ to help you.

Postgraduate Students’ Forum The Postgraduate Students’ Forum (PGSF) is the official representation of postgraduate students at Bangor. All postgrad students are welcome to participate in events, attend the meetings, and stand for election. The PGSF works in partnership with the Students’ Union (SU), as well as forming a link between the student body and the University's task groups or executive panels. Student Services Student Services offers the following assistance: • a free and confidential counselling service • mental health advisers to assist students to manage their studies and who can identify sources of help and support • a team of staff who will deal with crises and serious incidents involving students outside normal University hours • health care via daily surgeries with a local General Practitioner. • a dedicated student health nurse • our Chaplaincy team provide support for all members of the University, regardless of their religious beliefs • a Money Support Officer – to assist with financial concerns • a Housing Office – for accommodation services in the private sector • Peer Support – to aid new students’ social integration. International Student Support Bangor has a team of advisers for international students who offer assistance and advice on a range of matters – please see page 16. Students’ Union The Students' Union is here to support you throughout your time in Bangor through: • academic representation, including problems with any aspect of your course including academic appeals • feedback and advocacy on your behalf on services that you receive from the University • helping you to create the changes that you want to see in your student experience • our confidential listening service, Nightline, exists for you to call when you need someone to listen • the Vice President Education and Welfare, is based in the SU to help you with any issues you have whilst at University. They run the course representative scheme and are on hand as a first port of call for any problem you might face and will be able to refer you on to the most appropriate person to help find a solution to your problem.

“I have always felt supported by my tutors and supervisors, and because it’s a small place I very quickly got to know my course-mates and the staﬀ in my department. There’s a good programme of social events and excellent free training sessions (e.g. on research or writing skills) on oﬀer throughout the year.” CHRISTINA LES, PhD Modern Languages

BANGOR UNIVERSITY POSTGRADUATE PROSPECTUS 9

39450 BU PG Prospectus 2015_2018 2014-09-10 10:34 AM Page 10

“I chose to become a Postgraduate Peer Guide because I wanted to help other students settle into Bangor and fall in love with Bangor as much as I have.” KATE ISHERWOOD MSc Consumer Psychology with Business

Disability Service We offer a service for all disabled students whether full-time or part-time. Including information about your impairment, on-going health condition, mental health difficulty or specific learning difference (such as dyslexia, dyspraxia, AD(H)D) on your application form enables us to begin discussions at an early stage about any support or reasonable adjustments you may need. These discussions are in confidence and information will only be shared on a ‘need to know basis’ within the university, when appropriate and with your permission. Each person’s requirements are considered on an individual basis but some of the help on offer includes: • advice on strategies to make studying and everyday tasks more manageable; • information about disability or mental health issues, and the services and support which might be available; • Personal Learning Support Plans agreed with students and their academic schools, so that necessary arrangements can be put in place; • specific examination adjustments, for example extra time; • help with applying for finance through Disabled Students Allowances (DSAs), where applicable; • provision of learner support workers, for example mentors, notetakers; • provision of BSL interpretation arranged; • helping you to liaise with your local Social Services for the provision of personal care support; • work with academic schools and the wider university to ensure inclusive policy and practice. Contact us to make an appointment. If you do experience difficulty with mobility, we would advise you come and visit the university to assess the practicalities yourself. You can contact the Disability Service at: Disability Service Student Services, 1st Floor, Neuadd Rathbone, College Road, Bangor University, Bangor, Gwynedd LL57 2DF Tel: 01248 382032 E-mail: disabilityservice@bangor.ac.uk www.bangor.ac.uk/studentservices/disability

10 BANGOR UNIVERSITY POSTGRADUATE PROSPECTUS

Bangor Miles Dyslexia Centre The Miles Dyslexia Centre’s Student Service provides all-round support for Bangor University students with dyslexia, and other specific learning differences such as dyspraxia and ADD /AD(H)D. The Centre also works with University staff, providing information and helping to build Bangor’s inclusive learning environment. More information can be found on our website: www.dyslexia.bangor.ac.uk You can contact the Miles Dyslexia Centre at: Miles Dyslexia Centre, Bangor University, Bangor, Gwynedd LL57 2DG Tel: 01248 383620 E-mail: dyslex-student@bangor.ac.uk Postgraduate Peer Guide Scheme Our very successful undergraduate Peer Guide Scheme has been extended to include Postgraduate Peer Guides to offer a warm welcome and help with settling in to life in Bangor. The Postgraduate Peer Guides understand what it is like to make the step up to postgraduate study so they can give you a few friendly tips and introduce you to other students. They are all familiar with what it is like to be a student at Bangor and will be able to show you where all the things are that you might need. If you need any help or information they can’t provide themselves they will be able to point you in the direction of someone else who can help you. Look out for them when you arrive – they’ll be visible in your academic School wearing their distinctive hoodies or t-shirts. If by chance you don’t meet one for some reason, please contact: peerguiding@bangor.ac.uk

39450 BU PG Prospectus 2015_2018 2014-09-10 10:34 AM Page 11

@CareersBangor www.facebook.com/careersbangor

B-Enterprising - the B-Enterprising team are dedicated to encouraging you to be more enterprising whatever your area of study and whether you see yourself in regular employment or running your own business. We have developed a range of different learning opportunities to enable you to gain commercial awareness and other enterprise skills, and provide practical opportunities for you to engage through experiential workshops, competitions and events. As well as opportunities to develop enterprising skills, B-Enterprising also provides entrepreneurship training and support to budding entrepreneurs and works closely with external partners to provide free, confidential, one to one mentoring support to help you develop your business idea. Details of our events and activities can be found at: www.bangor.ac.uk/b-enterprising and www.facebook.com/benterprising You can contact the Careers and Employability Service at: Careers and Employability Service, 2nd Floor, Neuadd Rathbone, College Road, Bangor University, Bangor, Gwynedd, LL57 2DG Tel: 01248 382071 E-Mail: careers@bangor.ac.uk www.bangor.ac.uk/careers The Careers and Employability Service Our aim is to help you develop your employability, to make informed and appropriate career decisions as well as gain appropriate jobseeking skills such as CV writing and interview techniques. Our professionally qualified team can provide you with a variety of services. These cover careers guidance, work experience opportunities, finding term-time and holiday jobs as well as graduate jobs, and developing enterprise and entrepreneurial skills. Careers Education, Information, Advice and Guidance - one-to-one careers clinics and guidance interviews, on-line e-guidance provision, information resources, programme of workshops and employer talks.

GO Wales - completing a period of work experience is a critical factor in gaining future graduate level employment. To help you achieve this, we provide you with advice and information on term-time and vacation work experience opportunities. We offer students and graduates with a Welsh address the chance to gain a head start in today’s competitive job market by offering a range of quality work experience opportunities and other related services through a number of programmes e.g. work placements, work tasters, Graduate Academy Training Programme, short training courses and funding. JobZone - it can be a challenging task to find work but JobZone, the University’s dedicated student employment service, is here to help. JobZone can help you find local part-time work, graduate vacancies, work experience and volunteering opportunities. Access JobZone online – www.bangor.ac.uk/jobzone Bangor Employability Award The Bangor Employability Award (BEA) scheme is designed to enhance the immediate and longer-term career prospects of Bangor University students. It offers a career management and skills development programme, whilst accrediting extra- and co-curricular activities that may not be formally recognised within the academic curriculum. The BEA Masters scheme has recently launched and is available to all taught postrgraduate students – contact employability@bangor.ac.uk for more information. Alumni After your studies at Bangor, the Development and Alumni Relations Office will help you maintain your contact with the University from wherever you are in the world. A wide variety of benefits and services are available to alumni as well as channels for keeping in touch with former classmates, finding lost friends and help with organising reunions. You can contact the Development and Alumni Relations Office at: Development and Alumni Relations Office Bangor University, Bangor, Gwynedd LL57 2DG Tel: + 44 (0)1248 382223 E-mail: alumni@bangor.ac.uk www.bangor.ac.uk/alumni BANGOR UNIVERSITY POSTGRADUATE PROSPECTUS 11

39450 BU PG Prospectus 2015_2018 2014-09-10 10:34 AM Page 12

FACILITIES AND RESOURCES

Library and Archives Services We aim to provide a range of attractive study environments, with flexible spaces to suit all learning and research needs including collaborative work areas, meeting rooms and silent study spaces. You will benefit from easy access to our extensive collection of books, journals and online databases, including our fantastic heritage collections. The majority of electronic resources are accessible on and off campus 24/7 and encompass all subject areas from the arts to natural sciences. The library subscribes to major electronic journal packages including Elsevier ScienceDirect, Springer, Wiley, Oxford University Press, Cambridge University Press, Sage, PsycARTICLES, IEEE Xplore, Royal Society of Chemistry, American Chemical Society, American Institute of Physics, BioOne, JSTOR and Project Muse. Wherever possible we purchase e-books as well as the print version. Using our online library catalogue you can locate the different resources, as well as renew your loans, reserve items and check past exam papers. All our libraries provide self-service facilities and access to printers, photocopiers, scanners and computers. There is wi-fi access in all our libraries as well as study support rooms with assistive technology equipment and Braille embossers. Our opening hours include evenings and weekends throughout the year, plus our Main Library is open 24/7 during termtime.

12 BANGOR UNIVERSITY POSTGRADUATE PROSPECTUS

We house one of the largest university based archives not only in Wales, but also the UK. This collection contains important historical and literary material relating to north Wales and includes the archives of nearly all the major landed estates in the area. Allied to the Archives is the Special Collections of rare printed books. This collection also includes the Welsh Library, housed in the prestigious Shankland Reading Room, the Bangor Cathedral collection, Frank Brangwyn’s collection of art and the Owen Pritchard collection which includes important examples from modern private presses. During Welcome Week you will be given an introduction to our services and an opportunity to meet our staff. Our Library Academic Support team arrange workshops throughout the year to enable you to make effective use of resources. The team also provides guidance on a wide-range of information skills that are essential for you to study efficiently during your time at university. The team are on hand to help if you are looking for guidance on sourcing information for an essay, dissertation or other academic work. If you have any queries – our staff are always happy to help.

39450 BU PG Prospectus 2015_2018 2014-09-10 10:34 AM Page 13

Information Technology Services IT Services is responsible for the implementation and support of the University IT infrastructure and provides a wide range of facilities and services including wireless and high speed network access on campus and in all Halls of Residence and remote access to IT when off-campus. The IT Support Centre staff are always on hand for the best advice, help and support on any IT matter. IT Facilities on Campus - We have a number of computer rooms/areas which can access the University’s network across the campus with over 1,000 computers available for students to use. Wireless access and laptop power recharge points are also available. The computer rooms also have long opening hours with some available 24 hours every day. All computers have the necessary software to support your studies at the University, including Microsoft Office, Web browsers, Office365, Statistics and Graphics packages etc. Printing and copying facilities including a wireless service are available across the university. There are specialised computing facilities in the Main Arts and Deiniol Libraries for the sole use of disabled students or those with additional needs. The rooms contain computers running a range of assistive software, Braille embosser, Rainbow scanner, CCTV magnifier and height adjustable furniture. IT Facilities in Halls of Residence - You can connect to the Internet from Halls of Residence through our wired and wireless network. Every bedroom in every hall has Internet access to all legal web services at speeds equivalent to local domestic broadband. DesktopAnywhere - You can also access the University’s networked software using our DesktopAnywhere facility without having to install any additional special software on your computer. This can be used from halls of residence, home, wireless zones or within the oncampus computer rooms, in fact anywhere you have a broadband or better network connection. The University also provides access to an Office365 e-mail and calendaring account, and somewhere to store your academic work, both of which can be accessed anywhere with an internet connection. IT Facilities for students living off-campus - You can use the University IT facilities from home or anywhere away from the campus over any internet connection which permits web browsing, allowing you to access the same DesktopAnywhere service (see above). Bringing your own computer to University - Computer ownership is not obligatory but if you do decide to bring a PC/Mac/tablet etc. we have easy to use wireless eduroam internet access across the campus. Can I borrow a computer? - We have a laptop loan service – PC Notebooks are available free for 1 week and 3 week loan periods from the IT Support Centre, Adeilad Deiniol. With a computer and internet access you can connect to a wide range of networked software, e-mail and file storage etc.

Services for Disabled Students The University service, DSAKit is an accredited IT equipment supply service specifically for students eligible for the Disabled Student Allowance (DSA). Where the funding body has selected DSAKit as the equipment supplier they will coordinate the provision of IT equipment and software installation and training, and support you to get you up and running quickly and easily. For further information, please contact DSAKit: E-mail: dsakit@bangor.ac.uk Tel: 01248 382104 www.bangor.ac.uk/dsakit For information about the Disabled Student Allowance, contact: E-mail: access_centre@bangor.ac.uk Tel: 01248 388101 www.bangor.ac.uk/access_centre Learning Technology Online Learning - The University’s bilingual virtual learning environment Blackboard is available on and off-campus for all users. It provides online support including course notes, audio and video material, blogs and quizzes. Lecture Capture - ‘Panopto’ lecture capturing software is used by many academic modules. If a lecturer has opted to use this service, the system records audio, and whatever is displayed on the computer desktop (e.g. Powerpoint slides). This is then saved and can be distributed through Blackboard, the University's online learning environment. Students are using this to review what they have learnt in lectures, and for revision. MyBangor - The University provides online access to information and services to support you whilst at University. The following are examples of our expanding range of online services which will allow you to: • see your timetable online • check which modules you are studying • check your marks • check feedback on modules/courses • log experience towards the Bangor Employability Award • manage your IT account • join a discussion forum • buy printer credits Printing and Binding Unit - We have a central printing and binding unit at the University and the services available include: • Digital Printing – high quality, fast turnaround, colour and black and white printing of dissertation/thesis, posters, flyers etc • Binding of thesis/dissertations – hard and soft covers • Laminating – from A4 to A0 (large format) • Large format poster printing IT Help and Support - The IT Support Centre staff are always on hand to help with any IT problem, advice or just that extra bit of reassurance we all need sometimes. All new users are given a comprehensive guide on all IT Services available at Bangor (electronic and printed versions available). We also provide a wide range of IT Guides which can be accessed online. BANGOR UNIVERSITY POSTGRADUATE PROSPECTUS 13

39450 BU PG Prospectus 2015_2018 2014-09-10 10:34 AM Page 14

SOCIAL LIFE AND ENTERTAINMENT Social Life and Entertainment Bangor is very much a University city – the entertainment and nightlife is student-orientated and student-led. The Students’ Union organizes a large number of student clubs and societies, covering a wide range of sporting, social, cultural, religious and political interests. In addition to the host of artistic events organised by Pontio in Bangor, the latest films are shown at the nine-screen Cineworld Multiplex Cinema at Llandudno Junction. Galeri in Caernarfon and the Venue Cymru theatre in Llandudno, which are both less than half an hour away also offer a variety of entertainment. Where classical music is concerned, Bangor offers one of the most exciting and varied concert programmes of any British university with well over 30 concerts a season. As well as our own Chamber Ensemble, there are visits by artists of international calibre, regular performances by the BBC National Orchestra of Wales and occasional visits from international orchestras. Oriel Ynys Môn, on Anglesey, has a purpose built museum, art and events gallery. The gallery offers a dynamic programme of creative exhibitions, displaying the work of established artists and young talents alike. Wales’ premier art gallery, Oriel Mostyn, in Llandudno, has been described as ‘one of the most adventurous contemporary art venues in the country.’ It is also one of the most beautiful galleries in Britain, and shows exhibitions by major international artists. Throughout the year trips to towns and cities of interest and events within the local community are arranged for international students by the International Student Support Team. These trips provide great opportunities for international students to visit other places in the UK and encourage you to become involved with local community groups and make new friends.

Students’ Union The Students’ Union (SU) represents students on all matters, whether academic, competitive or social. The Union represents every student in Bangor, be they undergraduate, postgraduate, mature, international or part-time. The SU provides a range of services, support, activities and entertainments for students and encourages you to get involved in the wide range of activities offered, as it’s an ideal way to meet new people and try new things. Clubs and Societies You can pursue existing or new interests through the range of clubs and societies on offer, and at Bangor University, student membership of the Students’ Union clubs and societies is free of charge. There are over 135 clubs and societies in total, varying from societies such as film, photography and drama to sport clubs such as canoeing, football and surfing so you’re sure to find something that interests you. Pontio Pontio, the ambitious Arts & Innovation Centre is set to be a major social hub for students as well as an internationally significant centre for learning, innovation and the performing arts. In addition to providing a new base for the Students’ Union, the exciting new centre houses a theatre, studio theatre, cinema, lecture theatres, exhibition spaces, bar and cafe. A full programme of events such as music, drama, aerial theatre, comedy, film and a range of other activities will be held in the Pontio centre.

For more information please see: www.bangor.ac.uk/international/support/news_trips

“There is something for everyone here. There are nice cafes and restaurants, plenty of pubs and a growing club scene. There are many sports clubs to get involved in, including surﬁng and mountain walking, thanks to the beautiful surroundings. There are also many opportunities to involve yourself in volunteering in the community – with the elderly, children and the environment.” CHARLOTTE WILKIN, from Maidstone, Kent, studying a PhD in Psychology

14 BANGOR UNIVERSITY POSTGRADUATE PROSPECTUS

39450 BU PG Prospectus 2015_2018 2014-09-10 10:34 AM Page 15

Sport and Fitness Bangor is exceptionally well-situated and wellequipped for students interested in sport – especially those involving the great outdoors. Rock climbing, mountain biking, canoeing, sailing and surfing are just some of the activities available, as well as team sports such as rugby, hockey and football. With 54 student sport clubs – there’s something for everyone. The newly refurbished University Sport Centre – Canolfan Brailsford – has extensive indoor training facilities including an 80-station two storey gym and a separate high-performance area equipped with 6 Olympic weightlifting platforms. Canolfan Brailsford is also home to a climbing wall, two sports hall, a purpose built gymnastics hall and four squash courts. Adjoining Canolfan Brailsford is the Netball dome – a brand-new purpose built facility that contains two indoor netball and tennis courts. The Ffriddeodd Campus also houses a floodlit all weather pitch as well as grass pitches for lacrosse and football. At the Normal site, the University has two additional sports halls and a new third-generation all weather pitch built in partnership with Bangor City FC. At Treborth, the University has extensive playing fields for rugby union, rugby league, football, American Football, Quidditch and Ultimate all alongside an 8-lane floodlit running track. Locally there is a 25 metre swimming pool and diving facility in Bangor and slightly further afield the University has an outdoor activity base in Llanberis, providing facilities for the University Rowing and Canoe clubs who make use of the stunning surrounding of Llyn Padarn at the foot of Snowdon.

“Bangor is one of the most attractive study destinations in the UK and has everything for students who love the great outdoors: climbing, mountain biking, paragliding, canoeing, sailing and surﬁng – whether on land, sea or air, everyone is catered for.”

“Bangor is full of clubs and societies for anyone to join totally free. Usually clubs have socials and meet once or twice a week, making them really casual but great for making new friends.” BANGOR UNIVERSITY POSTGRADUATE PROSPECTUS 15

39450 BU PG Prospectus 2015_2018 2014-09-10 10:34 AM Page 16

INFORMATION FOR INTERNATIONAL STUDENTS Reasons to choose Bangor University: • Bangor is ranked in the world’s top 350 universities (Times Higher Education World Rankings 2013-14) • The most recent government Research Assessment Exercise identiﬁed world-leading research in all of Bangor’s 19 assessed subject areas with nearly 50% given the top grading of 3 or 4 stars • Bangor is considered an economical place to live and study and we oﬀer an International Scholarship to academically outstanding international students • Bangor is one of the most stunning University settings in the UK situated between the Snowdonia mountains and the sea – north Wales is an area of outstanding natural beauty yet close to major cities such as Manchester and Liverpool.

International Student Ambassadors Bangor University strongly believes in looking after their students and making sure that everyone is made to feel welcome and settles in with ease. Bangor University’s team of International Student Ambassadors support international students from arrival in Bangor right up to their graduation day. The International Student Ambassadors are current international students who have been chosen to play a key part in the support programme oﬀered to students during their studies as well as recruitment activities both within Bangor and overseas. Please see: www.bangor.ac.uk/international/studentproﬁles/ambassadors

Meet and Greet Service Bangor University oﬀers an airport pick up service – available to students arriving at Manchester International Airport*. Simply register online and we'll meet you at the airport and take you to your accommodation.

International Student Support Office Throughout the year, the International Student Support Office offers assistance and advice on a range of matters such as: • NHS health care in the UK • Opening a bank account • Immigration status and applications to extend your visas • Work regulations and finding work • Travelling outside the UK • Police registration • Accommodation • Bringing your family to the UK • Nurseries and schools in Bangor • English Language courses.

*available on selected dates www.bangor.ac.uk/international/support/airportpickup

For further information and advice please see: www.bangor.ac.uk/international/support

For further information please contact the International Student Support Oﬃce at internationalsupport@bangor.ac.uk or +44 (0) 1248 388430.

English Language Requirements To enable you to have the best learning experience at Bangor, you must be able to communicate effectively in English. Students for whom English is not a first language will be required to provide evidence of English proficiency through an approved testing system such as IELTS or TOEFL.

Support for International Students The University is very aware of the challenges facing international students in moving away from home to study, so we have a range of services and support to help you in the time leading up to arrival in Bangor and throughout your time here as a student.

Welcome Week During your first weeks of arrival at Bangor, the International Student Support Service arranges a range of activities which introduce you to life at the University. These activities aim to help you to settle in to life in a new country and will cover all aspects of living and studying at Bangor. We have a specific orientation programme for international students: www.bangor.ac.uk/international/support/welcome_week_program me.php The programme is not only aimed at providing useful and essential information, it also provides an opportunity for students to meet others and to make friends – with those from their home country and from all over the world. We also arrange trips and events for international students throughout the year. This enables students to meet others from all over the world and gives them an opportunity to get to know the area and experience the unique Welsh culture. Events we organise include Diwali and Chinese New Year celebrations, traditional Welsh cultural evenings and an annual international gala. Regular visits to local attractions, as well as major cities such as Liverpool, Manchester and Cardiff, are also organised. For more information please see: www.bangor.ac.uk/international/support/news_trips

16 BANGOR UNIVERSITY POSTGRADUATE PROSPECTUS

Entry onto postgraduate courses requires the following English Language minimum scores: • An overall score of IELTS 6.0 with no individual score lower than 5.5 • TOEFL IBT with an overall score of 75, with minimum score of Listening - 17, Reading - 18, Speaking - 20 and Writing - 18 • Some postgraduate programmes may require higher scores. For the most up-to-date information see: www.bangor.ac.uk/international/future/englishlanguage

39450 BU PG Prospectus 2015_2018 2014-09-10 10:34 AM Page 17

English Language Support The English Language Centre for Overseas Students (ELCOS) provides language improvement and study skills courses to overseas students at Bangor University. Pre-sessional English Students who have not achieved the English language level required can undertake a pre-sessional course prior to the beginning of the academic programme in order to reach the required level of English language proﬁciency. Please see: http://elcos.bangor.ac.uk/pre-sessional

OVER 125 YEARS OF EXCELLENCE

In-sessional English The Centre also offers general English language improvement courses and language and writing courses to help you develop your academic English skills whilst you study at Bangor. Please see: www.bangor.ac.uk/international/future/elcos Tel: +44 (0) 1248 382252 E-mail: elcos@bangor.ac.uk Visits to your country Bangor University representatives regularly travel overseas to meet prospective students and attend education fairs throughout the year. To find out about the next visit to your country please see: www.bangor.ac.uk/international/visits Meet your Country Manager Bangor has a dedicated team of International Officers who can provide help and support throughout the application process. Contact your country manager for information and assistance or see: www.bangor.ac.uk/international/countries/index.php The University has a world-wide network of advisers and representatives who provide free advice and assistance through the application process. The University currently has an adviser/s in the following countries: Armenia India Oman Azerbaijan Indonesia Pakistan Bahrain Iraq Philippines Bangladesh Japan Romania Brazil Jordan Russia Brunei Kazakhstan Saudi Arabia Cambodia Kenya Singapore Cameroon Kuwait Sri Lanka Canada Lebanon Taiwan China Libya Thailand Columbia Malaysia Turkey Cyprus Mexico Uganda Ghana Nepal United Arab Emirates Greece New Zealand USA Hong Kong Nigeria Vietnam For more information and contact details please see: www.bangor.ac.uk/international/countries/our_agents Connect with us online If you are unable to attend an Open Day or educational fair to meet Bangor University staff there are a number of ways you can connect with staff, other applicants, current students and alumni. @BangorUni www.facebook.com/BangorUniversity (International Students Group search ‘Bangor University International Students’) Skype: bangorinternational

To download the International Student Guide brochure and for more information about living and studying at Bangor University as an international student plus information about fees, visas, the application process and much more, please see: www.bangor.ac.uk/international

“Bangor is a multicultural and friendly university with generous support for students.” BANGOR UNIVERSITY POSTGRADUATE PROSPECTUS 17

39450 BU PG Prospectus 2015_2018 2014-09-10 10:34 AM Page 18

STUDENT FINANCE AND FEES Tuition Fees The tuition fees cover the cost of your study at the University. The fees are determined by the students’ country of origin and sometimes vary depending on the type of subject being studied. For all current tuition fees and further information about fees for certain courses, please visit: www.bangor.ac.uk/ar/studentfinance/info/ Funding There are various sources of funding available to postgraduate students. It is essential that you start thinking about how to fund your postgraduate studies as early as possible as there are often deadlines set for applying for funding. As well as considering external funding it’s worth knowing that Bangor University offers a number of its own Scholarships, academic School Scholarships, Studentships and Bursaries. Full details of sources of funding can be found at: www.bangor.ac.uk/studentfinance/postgrad Bangor University Bursaries and Scholarships The University offers numerous opportunities each year to fully or partially fund your study in the form of bursaries and scholarships. For Masters courses, these generally range from around £500 to £5,000 per year, depending on the subject area, and are usually allocated on a competitive basis. For research degrees such as a PhD, the University advertises a significant number of fully-funded research studentships each year, with funding allocated variously from central scholarship funds, academic Schools, UK Research Councils and charitable institutions.

International Scholarships Scholarships of £2,500 are awarded to every successful candidate showing a performance equivalent to 2.i or 2.ii. Scholarships of £5,000 are awarded to candidates showing a performance equivalent to a 1st class honours. Other International Scholarships oﬀered by individual academic schools are also available. For full information and eligibility criteria please see: www.bangor.ac.uk/international/future/scholarship.php.en Third Party Funding It is sometimes possible to obtain third party ﬁnancial support for your study. This may be from a charity, foundation or trust whose aims and interests correspond with your own proposed area of study, or it may be that your employer is willing to sponsor you. In either case, the onus is usually upon you as the prospective student to secure this kind of funding for your study. Usually, third party funding will only partially cover the cost of your study, and so you may need to apply to several sources to make up the full cost. Self-funding It is common for postgraduate students, particularly those undertaking a shorter taught course (e.g. a Masters degree), to selffund their study, whether this is achieved by using existing savings, working part-time to support your living costs or using a Career Development Loan from a High Street bank and paying this back in instalments agreed with the bank. Often, it is a combination of the above. Please see: www.bangor.ac.uk/fcourses/postgrad/self_funding

Funding opportunities can arise throughout the year, so you are advised to check our website regularly for updates: www.bangor.ac.uk/scholarships/postgraduate

If you do self-fund your study, it is worth knowing that the University does not always require full tuition fees to be paid ‘up-front’ and that you can often pay in agreed instalments, or by monthly direct debit. For more information please see: www.bangor.ac.uk/ﬁnance/ic/ic105

Santander Scholarships The Santander Group awards Scholarships to Bangor University Taught Postgraduate students. The scholarship fund aims to reward the most academically gifted students from countries that are supported by the Santander Universidades scheme. Currently, there are a number of scholarships ranging in value from £4,162 to £5,000 available for eligible canidates. For more details please see: www.bangor.ac.uk/scholarships/santander.php.en

Hardship Funds The University has limited means to help existing students in urgent need of ﬁnancial support. The ‘Financial Contingency Fund’ is made available to institutions to provide discretionary ﬁnancial help to support vulnerable students, in particular to help them access and remain in higher education. Assistance is given in the form of a nonrepayable grant. Please see: www.bangor.ac.uk/studentservices/moneyadvice/hardship

The Santander Mobility Scholarship Scheme This scheme oﬀers Bangor University research students the opportunity to study or research overseas at institutions within the Grupo Santander Network during the academic year. The activities for which the scholarship is requested should be directly linked to the applicant’s current and future research plans and make a positive contribution to their College/School and/or the University. www.bangor.ac.uk/scholarships/santander/santandermobility

18 BANGOR UNIVERSITY POSTGRADUATE PROSPECTUS

39450 BU PG Prospectus 2015_2018 2014-09-10 10:34 AM Page 19

Bangor is considered an economical place to study so you can make the most of your money here. Low Cost of Living Market research shows that the cost of living in Bangor is much lower than in other parts of the UK. Bangor has been described as “one of the cheapest places in Britain” to be a student (The Independent’s A-Z of Universities and Colleges) and is consistently ranked as one of the most economical places to study in the UK. By choosing Bangor University, you are already potentially making a substantial saving. We estimate that you can live in reasonable comfort in Bangor’s city centre for around £160 per week in shared accommodation based on the following breakdown of costs#: Room rent, private accommodation: approx. £70 Food and utility bills: approx. £60 Personal expenses+ and books: approx. £30

“Bangor is such a great place to live, not too expensive, which is always great for students. There is so much to do here, great places to visit and the scenery is incredible. When you’re stressed out with work, you can’t beat a nice stroll down to the pier, along the Menai Strait. And then there’s Snowdon and the beaches for even more fun!”

By comparison, you can expect to pay around £285 per week in London.*

# These estimates do not include the cost of personal travel to and from Bangor + Being a relatively small city, it is not usually a necessity to use public/private transport to get around Bangor * www3.imperial.ac.uk/studentfinance/livingcosts Please note: these figures are based on current prices, rental markets and current information available. Costs vary widely and these figures are meant as a guide only.

BANGOR UNIVERSITY POSTGRADUATE PROSPECTUS 19

39450 BU PG Prospectus 2015_2018 2014-09-10 10:34 AM Page 20

APPLYING AND ENTRY REQUIREMENTS How to Apply You can apply online for all postgraduate taught courses and postgraduate research programmes (with the exception of the PGCE, MA Social Work, MSc/Diploma in Occupational Therapy and DClinPsy – see below/next column for further details) at: www.bangor.ac.uk/courses/postgrad/taught/application You are strongly advised to read the Guidelines for Applicants before completing the form and also read the general application information at: www.bangor.ac.uk/courses/postgrad/taught/apply_taught In some countries we have a network of representatives (Agents) who can assist you with preparing and making an application – please see: www.bangor.ac.uk/international/our_agents Application for Postgraduate Research Programmes Applicants for a research degree are encouraged to identify and discuss the topic for research with the relevant department prior to submitting the application. The research degree application should include a research proposal outlining the topic, purpose and rationale behind the research in question. A good research proposal is essential if you are applying for a PhD or MPhil. For guidance, please go to: www.bangor.ac.uk/courses/postgrad/research/advice International students are encouraged to apply 6 months in advance in order to allow for the lengthy visa issuing processes which may take months in some countries. If you’re from a country outside the European Union, you should bear in mind that making immigration and visa arrangements can be a lengthy process, so please apply as soon as possible. It is possible for students to submit an application before they are able to meet all entry requirements, as the University will process the application, and may issue a conditional offer letter, stating the conditions that need to be met prior to registration. International students undertaking certain Research degrees in Science and Engineering may be required to obtain an ATAS certificate prior to applying for a student visa. The University will advise candidates of the necessary steps if their research application is successful. If you need further support during the admissions process, contact: Home/EU students: Admissions Office, Academic Registry, Bangor University, Bangor, Gwynedd, LL57 2DG, UK. E-mail: postgraduate@bangor.ac.uk Tel: 01248 388484 International students: International Education Centre Rathbone, Bangor University, College Road, Bangor, Gwynedd, LL57 2DG, UK Tel: +44 (0) 1248 382028 E-mail: international@bangor.ac.uk Applications for Post Graduate Certificate in Education (PGCE) Candidates should note that the application process for the PGCE programmes differs from Bangor University's standard postgraduate application procedure. Applications are made through the Graduate Teacher Training Registry (GTTR), which has earlier deadlines for submission. Applications can be made online at: www.gttr.ac.uk/students/apply/ Further information about the GTTR can be found at: www.gttr.ac.uk

20 BANGOR UNIVERSITY POSTGRADUATE PROSPECTUS

Applications for DClinPsy must be made through: The Clearing House for Postgraduate Courses in Clinical Psychology (please see contact details under DClinPsy in previous column). Applications for MSc/Diploma in Occupational Therapy For an application form and details of the application process go to: www.bangor.ac.uk/healthcaresciences/occtherapy/admissions Applications for MA Social Work For an application form and details of the application process go to: www.bangor.ac.uk/so/listcourses_pg Entry Requirements The qualifications, skills and qualities needed for postgraduate study at Bangor vary from course to course and academic School to School. Full details can be found on our online postgraduate prospectus at: www.bangor.ac.uk/courses/postgrad We recognise many different qualifications from around the world. For details of international entry requirements, please visit: www.bangor.ac.uk/international/applying/entryrequirements English Language As the programmes are delivered and assessed through the medium of English at Bangor, and to get the most from your studies, students for whom English is not a first language will be required to provide evidence of English Language proficiency. If you need to take further studies to improve your English Language, you can apply to undertake English Language courses at the University's English Language Centre prior to the beginning of the academic programme. Academic Entry onto postgraduate programmes requires a Bachelor/first degree from an approved University or Higher Education Institution. Normally for admission to Masters courses the minimum degree classification accepted is a lower second class honours or equivalent and for research degrees an upper second class honours or equivalent. Bachelor degrees gained in the UK are normally accepted. For students with degrees from other countries please see: www.bangor.ac.uk/international/countries/list.php Some programmes may require a higher degree classification or a higher degree award. Mature Student Regulations Mature students who do not have the academic qualifications normally required for entry can be considered for entry onto postgraduate degree programmes. A minimum of two years relevant professional work experience can be recognised as an entry qualification and may be accepted in-lieu of formal academic qualifications. Disability Support/Applicants with Additional Support Needs If you are an applicant with additional support needs, you can contact an adviser at the Disability Service (within the Student Support Service) to discuss any support needs you may have and arrangements that may be necessary. Visit the website for more details at: www.bangor.ac.uk/studentservices/disability Alternatively please contact: Disability Advisers, Student Support Services, Bangor University, First Floor, Neuadd Rathbone, College Road, Bangor, Gwynedd, LL57 2DF Tel: 01248 388650 E-mail: disabilityadviser@bangor.ac.uk

39450 BU PG Prospectus 2015_2018 2014-09-10 10:35 AM Page 21

STUDY OPTIONS

SOME TAUGHT COURSES HAVE JANUARY OR SEPTEMBER START DATES

A variety of study options are available at Bangor. Most of our students who study for a postgraduate qualification do so on a fulltime basis, but many of our taught courses and research programmes are available on a part-time basis and some academic Schools offer distance learning courses. You may have a definite idea of which subject you wish to study but you may be unsure of the way in which you want to study it. The following information will explain the different postgraduate study options available at Bangor. Course start date Most taught courses will start in September. However, you’ll have the choice of being able to start some Masters-level programs in either January or September. If a course does offer a January or September start date, this will be highlighted in the Course Duration section of the course description and on our website: www.bangor.ac.uk/courses/postgrad/postgrad_jan_intake.php.en For most research courses, we can accept an intake at the beginning of every calendar month. Please enquire with the Course Director. Taught Courses Postgraduate Diplomas and Masters Degrees normally entail one year full-time study. The coursework element takes eight months, after which a postgraduate Diploma may be awarded. If you reach a sufficiently high standard in the Diploma assessment, you may carry out a research project and a dissertation (usually taking 4-7 months) for a Master degree (MA, MSc, MTh, MMus, MBA, as appropriate). Most Masters courses can be exited at Postgraduate Diploma level. The Masters courses consist of lectures, projects and assignments. Other postgraduate taught courses on offer include: PG Cert, PG Diploma, PGCE (Postgraduate Certificate in Education – professional teaching qualification). Research Programmes The degrees of PhD and MPhil are research degrees and are awarded after the examination of a candidate’s thesis, produced following a period of research. While the majority of candidates pursue research degrees on a full-time basis, in certain circumstances it is possible to offer part-time schemes of study. You may register for these degrees at the beginning of any month. An MPhil demonstrates possession of the skills necessary to carry out supervised research by the systematic analysis of existing data. For students who wish to gain more extensive training in research an MRes involves fewer taught modules and a greater research element than a Masters. A PhD shows the ability to conduct original research, having acquired the necessary research methodology skills. It will be an independent study, using new data, which advances the frontiers of knowledge in the subject area. The usual period of registration for research programmes is: Part-time: MPhil 3 years / PhD 5 years Full-time: MPhil 2 years / PhD 3 years DClinPsy This 3-year full-time programme leads to the degree of Doctor in Clinical Psychology, and comprises taught courses, clinical placements and a substantial research project. Applications for this course are NOT made through the University. They must be directed to The Clearing House for Postgraduate Courses in Clinical Psychology, 15 Hyde Terrace, Leeds, LS2 9LT. Please view their website for details and closing dates: www.leeds.ac.uk/chpccp. Please note: this course is not open to international applicants. BANGOR UNIVERSITY POSTGRADUATE PROSPECTUS 21

39450 BU PG Prospectus 2015_2018 2014-09-10 10:35 AM Page 22

COLLEGE OF ARTS AND HUMANITIES About the College Research into the Arts and Humanities at Bangor University dates back to 1884 when the University College was founded. The College of Arts and Humanities brings together a variety of collaborative projects and a wide-range of academic expertise, offering a diverse choice of postgraduate programmes of study. If you are thinking about a postgraduate career in the Arts and Humanities, with over fifty different and challenging postgraduate programmes available, Bangor is a natural choice. Research strengths Research in the College spans a wide range of disciplines and in many cases combines expertise across a wide variety of areas. We have a proven international record of research achievement with the regular publication of books and articles by staff throughout the College – this means that you will be sharing a learning environment with academics at the cutting edge of their chosen field. There are also varied possibilities for research hosted in the College’s research centres, such as the Bilingualism Centre, the Centre for Research in Early Music, the Institute for Medieval and Early Modern Studies (IMEMS), Centre for East Asian Studies to name but a few. Facilities The College has access to a wide range of University teaching, learning and support resources in addition to those in our constituent Schools. We have study rooms, where students have access to study space and IT facilities, and the library has a dedicated arts and humanities research room which houses reference volumes and is for the exclusive use of postgraduates and staff from the College.

Centres of Excellence The following research centres are based within the College of Arts and Humanities: • Centre for Advanced Welsh Music Studies (CAWMS) CAWMS co-ordinates and develops Welsh musical scholarship by promoting conferences and publications, providing written resources in the medium of Welsh, and collaborating with scholars in other Celtic countries. • Centre for Research in Early Music The Centre, founded in 2006, co-ordinates the activities of music staff engaged in research on music before 1700 – a concentration of specific excellence unequalled in any other institution in the UK. • Centre for Galician Studies in Wales A forum for research on contemporary Galicia. Issues pertaining to bilingualism and cultural identity and their relevance to both Galician and Welsh culture are of particular interest. • Electroacoustic Wales Electroacoustic Wales supports electroacoustic music composition and research in the School of Music’s studios, organises and promotes concerts of electroacoustic music, stages workshops on the principles and practice of electroacoustic music, and acts as a conduit and focal point for discussion and cooperation between electroacoustic music composers, performers and listeners in Wales. • ESRC Centre for Research on Bilingualism in Theory and Practice Research in the field of bilingualism draws on several disciplines, including linguistics, psychology, neuroscience, education, sociology, economics, and political science. • The Graduate Programme in Translation Studies The Programme combines the expertise of academics and practitioners in the field of translation who are based in the School of Modern Languages, the School of Welsh and Bangor University's Translation and Language Technologies Unit. • International Centre for Sacred Music Studies (ICSMuS) This new international centre of excellence sets out to stimulate, support, disseminate and engage in research and study in the interdisciplinary field of sacred music.

22 BANGOR UNIVERSITY POSTGRADUATE PROSPECTUS

• R.S. Thomas Centre The Centre, a collaboration between the Schools of Welsh and English, was oﬃcially opened by R.S. Thomas in April 2000. Its archive contains an extensive collection of manuscript material by R.S. Thomas, including unpublished work, as well as all of his published works, together with a comprehensive collection of reviews, critical books and articles, interviews and audiovisual material. This material is available to visiting scholars. • The Archive of Traditional Welsh Music A repository of recorded musical and verbal forms which are perpetuated in the oral tradition rather than through writing or printing. Primarily a research, teaching and training centre, the Archive endeavours to serve educational institutions and the general public. • Institute of Medieval and Early Modern Studies (IMEMS) The Institute builds on excellence in Arts and Humanities research at Bangor University and Aberystwyth University and takes a multidisciplinary approach to the study of the Medieval and Early Modern periods. • The Centre for East Asian Studies Founded in 2014, the Centre engages with scholars from across the university and beyond in the development and enhancement of Bangor’s engagement with the East Asian region. The Centre is highly interdisciplinary and promotes innovative, cross-cultural and dynamic research in the broad field of East Asian Studies. • The Institute for the Study of Welsh Estates This newly founded Institute is dedicated to promoting information relating to Welsh landed estates through education, research and publications.

39450 BU PG Prospectus 2015_2018 2014-09-10 10:35 AM Page 23

COLLEGE OF ARTS AND HUMANITIES The College of Arts and Humanities consists of the following academic Schools: • School of Creative Studies and Media • School of English • School of History, Welsh History and Archaeology • School of Lifelong Learning • School of Linguistics and English Language • School of Modern Languages • School of Music • School of Philosophy and Religion • School of Welsh “The School of Linguistics is fairly small and so you’re a person rather than a number. The lecturers all know you as a person, not just a student which is just as important when at university. They are always up for joining in with the social events arranged by the Bangor Linguistics Society (BLS). The School has its own departmental library. The School also hold loads of seminars from invited speakers on many different aspects of Linguistics through the Linguistics Circle, Bilingualism Centre and Bangor Linguistics Society Approaches to Language series. These provide a great opportunity to see what sort of research is being conducted outside the university. I chose to study at Bangor for my undergraduate degree because I had a good experience on my open day. The people were really friendly and the scenery is beautiful. Postgraduate study here seemed like a natural progression as I enjoyed being part of the Linguistics department so much that I didn’t want to study anywhere else. As Bangor is a small city, it’s a really friendly place to be and it’s so easy to make friends from many different departments and the local area. The University is located in an ideal situation which means an adventure isn’t too far away if you happen to get bored. I’ve spent my summers by a beach which is still a novelty after living in a town all my life! I would definitely recommend the School of Linguistics and English Language at Bangor as they are so friendly and welcoming.” HANNAH PATON, from Widnes in Cheshire, MA in Bilingualism

The College of Arts and Humanities hosts a Graduate School that provides a supportive environment for postgraduate study. The Graduate School fosters a research community comprising students and staﬀ, and opportunities for interdisciplinary discussion. The Graduate School encourages intellectual exchange through Schoolbased interdisciplinary seminars, public lectures, and more informal exchange through a programme of student-led reading groups and seminars. The Graduate School runs an Induction event to welcome all new students, and a diary of free events designed to enhance your study, that include sessions on giving a conference paper, preparing for a viva, and practical advice on small group teaching. Throughout your postgraduate career at Bangor, training opportunities and events are organised for you to update and enrich your academic experience and your employability.

“I am currently studying for a PhD in Modern Languages at Bangor, looking at the exhibition of everyday culture from the 1950s in French and German museums. The project builds on research that I conducted during the dissertation element of my MA. I decided to study at postgraduate level at Bangor as I thoroughly enjoyed my undergraduate degree at Bangor and wanted to try and stay in the same department for postgraduate study because of the outstanding support and guidance from the academic staff. I was then lucky enough to secure MA and PhD funding for Bangor. All the staff in the School of Modern Languages go above and beyond their role as academic researchers and lecturers to ensure that postgraduate students get the most out of their taught or research degrees. Regular meetings with supervisors are organised from the beginning of the course and staff are always happy to answer any questions students may have in person or via e-mail. What I found particularly beneficial at MA level were the very small class sizes and the personal approach adopted to taught classes. At times, there may only be a handful of postgraduates in each seminar which make for a much more productive and stimulating intellectual environment. I also appreciated the tendency towards lecturers co-teaching seminars at MA level as it made for much more lively academic discussion! Although I am based in a small department, we have a very interesting and dynamic research environment with regular exchange between postgraduates and lecturers. Through going to the academic workshops organised by the Academic Development Unit I have also made numerous new friends, also studying for PhDs, from other Schools and Colleges. For the first time in over five years at Bangor I joined an Athletic Union sports club this year (BU Dance Club) and performed in the Summer Show Dance and have started learning Welsh with the School of Lifelong Learning – who says it is never too late to start anything! If you want to study further at a small and friendly but researchdriven University set in beautiful scenery then Bangor is the place for you. STEPHANIE JOY BOSTOCK, from North Staffordshire, PhD in Modern Languages

BANGOR UNIVERSITY POSTGRADUATE PROSPECTUS 23

39450 BU PG Prospectus 2015_2018 2014-09-10 10:35 AM Page 24

24 BANGOR UNIVERSITY POSTGRADUATE PROSPECTUS

39450 BU PG Prospectus 2015_2018 2014-09-10 10:35 AM Page 25

School of Creative Studies and Media About the School The School of Creative Studies and Media (SCSM), oﬀers degrees across a wide range of creative arts, including ﬁlm, journalism, media, digital and interactive media, professional writing and theatre. All of our courses combine the practical and the theoretical, ensuring that our students graduate with a comprehensive knowledge of their subject area.

Academic areas covered within the School The Masters degrees in the School oﬀer you a blend of taught modules and personal supervision, allowing you both to pursue your own area of interest and draw upon the wideranging expertise of members of staﬀ in the School, all within a structured framework. The MAs also allow you to pursue a blend of theoretical/critical and creative-practice work.

A distinct feature which makes the School exceptional is the way in which students from the various disciplines are encouraged to interact with, and learn from, each other. For example, students from screenwriting, theatre and media practice courses often work together to produce practical pieces of work. Our course structure is extremely ﬂexible, and allows students to choose modules from outside their specialised disciplines.

PhD/MPhil study is available in subjects across the whole spectrum of the Creative Industries, with potential research or practice-led research specialisms in such areas as: Professional Writing, Film and/or Media Studies, New Media, Drama, Communications and related ﬁelds. Research Links/Links with Industry The School has strong links with local companies (e.g. BBC Wales, National Library of Wales, S4C, Cwmni Da, Dafydd Hardy Estate Agents, Menter Môn, Galeri Caernarfon, GeoMôn) and oﬀers a range of invited industry talks and workshops for you to attend and forge links with potential future employers in the Media and Creative Industries.

Staff and facilities Our staff include both highly regarded academics and acclaimed creative practitioners, with strong regional, national and international links in the private and public sector. Academic staff specialise in diverse research areas such as East Asian media, vertical dance, technology and discourse, Jewish film, digital advertising, journalism, politics and risk, digital fiction, videogames and virtual worlds, live television, documentary film making, adaptation studies and comics. Staff expertise is matched by our state-of-the-art purpose built facilities. SCSM facilities reflect the multidisciplinary nature of the School. As well as broadcast quality TV and radio equipment, the School has dedicated spaces for those studying games, digital media, journalism and writing, as well as a theatre and digital cinema. All of these facilities are gathered together in the John Phillips Hall – SCSM's home – situated on the shore of the Menai Strait.

STAFF PROFILE

The study environment at Bangor couldn’t be better for studying at postgraduate level. You will be joining a vibrant postgraduate community and a School with signiﬁcant experience in teaching the creative industries at postgraduate level. In recent years, our postgraduate students have won numerous awards and scholarships and found academic and industry employment at such prestigious institutions as the BBC and in the entertainment software sector.

COURSE LIST: MA/Diploma • Filmmaking: Concept to Screen MSc • International Media Management (with Business/Law) MRes • Creative Practice • Film and Visual Culture PhD/MPhil • Professional Writing, Film, Media, New Media, Journalism, Creative Studies PhD/MPhil Practice-Led Research • Professional Writing, Film, Media, New Media, Journalism, Creative Studies

TO FIND OUT MORE: Tel: +44 (0) 1248 388560 E-mail: scsm@bangor.ac.uk www.bangor.ac.uk/media

Professor Astrid Ensslin, Professor of Digital Culture and Communication School of Creative Studies and Media Professor Astrid Ensslin’s specialist areas of interest are videogames and virtual worlds; digital ﬁction; semiotics and discourse analysis. She is currently working on publishing books on analysing digital ﬁction and literary videogames; and on the language of gaming. “The School of Creative Studies and Media is keen on providing access to cutting-edge facilities in creative media, including the latest gaming technologies (consoles and mobile devices). The School has a special focus on creative technologies and a wide range of creative subjects, bringing together practitioners and scholars. Students gain access to my scholarly experience, resources and networks. They meet with me on a regular basis to discuss ideas and obtain feedback on their work, and they are directly involved in my teaching and research projects, including editorial work on the Journal of Gaming and Virtual Worlds. The School’s diversity of subjects and interests across creative industries, its national and international excellence in teaching and research and its friendly, dynamic atmosphere make it a great place for postgraduate study. The School has a vibrant postgraduate student community with wonderful networking facilities for taught and research postgraduates.”

BANGOR UNIVERSITY POSTGRADUATE PROSPECTUS 25

39450 BU PG Prospectus 2015_2018 2014-09-10 10:35 AM Page 26

Filmmaking: Concept to Screen MA COURSE DURATION MA: 1 year full-time.

Compulsory Modules: • The Film Industry The aim of this module is to foster an ENTRY REQUIREMENTS understanding of the workings of the A good 2.i Honours degree or industry equivalent international film industry. Film production, experience. A portfolio of creative/film work is distribution, exhibition, marketing and also required. IELTS score of 6.5 (no component consumption will all be examined. below 6.0) or equivalent if your first language is not English or Welsh. • Concept Development This module introduces the practical and COURSE DESCRIPTION theoretical aspects of developing concepts for This taught degree programme has a unique film, as well as the craft of screenwriting. This focus, offering training in all aspects of will include script formatting, style, structure, filmmaking, from concept and creative genre, plotting, characterisation and dialogue. development through the filmmaking process and on to distribution and marketing. By the end • Film Production: The micro short of the degree, you will have developed a This module aims to develop knowledge of the competition and festival-ready calling-card short technical aspects of filmmaking, including film, together with transferrable skills in direction, camera-work, lighting, music and developing and marketing your product and an editing, with the aim of producing a high-quality understanding of the nature of the film industry. two-minute short film.

• Film Production - Dissertation You will generate work that displays exceptional capability in operational aspects of media production technologies, systems, techniques and professional practices to produce a competition and festival-ready, calling-card short ﬁlm.

Teaching on this degree conforms to current • Writing the Short Film industry practice, and includes training and This module expands your practical experience mentoring in standard development documents, of screenwriting, and advances core theories on such as screenplay, treatment and storyboards, the synthesis of creative and industry practice, and in areas such as risk assessment and budget as well as focusing specifically on the history, management. Visiting guest speakers from format, aesthetics and demands of the short various areas of the film industry provide an film. essential context on changing practices, as well as offering useful information of their own • Pre-Production: The Short Film experiences in film. The programme does not This module aims to develop knowledge on the include training in basic production techniques, practical and budgetary aspects of preand successful applicants will have a first degree producing a festival quality short film, including in Media Studies or a related discipline, and/or commissioning strategies, casting, rehearsals, equivalent industry experience. All students on risk assessment, location scouting, and the this programme receive a production budget. managing and co-ordination of a production crew.

The School actively seeks to put students in contact with relevant industry bodies and organises a variety of professional workshops and competitions, e.g. through the Enterprise by Design scheme.

CAREER PROSPECTS This MA has a strong industry focus, and aims to train students vocationally. This will be achieved by providing you with teaching that conforms to current industry practice, including standard development documents (screenplay, treatment, storyboards), and a focus on completing work that can be entered into a variety of international film festivals and competitions. Visiting guest speakers from various areas of the film industry will also provide an essential context on changing practices, as well as providing useful information of their own experiences in film.

Past graduates have secured positions in a variety of creative (and related) industries, including broadcasting and ﬁlmmaking, advertising/PR, games development and tourism. For further course details, please see: www.bangor.ac.uk/go/pg/creative

International Media Management MSc COURSE DURATION MSc: 1 year full-time or 2 years part-time.

Compulsory Modules: • Masters Dissertation • Organisations and People The dissertation provides you with the This modules provides an integrated analysis of opportunity to work with a specialist supervisor ENTRY REQUIREMENTS management, organisations and people, in the production of an extended piece of A good 2.ii Honours degree or industry equivalent developing the conceptual, strategic and writing. The work will, of necessity, go through a experience. IELTS score of 6.0 (no component practical skills necessary for managers in number of stages, and the supervisor will below 5.5) or equivalent if your first language is complex, global organisational contexts. support you in the effective revision of your not English or Welsh. work. As well as developing high levels skills in • Intellectual Property Law research and presentation, students will also COURSE DESCRIPTION This module equips you with an understanding develop important skills of self-management. The creative industries play a vital role in of the fundamentals of intellectual property law, economic growth worldwide, accounting for the definition and scope of copyright; the CAREER PROSPECTS some 7% of gross domestic product across authorship, ownership, duration and Through its unique spread of modules in creative Europe, over 11% in the US and up to 17-20% qualification for copyright protection; industries, business and law, this vocationally elsewhere. This phenomenal rate of growth infringement of copyright and the defences to oriented MSc prepares you for a senior provides excellent opportunities for individuals an infringement action. management career in the creative economies. with the skills and background to take up The programme as a whole will also prepare you executive roles within the sector. Bringing • Marketing Strategy for PhD or MPhil level postgraduate study. The together three outstanding Schools at Bangor This module introduces you to the School actively seeks to put students in contact University (Business; Law; Creative Studies and ‘fundamentals’ of marketing, by illustrating with relevant industry bodies and organises a Media), the MSc International Media Management strategies in a wide range of situations, and variety of professional workshops and will provide you with the intellectual development covering the various schools of thought in competitions, e.g. through the Enterprise by and training to develop a senior management marketing, together with relevant analytical Design scheme. career in this area. On this degree you will study models and management practices. topics such as Strategic Management, Marketing Past graduates have secured positions in a Strategy, Finance for Managers, Organisations • Creative Industries variety of creative (and related) industries, and People, Intellectual Property, Comparative In this module, you will analyse the including broadcasting and filmmaking, Corporate Law, Labour Law, International Law, development of the creative industries globally. advertising/PR, games development and Research Methods and Creative Industries. You There will be a particular emphasis on the tourism. will also undertake a media-focused dissertation media, and the relevant social, economic and designed to investigate and interrogate theory political contexts of the main developments For further course details, please see: and practice in the creative economies locally within these industries will also be considered. www.bangor.ac.uk/go/pg/creative and/or globally. • Research Methods This module equips you with an understanding and critical overview of key methodological issues associated with various types of research in the Media, Cultural and Creative Industries, in preparation for the dissertation.

26 BANGOR UNIVERSITY POSTGRADUATE PROSPECTUS

39450 BU PG Prospectus 2015_2018 2014-09-10 10:35 AM Page 27

Creative Practice MRes COURSE DURATION MRes: 1 year full-time or 2 years part-time.

Compulsory Modules: • MRes Dissertation • Creativity and Research With guidance from experienced members of This module provides the opportunity for you to staff, you will develop a topic of your own for ENTRY REQUIREMENTS consider the role and significance of creative further research; you will work towards the A good 2.i Honours degree or industry equivalent practice within an academic context and to production of an independently researched and experience. IELTS score of 6.5 (no component analyse its role in generating knowledge. The produced practice-based portfolio and below 6.0) or equivalent if your first language is class will synthesise a variety of theories and accompanying critical commentary, which will not English or Welsh. perspectives on the relationship between art, reflect and demonstrate the knowledge and creativity, science and knowledge, and will skills you have acquired during the taught COURSE DESCRIPTION develop an extended critical analysis of the modules. The School of Creative Studies and Media has a planning and performance of creative strong reputation for its synthesis of functions. CAREER PROSPECTS critical/theoretical work and practice, and this This degree programme will prepare you to meet degree lies at the heart of its activity. You take • Communicating Practice the need, increasingly being identified within first semester modules in creativity and research This module introduces you to the practical and industry, for self-reflective practitioners with and in media theory, before embarking on the theoretical aspects of practice-based and experience at project development in the creative production of a substantial practice-based practice-led research including the grounding sector. dissertation under the supervision of a specialist of research in the state of the art and member of staff. The dissertation includes both a theoretical paradigms, project planning and The School actively seeks to put students in reflective/critical element and a portfolio, and development, resource planning, practice contact with relevant industry bodies and can be undertaken in any of the practice-based methodologies and the construction of a organises a variety of professional workshops disciplines taught in the School, including writing, practice-based or practice-led research and competitions, e.g. through the Enterprise by screenwriting, performance, television and radio proposal. During the module you will develop Design scheme. production, film and documentary making, digital and document a proposal for an 8-month media writing and production, and journalism. programme of practice-based or practice-led Past graduates have secured positions in a Successful applicants for this programme will research in a field of your choosing, such as variety of creative (and related) industries, have an excellent first degree in a relevant performance, digital media, film, creative including broadcasting and filmmaking, discipline or equivalent practical/industrial writing or journalism. advertising, PR, games development and experience, and a demonstrated ability to work tourism. independently to bring a self-directed project to • Researching Film/Visual Culture completion. The aim of this module is to ensure that you are For further course details, please see: equipped with a comprehensive and advanced www.bangor.ac.uk/go/pg/creative knowledge of research approaches and methodologies relevant to the discipline. The module will guide and inform you about the various ways that film and visual culture can be researched and how online, library, archival and textual based sources can be used to inform and disseminate your own research project.

Film and Visual Culture MRes COURSE DURATION MRes: 1 year full-time or 2 years part-time.

Compulsory Modules: • Film and Visual Culture The aims of this module are to ensure that you ENTRY REQUIREMENTS are equipped with a comprehensive and A good 2.i Honours degree or industry equivalent advanced knowledge of research approaches experience. IELTS score of 6.5 (no component and methodologies relevant to the discipline. below 6.0) or equivalent if your first language is The module will guide and inform you about the not English or Welsh. various ways that film and visual culture can be researched and how online, library, archival and COURSE DESCRIPTION textual based sources can be used to inform This programme offers you the opportunity to and disseminate their own research project. undertake in-depth study on a chosen aspect of The module will offer level-appropriate training film and/or visual culture. Following first related to film and visual culture methodology semester modules in Research Methods for Film and will examine how to conceive, pursue, and Visual Culture and in Media and Cultural organise and successfully complete research Theory, you embark on a 40,000 word projects in film studies. This module directly dissertation (or practice-based equivalent), prepares you for the MRes dissertation and you supervised by specialist film and visual culture will be asked to directly link the methodologies staff across the College of Arts and Humanities and approaches discussed with your own at Bangor. The MRes is supported by a dedicated proposed projects. Throughout this module you College-wide seminar series, which offers you will engage with members of the Film and the opportunity to present your own work in Visual Culture teaching team and will identify progress, and to develop an understanding of and work with individual tutors in the critical paradigms and research in Bangor and formulation of your individual MRes beyond. dissertation idea. Successful applicants for this programme will have an excellent first degree in a relevant discipline or equivalent practical/industrial experience, and a demonstrated ability to work independently to bring a self-directed project to completion.

• Media and Cultural Theory Media and Cultural Theory aims to provide a systematic overview of major 20th and 21st century critical schools and theoretical approaches, which are key for an advanced understanding of how to read and analyse creative, cultural and media artefacts such as fiction, non-fiction, poetry, drama, film, video games and other new media texts. You will be given the opportunity to study, discuss and close-read seminal readings from the canon of critical literature and apply them to creative, cultural and media artefacts.

• MRes Humanities: Dissertation With guidance from academic staff, students following the MRes Humanities Dissertation module will be asked to choose a topic of their own, for further research. Students will be expected to produce an independently researched piece of work which will reflect the knowledge and skills acquired from the taught modules. The topic chosen may be specific to one culture or comparative. CAREER PROSPECTS The MRes Film and Visual Culture will provide ideal training for those wishing to work in the creative industries, with a particular focus on the development of key analytical and critical skills for the film and visual culture sectors. It will also provide a strong basis for those wishing to pursue doctoral study with a view to careers in teaching, lecturing and research. The School actively seeks to put students in contact with relevant industry bodies and organises a variety of professional workshops and competitions, e.g. through the Enterprise by Design scheme. Past graduates have secured positions in a variety of creative (and related) industries, including broadcasting and filmmaking, advertising/PR, games development and tourism. For further course details, please see: www.bangor.ac.uk/go/pg/creative

BANGOR UNIVERSITY POSTGRADUATE PROSPECTUS 27

39450 BU PG Prospectus 2015_2018 2014-09-10 10:35 AM Page 28

Professional Writing / Film / Media / New Media / Journalism / Creative Studies PhD/MPhil (including PhD/MPhil Practice-Led Research) COURSE DURATION PhD: 3 years full-time, 6 years part-time; MPhil: 2 years full-time, 4 years part-time. ENTRY REQUIREMENTS We would normally expect students starting a PhD or MPhil to hold a ﬁrst class or a good second-class undergraduate degree. In many cases PhD and MPhil applicants have studied to MA level, though this is not compulsory. We are able to accept students on a distance-learning basis, but they should have already acquired the skills taught in the introductory seminars, or should make arrangements to attend equivalent seminars at another institution, at their own expense. Students whose ﬁrst language is not English are expected to have an IELTS score of 7.0, no element below 6.5.

COURSE DESCRIPTION PhD/MPhil and PhD/MPhil Practice-Led study is available in subjects across the whole spectrum of the Creative Industries, with potential research specialisms in such areas as: film and/or media studies, new media, drama, communications and related fields. Our staff specialise in a wide range of subject areas, such as world cinema, visual culture, digital and interactive media, games and virtual environments, digital arts and culture, journalism, media and cultural studies, screenwriting and adaptation, drama and performance. Whilst our Practice-Led Research staff specialise in areas such as digital and interactive media, professional writing (journalism and screenwriting), media and film production, and performance.

CAREER PROSPECTS Following their research degrees, past graduates have secured positions in prestigious academic institutions as well as a variety of creative (and related) industries, including broadcasting and ﬁlmmaking, advertising/PR, games development and tourism. The School actively seeks to put students in contact with relevant industry bodies and organises a variety of professional workshops and competitions, e.g. through the Enterprise by Design scheme.

All research students have a broad range of academic training events to choose from, including: • seminar series for staff and students The environment in Bangor could not be better • regular supervisory committee meetings for studying at postgraduate level. You will be • an annual PG symposium joining a vibrant postgraduate community and a • career and research skills courses offered by School with significant experience in teaching the the University’s Academic Development Unit. creative industries at postgraduate level. Research students are also involved in undergraduate teaching and editorial/publishing activities in the School. For further course details, please see: www.bangor.ac.uk/go/pg/creative

28 BANGOR UNIVERSITY POSTGRADUATE PROSPECTUS

39450 BU PG Prospectus 2015_2018 2014-09-10 10:35 AM Page 29

School of English

The School offers an engaging and supportive environment for postgraduate study, focusing on small group teaching and one-to-one supervision. Postgraduate students work closely with academic staff in a research community that encourages interdisciplinary exchange and activity. Our Masters and PhD students are part of a lively Graduate School within the College of Arts and Humanities, which provides opportunities for productive exchange across its constituent Schools and disciplines. Research activities initiated and run by our students include the annual postgraduate conference in medieval studies and medievalism, the staff and postgraduate students’ writing workshop, regular poetry readings, and the online postgraduate journal. Overview of the academic areas covered within the School Our expertise lies in six key areas: late medieval and early modern literature, literary editing and the history of the book, Welsh writing in English, contemporary literature and creative writing, film, and literature and religion. Three research centres facilitate research in these areas: • The Institute for Medieval and Early Modern Studies (IMEMS), a collaborative research institute between Bangor University and Aberystwyth University, focusing on research activities in the pre-1800 period. • The R. S. Thomas Centre fosters new work in this area of study, particularly through an engagement with primary source materials from the R. S. Thomas archives, acquired by Bangor University in recent years. • The Centre for Contemporary Poetry (informally known as ‘Contempo’) is a collaborative, cross-institutional research centre founded in 2006, and run by Bangor, Aberystwyth and Brighton Universities. Through regular video-linked seminars and symposia it aims to develop knowledge about contemporary poetic practices, about the interface between the word and the visual, and to examine differences in practice between experimental and traditional poetic forms.

Other areas of particular strength are Arthurian studies, Milton, rhetoric and the literature of argument, medieval and early modern women’s writing, medieval and early modern drama, Shakespeare, and creative writing. Bangor has one of the longest histories of teaching creative writing in the UK and has pioneered the creative-critical interface that has allowed our graduates to excel in writing and publishing work. A number of members of staff have interests in gender approaches to literature, while we have specialists in early modern rhetoric, modern drama (Mamet) and experimental writing. In addition to the training in research skills that you will obtain at Masters level, we also offer specialist training in palaeography and codicology (medieval and early modern manuscripts, in Middle English, Middle Welsh, Anglo Norman and Latin). This scheme, started in 2005, continues to attract students from across Wales and the UK. Staff and facilities The interests of our staff extend from the medieval period to the twenty-first century and look beyond the UK to the exciting international landscapes of literatures in English. Our staff are enthusiastic researchers and teachers who come together in the introductory postgraduate courses to pass on their invaluable knowledge and expertise. The library holdings have been carefully developed to match the School’s research interests. We have major holdings of scholarly editions and critical texts in the fields of Arthurian literature, the early modern period (being particularly strong in the areas of Milton, Shakespeare, and early modern radical writers), and of Anglophone Welsh literature. Other library facilities include research packages and subscription to a range of journals and e-journals.

STAFF PROFILE

About the School The School of English has been an integral part of Bangor University since the University opened its doors in 1884. Our long history, strong tradition and wealth of experience are reflected in our expertise at postgraduate level, and complemented by a range of courses that allow our students to specialise in many areas of traditional and contemporary study. Our academic staff includes some of the world’s foremost authorities on Milton, Arthurian Literature, Herbert, early modern literature, the history of the book and Welsh writing in English, and all teaching staff in the School are successful poets, authors, critics or novelists in their own right.

COURSE LIST: MA/Diploma • Arthurian Literature • Creative Writing • English Literature • Literatures of Wales • Medieval Studies PhD/MPhil • Creative and Critical Writing • English

TO FIND OUT MORE: Tel: +44 (0) 1248 382102 E-mail: pgadmissionstutor@bangor.ac.uk www.bangor.ac.uk/english

STAFF PROFILE Dr Kachi A. Ozumba, Lecturer in Creative Writing and Literature and Postgraduate Admissions Tutor, School of English “I was attracted to Bangor by its distinguished history as one of the first institutions in the UK to offer creative writing at degree level, and by the sheer beauty of the north Wales landscape, the inspiring mountains, valleys and sea. I teach creative writing and modern literature. I also offer one-to-one supervision and feedback which students find particularly helpful. My research interests include prose fiction, comparative literature, transcultural writing, and postcolonialism. The writing life is a new area of interest, and I am currently co-editing a book on contemporary writers and their craft. My writings have won the Arts Council England’s Decibel Penguin Prize and the Commonwealth Short Story Prize, been shortlisted for the prestigious Royal Society of Literature Ondaatje Prize and for the Commonwealth Writers’ Prize, been broadcast on BBC, published widely and translated into other languages. My literary activities have also led to my being appointed a judge for the 2010 and 2011 Commonwealth Short Story Prizes, and for the 2011 Lightship International Literary Competitions.”

BANGOR UNIVERSITY POSTGRADUATE PROSPECTUS 29

39450 BU PG Prospectus 2015_2018 2014-09-10 10:35 AM Page 30

Arthurian Literature MA COURSE DURATION MA: 1 year full-time; 2-3 years part-time.

The MA in Arthurian Literature takes a flexible, • Post-Medieval Arthur comprehensive, approach to the discipline. You This module addresses the Arthurian myth and may choose to specialise in the medieval or the legends from the early modern period onwards, ENTRY REQUIREMENTS post-medieval period. At the same time you can paying attention to the way the story was Applicants should normally hold a 2.i enjoy all the benefits of one-to-one supervision in shaped in different centuries. undergraduate degree or equivalent in a relevant the Open Essay options, and develop your area, demonstrating high achievement in research skills. Moreover, in-depth introductions • Dissertation elements relevant to the proposed research or to the study of medieval palaeography and The dissertation module gives you the equivalent experience. You should also, in your codicology are available by collaboration with opportunity to produce a substantial piece of application, outline the area in which you wish to other relevant Schools and disciplines. scholarly research, on a subject of your own specialise. International students whose first choice and discussed in detail with a chosen language is not English: IELTS score of at least Students are encouraged to participate in the supervisor. 6.5 (with no element below 6.0) is required. annual international postgraduate conference, ‘Medievalism Transformed’, the bi-weekly Optional Modules: COURSE DESCRIPTION Institute for Medieval and Early Modern Studies • Open Essay The MA in Arthurian Literature benefits from the seminar series (www.imems.ac.uk/) and the • Advanced Latin for Postgraduates expertise of world-class academics, outstanding online postgraduate journal. • Manuscript and Printed Books library resources, and a unique location with medieval roots in the legend. Structure Subject to availability, you may choose relevant The MA in Arthurian Literature consists of two modules in medieval Welsh literature/Welsh Arthurian Literature is an established area of parts. Part One must be successfully completed Arthurian literature offered in the School of learning in the School of English. The main before proceeding to part two. Welsh. specialists in the field are Dr Raluca Radulescu, whose work has focused on Malory, Arthurian Compulsory Modules: RESEARCH LINKS/LINKS WITH INDUSTRY romances and chronicles, and Professor PJC • Introduction to Literary Theory, Scholarship A collaboration with the tourist attraction 'King Field, world-renowned for his work on the and Research Arthur's Labyrinth' at Corris has led to funded Arthurian legend through the centuries. The This module develops knowledge of literary Access to Masters MA places in recent years. course also draws upon the expertise available theory and research methods. within the School of English and other Schools in CAREER PROSPECTS the College of Arts and Humanities, including the • Medieval Arthur Current and past research students have Schools of Welsh, History, Welsh History and This module explores the Arthurian myth from engaged in higher degrees, teaching, research Archaeology and Music. Staff in these areas the earliest archaeological evidence to the end and librarianship in higher education (UK, US, contribute regularly to the teaching of Arthurian of the fifteenth century, with a view to Japan, and elsewhere), publishing, and a range of topics spanning the medieval period to the examining its evolution in a variety of the socio- related activities. present. political contexts, as well as material culture. For further course details, please see: www.bangor.ac.uk/go/pg/english

Creative Writing MA COURSE DURATION MA: 1 year full-time or 2-3 years part-time.

• Creative Writing: Poetry A series of group seminars invites you to experiment with a range of approaches to ENTRY REQUIREMENTS poetry, from the use of traditional forms to A 2.i degree or equivalent in a relevant field innovative techniques for exploring language. (please contact us for advice on accepted You will read and discuss contemporary poetry, degrees if unsure) and a demonstrated interest in and develop a portfolio of your own work with creative writing. Potential students are invited to individual supervision. submit a short sample of their work with their application. International students whose first • Creative Writing: Prose language is not English: IELTS score of at least Taught initially by seminar, followed by 6.5 (with no element below 6.0) is required. individual supervision, this module presents advanced fiction writing techniques, focusing COURSE DESCRIPTION on how character, plot, setting, tone and style An MA in Creative Writing may be the first step contribute to compelling narrative, and on how towards a writing career, or a chance for more conventions of genre may be challenged. experienced writers to develop their work from a Assessment is by a portfolio of fiction. new perspective. The School offers a range of opportunities for postgraduate study in a • Introduction to Literary Theory, dynamic critical and creative environment. One of Scholarship and Research the first institutions in the UK to offer creative This module offers the opportunity to study writing at degree level, Bangor has significant alongside MA students in English Literature, experience in this discipline. Specialist writing and to share ideas about authorship, the history staff closely involved in teaching and supervision of the book, and some key contemporary include, Ian Gregson, Carol Rumens, Kachi perspectives on the relationship between Ozumba and Zoë Skoulding, who have a range of literature and the culture in which it is expertise in poetry, fiction, literary editing and the produced. For writers, this module offers a interface between creative and critical writing. valuable insight into how your creative work relates to its wider context. For the first part of the MA, the following modules are taught in small groups or through individual supervision:

Optional modules: • Advanced Writing Portfolio (taught by supervision) • Open Essay/Portfolio (taught by supervision) • Transcreative Writing (taught in conjunction with the School of Modern Languages, but no foreign language skills required). Modules may also be taken from any part of the MA in English Literature programme. The second part of the MA is the Dissertation, which is a chance to develop a longer piece of creative writing in consultation with a supervisor. RESEARCH LINKS/LINKS WITH INDUSTRY Practising writers are regularly invited to share their insights with students. CAREER PROSPECTS An MA in Creative Writing may lead to a career as a novelist, poet or playwright. Planning and developing a substantial writing project is a good preparation for future funded or commissioned writing, as well as for an academic career in practice-based research. This course also offers a range of skills that can be applied in other contexts, for example editing, publishing, journalism and arts administration. The ability to use language fluently and persuasively is essential for success in almost any field, and the flexibility of working across genres in this course offers an excellent grounding in creative language use. For further course details, please see: www.bangor.ac.uk/go/pg/english

30 BANGOR UNIVERSITY POSTGRADUATE PROSPECTUS

39450 BU PG Prospectus 2015_2018 2014-09-10 10:35 AM Page 31

English Literature MA COURSE DURATION MA: 1 year full-time or 2-3 years part-time. ENTRY REQUIREMENTS Applicants to this programme should normally hold a 2.i undergraduate degree or equivalent in English Literature or a related subject, demonstrating high achievement in elements relevant to the proposed research, or equivalent experience. Your application should also outline the area in which you wish to specialise. For international students whose first language is not English, the entry requirement includes an IELTS score of at least 6.5 overall (with no mark below 6.0 in any aspect of the test). COURSE DESCRIPTION You will develop the skills and knowledge required for textual, theoretical and historical analysis in your chosen field. The School offers one-to-one supervision from experts in the field. Students are encouraged to make use of the University’s extensive archives and to take part in the research activities of the School of English and wider College of Arts and Humanities, which includes the English Literature Research Seminar series, scholarly reading groups, workshops and conferences.

technological revolution upon literary studies. The Revolution and Modernity, 1750 to the Present pathway offers students the opportunity to become intimately acquainted with the historical, cultural and literary forces that have shaped our contemporary age. This interdisciplinary pathway explores a variety of visual and verbal print cultures, spaces and identities in order to unravel the complex relationship between texts and their contexts. Bangor University, with its neo-Gothic architecture and its proximity to Thomas Telford’s pioneering Menai Suspension Bridge, is itself a physical embodiment of aesthetic revolution and the pursuit of modernity. While honing their knowledge of nineteenth, twentieth and twenty-first century texts, students will also become fluent in contemporary scholarly discourse and develop their own critical voice.

The Four Nations Literature pathway offers an opportunity for pioneering study of the literatures of England, Scotland, Ireland and Wales. It aims to widen the scope of traditional English Literature courses by seeking out continuities and contrasts between the literatures of Britain and Ireland in the modern period. In particular, the Four Nations pathway investigates the ways The MA consists of taught modules (Part One) in which the literatures of Britain and Ireland mainly assessed by essays, followed by a register the effects of modernity on British and dissertation (Part Two). The modules within the Irish culture and society, from the late eighteenth English Literature programme are grouped into century to the contemporary moment. Bangor four ‘pathways’ . Each of these represents a University, located between London, Dublin and particular area of research strength at Bangor Liverpool, is the ideal place to examine such and offers an aspect of literary study in which MA issues. students may choose to specialise. Those students who prefer not to specialise by The four pathways: following the pathways above can pursue a The Medieval and Early Modern Literature broader portfolio of advanced literary studies in pathway draws on well-known and English by completing the compulsory module internationally recognised areas of expertise at and a free choice of three other modules. Bangor. Members of the School of English Part One: undertake research in medieval English poetry, At the beginning of the course, all students follow prose and drama; the literature of the Tudor the compulsory module Literary Theory, period; the drama of Shakespeare and his Scholarship and Research which considers key contemporaries, and seventeenth-century ideas in literary theory, the analysis of texts and literature in poetry and prose as well as on the the techniques of advanced scholarly writing. In stage. Particular areas of interest include Chaucerian studies, medieval romance, Arthurian addition, students will choose three further modules. You may make an open selection of literature, medieval and early modern drama, modules or follow one of the four pathways. In pre-modern travel writing, early modern memory studies, George Herbert and devotional order to complete a pathway, at least two of the three optional modules must be selected from poetry, autobiographical writing, Milton, that pathway. polemical prose, words and music, manuscript studies, and the work of women writers across Modules on Medieval and Early Modern the medieval and early modern periods. These wide-ranging topics are reflected in the choice of Literature: • Pre-Modern Travel modules and dissertation topics available to • Manuscripts and Printed Books students who follow the pathway. • The European Renaissance The Material Texts pathway introduces students • Myth and the Early Modern Author • Women’s Devotional Writing to many of the methodologies associated with the history of the book, the sociology of texts, the • Medieval Arthur • Post-Medieval Arthur history of reading and the theories associated with editing. The investigation of the material text • Advanced Latin for Postgraduates • Editing Texts and the circumstances of production and consumption are growing areas within the Modules on Material Texts: discipline of literary studies. Students will • Manuscripts and Printed Books examine a range of texts from medieval and early-modern manuscripts, through early printed • Material Texts and Contexts • Print, Politics & Popular Culture books and on to the serialised texts of the • Editing Texts Victorian period, as well as looking at cinema, screenplays and contemporary technologies of Modules on Revolution and Modernity, 1750 to self-representation. This pathway makes the the Present: most of the School’s expertise in book history • Revolution, Modernity: 1790-1930 and scholarly editing, as well as Bangor • Welsh Literature in English University’s particularly strong archive collections. The School is also actively involved in • Material Texts and Contexts • Modernisms several digitisation projects, and many of the • Print, Politics & Popular Culture modules will consider the impact of the latest

• Irish Literature • Editing Texts Modules on Four-Nations Literature: • Revolution, Modernity: 1790-1930 • Welsh Literature in English • Modernisms • Irish Literature • Editing Texts In addition to the above pathway-related modules, the following modules are offered: • Open Essay • The Postgraduate Conference It is also possible to take one optional module from the MA in Creative Writing (if the prerequisites of creative writing experience are met) or from another School in the College of Arts and Humanities. Part Two: Preparation of a 20,000-word dissertation on a subject of your choice, researched and written under the individual supervision of a subject specialist. Those following a specified pathway will be expected chose a subject in a relevant research area. CAREER PROSPECTS The course offers excellent preparation for participation in doctoral programmes. It adds to the qualifications of those intending to pursue a career in cultural and creative fields such as publishing, arts administration, the media, communications and teaching. The experience of postgraduate literary study can also enhance future employability, through the acquisition of transferrable skills such as: the ability to pursue independent research; to carry out advanced analysis of texts and arguments; and to present ideas fluently in written and oral form. Above all, the MA affords an opportunity for advanced personal and intellectual development. For further course details, please see: www.bangor.ac.uk/go/pg/english

BANGOR UNIVERSITY POSTGRADUATE PROSPECTUS 31

39450 BU PG Prospectus 2015_2018 2014-09-10 10:35 AM Page 32

32 BANGOR UNIVERSITY POSTGRADUATE PROSPECTUS

39450 BU PG Prospectus 2015_2018 2014-09-10 10:35 AM Page 33

Literatures of Wales MA COURSE DURATION MA: 1 year full-time or 2-3 years part-time.

and to consider the question of what happens to Idris Davies. English-language literature when it is not the Gender and Wales: Students will study the principal tradition. ENTRY REQUIREMENTS relation between gender and the Welsh nation, Applicants to this programme should have a 2.i Part One: and how gender roles have changed over the The first part of the course comprises three or equivalent in a relevant subject (e.g. English last century. Themes might include sexuality, modules which seek to provide students with an masculinity and industry, gendered Literature, Welsh, or History). Practical experience may also be accepted. Applicants will understanding of modern Welsh literary and representations of the colonised space, the cultural history, enable them to develop their be judged on their individual merits, with work male body, women and representations of land. understanding of key issues in modern Welsh experience and other factors also considered. Writers to be studied might include: Elin ap literary scholarship and consider key issues The ability to speak Welsh is not a requirement Hywel, Jan Morris, John Sam Jones, Glyn Jones, across both literary traditions, from a crossfor this course. Students will have the Jane Aaron, Lewis Jones, Gwyneth Lewis, Rhys community perspective. opportunity to take Welsh lessons. For Davies, Amy Dillwyn, Menna Gallie. international students whose first language is Part Two: Introduction: ‘Who Speaks for Wales?’ In this not English, the entry requirement includes an Preparation of a 20,000-word Dissertation, IELTS score of at least 6.5 overall (with no mark introductory module, students will be asked to written in English or Welsh, on any aspect of the consider how issues of identity pertinent to below 6.0 in any aspect of the test). literatures in which the student is interested a Wales from 1840 to the present have been subject of your choice, researched and written understood. Typically, students will study COURSE DESCRIPTION under the individual supervision of a subject internal difference within Wales, Britishness, Taught jointly by the Schools of Welsh and English, the Literatures of Wales MA is the first notions of Celtic identity, Wales as a postcolonial specialist. course anywhere in the world which focuses on nation, parallels with other ‘dominated’ British CAREER PROSPECTS the study and comparison of texts from the two nations, nationalist movements. Work by the By providing students with the unique following writers might be studied: Hywel Teifi main literary traditions in Wales (where opportunity to study with the best fellowEdwards, Saunders Lewis, Raymond Williams, necessary in English translation). Wales is the scholars from both literary and cultural only one of the British Celtic nations to retain a Matthew Arnold, J.R. Jones, M. Wynn Thomas, traditions, the course equips students for a wide widely-spoken, viable indigenous language and Tony Conran, Dai Smith, Kirsti Bohata. range of careers in the Welsh public and private a vibrant contemporary literature. It is also the sectors. For any job in which an understanding Welsh Modernity: Students will be asked to only British nation whose distinctive of both linguistic cultures is important, this consider the ways in which literature across Anglophone literature remains marginalised both linguistic traditions registers the arrival of course is an ideal training. It also provides a within its own education system. At university sound basis for further postgraduate study modernity, and the changes subsequently level, the linguistic divide of the twentieth wrought. Themes might include industry, class, within Wales, or beyond. century encouraged the separate study of the urbanisation, capitalism, rural culture, religion, two literatures, a schism which modern linguistic change and exile. Writers to be studied For further course details, please see: scholarship has only recently started to www.bangor.ac.uk/go/pg/english might include Caradoc Evans, Lynette Roberts, overcome. Bangor – a genuinely bilingual Caradog Pritchard, Dylan Thomas, Kate Roberts, cultural centre – is an ideal place in which to R.S. Thomas, Arthur Machen, Emyr Humphreys, study these two literary traditions from Wales,

Medieval Studies MA COURSE DURATION MA: 1 year full-time; 2-3 years part-time; Diploma: 9 months full-time (also available parttime). ENTRY REQUIREMENTS Applicants should normally hold a 2.i degree or equivalent undergraduate degree in a relevant area, demonstrating high achievement in elements relevant to the proposed research or equivalent experience. In their applications, students should outline the area in which they wish to specialise. International students whose ﬁrst language is not English: IELTS score of at least 6.5 (with no element below 6.0) is required.

The MA in Medieval Studies takes a ﬂexible, comprehensive, approach to the discipline. You may choose to specialise in one of the participating Schools; English, Music, Welsh or History, Welsh History and Archaeology. At the same time you can enjoy all the beneﬁts of oneto-one supervision in the Open Essay options, and acquire independent research skills. Moreover, an introduction to the study of medieval palaeography and codicology is available through collaboration with other relevant schools and the Bangor University Archives and Special Collections, which includes the library of Bangor Cathedral.

Subject to availability, you may choose from a variety of relevant modules in aspects of medieval studies oﬀered in the Schools of English; History, Welsh History and Archaeology; Music; and Welsh, such as: • Medieval Arthur • Astudiaeth Unigol: 1 (Cymraeg) • Medieval and Early Modern Women’s Devotional Writing (English) • The Age of Llywelyn ap Iorwerth (History) • Principal Subject: Early (Music) • Medieval Latin

Part Two • Dissertation – a substantial piece of scholarly You are encouraged to participate in the activities research, on a subject of your own choice and COURSE DESCRIPTION of the Institute for Medieval and Early Modern discussed in detail with a chosen supervisor. Medieval Studies is a well-known and Studies (www.imems.ac.uk), and the annual internationally recognised area of expertise at international postgraduate conference, RESEARCH LINKS/LINKS WITH INDUSTRY Bangor. Our particular strengths are in: medieval ‘Medievalism Transformed’. Collaboration with the National Library of Wales, literature, particularly Arthurian; Welsh History Aberystwyth, has led to a funded Access to and Archaeology; Welsh medieval literature, and Structure Masters place on this degree in recent years. Music. Additional strengths include, among The MA in Medieval Studies consists of two parts. others, gender, devotional literature, drama, Part One must be successfully completed before CAREER PROSPECTS Anglo-Norman studies and early sacred music. proceeding to the second part, the dissertation. This MA prepares you for a career in teaching, Interdisciplinary approaches form the core of publishing and a range of related activities, as medieval studies and the current expertise at Compulsory Modules: well as providing preparation for further Part One: Bangor guarantees this approach, both through research in higher education. the core module and through the optional • Understanding the Middle Ages modules oﬀered. In addition, Bangor can boast a This module is designed to introduce you to the For further course details, please see: unique combination of module choices. Welsh, breadth of subject areas and methodologies www.bangor.ac.uk/go/pg/english Arthurian studies and Music form the distinctive subsumed under the umbrella of medieval core of the provision, alongside our widely studies. recognised expertise in teaching palaeography • Manuscripts and Printed Books and codicology. This module consists of an introduction to palaeography and codicology.

BANGOR UNIVERSITY POSTGRADUATE PROSPECTUS 33

39450 BU PG Prospectus 2015_2018 2014-09-10 10:35 AM Page 34

English / Creative and Critical Writing PhD/MPhil COURSE DURATION PhD: 3 years full-time, 6-8 years part-time; MPhil: 2 years full-time, 4-5 years part-time.

PhD/MPhil in Creative and Critical Writing This programme provides the opportunity to work over an extended period on a collection of short stories, a novel or a collection of poems ENTRY REQUIREMENTS under the individual supervision of a writer We would normally expect students to hold a first actively publishing in your field. Your creative class or a good second-class degree. Students work will be accompanied by a critical without an MA are required to follow the commentary, which should be mainly focused on research training module offered by the school. exploring some idea, topic, genre, theme, writer We are able to accept students on a distanceor group of writers that has a relationship with learning basis, but they should have already the creative work being undertaken. Researching acquired the skills taught in the introductory this element will ensure a good knowledge of seminars, or should make arrangements to current literary concerns. The critical attend equivalent seminars at another institution, commentary should include a section in which at their own expense. International students you discuss your own work and the ways in whose first language is not English: an IELTS which it relates to the literary texts you have score of at least 6.5 (with no element below 6.0) discussed. The major component of the PhD is is required. the creative element, which the critical commentary is intended to support. The creative COURSE DESCRIPTION element should be 70,000 to 80,000 words in PhD/MPhil in English length if prose. For poetry an equivalent length, The MPhil in English is awarded for a dissertation depending on the exact nature of the creative of not more than 60,000 words and the PhD in work submitted, will be negotiated with your English for a dissertation normally of not more supervisor. The critical commentary should be than 100,000 words. Research may be carried 20,000 to 30,000 words. The thesis, comprising out in the main fields of English literature postboth creative and critical components, is 1300; Arthurian literature; American literature; expected to have a total word count of about Comparative literature or interdisciplinary 100,000 words or equivalent. studies. Staff specialisms include: Anglo-Welsh writing (especially R.S. Thomas); Postcolonial You will be joining a vibrant postgraduate Literature; Gender and Writing; Autobiography; community and a School with significant Travel Writing; Romanticism; Renaissance experience in teaching creative writing at Literature; Modern English and American Drama; postgraduate level. A number of staff members Milton and Literature of the Civil War period; are published and award-winning authors, and Modernism; Contemporary Poetry; other are involved in a variety of editing and judging literature from the middle Ages, and the 16th, activities. The School benefits from the presence 17th, 19th and 20th centuries. of the poet Professor Carol Rumens as a visiting professor and the frequent visits of honorary professor Philip Pullman, who offers both readings and workshops.

RESEARCH LINKS/LINKS WITH INDUSTRY Visiting academics feature regularly in the School’s research seminars. The School organises a number of readings by writers each year, and recent visitors have included: Jackie Kay, George Szirtes, Anne-Marie Fyfe, Erin Moure, Andrea Brady, Robert Hampson, Jeff Hilson, Michael Symmons Roberts, Tiffany Atkinson, Patrick McGuinness, Richard Marggraf Turley and Damian Walford Davies. The Contempo seminar series, run jointly with Aberystwyth University, is a staff and postgraduate seminar series that also has a regular programme of visiting writers and critics. CAREER PROSPECTS The PhD/MPhil in English prepares you for a career in higher education, as well as in publishing, arts administration, media research, and a range of related careers. This course fully prepares you for a future career as a writer and as an academic. Students also have the opportunity to follow a range of training programmes offered through the University that significantly enhance their chances of finding work in the field of their choice. Our students are successful. A number of recent or existing postgraduate students have successfully published collections of poems or short stories that have arisen from their studies here at Bangor. These include John Tanner, Zoe Skoulding, and Nessa O’Mahoney. Others have published stories including Terri Lee Hackman, Zoe Perrenoud, and Lisa Blower (who also won the 2009 Guardian Short Story Competition). For further course details, please see: www.bangor.ac.uk/go/pg/english

“For my PhD I am researching identity construction within Latino literature. The Academic Development Unit within the University has been really good - I’ve been to many workshops run by them, e.g. how to present research, build-up your academic CV, the best use of online resources. These workshops have helped me with developing beyond undergraduate level and to become an independent researcher. Starting a PhD course can be overwhelming and these workshops have given me a foot-hold and the opportunity to network with other postgraduates. The highlight for me so far is that I have been asked to present a paper on an aspect of my work at other universities and that’s something I’m looking forward to. The atmosphere at the School of English is a really positive one. There is a big international population at the University which adds a feeling of multiculturalism and diversity. Bangor is surrounded by the mountains and the sea – so you couldn’t ask for a prettier location!” DAVINA EAGLES, from New York, USA, PhD in English Literature

34 BANGOR UNIVERSITY POSTGRADUATE PROSPECTUS

39450 BU PG Prospectus 2015_2018 2014-09-10 10:35 AM Page 35

School of History, Welsh History and Archaeology About the School History has been taught at Bangor since the University was established in 1884 and Archaeology has been taught here since 1960. The School is located in the historical centre of the University, and the lecture rooms, arts library and archives are all close by. The School has an excellent reputation for teaching and research over a wide area, extending chronologically from prehistory to the present.

Almost half the academic staff in the School have a major interest in Welsh history from the age of the Welsh princes to devolution, and also including specialisms in early modern religious, social, economic and cultural history, the history of estates and rural society in the nineteenth century, and Welsh historiography (i.e. the history of writing Welsh history). You will therefore be taught by those who are actively researching and publishing in the areas which you are studying. Archaeologists take advantage of Bangor’s location in an area which has a wide range of archaeological monuments – prehistoric tombs and stone circles, Roman forts, medieval castles (including the World Heritage Sites of Beaumaris, Caernarfon and Conwy), and the remains of the industrial revolution. The research interests of the archaeology staff include the early prehistory of Britain and Ireland, the Celtic Iron Age in Europe and Britain, the Western Atlantic Seaboard, Wales and Ireland in the early Middle Ages, and the history of archaeology. Several members of staff have field projects in Wales and beyond.

In the ﬁeld of Archaeology there are research strengths in the following areas: • Early prehistory: landscapes and seascapes; death and burial • Later prehistory and Roman: landscapes, settlement and burial; social archaeology; Celtic archaeology • Early medieval: art and sculpture, settlement; social archaeology; Celtic archaeology. In the ﬁeld of Heritage there are research strengths in the following areas: • Heritage management: national and international; public archaeology.

STAFF PROFILE

Staff and facilities With 18 teaching staff, the School has particular strengths in Welsh history and Celtic archaeology. The School has a vibrant research culture. For example, there are fortnightly research seminars in History and Archaeology research papers with leading scholars in various fields from within Bangor and beyond. This is supported by the Institute of Medieval and Early Modern Studies, as well as links with other research groups and series in the University. The library offers excellent resources in these fields, including a comprehensive collection of journals and newspapers, collections from published sources, and a wide range of books which deal with all aspects of Wales’s past. There is also a substantial collection of rare books. The University Archives have the largest archive collection in Wales after the National Library, and are home to a wealth of manuscripts dating from the Middle Ages to the present – varying from the substantial collections of the Mostyn and Penrhyn estates to the papers of modern and contemporary politicians, literary figures and scholars as Kate Roberts, the pioneering socialist David Roberts and the historian John Edward Lloyd.

Overview of the academic areas covered within the School In the ﬁeld of History and Welsh History there are research strengths in the following areas: • Medieval: the Anglo-Norman world; the history of women in the Middle Ages; seals and sigillography; religion; society and culture. • The early modern period: religion, national identity and political rhetoric in England and Wales during the late Stuart era. • Modern and contemporary history: charities; towns; racism and nationalism; the labour movement; history of sport; consumerism; devolution.

Prof Tony Claydon, Professor of Early Modern History, School of History, Welsh History and Archaeology

Professor Tony Claydon’s specialist areas of interest are the politics, religion and national identity of people in late Stuart Britain. He is currently working on a series of related articles on the presentation of politicians as celebrities in the late Stuart press; the construction and understanding of time in newspapers under Queen Anne; sermons as propaganda; and the print debate over foreign policy. “We have a collection of specialists in my period across disciplines. This has, for instance, allowed us to organise what has become the world's leading regular conference on the history and literature of the Restoration period (1660-1689) in Britain and Ireland. This sort of close interdisciplinary working extends outside my period as well: for example, as I wrote my recent article on perceptions of time in the press I had really productive discussions with colleagues from linguistics, English literature, media studies, and psychology.

COURSE LIST: MA/Diploma • Celtic Archaeology • History • Welsh History PhD/MPhil • Archaeology • Heritage • History • Welsh History

TO FIND OUT MORE: Tel: +44 (0) 1248 382144 E-mail: history@bangor.ac.uk www.bangor.ac.uk/history

The internet means I have access to the holdings of all the world's libraries for my key source, print culture; and this is supplemented by the University archive, which has an extraordinarily rich collection of material from north Wales and so allows me, and graduate students, to think about local case studies of national or international phenomena. For instance, with a PhD student, I am looking at the nature of news in a huge series of manuscript newsletters written by a paid scribe in London to inform Welsh gentry families in the late seventeenth century. My skills in analysing print sources, and my experience of thinking about religion and national identities in the late Stuart period; feed into my PhD supervision (for example topics on news values, and English views of Germany in the later seventeenth century); and into MA classes on reading the press, and modules on British identity. The centralised Arts and Humanities Graduate School ensures students have the rich interdisciplinary experience I have enjoyed in my research; and it supplements the more subject-based support provided by the School of History, Welsh History and Archaeology. This includes a strong seminar programme; and a close and inclusive atmosphere which makes MA students feel welcome, and which rapidly integrates PhD students into the academic team.”

BANGOR UNIVERSITY POSTGRADUATE PROSPECTUS 35

39450 BU PG Prospectus 2015_2018 2014-09-10 10:35 AM Page 36

Celtic Archaeology MA COURSE DURATION MA: 1 year full-time, 2 years part-time; Diploma: 30 weeks full-time.

Compulsory Modules: • Theory and Interpretation in Celtic Archaeology This module introduces you to a range of theories, interpretations and key debates relevant to the study of Celtic Archaeology.

ENTRY REQUIREMENTS Good undergraduate degree in a relevant discipline at least 2.ii normally required. Applicants who do not speak English as their • Initiating a Research Project native language must pass the IELTS English test This module explains how to begin a research with a score of 6.0 overall and no element below project and ultimately produce a substantive 5.5. Students who have an overall score of 5.0 or and original research piece. higher on the IELTS can take a summer presessional course in the University’s English • Skills Option module(s) Language Centre for Overseas Students (ELCOS) Chosen from a portfolio oﬀered within the prior to beginning their MA. School of History and Welsh History and Archaeology, the College Graduate School and COURSE DESCRIPTION the University. This programme aims to deepen knowledge of archaeology beyond undergraduate level, with • Dissertation particular emphasis on Celtic archaeology. It The dissertation module gives you the provides the opportunity for you to specialise in a opportunity to complete a piece of scholarly particular academic area, so as to gain a close research of 15,000-20,000 words on a subject understanding of the archaeological debates of your choice and discussed in detail with a around it. The programme acquaints you with chosen supervisor. relevant archaeological theoretical issues and methods of interpretation and the use of Optional Modules: evidence. It also provides you with the necessary One chosen from research skills to produce an original piece of • The Prehistoric Archaeology of the work on a chosen topic. Irish Sea Zone • Celtic Societies in Europe An MA will be awarded on successful completion • The Archaeology of the Early Medieval Celtic of all 180 credits. Churches

CAREER PROSPECTS An MA in Celtic Archaeology is a versatile qualiﬁcation and will give you a detailed understanding of the academic discipline of archaeology and the ability to conduct research at various levels of historical analysis. It will enhance your career opportunities in archaeology, communications, teaching, heritage industries, publishing and research. The transferable skills acquired through this programme are beneﬁcial in a range of other careers, including advertising, journalism, consulting etc. After successful completion of the MA in Celtic Archaeology you may also decide to pursue an academic career in archaeology, by applying for a place to study of a PhD in Celtic Archaeology. For further course details, please see: www.bangor.ac.uk/go/pg/history

A Diploma will be awarded on the successful completion of the ﬁrst 120 credits.

History MA COURSE DURATION MA: 1 year full-time, 2 years part-time; Diploma: 30 weeks full-time.

Compulsory Modules: • Themes and Issues in History: Interpretations, Approaches and Debates This module develops knowledge of relevant ENTRY REQUIREMENTS historical theoretical issues and methods of Good undergraduate degree at least 2.ii normally interpretation of the historical past. required. Applicants who do not speak English as their native language must pass the IELTS • Documents and Sources English test with a score of 6.0 overall and no This module examines the wide range of element below 5.5. Students who have an overall evidence that historians use to reconstruct the score of 5.50 or higher on the IELTS can take a past, and the problems and opportunities of summer pre-sessional course in the University’s interpretation. English Language Centre for Overseas Students One chosen from the following: (ELCOS) prior to beginning their MA. - Documents and Sources in Medieval and Early Modern History COURSE DESCRIPTION - Documents and Sources in Modern History This programme aims to provide a detailed knowledge and understanding of a specific • Initiating a Research Project academic area through rigorous research This module explains how to begin a research training. You will become acquainted with project and ultimately produce a substantive relevant historical theoretical issues and and original research piece. methods of interpretation and the use of evidence. It also provides you with the necessary • Skills Option module(s): research skills to carry out an original piece of Chosen from a portfolio offered within the historical research in the chosen area of study. School of History and Welsh History, the College Graduate School and the University. An MA will be awarded on successful completion of all 180 credits. • Dissertation The dissertation module gives you the A Diploma will be awarded on the successful opportunity to complete a piece of scholarly completion of the first 120 credits (1-4 below). research on a subject of your choice and discussed in detail with a chosen supervisor.

36 BANGOR UNIVERSITY POSTGRADUATE PROSPECTUS

Optional Modules: • Normandy under the Normans, 911-1144 • Women and Power in the High Middle Ages • National Identities in Britain and Ireland 16601800 • An Open Elite? Nineteenth-Century England and Wales • The Development of Labour Politics • Policy and the State, 1945-1987 • War and Protest, 1914-2003 CAREER PROSPECTS An MA in History is a versatile qualiﬁcation and will give you a detailed understanding of the discipline and the ability to conduct research at various levels of historical analysis. It will enhance your career opportunities in a range of professions in the media and communications industries, teaching, heritage and museums, publishing and research. The transferable skills acquired through this programme are beneﬁcial in a range of other careers, including advertising, journalism, consulting etc. After successful completion of the MA in History you may also decide to pursue an academic career in History, by applying for a place to study for a PhD in History. For further course details, please see: www.bangor.ac.uk/go/pg/history

39450 BU PG Prospectus 2015_2018 2014-09-10 10:35 AM Page 37

Welsh History MA COURSE DURATION MA: 1 year full-time, 2 years part-time; Diploma: 30 weeks full-time.

Compulsory Modules: • Themes and Issues in History: This module develops knowledge of relevant historical theoretical issues and methods of interpretation of the historical past.

CAREER PROSPECTS An MA in History is a versatile qualiﬁcation and will give you a detailed understanding of the discipline of Welsh History and the ability to conduct research at various levels of historical analysis. It will enhance your career opportunities in media and communications industries, teaching, publishing and research. Further, the transferable skills acquired through this programme are beneﬁcial in a range of other careers, including advertising, journalism, consulting etc. After successful completion of the MA in Welsh History you may also decide to pursue an academic career in history, by applying for a place to study for a PhD in Welsh History.

ENTRY REQUIREMENTS Good undergraduate degree at least 2.ii normally required. Applicants who do not speak English • Documents and Sources as their native language must pass the IELTS This module examines the wide range of English test with a score of 6.0 overall and no evidence that historians use to reconstruct the element below 5.5. Students who have an overall past, and the problems and opportunities of score of 5.0 or higher on the IELTS can take a interpretation. One module chosen from the summer pre-sessional course in the University’s following: English Language Centre for Overseas Students - Documents and Sources in Medieval and Early (ELCOS) prior to beginning their MA. Modern History - Documents and Sources in Modern History COURSE DESCRIPTION This programme aims to provide you with a • Initiating a Research Project For further course details, please see: detailed knowledge and understanding of a This module explains how to begin a research www.bangor.ac.uk/go/pg/history specific academic area of the history of Wales project and ultimately produce a substantive through rigorous research training. You will and original research piece. become acquainted with relevant historical theoretical issues and methods of interpretation • Skills Option module(s) and the use of evidence. It also provides you with Chosen from a portfolio offered within the the necessary research skills to carry out an School of History and Welsh History, the College original piece of historical research in the chosen Graduate School and the University. area of study. • Dissertation An MA will be awarded on successful completion The dissertation module gives you the of all 180 credits. opportunity to complete a piece of scholarly research on a subject of your choice and A Diploma will be awarded on the successful discussed in detail with a chosen supervisor. completion of the first 120 credits. Option Modules: One chosen from the following: • The Age of Llywelyn ap Iorwerth • State, Society and Culture in Tudor Wales • The development of the Labour Party

History / Welsh History / Archaeology / Heritage PhD/MPhil COURSE DURATION PhD: 3 years full-time; 5 years part-time; MPhil: 2 years full-time; 3 years part-time. ENTRY REQUIREMENTS It is possible to join the PhD after successfully completing a Masters in a related subject (History/Welsh History/Archaeology/Heritage) at Bangor or elsewhere. Applicants who do not speak English as their native language: IELTS score of 7.0 overall (no element below 6.5). Students who have an overall score of 5.5 can take a summer pre-sessional course in the University’s English Language Centre for Overseas Students (ELCOS). COURSE DESCRIPTION Those taking this degree are required to write a substantial and original theis of up to 100,000 worlds for PhD, or 60,000 words for MPhil on a topic relating to History/Welsh History/ Archaeology/Heritage. You will receive research and trans-ferable skills training from the University’s Graduate Training Programme. You may also attend MA modules oﬀered by the School and the College of Arts and Humanities Graduate School. You will receive guidance from two supervisors. CAREER PROSPECTS This is a research programme. You can pursue an academic career in History/Welsh History/ Archaeology/Heritage. The high level analytical and research skills acquired during this degree will increase your employability in areas such as communications, media, museums and heritage industries, teaching, publishing as well as roles in research and development roles more widely.

BANGOR UNIVERSITY POSTGRADUATE PROSPECTUS 37

STAFF PROFILE

39450 BU PG Prospectus 2015_2018 2014-09-10 10:35 AM Page 38

Prof Ineke Mennen, Prof of Bilingualism Head of Speech Research Group, and Director of Graduate Studies “My research focuses on the acquisition of speech by bilingual speakers (encompassing both sequential and consecutive bilinguals) with a view to enhancing understanding of the mutual interaction between two or more phonetic systems and its implications for phonetic and phonological theory. I am particularly interested in understanding along which dimensions intonation and prosody differ across languages or language varieties, and how such differences are generated in speech production, evaluated in speech perception, acquired in first or second language acquisition, and lost or broken down in conditions of attrition or speech impairment. As such, my research interests span different disciplines and provide a welcome balance between theory and practice. My research is experimental in nature and I employ instrumental techniques for data analysis. While I have studied intonation mostly in adult sequential bilinguals, my research has also focused on acquisition of intonation in child speech as well as in disordered speech (e.g. in individuals with Parkinson's Disease, dysarthria, Asperger's Syndrome). Other research interests relate to speech and language therapy provision to bilingual clients and clients from ethnic and linguistic minorities.

38 BANGOR UNIVERSITY POSTGRADUATE PROSPECTUS

I teach on the MA in Bilingualism. My research directly informs the modules I deliver on this MA programme. This means that students are exposed to the very latest research. I also supervise postgraduate and PhD students in areas including bilingual first language acquisition of sound structure, cross-language differences in the prosody of emotion, foreign accent, and phonetic first language attrition. My supervisees will have the opportunity to use and get training in our Bilingual Speech Laboratory, with state of the art recording facilities and speech analysis equipment. The School of Linguistics and English Language is relatively small and very friendly. Staff get to know students as individuals. There is also a strong and vibrant research culture in the School with excellent links with other Schools, Colleges and Research Centres, including Modern Languages, Psychology, Education, and the Bilingualism Research Centre. Postgraduates have a dedicated fully-equipped computer lab, and actively participate in research and social events in the School.”

39450 BU PG Prospectus 2015_2018 2014-09-10 10:35 AM Page 39

School of Linguistics and English Language About the School The School of Linguistics and English Language was established in 1960, making it one of the oldest Linguistics departments in the UK. The School provides a vibrant teaching and research environment, and is unique in the UK and internationally in terms of the areas of teaching and supervision that it offers. Students are taught and supervised by staff, all of whom are active researchers. Many of the staff in the School are recognised as international leaders in their fields of expertise. Postgraduate programmes in the School cover a wide range of theoretical and applied areas. While each MA and MSc course features compulsory training components, there are a wide range of option modules available. Students are supported in their learning by lectures, seminars and smaller tutorial groups, and are assessed in a range of ways, including research reports, and presentations. Learning is supported by a virtual BlackBoard system, which features a library of electronic reading resources that can be downloaded, discussion forums and lecture slideshows and other handouts. MA and MSc students progress through a taught component, comprising a range of compulsory and option modules, before embarking on a significant individual research project. This culminates in a 20,000 word dissertation, and is supported through one-on-one tutorials by a supervisor. PhD study is supported by regular tutorials with a supervisor, as well as a second supervisor who has relevant expertise. You are also supported by a taught research training and development programme, and can also take subject-specific modules from the wide-range of postgraduate modules available through the School’s taught programme. PhD students have an annual allowance of funds available to them to participate in conferences, and are encouraged, as appropriate, to contribute to and participate in the School’s Research Seminar Series. Strengths and expertise The School of Linguistics and English Language has two research priorities, in which it has world-class expertise. These are in the areas of Bilingualism and Cognitive Linguistics. The School’s expertise also extends to the areas of Language Development and Forensic Linguistics.

Research Centre, funded by the UK’s Economic and Social Science Research Council (ESRC). The Bilingualism Research Centre features state-of-the-art research facilities and a phonetics laboratory. The School has a central role in the organisation of the Summer School in Bilingualism at Bangor, which is taught by leading researchers in the field. The School is the only academic unit in the UK to offer an MA, and a PhD in Bilingualism. Moreover, the study of Bilingualism is central to the School’s Linguistics, and English Language undergraduate curriculum. Cognitive Linguistics is the study of language that is informed by the psychological sciences. It provides an interdisciplinary approach which situates language within the study of the mind, culture and communication. Cognitive linguists assume that language reflects general cognitive abilities, and can be deployed to investigate certain aspects of the way the mind is organised. Members of staff in the School conduct research on various aspects of language, mind, text and culture from the perspective of cognitive linguistics. You can also specialise in cognitive linguistics at PhD level. Cognitive linguistics provision is central to the School’s undergraduate curriculum. Staff and facilities Academic staff in the School specialise in aspects of speech and language disorders, first and second language acquisition, bilingualism, forensic linguistics, Welsh linguistics and cognitive linguistics. In addition, the School is proud to have David Crystal as its Honorary Professor, who spends a full day in the School each year giving a series of lecturers on a range of language-related topics. Staff in the School conduct research on a wide range of languages including English, French, Danish, German, Italian, Spanish, Greek, Lombard, Dutch and Welsh. The School houses an extensive collection of books on Linguistics and English Language maintained by the Bangor Linguistics Society (a student run society), and a phonetics laboratory which includes recording, speech analysis and audio facilities. We also offer dedicated office space for PhD students in Bilingualism.

COURSE LIST: MA • Bilingualism • Cognitive Linguistics • Linguistics MSc • Forensic Linguistics • Language Development PhD/MPhil • Bilingualism • Linguistics

TO FIND OUT MORE: Tel: +44 (0) 1248 382264 E-mail: lingadmin@bangor.ac.uk www.bangor.ac.uk/linguistics

Overview of the academic areas covered within the School In terms of taught provision, the School oﬀers an exciting array of taught programmes covering all aspects of bilingualism, human communication, language development, forensic linguistics, linguistics and cognitive linguistics. Introductory modules cover aspects of meaning, grammar, and sound, as well as dealing with research methods. Advanced modules relate to a broad range of topics including grammatical systems, metaphor and thought, aspects of bilingualism, aspects of language acquisition and processing, forensic linguistics, crosslinguistic surveys in domains such as space and time, and many other areas. The School currently oﬀers PhD supervision in a wide range of areas, including language acquisition, forensic linguistics, cognitive linguistics, bilingualism, phonetics, second speech learning, Welsh linguistics, language processing, and speech and language disorders.

Bilingualism is the study of the way speakers of two (or more) languages acquire and use their languages and how these languages are represented in the mind. Bangor University is situated in the UK’s only truly bilingual region (Welsh-English). Members of staﬀ in the School conduct research on all aspects of bi/multilingualism, and adopt a multidisciplinary, empirically-informed perspective. The School spearheaded the successful bid for a £5m Bilingualism BANGOR UNIVERSITY POSTGRADUATE PROSPECTUS 39

39450 BU PG Prospectus 2015_2018 2014-09-10 10:35 AM Page 40

Linguistics MA COURSE DURATION MA: 1 year full-time, 2 years part-time.

Compulsory Modules: • Foundations of Linguistics This module provides an overview of the discipline of language science. In particular, it covers key ideas, and methodologies in the study of meaning, grammar and sound.

ENTRY REQUIREMENTS A 2.ii undergraduate degree normally required. Applicants who do not speak English as their native language must pass the IELTS English test with a score of 6.0 in all four components. • Language, Culture and Power Students who have an overall score of 5.5 on the This is a survey module reviewing facts and IELTS can take a summer pre-sessional course in processes involved in ethno-linguistic diversity, the University’s English Language Centre for in language and development, in Overseas Students (ELCOS) prior to beginning multilingualism, and in sociolinguistics. their MA. • Research Methods in Linguistics COURSE DESCRIPTION This module aims at equipping you with the This course is for students with an necessary foundations and tools to design and undergraduate degree in any subject who want a carry out experimental research within qualification in linguistics. You also write a linguistics. research dissertation on a topic of your own choice. To help you achieve this, the programme Optional Modules: has a compulsory module on Research Training • Language Acquisition which includes training in specific linguistic • Current Issues in Bilingualism research and general social science research. • Text Analysis Those who have a BA in Linguistics may be • Issues in Forensic Linguistics exempt from compulsory modules which they • Grammatical Systems and Change have already covered as part of their first degree, • Metaphor and Thought or may prefer to follow one of the other MA • Welsh Linguistics modules offered by the School. • Language Contact and Bilinguals • L2 Speech Learning • Authorship Attribution • Language, Space and Time • Language and Communication

CAREER PROSPECTS An MA in Linguistics will give you a detailed understanding of how language works and the ability to conduct research at various levels of linguistic analysis. Graduates ﬁnd career opportunities in communications, teaching, publishing, research, and the transferable skills acquired through this programme are beneﬁcial in a range of other careers, including advertising, journalism, consulting etc. After successful completion of the MA in Linguistics, you may also decide to pursue an academic career in Linguistics, by applying for a place on the PhD in Linguistics. For further course details, please see: www.bangor.ac.uk/go/pg/linguistics

Cognitive Linguistics MA COURSE DURATION MA: 1 year full-time, 2 years part-time.

ENTRY REQUIREMENTS A 2.ii undergraduate degree in linguistics or a related area normally required. Applicants who do not speak English as their native language must pass the IELTS English test with a score of • Metaphor and Thought 6.0 in all four components. Students who have an This module represents an introduction to the overall score of 5.5 on the IELTS can take a main theoretical paradigms in cognitive summer pre-sessional course in the University’s linguistics that investigate ﬁgurative language, English Language Centre for Overseas Students particularly metaphor. (ELCOS) prior to beginning their MA. • Research Methods in Linguistics COURSE DESCRIPTION This module aims at equipping you with the The MA in Cognitive Linguistics is primarily necessary foundations and tools to design and aimed at those who wish to undertake a taught carry out experimental research within programme of graduate-level study in order to linguistics. pursue research in some aspect of Cognitive Linguistics. Optional Modules: • Grammatical Systems and Change Cognitive Linguistics is a modern and innovative • Language, Space and Time approach to the study of language and mind, and • Language Acquisition their relationship with embodied experience and • Current Issues in Bilingualism culture. The MA provides a focused and • Text Analysis comprehensive programme of graduate-level • Issues in Forensic Linguistics training in the core subject matter of Cognitive • Welsh Linguistics Linguistics, including the most important • Language Contact and Bilinguals theoretical frameworks. The subject matter • L2 Speech Learning covered includes conceptual structure and • Authorship Attribution organisation, ﬁgurative language, grammar and • Language, Culture and Power mind, the relationship between language, thought • Language and Communication and culture, lexical and cognitive compositional semantics, the issue of embodiment, and contemporary methodology in Cognitive Linguistics.

40 BANGOR UNIVERSITY POSTGRADUATE PROSPECTUS

CAREER PROSPECTS The MA provides a platform for those interested in pursuing an academic career, who can apply for an advanced research degree such as a PhD. Skills acquired through this programme increase your employability in a range of careers, including communications, teaching, publishing, research, journalism, consulting etc. For further course details, please see: www.bangor.ac.uk/go/pg/linguistics

39450 BU PG Prospectus 2015_2018 2014-09-10 10:35 AM Page 41

Forensic Linguistics MSc COURSE DURATION MSc: 1 year full-time, 2 years part-time.

CAREER PROSPECTS Successful completion of the programme will provide you with the requisite skills, ENTRY REQUIREMENTS understanding, and knowledge to work A 2.ii undergraduate degree in linguistics or a effectively in environments where an related area normally required. Applicants who understanding of legal practices is required; and do not speak English as their native language so will increase your employability in forensic must pass the IELTS English test with a score of • Issues in Forensic Linguistics domains as well as in related fields such as the 6.0 in all four components. Students who have an This module deals with a cross-section of areas police force, prison service, emergency call overall score of 5.5 on the IELTS can take a relevant to the study of forensic linguistics, services and security services. summer pre-sessional course in the University’s including (i) the techniques used by linguists to English Language Centre for Overseas Students analyse language evidence to be used in court For further course details, please see: (ELCOS). (specifically ‘forensic’ linguistics) and (ii) the www.bangor.ac.uk/go/pg/linguistics language used by legal professionals and COURSE DESCRIPTION laypersons in court (also known as ‘language The MSc Forensic Linguistics course provides a and the law’). programme of graduate-level study and research training in this area. It consists of a taught • Research Methods in Linguistics component including a combination of core and This module aims at equipping students with optional modules, and a research dissertation of the necessary foundations and tools to design 20,000 words. and carry out experimental research within linguistics. This course aims to develop your competence and critical understanding of the range of Optional Modules: phenomena dealt with in the field of forensic • Text Analysis linguistics (language analysis for authorship • Authorship Attribution attribution; violent crime prevention/detection; • Language Acquisition and an understanding language use in • Current Issues in Bilingualism professional settings). The purpose of the course • Grammatical Systems and Change is to provide you with the necessary theoretical, • Metaphor and Thought analytical and methodological skills to undertake • Welsh Linguistics practical work and/or advanced research in the • Language Contact and Bilinguals field of forensic linguistics. • L2 Speech Learning • Language, Space andTime • Language, Culture and Power • Language and Communication

Bilingualism MA COURSE DURATION MA: 1 year full-time, 2 years part-time.

ENTRY REQUIREMENTS A 2.ii undergraduate degree in Linguistics or a related area normally required. Applicants who do not speak English as their native language must pass the IELTS English test with a score of • Research Methods in Linguistics 6.0 in all four components. Students who have an This module aims at equipping students with overall score of 5.5 on the IELTS can take a the necessary foundations and tools to design summer pre-sessional course in the University’s and carry out experimental research within English Language Centre for Overseas Students linguistics. (ELCOS) prior to beginning their MA. • Bilingual Research & Methods COURSE DESCRIPTION This module exposes you to a range of The MA in Bilingualism provides a programme of theoretical issues addressed and practical graduate-level study in the broad ﬁeld of methods used in the study of bilingualism. bilingualism as well as research training in this area. It consists of a taught component including Optional Modules: a combination of core and optional modules, and • Language Contact and Bilinguals a research dissertation of 20,000 words. • Language Acquisition The course provides a comprehensive, varied • L2 Speech Learning and ﬂexible programme of training in multi• Current Issues in Bilingualism disciplinary topics associated with the study of • Iaith Plant/Child Language bilingualism, including issues relating to • Metaphor and Thought language, education, and cognition. The purpose • Language, Space and Time of the course is to provide you with the necessary • Language, Culture and Power theoretical, analytical and methodological tools • IT and Data Handling and skills to undertake advanced research in an • App. of IT data Handling area of bilingualism. • Statistics for Postgraduate Research • SPSS for Postgraduate Research • Language and Communication • Issues in Forensic Linguistics • Welsh Linguistics • Grammatical Systems and Change

CAREER PROSPECTS Multilingualism is a wide-spread phenomenon in many countries including the UK. An MA in Bilingualism will give you a detailed understanding of issues related to bilingualism and the ability to conduct research in this area. Graduates ﬁnd career opportunities in communications, teaching, speech and language therapy, publishing, research, and the transferable skills acquired through this programme are beneﬁcial in a range of other careers, including advertising, journalism, consulting etc. After successful completion of the MA in Bilingualism, you may also decide to pursue an academic career, by applying for a place on the PhD in Bilingualism. For further course details, please see: www.bangor.ac.uk/go/pg/linguistics

BANGOR UNIVERSITY POSTGRADUATE PROSPECTUS 41

39450 BU PG Prospectus 2015_2018 2014-09-10 10:35 AM Page 42

Language Development MSc COURSE DURATION MSc: 1 year full-time, 2 years part-time.

ENTRY REQUIREMENTS A 2.ii undergraduate degree in linguistics or a related area normally required. Applicants who do not speak English as their native language must pass the IELTS English test with a score of • Language Acquisition 6.0 in all four components. Students who have an The main objective of this module is to overall score of 5.5 on the IELTS can take a introduce you to central questions in language summer pre-sessional course in the University’s acquisition research (e.g. How do we learn the English Language Centre for Overseas Students meaning of words? What are the advantages of (ELCOS). bringing up a child bilingually? Are children better language learners than adults?). The COURSE DESCRIPTION focus will be on first language (L1) acquisition. This new Language Development MSc course is the first master’s programme in Wales to offer • Research Methods in Linguistics courses in typical and atypical language This module aims at equipping you with the development in both monolingual and bilingual necessary foundations and tools to design and (simultaneous and sequential) populations. It carry out experimental research within consists of a taught component including a linguistics. combination of core and optional modules, and a research dissertation of 20,000 words. Optional Modules: • L2 Speech Learning The Language Development MSc course aims to • Current Issues in Bilingualism develop your understanding of monolingual and • Text Analysis bilingual development and acquisition in • Issues in Forensic Linguistics typically-developing children, in adults, as well as • Grammatical Systems & Change children with language impairments. The • Metaphor and Thought purpose of the MSc programme is to provide you • Welsh Linguistics with the necessary theoretical and • Language Contact and Bilinguals methodological skills to undertake research in • Authorship Attribution this field. • Language, Space and Time • Language, Culture and Power • Language and Communication

Linguistics / Bilingualism PhD/MPhil COURSE DURATION PhD: 3 years full-time; 5 years part-time; MPhil: 2 years full-time; 3 years part-time. ENTRY REQUIREMENTS It is possible to join the PhD. programme after successfully completing a Masters in Linguistics or related subject at Bangor or elsewhere. Applicants who do not speak English as their native language must pass the IELTS English test with a score of 6.0 in all four components. Students who have an overall score of 5.5 on the IELTS can take a summer pre-sessional course in the University’s English Language Centre for Overseas Students (ELCOS). COURSE DESCRIPTION Linguistics PhD/MPhil: This is a research programme. You will receive research and transferable skills training from the University’s Graduate Training Programme. You may also attend modules in Linguistics offered by the School. You conduct research in an area of Linguistics, under the guidance of two supervisors, and submit a thesis at the end of the programme. CAREER PROSPECTS This is a research degree, preparing you for an Bilingualism PhD/MPhil: academic career in Linguistics / Bilingualism or This is a degree scheme which is especially for other work requiring highly qualified designed for those wishing to write their thesis individuals in related areas. The high level on the topic of bilingualism. You will receive analytical and research skills acquired during research and transferable skills training from the this degree will increase your employability in University’s Graduate Training Programme. You areas such as communications, teaching, may also attend modules on Linguistics and publishing, research etc. Bilingualism offered by the School. You will receive guidance from two supervisors. For further course details, please see: www.bangor.ac.uk/go/pg/linguistics

42 BANGOR UNIVERSITY POSTGRADUATE PROSPECTUS

CAREER PROSPECTS Successful completion of the programme will provide you with the requisite skills, understanding, and knowledge to work eﬀectively and increase your employability in organisations working with bilingual populations and second language learners with and without language impairment, such as speech and language therapists and teachers. For further course details, please see: www.bangor.ac.uk/go/pg/linguistics

39450 BU PG Prospectus 2015_2018 2014-09-10 10:35 AM Page 43

School of Modern Languages About the School The teaching of Modern Languages has featured in the University curriculum at Bangor ever since then the University College of North Wales welcomed its first students in 1884. Our work is based on this solid and continuous tradition and we embrace and promote the best of what technology has to offer the language learner. We offer one of the UK's broadest and most flexible ranges of degree courses in French, German, Italian, and Spanish - plus many combinations with other subjects. We also provide modules which allow all students within the University the opportunity to develop their language skills throughout their time at Bangor. The School of Modern Languages offers postgraduate research supervision in a variety of areas and languages (French, German, Italian, Spanish, Galician, Mandarin, Japanese, Catalan and Translation Studies) in a friendly and vibrant environment. The School also hosts the Centre for Galician Studies in Wales and has close links with organisations all over the UK, Europe and the Far East. We hold a regular Research Forum with a variety of guest speakers as well as regular events aimed specifically at fostering the research skills of our postgraduate students. Teaching opportunities are also available for postgraduate students interested in further developing their profile. There is a lively and expanding postgraduate community within the School, and students work in a close-knit and supportive environment.

Staff and facilities Our staff are internationally recognised researchers in their chosen fields, demonstrating a wide range of expertise. Collaborative projects across the different language areas provide for a vibrant and cross-disciplinary research culture which feeds directly into postgraduate teaching. Students interact regularly with staff through small group teaching and/or one-to-one tutorials, and students will normally have two project supervisors. Your supervisory team will encourage you to develop your research profile and career prospects by attending training events, presenting at international conferences and publishing your research. At Bangor we boast excellent research support facilities including dedicated work stations and a broad range of media and library resources. You will be guaranteed full access to computing facilities, library provision and all departmental resources – including our extensive film library, subscriptions to foreign-language media, specialist language software and the Centre for Galician Studies library.

COURSE LIST: MA • European Languages and Cultures • Translation Studies PhD/MPhil • French and Francophone Studies • German Studies • Italian Studies • Hispanic Studies • Translation Studies PhD/MPhil by Practice • Translation Studies

TO FIND OUT MORE: Tel: +44 (0) 1248 382130 E-mail: modlangs@bangor.ac.uk www.bangor.ac.uk/ml

Overview of the academic areas covered within the School The School currently oﬀers both taught postgraduate degrees and research-based postgraduate degrees covering a broad range of specialist and interdisciplinary areas. These include Translation Studies, Iberian Studies (including Galician, and Catalan), German Studies (with speciﬁc expertise on the post-1945 period), Italian Studies, Film Studies, Francophone Studies (both the 19thcentury and contemporary period) and Comparative Literature.

STAFF PROFILE

Expertise in cross-disciplinary areas is particularly strong in the ﬁelds of memory studies, minority languages and cultures, cultural transfer, and translation and sociopolitical change. Dr Gillian Jein, Lecturer in French, School of Modern Languages “I studied French and History at Trinity College, Dublin gaining a double ﬁrst-class honours degree before moving to Paris in 2001 to complete a DEA at Université Sorbonne Nouvelle, Paris III. In Paris I taught English at the Institut du Monde Anglophone, while residing and taking classes at the École normale supérieure. After a semester at NYU, and some years working in London I returned to Trinity College, Dublin to research a doctoral thesis on urban travel writing, supervised by Professor David Scott. My PhD, funded by the prestigious Ussher Fellowship, was awarded in 2008 and is to be published as a monograph entitled Urban Crossings: French Travel Writing in London and New York, 1851-2000 by Anthem Travel Press. I am an editor of The Irish Journal of French Studies and co-founder of the Irish Centre for Transnational Studies. After periods teaching at the University of Stirling and the University of Limerick, I came to Bangor in 2012. My research interests can be gathered under the rubric of ‘urban cultures’. I am interested in exploring the relationships between space, ideology and practices of urban life in France. The empirical slant of my research focuses on cultural practices and urban intervention, and is informed by theoretical strands of space, power and identity. Exploring the ethics of urban social space and its governance is a key theme informing this work. My current project is concerned with the dynamics of transnational identities in France and investigates how textual/visual practices of deceleration and interruption inform understandings of the self and belonging in the global city. The project is funded by the British Academy and the Modern Humanities Research Association”. BANGOR UNIVERSITY POSTGRADUATE PROSPECTUS 43

39450 BU PG Prospectus 2015_2018 2014-09-10 10:35 AM Page 44

European Languages and Cultures MA COURSE DURATION MA: 1 year full-time; 2 years part-time.

interdisciplinary environment. Having completed compulsory modules in Research Methods and Modes of Critical Theory, you choose a language speciﬁc module from those on oﬀer in any given year (in French, German, Italian or Spanish). These modules form the necessary preparation for the dissertation on a topic of personal interest. Assessment is by essays, seminar papers, presentations and a dissertation.

ENTRY REQUIREMENTS Applicants should have an appropriate first degree in a relevant subject with a minimum of second class honours, or a qualification or experience which is acceptable as equivalent. Non-native speakers of English will normally be required to have IELTS 6.5 or above, with no element below 6.0. Applications are always Compulsory Modules: considered individually, and applicants are • Research Methods judged on their individual merits; work This module develops skills in academic experience and other factors are also considered. writing, presenting, and conducting Students who have an overall score of 5.5 on the bibliographic research in different language IELTS can take a summer pre-sessional course in areas. the University’s English Language Centre for Overseas Students (ELCOS). • Modes of Critical Theory This module takes a thematic approach to COURSE DESCRIPTION critical modes of analysis and critical theories. The MA in European Languages and Cultures is Up to six themes are studied in a given designed to appeal to a wide range of suitable academic year, including (but not limited to): graduates. This course aims to enable you to theories of language, conflict, memory, the city, acquire an in-depth knowledge and aesthetics, national identity and gender. understanding of European cultures and identities within their socio-historical contexts • Critical Theory in Practice and from a comparative perspective by analysing Building on Modes of Critical Theory, this theories, films, literary works and historical module incorporates student-led case studies sources in the original language. The course based on themes studied in semester 1, and provides a varied, cross-cultural and flexible requires some target-language academic programme which allows students to specialise writing to complement your analytical work. in specific aspects of European culture, such as literature, political and social history, critical Target Language Optional Modules: theory, culture, national identity, cinema, memory • (Non)conformity in the GDR studies and the visual arts. • Sites of Memory in Eastern Germany • Pathologies of Memory The School offers research supervision in a • Noirs de France: Immigration, Integration variety of areas and languages and provides and Identity research opportunities in a personal and vibrant • From Surrealism to Street Art: Art, Politics and

Everyday Life in France • Visions of the City in French Cinema • Translating Spain • 20th Century Spanish Women’s Writing • Italian Romanticism • 20th Century Italian Short Fiction Dissertation 20,000 words on a topic relevant to your chosen language specialism(s). This may be a comparative project across more than one language area. RESEARCH LINKS/LINKS WITH INDUSTRY The School of Modern Languages actively promotes engagement with local companies via the Knowledge Economy Skills Scholarships (KESS) and the Access to Masters (ATM) schemes. During the last few years, several MA students have benefited from these scholarships. CAREER PROSPECTS This course is designed for those wishing to enhance their employment prospects or to pursue research interests relating to a European context, with a view to a specific career in a number of areas, such as national and international businesses, education, translating, cultural management or the media. The course will equip you with a wide range of transferable skills, including skills in research and in written, oral and intercultural communication. It also provides the foundation for students who intend to continue their research at Bangor in the shape of a PhD qualification. For further course details, please see: www.bangor.ac.uk/go/pg/modernlanguages

Translation Studies MA COURSE DURATION MA: 1 year full-time; 2 years part-time.

French, Galician, German, Modern Greek, Italian, Spanish, Catalan and Welsh.

ENTRY REQUIREMENTS Entry to the MA in Translation Studies programme requires a good honours degree or equivalent in a relevant subject. However, applicants are judged on their individual merits and age; work experience and other factors are also considered. Non-native speakers of English will normally be required to have IELTS 6.5 or above, with no element below 6.0. Students who have an overall score of 5.5 on the IELTS can take a summer pre-sessional course in the University’s English Language Centre for Overseas Students (ELCOS).

The School works closely with the University’s Canolfan Bedwyr (Centre for Translation Services) and School of Welsh to provide Welshrelated modules. Compulsory Modules: • Research Methods This module develops knowledge of intermediate and advanced research methods at postgraduate level.

RESEARCH LINKS/LINKS WITH INDUSTRY The programme is closely linked with the local translation industry. Canolfan Bedwyr provides opportunities for site visits and work placements. The ATM (Access to Masters) scheme allows you to apply your translation skills in a ‘real-life’ setting through work placements in public and private sectors that use translation services. Further links with the translation industry are also being developed outside Wales.

CAREER PROSPECTS You will be prepared for a range of careers as translators within public organisations, such as • The Making of a Discipline the European Commission, as well as in private This module equips you with the necessary commercial companies and translation agencies. skills, knowledge and understanding to pursue You may also consider careers in other areas that COURSE DESCRIPTION independent research in the area of Translation require advanced language and communication The MA in Translation Studies not only provides Studies or other related disciplines. skills such as marketing, public relations, excellent professional training, but also offers the technical writing or language teaching. If you opportunity to study in a bilingual country which Optional Modules (students choose one Content wish to further your study subsequently, there is hosts an intensive and stimulating research Module and one Practice Module): an opportunity to continue in Bangor with either a culture in Translation Studies. This course aims practice-led or a research-based doctorate in to prepare you both for professional careers in Content Modules: Translation Studies. the translation industry and advanced academic • Translation in Practice research. • Translation and Creative Writing For further course details, please see: • Translation in Wales www.bangor.ac.uk/go/pg/modernlanguages The first semester provides theoretical and methodological underpinning through modules in Practice Modules: Translation Studies and Research Methods. The • Translation Portfolio practice-led modules in the second semester • Cymraeg/English translation provide you with an opportunity to investigate • English/Chinese legal translation various aspects of the profession and explore areas of personal interest. The dissertation project consolidates your learning either through research or translation practice. The School of Modern Languages can offer supervision in a variety of research specialisms and languages; the languages available include: Chinese, English,

44 BANGOR UNIVERSITY POSTGRADUATE PROSPECTUS

39450 BU PG Prospectus 2015_2018 2014-09-10 10:35 AM Page 45

French and Francophone Studies / German Studies / Hispanic Studies / Italian Studies / Translation Studies PhD/MPhil COURSE DURATION PhD: 3-4 years full-time; 6 years part-time; MPhil: 2 years full-time, 3 years part-time.

The School is able to oﬀer supervision of postgraduate degrees by research in the following areas:

ENTRY REQUIREMENTS Applicants should normally have a ﬁrst or upper second class honours undergraduate degree and a Masters degree in a relevant subject. Nonnative speakers of English will normally be required to have IELTS 6.5 or above, with no element below 6.0. Applications are, however, always considered individually, and applicants are also judged on their individual merits, work experience and other relevant qualiﬁcations. Students who have an overall score of 5.5 on the IELTS can take a summer pre-sessional course in the University’s English Language Centre for Overseas Students (ELCOS).

French and Francophone Studies: • French ﬁlm • Multiculturalism, immigration and national identity in modern France • Memory studies • Travel writing • Urban cultures, graﬃti and street art

COURSE DESCRIPTION The School of Modern Languages offers research-based postgraduate degrees covering a broad range of specialist and interdisciplinary areas within French, German, Hispanic, Italian, East Asian Studies and Translation Studies. The close working relationship between these areas creates high levels of interdisciplinarity and extensive cross-cultural research, which is displayed through research expertise in literary studies, film studies, visual culture, historical studies and translation. Co-supervision of comparative topics within the School can also be offered. Research specialism within the fields of translation studies and minority cultures and languages also provide for a research culture which is particularly suited to the bilingual community of north Wales.

German Studies: • German Romanticism • German/Spanish literary relations (19th C) • East German history, society and politics • Representations of memory in contemporary Germany • Representations of ageing, illness and death • Translation and ideology Italian Studies: • 20th and 21st Century Italian ﬁction • Memory and history in contemporary ﬁction • Representations of space and the image of the city Hispanic Studies: • The Spanish 19th century • 20th and 21st century peninsular literature • Spanish comics • Iberian travel writing • Hispanic women writers • Galician Studies • Nations and Nationalisms in Spain • Spanish cinema • Catalan Studies • Hispanic Visual Cultures

Translation Studies (PhD/MPhil by Research or by Practice) A PhD or MPhil by Research in Translation Studies can include: a wide range of subjects on translation theory, history and practice, covering a range of European languages (German, French, Spanish, Italian) and Chinese. Due to the expertise of academic staff in the College of Arts and Humanities, certain topics would be particularly relevant. These include: translation and minority languages (with expertise in the Welsh, Galician and Catalan contexts available); translation and gender; sociological approaches to translation practice and contexts, or translation and the creative industries (journalism, film, media and creative writing). A PhD or MPhil by Practice in Translation Studies would combine a completed translation of a critical/creative piece of work plus a dissertation, including 1) a critical analysis/commentary of the translation and its context and 2) critical piece engaging with Translation Studies which stands as a contribution to the field. CAREER PROSPECTS Successful completion of a PhD or MPhil enhances employment prospects and opens up opportunities in a broad range of areas, including higher education, translating, cultural policy and management, the media, journalism, the publishing sector, national and international businesses. For further course details, please see: www.bangor.ac.uk/go/pg/modernlanguages

You will normally be assigned two supervisors and are guaranteed full access to computing facilities (including translation memory software), library provision, and all School resources including the ﬁlm library. Bangor has a long tradition of excellent student support. There is a lively and expanding postgraduate community within the School, and students work in a close-knit and supportive environment.

BANGOR UNIVERSITY POSTGRADUATE PROSPECTUS 45

39450 BU PG Prospectus 2015_2018 2014-09-10 10:35 AM Page 46

STAFF PROFILE

Dr Christian Thomas Leitmeir, Senior Lecturer in Music, Director of Research in Music Dr Leitmeir’s specialist research interests are in medieval music theory, Renaissance polyphony, palaeography, source studies, editorial philology and music of the long 19th century. “Research specialisms in the School of Music cover a wide range from medieval chant right up to performance and composition with live electronics. As an expert in early music and editing, I am particularly thrilled to work in Bangor, which has a strong commitment to these two areas. In fact, we are one of the very few institutions where medieval, Renaissance and Baroque music as well as critical philology are not represented by a lone scholar, but by a host of specialists. The size of the University is very conducive to co-operation, both within the School and across different disciplines. Since I came to Bangor I have particularly enjoyed the congenial and open-minded atmosphere, where colleagues and postgraduate students form part of a genuine scholarly community. In my experience, being far from the madding crowd of busy cities really helps to focus the mind. Although Bangor forms a great base for intensive research, we are equally committed to take our research out into the world. Both staff and students regularly present their work at international conferences and we hold international conferences ourselves every year, often organised by or with our postgraduate students. At postgraduate level, research feeds directly back into teaching and supervision: for instance, I have a special interest in early music from Continental Europe, which still has undiscovered riches to offer. In order to share this passion, I have organised regular block seminars in Prague, where our students experience a different musical culture and meet colleagues from the Czech Republic, Poland, France and Germany.”

46 BANGOR UNIVERSITY POSTGRADUATE PROSPECTUS

39450 BU PG Prospectus 2015_2018 2014-09-10 10:35 AM Page 47

School of Music About the School Founded in 1921, Bangor University’s School of Music has a long tradition of academic and creative excellence in a very wide range of musical activity. Our compact postgraduate community is ideally sized to foster discourse and collaboration in a convivial atmosphere. Staff and postgraduates meet weekly for research seminars and social activities. We have strong links with employers, and our graduates have gone on to secure jobs in a wide range of prestigious organisations including broadcasters, orchestras and opera companies, schools, publishers and record companies. Others enjoy successful careers as freelance performers and composers, and a significant number of former research students have gone on to academic positions in Bangor and elsewhere. Academic activity within the School covers the full gamut of musical scholarship and creativity, and is complemented by a vibrant programme of extracurricular performance (choirs, orchestras, early music and new music ensembles, an opera group, etc.). In collaboration with Bangor’s new arts and innovation centre Pontio, the School curates an extensive and varied concert series, including visits from worldclass performers such as Freddy Kempf, Catrin Finch, Willard White, the Allegri String Quartet and the BBC National Orchestra of Wales. We also host an annual New Music Festival. The School of Music is unique in Wales for having a genuinely bilingual atmosphere. Most of our postgraduate courses can be studied through the medium of Welsh or English. Strengths and expertise Our musicological expertise covers over 1000 years of music history, from plainchant to punk rock. We have particular specialisms in early music, music since 1900, minimalism, and the music of Wales. We also have strengths in ethnomusicology and popular musicology. Composition is interpreted in its widest sense, encompassing contemporary ‘classical’, electroacoustic, popular, and applied composition (including film music). The performance of music is central to the life of the School; particular strengths lie in vocal performance, new music for instruments, and music for instruments with live electronics. We also teach and research applications of music, such as Music in Health and Well-Being, and Arts Administration. The School hosts two research centres: the Centre for Research in Early Music (CREaM) and the Centre for Advanced Welsh Musical Studies (CAWMS).

Staff and facilities Our 17 members of academic staff are all active as researchers, and teach directly from their own expertise as musicologists, composers and performers. The last Research Assessment Exercise graded 70% of our published research as internationally excellent or world-leading, confirming our status as one of the world’s leading university music schools. In addition, several members of staff have received awards recognising their excellence as teachers and communicators.

COURSE LIST:

The School of Music is situated at the heart of Bangor University, with ample practice facilities and cosy social spaces within our own fine Victorian building, and studios, concert halls, cafés and library resources next door in the University’s Main Building. The 200-seat Powis Hall, the 450-seat Theatr Bryn Terfel, and the 520-seat Prichard-Jones Hall are equipped with concert grand pianos (two Steinway Ds and a Bösendorfer Imperial). We also have two organs and a collection of harpsichords. There are specialised practice rooms for percussionists and pianists, in addition to twelve individual practice rooms, and various larger rehearsal spaces. Our library holds over 3000 CDs, 20,000 scores, and a large collection of books on music; we also have electronic subscriptions to major journals and to online resources such as Grove Online and the Naxos Music Library. Specialist collections include the Archive of Welsh Traditional Music, the Welsh Pop Archive, and the unique Peter Crossley-Holland Collection of world music instruments. We have two fully-equipped 8-channel studios for the composition of electroacoustic music, in addition to a recording studio and a multi-user teaching studio. Postgraduate students have their own dedicated work room, and full office facilities are provided for research students.

PhD/MPhil • Music

Overview of the academic areas covered within the School Our taught Masters programmes are among the most flexible offered by any UK university. For those wishing to follow a broad musical curriculum, our MA in Music (Standard Track) allows study of as many as three separate subject areas from a large selection spanning musicology, composition, performance and applied studies. The MA in Music (Special Track) is for students who wish to focus on a specific area of musicological inquiry, and there are also specialised MA courses in Early Music and 20th/21st-Century Music. Our MMus Performance course is ideal for those embarking on careers in the sphere of professional performance, while the MMus in Composition / Electroacoustic Composition / Sonic Arts enables students to develop creativity and technical skills in their chosen field of compositional activity.

MA • Music • Early Music • 20th and 21st Century Music MMus • Composition/Electroacoustic Composition/Sonic Arts • Performance MA/MMus by Research • Music

TO FIND OUT MORE: Tel: +44 (0) 1248 382181 E-mail: music@bangor.ac.uk www.bangor.ac.uk/music

Teaching on all of these programmes is delivered through a blend of group seminars and workshops, one-to-one supervision, and directed private study. Work placements are available on some programmes, and a Bangor Masters degree makes an ideal preparation for doctoral study. Research degrees (MA by Research, MPhil and PhD) may be undertaken by musicologists, composers or performers, leading to the submission of a thesis, a portfolio of compositions, and/or a series of performances. Research students take responsibility for their own research and creative practice, but are supported in their endeavours by means of fortnightly individual supervision, in addition to research training at both School and institutional levels. As with our Masters courses, it is sometimes possible to undertake a work placement as part of the programme. Opportunities for research students to contribute to undergraduate teaching are often available, with full training provided by the University.

BANGOR UNIVERSITY POSTGRADUATE PROSPECTUS 47

39450 BU PG Prospectus 2015_2018 2014-09-10 10:35 AM Page 48

Music (Standard Track) MA COURSE DURATION MA: 1 year full-time; 2-5 years part-time. ENTRY REQUIREMENTS A first degree at 2.ii standard or higher (or equivalent) is required. Candidates with a 2.ii degree must however achieve a 2.i in a substantial project in their chosen area of study (e.g. dissertation, composition portfolio, recital). Performers will have to audition or, alternatively, submit a recent unedited recorded video performance, featuring contrasting repertoire (25-30 minutes). Musicologists may be asked to submit a piece of written work of 3,000-5,000 words that can either be 1) a discussion of a selected topic from music history or ethnomusicology, or 2) an analysis of a selected composition. The essay must be academic in style, and must include footnotes and a full bibliography. Composers may be asked to submit representative samples of their work (two or three pieces). These can be notated scores, or audio recordings, or both, and may be sent on paper, as a data DVD, or via a weblink such as Dropbox.

The course is divided into two parts: two semesters of taught study (Part I) and a substantial independent piece of work in the main area, produced over the summer (Part II). Part I is centred on the Principal Subject module in your main area of interest. It lays the foundations of a Part II project in the same area. The following subjects are available: Historical Musicology, Editorial Musicology, Ethnomusicology, Celtic Traditional Music, Music in Wales, Music and the Christian Church, Composition, Electroacoustic Composition, Composing Film Music, Studying Film Music, Solo Performance, Early Music, 20th/21st Century Music.

Subject-speciﬁc teaching is provided through a combination of individual tuition and seminar session in small groups. Within each of the chosen subject areas, you can identify your own projects, for which you will receive expert supervision. RESEARCH LINKS/LINKS WITH INDUSTRY Through the Access to Masters scheme (ATM), several students pursued their MA studies in combination with a project for a company.

CAREER PROSPECTS On this course, you will develop and refine knowledge in your chosen subject areas at an advanced level, and be equipped to undertake specialist research in an informed and systematic manner by providing a range of The Preparing for the Part II Project module acts appropriate methodologies and skills, whilst also as a bridge between Parts I and II. attaining a high standard of scholarship and a mature intellectual understanding of your An additional 40 credits will be gained through discipline. All these are key skills which prepare submissions in other fields through either one you for the demands of highly qualified jobs (both Major Open Submission or two Minor Open within and outside music). Submissions. You can select from a number of subject areas, including, but not restricted to, In a highly competitive job market, a those listed above. Additional offerings include postgraduate qualification often makes the modules in Arts Administration, Music in the crucial difference. Previous students have Community, Ethnomusicology and Analysis. pursued further careers as professional For non-native English or Welsh speakers, composers, performers, editors, scholars, arts proficiency in English – IELTS overall result of Depending on your main area of specialism, you administrators, librarians, instrumental/vocal 6.0 with no individual score lower than 5.5. will attend a core module in Current tutors and school teachers. Musicology – Concepts of Composition or COURSE DESCRIPTION Performace and History. During these modules For further course details, please see: The MA in Music combines specialisation in one you will become familiar with up-to-date www.bangor.ac.uk/go/pg/music area (including Historical Musicology, Editorial research and creative techniques and Musicology, Composition, Solo Performance) with methodologies in the selected disciplines. further training in up to three complimentary areas.

Music (Special Track) MA COURSE DURATION MA: 1 year full-time; 2-5 years part-time. ENTRY REQUIREMENTS A first degree at 2.ii standard or higher (or equivalent) is required. Candidates with a 2.ii degree must however achieve a 2.i in a substantial project in their chosen area of study (e.g. a dissertation). You may be asked to submit a piece of written work of 3,000-5,000 words that can either be 1) a discussion of a selected topic from music history or ethnomusicology, or 2) an analysis of a selected composition. This piece of work must be academic in style, and must include footnotes and a full bibliography. For non-native English or Welsh speakers, proficiency in English – IELTS overall result of 6.0 with no individual score lower than 5.5.

Part I is centred on the Principal Subject module in your area of specialism. Another aspect of the same area will be explored in the Independent Special Study. The Preparing for the Part II Project module acts as a bridge between Parts I and II. Depending on the main area of specialism, you will attend the core module – Current Musicology. During this module you will become familiar with up-to-date research and creative techniques and methodologies in the selected disciplines. Subject-speciﬁc teaching is provided through a combination of individual tuition and seminar sessions in small groups. Within each of the chosen subject areas, you can identify your own projects, for which you will receive expert supervision.

CAREER PROSPECTS On this course, you will develop and reﬁne knowledge in your chosen subject area at an advanced level, and be equipped to undertake specialist research in an informed and systematic manner by providing a range of appropriate methodologies and skills, whilst also attaining a high standard of scholarship and a mature intellectual understanding of your discipline. All these are key skills which prepare you for the demands of highly qualiﬁed jobs (both within and outside music). Owing to its narrow focus, the Special Track course will generate a high level of expertise which makes you particularly marketable in your area of specialism.

In the ever more competitive job market, a postgraduate qualiﬁcation often makes the crucial diﬀerence. Previous students have COURSE DESCRIPTION RESEARCH LINKS/LINKS WITH INDUSTRY pursued further careers as performers, editors, The MA in Music (Special Track) allows you to The School of Music has traditionally been strong scholars, arts administrators, librarians, specialise in any one of the following areas: in establishing collaborative links. Through the instrumental/vocal tutors and school teachers. Historical Musicology, Editorial Musicology, Music Access to Masters scheme (ATM), several in the Christian Church, Celtic Traditional Music, students pursued their MA studies in For further course details, please see: Music in Wales, Studying Film Music. combination with a project for a company. www.bangor.ac.uk/go/pg/music All the training will be centred on your main area, aided by a broader look at the methodological foundation of the discipline as a whole (through the core module in musicology). The programme is divided into two parts: two semesters of taught study (Part I) and a substantial independent piece of work in the main area, produced over the summer (Part II).

48 BANGOR UNIVERSITY POSTGRADUATE PROSPECTUS

39450 BU PG Prospectus 2015_2018 2014-09-10 10:35 AM Page 49

Composition / Electroacoustic Composition / Sonic Arts (Special Track) MMus COURSE DURATION MMus: 1 year full-time, 2-5 years part-time. ENTRY REQUIREMENTS A first degree at 2.ii standard or higher (or equivalent) is required. Candidates with a 2.ii degree must however achieve a 2.i in a substantial project in their chosen area of study (e.g. composition portfolio). You may be asked to submit representative samples of their work (two or three pieces). These can be notated scores, or audio recordings, or both, and may be sent on paper, as a data DVD, or via a weblink such as Dropbox. For non-native English or Welsh speakers, proficiency in English – IELTS overall result of 6.0 with no individual score lower than 5.5.

COURSE DESCRIPTION The MMus in Composition / Electroacoustic Composition / Sonic Arts (Special Track) allows you to specialise in any one area of composition, including Electroacoustic Composition, Sonic Art and Composing for Film.

All the training will be centred on your main area, aided by a broader look at compositional techniques and approaches as a whole (through the core module in Composition).

The programme is divided into two parts: two semesters of taught study (Part I) and a substantial independent piece of work in the main area, produced over the summer (Part II). Part I is centred on the Principal Subject module in a chosen area of composition. Another aspect of the same area or a diﬀerent approach to composition will be explored in the Independent Special Study module. The Preparing for the Part II project module acts as a bridge between Parts I and II. Additionally, you will attend the core module Concepts of Composition. During this module you will become familiar with up-to-date research and creative techniques for composers. Subject-speciﬁc teaching is provided through a combination of individual tuition and seminar session in small groups. Within each of the chosen subject areas, you can identify your own projects, for which you will receive expert supervision.

All these are key skills which prepare you for the demands of highly qualified jobs (both within and outside music). Owing to its narrow focus, the Special Track course will generate a high level of expertise which makes you particularly marketable in your area of specialism. On the ever more competitive job market, a postgraduate qualification often makes the crucial difference. Previous students have pursued further careers as professional composers, performers, arts administrators, librarians, instrumental/vocal tutors and school teachers. For further course details, please see: www.bangor.ac.uk/go/pg/music

Performance MMus COURSE DURATION MMusc: 1 year full-time; 2-5 years part-time. ENTRY REQUIREMENTS A first degree at 2.ii standard or higher (or equivalent) is required. Candidates with a 2.ii degree must however achieve a 2.i in a substantial project in their chosen area of study (e.g. an extended recital). Applicants will have to audition or, alternatively, submit a recent unedited recorded video performance, featuring contrasting repertoire (25-30 minutes). A sample of academic work may also be requested. For non-native English or Welsh speakers, proficiency in English – IELTS overall result of 6.0 with no individual score lower than 5.5.

COURSE DESCRIPTION The MMus in Performance allows you to specialise in Solo Performance with further training in up to three complimentary areas. The programme is divided into two parts: two semesters of taught study (Part I) and a substantial recital prepared over the summer (Part II).

CAREER PROSPECTS On this course you will develop and refine knowledge in your chosen subject areas at an Part I is centred on the Principal Subject module advanced level, and be equipped to undertake in Solo Performance. It lays the foundations of a specialist research in an informed and Part II project, which will result in a major recital. systematic manner by providing a range of The Preparing for the Part II project module acts appropriate methodologies and skills, whilst also as a bridge between Parts I and II. attaining a high standard of scholarship and a mature intellectual understanding of their An additional 40 credits will be gained through discipline. submissions in other performance-related fields through either one Major Open Submission or All these are key skills which prepare you for the two Minor Open Submissions. These are demands of highly qualified jobs (both within and available in the following subject areas: outside music). The special focus on • Historical Performance Practice performance-related skills and activities will • Historical Musicology make you particularly employable as • Techniques of Vocal/Instrumental Teaching professional performers and vocal/instrumental • Performing with Live Electronics. tutors or prepare for a doctoral programme in performance. The core module Performance and History will acquaint you with up-to-date acacemic studies On the ever more competitive job market, a and research relating to preformance. postgraduate qualification often makes the crucial difference. Previous students have You will receive 42 hours of vocal/instrumental pursued further careers as professional tuition. In other subject areas, teaching is performers, editors, scholars, arts provided through a combination of individual administrators, librarians, instrumental/vocal tuition and seminar session in small groups. tutors and school teachers. Within each of the chosen subject areas, you can identify your own projects, for which you will For further course details, please see: receive expert supervision. www.bangor.ac.uk/go/pg/music

BANGOR UNIVERSITY POSTGRADUATE PROSPECTUS 49

39450 BU PG Prospectus 2015_2018 2014-09-10 10:35 AM Page 50

The School of Music has a stimulating postgraduate culture, with a lively community of taught and research postgraduates studying a wide range of areas.

“Notwithstanding its picturesque location, nestled between the Snowdonia mountains and the Menai Strait, there are many excellent academic reasons for studying at Bangor University. The School of Music has a very high staffstudent ratio, and this allows students to work closely with their tutors and other members of staff. The staff act as mentors not just in your chosen academic discipline (musicology, composition or performance) but also in the realms of teaching and professional development, which offers opportunities to develop from a postgraduate student into an academic peer. Personally I’m grateful for the diversity of specialisms in the staff, as well as the friendship and generosity that everyone shows me in Bangor.” TWILA BAKKER, PhD in Musicology

50 BANGOR UNIVERSITY POSTGRADUATE PROSPECTUS

39450 BU PG Prospectus 2015_2018 2014-09-10 10:35 AM Page 51

Early Music (Standard Track) MA COURSE DURATION MA: 1 year full-time; 2-5 years part-time. ENTRY REQUIREMENTS A first degree at 2.ii standard or higher (or equivalent) is required. Candidates with a 2.ii degree must however achieve a 2.i in a substantial project in their chosen area of study (e.g. dissertation or editing project). Applicants may be asked to submit a piece of written work of 3,000-5,000 words on a topic from early music history, or an edition of early music. The essay must be academic in style, and must include footnotes and a full bibliography. The edition must follow modern rules for critical editions and include source descriptions and critical apparatus.

The programme is divided into two parts: two semesters of taught study (Part I) and a substantial independent piece of work in the main area, produced over the summer (Part II). Part I is centred on the Principal Subject module in Early Music. It lays the foundations of a Part II project in the same area. The Preparing for the Part II project module acts as a bridge between Parts I and II.

An additional 40 credits will be gained through submissions in other fields through either one Major Open Submission or two Minor Open Submissions. You can select from a number of subject areas related to early music, including: • Historical Musicology • Editorial Musicology For non-native English or Welsh speakers, • Music and the Christian Church proficiency in English – IELTS overall result of 6.0 • Analysis with no individual score lower than 5.5 or the interdisciplinary modules: COURSE DESCRIPTION • Medieval Latin The MA in Early Music (Standard Track) allows • Advanced Latin for Postgraduates you to specialise in music of the medieval and • Manuscript and Printed Books early modern periods. Typically this area will be explored through a combination of different Subject-specific teaching is provided through a perspectives, such as historical musicology and combination of individual tuition and seminar editorial musicology. This will be supported by session in small groups. Within each of the broader look at the methodological foundation of chosen subject areas, you can identify your own the discipline as a whole through the core projects, for which you will receive expert module in musicology – Current Musicology. supervision.

RESEARCH LINKS/LINKS WITH INDUSTRY The School of Music has traditionally been strong in establishing collaborative links. Through the Access to Masters scheme (ATM), several students pursued their MA studies in combination with a project for a company. CAREER PROSPECTS On this course, you will develop and refine knowledge in your chosen subject areas at an advanced level, and be equipped to undertake specialist research in an informed and systematic manner by providing a range of appropriate methodologies and skills, whilst also attaining a high standard of scholarship and a mature intellectual understanding of their discipline. All these are key skills which prepare you for the demands of highly qualified jobs (both within and outside music). The special focus on music before 1700 will make you particularly employable in any profession related to early music. On the ever more competitive job market, a postgraduate qualification often makes the crucial difference. Previous students have pursued further careers as editors, scholars, arts administrators, librarians, instrumental/vocal tutors and school teachers. For further course details, please see: www.bangor.ac.uk/go/pg/music

20th and 21st Century Music (Standard Track) MA COURSE DURATION MA: 1 year full-time; 2-5 years part-time. ENTRY REQUIREMENTS A first degree at 2.ii standard or higher (or equivalent) is required. Candidates with a 2.ii degree must however achieve a 2.i in a substantial project in their chosen area of study (e.g. dissertation, composition portfolio, recital). Performers will have to audition or submit a recent unedited recorded video performance, featuring contrasting repertoire (25-30 minutes). Musicologists may be asked to submit a piece of written work of 3,000-5,000 words that can either be 1) a discussion of a selected topic from music history or ethnomusicology, or 2) an analysis of a selected composition. The essay must be academic in style, and must include footnotes and a full bibliography. Composers may be asked to submit representative samples of their work (two or three pieces). These can be notated scores, or audio recordings, or both, and may be sent on paper, as a data DVD, or via a weblink such as Dropbox.

COURSE DESCRIPTION The MA in 20th/21st Century Music (Standard Track) allows you to specialise in music after 1900. Typically this area will be approached through a combination of diﬀerent angles, such as historical musicology, analysis, performance and composition. This will be aided by a broader look at techniques, methodologies and approaches through the core module in Musicology Composition. The programme is divided into two parts: two semesters of taught study (Part I) and a substantial independent piece of work in the main area, produced over the summer (Part II). Part I is centred on the Principal Subject module in 20th/21st Century Music. It lays the foundations of a Part II project in the same area. The Preparing for the Part II project module acts as a bridge between Parts I and II.

Teaching is provided through a combination of individual tuition and seminar sessions in small groups. Within each of the chosen subject areas, you can identify your own projects, for which you will receive expert supervision. RESEARCH LINKS/LINKS WITH INDUSTRY Through the Access to Masters scheme (ATM), several students pursued their MA studies in combination with a project for a company. CAREER PROSPECTS On this course, you will develop and refine knowledge in your chosen subject areas at an advanced level, and be equipped to undertake specialist research in an informed and systematic manner by providing a range of appropriate methodologies and skills, whilst also attaining a high standard of scholarship and a mature intellectual understanding of their discipline. All these are key skills which prepare you for the demands of highly qualified jobs (both within and outside music). The special focus on music after 1900 will make you particularly employable in any profession related to contemporary music. In the ever more competitive job market, a postgraduate qualification often makes the crucial difference. Previous students have pursued further careers as professional composers, performers, editors, scholars, arts administrators, librarians, instrumental/vocal tutors and school teachers. For further course details, please see: www.bangor.ac.uk/go/pg/music

BANGOR UNIVERSITY POSTGRADUATE PROSPECTUS 51

39450 BU PG Prospectus 2015_2018 2014-09-10 10:35 AM Page 52

Music MA/MMus by Research COURSE DURATION Registration period (excluding write-up year) – MA/MMus: 1 year full-time; 2 years part-time.

COURSE DESCRIPTION Areas of Study Research degrees can be gained in the areas of musicology (MA by Research), performance and ENTRY REQUIREMENTS composition (both MMus by Research). A first degree at British Bachelor’s standard – Normally the research project will be limited to normally first-class degree or equivalent. any one area. Performers, however, will follow, in Applicants will be expected to prepare a proposal addition to their practical studies (60%), an of a project, appropriate to the duration and agreed programme of original research into academic level of the course. Performers will historical study, performance practice, editing or have to audition or, alternatively, submit a recent analysis, focusing on aspects related or central to unedited recorded video performance, featuring repertoire performed (40%). contrasting repertoire (30-40 minutes). Musicologists and composers may be asked to Structure of Programme submit samples of their work. For non-native As a research programme, the course does not English or Welsh speakers, proficiency in have a modular outline. Each student receives English – IELTS overall result of 6.5 with no close supervision on an individual and original individual score lower than 6.0. project, which has the potential to make a new and substantial contribution to the field. Each Postgraduate degrees by research are suitable student has a supervisory committee, led by the for candidates who already have some main supervisor, assisted by two other staff experience at postgraduate level (normally members with relevant expertise. evinced through a Master’s degree). Applicants who can demonstrate outstanding ability in their You will have regular meetings with your chosen field of study at undergraduate level can supervisor and are entitled to consult other be admitted to the MA/MMus by Research. members of your committee as appropriate. You are also encouraged to present reports on your Apart from these formal requirements, work in seminars and colloquia during your applicants will be accepted on the strength of period of study. their research proposal. Final assessment will be through viva voce examination through an appointed panel. The panel consists of one internal examiner from within the University/School (not identical with members of the supervisory committee), one external examiner, who is an expert in the field, and a chair.

Submission: • Historical Musicology / Editorial Musicology: Thesis of 50,000 words or equivalent • Composition: Portfolio of compositions, consisting of around 60 minutes of music (depending on complexity); accompanying essay of 5,000-7,000 words on style, technique and aesthetic which contextualises the submitted portfolio • Performance: (i) one full-length public recital (40-50 mins) and one CD (40-50 mins) with partial overlap of repertoire (60%) (ii) dissertation on a related area (15,000 words) or a composition of comparable length for the instrument in question (40%) RESEARCH LINKS/LINKS WITH INDUSTRY The School of Music has traditionally been strong in establishing collaborative links, often combined with full funding (through schemes such as KESS and KTP). CAREER PROSPECTS A research postgraduate degree is the highest attainable study qualification. During the programme you will make a significant and original contribution to your subject area and become a leading expert in this field. The learning process, although supervised, is independent, self-motivated and self-directed. Together with your subject-specific expertise, this makes graduates qualified for managerial positions or for an academic career. For further course details, please see: www.bangor.ac.uk/go/pg/music

Music PhD/MPhil COURSE DURATION Registration period (excluding write-up year) – PhD: 3 years full-time, 6 years part-time; MPhil: 2 years full-time; 4 years part-time.

Structure of Programme As a research programme, the course does not have a modular outline. Each student receives close supervision on an individual and original project, which has the potential to make a new ENTRY REQUIREMENTS and substantial contribution to the field. A degree at British Master’s standard: normally Each student has a supervisory committee, led merit degree or equivalent. Applicants will be by the main supervisor, assisted by two other expected to prepare a proposal of a project, staff members with relevant expertise. appropriate to the duration and academic level of Research students have regular meetings with the course. Performers will have to audition or, their supervisor and are entitled to consult other alternatively, submit a recent unedited recorded members of their committee as appropriate. video performance, featuring contrasting They are also encouraged to present reports on repertoire (45-60 minutes). Musicologists and their work in seminars and colloquia during each composers will be asked to submit samples of of their period of study. Final assessment will be their work. For non-native English or Welsh through viva voce examination through an speakers, proficiency in English – IELTS overall appointed panel. The panel consists of one result of 6.5 with no individual score lower than internal examiner from within the 6.0. University/School (not identical with members of the supervisory committee), one external Postgraduate degrees by research are suitable examiner, who is an expert in the field, and a for candidates who already have some chair. experience at postgraduate level (normally evinced through a Master’s degree). Apart from Submission – PhD these formal requirements, candidates will be • Historical Musicology / Editorial Musicology: accepted on the strength of their research Thesis of 100,000 words or equivalent proposal. • Composition: Portfolio of compositions, consisting of around 120 minutes of music COURSE DESCRIPTION (depending on complexity); accompanying Areas of Study essay of 7,000-10,000 words on style, Research degrees can be gained in the areas of technique and aesthetic which contextualises musicology, performance and composition. the submitted portfolio Normally the research project will be limited to • Performance: any one area. Performers, however, will follow, in (i) two full-length public recitals (40-50 mins) addition to their practical studies (60%), an and one CD (40-50 mins), featuring different agreed programme of original research into repertoire (60%) historical study, performance practice, editing or (ii) dissertation on a related area (40,000 words) analysis, focusing on aspects related or central to or a composition of comparable length for the repertoire performed (40%). instrument in question (40%).

52 BANGOR UNIVERSITY POSTGRADUATE PROSPECTUS

Submission – MPhil • Historical Musicology / Editorial Musicology: Thesis of 60,000 words or equivalent • Composition: Portfolio of compositions, consisting of around 70 minutes of music (depending on complexity); accompanying essay of 5,000-7,000 words on style, technique and aesthetic which contextualises the submitted portfolio • Performance: (i) one full-length public recital (40-50 mins) and one CD (40-50 mins), featuring different repertoire (60%) (ii) dissertation on a related area (20,000 words) or a composition of comparable length for the instrument in question (40%). RESEARCH LINKS/LINKS WITH INDUSTRY The School of Music has traditionally been strong in establishing collaborative links, often combined with full funding (through schemes such as KESS, and KTP). CAREER PROSPECTS A research postgraduate degree is the highest attainable study qualification. During the programme students will make a significant and original contribution to their subject area and become a leading expert in this field. The learning process, although supervised, is independent, self-motivated and self-directed. Together with their subject-specific expertise, this makes candidates qualified for managerial positions or for an academic career. For further course details, please see: www.bangor.ac.uk/go/pg/music

39450 BU PG Prospectus 2015_2018 2014-09-10 10:35 AM Page 53

School of Philosophy and Religion About the School The School of Philosophy and Religion offers the students the opportunity to study some of the most important and challenging ideas in philosophy that have shaped western and eastern cultures and to consider how they interrelate with religious thought. The School has developed out of a longstanding tradition in these subject areas in the University since the nineteenth century, and it provides a friendly, supportive, and informal atmosphere that will enable students to cultivate the skills of debate and independent thinking. Students will benefit from personal attention with one-to-one supervision. The School offers postgraduate research programmes with the option of face-to-face supervision at Bangor, or by distance learning. The distance learning programmes are particularly attractive for international students who wish to pursue research with us but wish to remain in their home countries, and for those home students who find regular travel to Bangor unfeasible. These programmes make use of Bangor’s online facilities, and close contact with a personal supervisor throughout the duration of the programme (via e-mail, Skype, and/or telephone).

Overview of the academic areas covered within the School The expertise of the staff lies in the general areas of the Western and Eastern philosophy, Eastern religions, Islamic, Christian and Jewish thought, Old Testament, philosophy of religion, ethics, social theory, psychoanalysis and Jungian studies. All of the postgraduate programmes require the student to write an extended piece of research on a subject of their choice in consultation with their supervisor. Applicants will need to submit a research proposal that outlines their intended topic of study. We are more than happy to discuss your interests prior to you writing your proposal. Staff and facilities Staff in the School are internationally recognised experts in their chosen field. They serve as editors or on the editorial boards of leading international journals, and are deeply committed to passing on their knowledge in an interesting and lively way in order to enhance the learning experience.

COURSE LIST: MRes by Distance Learning • Philosophy and Religion MARes by Distance Learning • Philosophy and Religion MTh by Distance Learning • Theology PhD/MPhil • Philosophy and Religion

TO FIND OUT MORE: Tel: +44 (0) 1248 382079 E-mail: spar@bangor.ac.uk www.bangor.ac.uk/spar

Since both religion (under various guises) and philosophy have been taught at Bangor for well over a hundred years, the library is particularly well stocked with books and periodicals which match the School’s research interests.

BANGOR UNIVERSITY POSTGRADUATE PROSPECTUS 53

39450 BU PG Prospectus 2015_2018 2014-09-10 10:35 AM Page 54

Philosophy and Religion MRes by Distance Learning COURSE DURATION 1 year full-time; 3 years part-time. ENTRY REQUIREMENTS Bachelor’s degree at 2.i or higher is normally required. Possession of a suitable professional qualiﬁcation or other relevant experience may also be accepted.

COURSE DESCRIPTION

This research degree is tailor-made to suit your interests in consultation with the areas of expertise offered by the School. It comprises two parts. Part One: Students will write two essays, each of 5000 words (30 credits each) from a choice of the topics listed below. The essay titles and content will be decided in consultation with your supervisor. Students will have full support from a designated supervisor (via e-mail, telephone, Skype, or any other means that is mutually convenient).

If your native language is not English, you must provide satisfactory evidence that you have an adequate knowledge and understanding of written and spoken English. IELTS: overall score of 7.0 (with no component below 6.5) or equivalent, usually acceptable. It may be necessary for applicants falling short of this minimum standard to attend an intensive English Topic List: Language course before registering for the • Eastern Philosophy and Religion (Hinduism, academic programme. Such a course is available Sikhism, Shinto and Confucianism at Bangor. • Islamic Philosophy and ethics • Religious fundamentalism • Political Philosophy (including social theory such as Marx, Weber, Rawls etc.) • Globalization (including, multiculturalism) • The Enlightenment • Democratic theory • The Philosophy of Nietzsche • Psychoanalytic Studies • Jungian Theory • Old Testament • Ethical Theory • Applied Ethics • Religious Experience

Part Two: This comprises a supervised dissertation of 40,000 words (120 credits). The subject of the dissertation will be decided by you in consultation with your supervisor. It is usually expected that the subject will relate to the

broad range of topics listed in Part 1. CAREER PROSPECTS Those wishing to teach religion or philosophy in schools or in institutions of Higher Education will find the programme especially beneficial. Many who pursue the programme will enter various careers in the public or private sector. It is anticipated that international students from non-Western cultures will find this degree helpful in working in international organisations and businesses. Some students may wish to proceed to doctoral study and pursue an academic career in a university setting. For further course details, please see: www.bangor.ac.uk/go/pg/philosophyandreligion

For 2015 entry, topics in philosophy of religion will be added, please see our website, or contact us for details.

Philosophy and Religion PhD/MPhil COURSE DURATION PhD: 3 years full-time; 5 years part-time; MPhil: 2 years full-time; 3 years part-time. ENTRY REQUIREMENTS To be accepted to an MPhil degree you will be expected to have gained a 2.i degree or above in Philosophy and/or Religion or in a related subject. To be accepted for a PhD degree students will either have attained a Masters degree in Philosophy and/or Religion or in a related subject or have an exceptional undergraduate degree and demonstrate an ability to complete an independent and original research project. If your native language is not English, you must provide satisfactory evidence that you have an adequate knowledge and understanding of written and spoken English. IELTS: overall score of 7.0 (with no component below 6.5) or equivalent, usually acceptable. Students falling short of this on the IELTS can take a sumer preseasonal course in the University’s English Language Centre for Overseas Students (ELCOS) prior to beginning their courses.

COURSE DESCRIPTION The aim of the MPhil degree is that you will have gained substantial specialist knowledge of a particular discipline and/or historical period, as a basis for more detailed research. You will have developed independent research skills appropriate for an academic post or a career in advanced research and written a substantial thesis, which may be extended subsequently into a thesis at doctoral level. The aim of the PhD degree is to assist you to complete a major piece of research in the area of Philosophy and/or Religion, and to demonstrate suitable academic attainments for appointment to a University-level teaching or research post. At the end of the programme, you will possess a good general knowledge of the particular ﬁeld of learning within which the subject of the thesis falls and will have made a signiﬁcant, original and substantial contribution to research. For both degree programmes, you will receive research and transferable skills training from the University’s Graduate Training Programme. You will be assigned a supervisor, whose duty it is to advise concerning the choice of subjects and on any questions relating to your academic work. Teaching is by means of individual tuition, according to the circumstances and the discretion of the supervisor. Arrangements vary from case to case. Advice can be given also by email or telephone but you will need to meet your supervisor on a regular basis in order to discuss your progress.

54 BANGOR UNIVERSITY POSTGRADUATE PROSPECTUS

CAREER PROSPECTS This is a research degree, preparing you for an academic career in religion or philosophy or for other work requiring highly qualiﬁed individuals in related areas. The high level analytical and research skills acquired during this degree will increase your employability in areas such as communications, teaching, publishing, research. For further course details, please see: www.bangor.ac.uk/go/pg/philosophyandreligion

39450 BU PG Prospectus 2015_2018 2014-09-10 10:35 AM Page 55

Philosophy and Religion MARes by Distance Learning COURSE DURATION 1 year full-time; 3 years part-time. ENTRY REQUIREMENTS Bachelor’s degree at 2.i or higher is normally required. Possession of a suitable professional qualification or other relevant experience may also be accepted. If your native language is not English, you must provide satisfactory evidence that you have an adequate knowledge and understanding of written and spoken English. IELTS: overall score of 7.0 (with no component below 6.5) or equivalent, usually acceptable. It may be necessary for applicants falling short of this minimum standard to attend an intensive English Language course before registering for the academic programme. Such a course is available at Bangor.

COURSE DESCRIPTION This research degree is tailor-made to suit your interests in consultation with the areas of expertise offered by the School. It comprises one dissertation of 50,000 words (180 credits). It is similar to the MRes programme, but is for students who wish to focus on one topic of research in consultation with their supervisor.

CAREER PROSPECTS Those wishing to teach religion or philosophy in schools or in institutions of Higher Education will find the programme especially beneficial. Many who pursue the programme will enter various careers in the public or private sector. It is anticipated that international students from nonWestern cultures will find this degree helpful in working in international organisations and businesses. Some students may wish to proceed to doctoral study and pursue an academic career in a university setting.

You will be assigned a supervisor, who will advise you throughout your studies. Teaching is by means of regular individual supervision, which can include face-to-face supervision at Bangor, supervision via Skype and telephone, and For further course details, please see: e-mail. www.bangor.ac.uk/go/pg/ philosophyandreligion

Theology MTh by Distance Learning COURSE DURATION 1 year full-time; 3 years part-time. ENTRY REQUIREMENTS Bachelor’s degree at 2.i or higher is normally required. Possession of a suitable professional qualification or other relevant experience may also be accepted. If your native language is not English, you must provide satisfactory evidence that you have an adequate knowledge and understanding of written and spoken English. IELTS: overall score of 7.0 (with no component below 6.5) or equivalent, usually acceptable. It may be necessary for applicants falling short of this minimum standard to attend an intensive English Language course before registering for the academic programme. Such a course is available at Bangor.

COURSE DESCRIPTION This programme is aimed at candidates who are already in, or wish to proceed to, the Christian ministry, and those who are intending to teach, or are currently teaching, religious studies in schools. The Theology MTh will enable students to discuss various theological views fairly and critically, and will nurture the characteristics of a creative theologian. It will also instil the necessary skills of an independent researcher and will provide students with a wide range of transferable skills. The programme is in two parts.

CAREER PROSPECTS Those wishing to go into the Christian ministry, Christian pastoral care, or teaching theology in schools or institutions of Higher Education will find this programme especially beneficial.

Part One: Students will write four essays, each of 5,000 words (worth 30 credits each). The essay titles and content will be decided in consultation with your supervisor and will be based on one or more of the following areas: • Old Testament • New Testament • Biblical Studies • Biblical Theology • Church History • Pastoral Theology • Pastoral Care • Early Church • History of Biblical Exegesis • Reception History of the Bible Part Two: Students will write a supervised dissertation of 20,000 words (worth 60 credits); the subject of the dissertation will be decided by you in consultation with your supervisor.

BANGOR UNIVERSITY POSTGRADUATE PROSPECTUS 55

STAFF PROFILE

39450 BU PG Prospectus 2015_2018 2014-09-10 10:35 AM Page 56

Dr Aled Llion, Lecturer, School of Welsh “For some time, I taught Welsh and Celtic Studies at overseas universities, including Lublin (Poland), Gaillimh (Ireland) and Harvard (USA). During the last two years I have had the privilege of being a Lecturer at the School of Welsh, Bangor University, and it is an extremely pleasant experience to begin to see Wales from within once again! I tend to work on the border between Literature and Philosophy (the area of my undergraduate degree). Hitherto, my main research work has focused on Welsh Medieval poetry and poetic art, making considerable use of concepts borrowed by European thinkers in the traditions of using Philosophy of Language and Literary Theory. It is very pleasant to live and work in an atmosphere as Welsh as that of Bangor University and the surrounds. This was my main reason for returning to Wales – in order to speak Welsh (English can be spoken anywhere!). It is this, together with the School’s intellectual richness and the commitment of its lecturers, that makes the experience of teaching – and learning – here so noteworthy; it is not surprising that students derive such pleasure from the experience of being here. The languages of the world form part of the immeasurable treasury of our heritage – the cultural ambience is of equal importance to the natural environment, and vice versa – and it is a privilege and pleasure to contribute to international discussions which can place Welsh language and literature at the centre. Having said so, sometimes, people are somewhat overawed when they remember who their colleagues are; all the other lecturers in the School of Welsh are authors and academics of an international standing, not to mention their vast contributions to the culture of Wales. An eﬀort, therefore, needs to be made!“

56 BANGOR UNIVERSITY POSTGRADUATE PROSPECTUS

39450 BU PG Prospectus 2015_2018 2014-09-10 10:35 AM Page 57

School of Welsh About the School The survival of Welsh in the modern era – both as a living language and a dynamic literary medium – is a truly remarkable story. As Wales gradually evolves into a vibrant bilingual nation, there has never been a more exciting time to study the language and its literature at postgraduate level. Bangor University is located in an area where 65% of the population is able to speak Welsh. No other university offers such a unique linguistic environment to study a living Celtic language and its literature. Bangor University’s contribution to the growth of modern Welsh scholarship and learning has been immense. It was here that John Morris-Jones compiled his monumental Welsh Grammar (1913), which forms the basis of the modern literary language. Between the 1930s and 1960s, it was at Bangor that Ifor Williams produced the first modern scholarly editions of the earliest Welsh poetry. Bangor also had an instrumental role in the production of three of the outstanding reference works of contemporary Wales, The Welsh Academy English-Welsh Dictionary (1995), Dictionary of the Place-Names of Wales (2007), and the Welsh Academy Encyclopaedia of Wales (2008). Staff and facilities Our staff are leading international experts in their respective fields of study. Their publications encompass both the medieval period and the literature of Wales in more recent times. The School has expertise in all of the major fields of Welsh literature, and among our staff are some of contemporary Wales’s leading writers and creative practitioners. Students can take advantage of the excellent IT Services on offer at the University together with an extensive collection of books and journals in our Library and Archives Service. Many of the journals are available online in full-text format and we also have databases, videos and CDs; micro material; a wonderful manuscript collection and a web-based catalogue to access e-books, e-journals, past exam papers, subject guides and other learning resources.

Overview of the academic areas covered within the School If you have experience of studying literature or comparative literature at undergraduate level, we would be interested in hearing from you. Wales has an unbroken literary tradition which extends back to such medieval highlights as the tales of the Mabinogion (which include the Welsh Arthurian legends), the heroic poetry of the Book of Aneirin and the love and nature poetry of Dafydd ap Gwilym. During the twentieth century, writers such as T. Gwynn Jones, Saunders Lewis, Kate Roberts and T.H. Parry-Williams gave a dynamic new direction to the literature of Wales. You may also have an interest in the social history of minority languages and the manner of their survival in the modern world. How did Welsh survive the industrial revolution? What was the fate of the Welsh diaspora in north America? What is the connection between Welsh and the growth of nationalism in modern Wales? If you are intrigued by such questions, a postgraduate course at the School of Welsh at Bangor is for you!

COURSE LIST: MA/Diploma • Cymraeg/Welsh • Y Celtiaid/The Celts • Literatures of Wales* PhD/MPhil • Cymraeg/Welsh

* Please see page 33 for course details

TO FIND OUT MORE: Tel: +44 (0) 1248 382240 E-mail: cymraeg@bangor.ac.uk www.bangor.ac.uk/ysgolygymraeg

The great merit of our MA courses is their ﬂexibility and the fact that it allows a free choice of topics within the broad parameters of the discipline. If, for example, you are primarily interested in medieval literature, your course will be structured accordingly. If, on the other hand, you wish to undertake a study of modern Welsh literature, or, if you wish to pursue the social history of Welsh, our MA course will be able to accommodate your academic interests. Research for the degree of MPhil or PhD may be conducted in the main ﬁelds of Welsh literature from the medieval period to the present, e.g. early court poetry, Welsh saga poetry, the tales of the Mabinogion, Dafydd ap Gwilym, the poets of the Welsh gentry, literature and society 1500-1900, the Welsh diaspora and Welsh culture of north America, the modern Welsh novel, modern Welsh poetry, and modern Welsh theatre. For those students who have no knowledge of Welsh prior to enrolment, the School works in close partnership with the University’s Welsh for Adults Unit, which has a host of courses and opportunities for students wishing to learn the language. Your language tuition needs will be assessed as part of the application process. Before embarking on your postgraduate course, you may well decide to take advantage of the Welsh for Adults Unit’s intensive three-week sumer school for beginners.

BANGOR UNIVERSITY POSTGRADUATE PROSPECTUS 57

39450 BU PG Prospectus 2015_2018 2014-09-10 10:35 AM Page 58

Y Celtiaid/The Celts MA COURSE DURATION MA: 1 year full-time; up to 3 years part-time; Diploma: 30 weeks full-time.

This new MA gives you the opportunity and ability to sift fact and ﬁction, and to answer in detail the question: ‘Who were – and who are – the Celts?’

ENTRY REQUIREMENTS Entry to the MA programme requires a good undergraduate degree in a relevant subject, e.g. literature, history, folklore, mythology, comparative literature, archaeology, anthropology from a university, or a similar qualiﬁcation from any other institution. Alternatively, possession of a suitable professional qualiﬁcation and relevant practical experience may also be accepted. In general, however, applicants are judged on their individual merits and age; work experience and other factors are also considered.

anthropology, art, music, literature, politics), we explore what is considered as ‘Celtic’ material in these various ﬁelds, and discuss the main arguments which have been forwarded in the course of deﬁning the term.

Do ‘The Celts’ actually exist, and if so, who and what are they? How can we discuss such questions, with what methodology and with what • Celtic Institutions evidence? How has the word itself (‘Celt’, ‘Keltoi’, This module explores the main aspects of etc.) been used through the centuries, from medieval ‘Celtic’ literacy, in poetry and prose, Classical historians to modern pop musicians? across a range of genres from the prose What has been – and what is – the political and legends and the court poetry to the laws and ideological relevance of the ‘Celt’? the vitae (Lives of Saints and rulers). The main focus is on Wales and Ireland, but the other The course is taught by experts in the Schools of Celtic languages will also be considered. Welsh; History, Welsh History and Archaeology; Equally, we consider the continuation of these and Music, studying literature, archaeology, early traditions into the modern period and up religion, mythology, antiquarianism, art history to the current day. and music, to explore the culture and identity of IELTS overall score of 6.0 (no single component the Celtic peoples from the hillforts of prehistory Optional Modules: below 5.5) or equivalent is usually acceptable for to the devolved and independent parliaments of A wide range of optional modules are available those who wish to study this course through the today. for students wishing to pursue specific research medium of English. It may be necessary for interests (e.g. History, Archaeology, Music, applicants falling short of this minimum standard Compulsory Modules: Medieval Literature, contemporary aspects). to attend an intensive English Language course • The Celt: Sources of Evidence before registering for the academic programme. This module introduces the main sources for CAREER PROSPECTS Such a course is available at Bangor. information about the ‘Celts’, based on two You will acquire a wide range of transferrable different definitions of ‘Celtic’: (i) the use of the skills, enabling you to proceed to a variety of COURSE DESCRIPTION word itself (‘Celt’, ‘Keltoi’, etc.) in identification or career paths, including all those normally ‘Celtic’ brings to mind the intricacies of Bronze self-identification; (ii) the prime sources associated with graduates in the Humanities. Age jewellery, the massive structures of concerning attitudes to the history and identity Those who wish to pursue academic interests Stonehenge and Newgrange, the legends of of the ‘Celts’ (defined as those peoples who will gain a sound basis to enable you to continue Arthur and Cú Chulainn and the Bardic craft of speak or spoke a Celtic language in the Modern to PhD level. medieval kings and princes. But ‘Celtic’ is also period). about the Renaissance, the Enlightenment and For further course details, please see: the New World; Romanticism, Revolution and the • The Creation of the Modern Celt www.bangor.ac.uk/go/pg/welsh struggles for survival in modernity of entire This module explores how the concept of the national identities. ‘Celt’ and the ‘Celtic’ was used and manipulated in the Modern period. Considering a wide range of discourses (e.g. linguistics, archaeology,

Cymraeg/Welsh MA COURSE DURATION 1 year full-time; 2 years part-time.

COURSE DESCRIPTION The MA in Welsh is a long-established and successful course which combines a practical ENTRY REQUIREMENTS grounding in postgraduate and research training Our MA course is suitable for students who with the opportunity to concentrate on a specific already have fluency in Welsh and for those who and chosen field of study. Whilst maintaining its aim to acquire – in a rigorous academic context – own distinct identity, the MA course is also a a greater understanding of the language, its means of laying foundations for a subsequent literature and of Welsh culture in general. For PhD project in terms of training provision and those who have no previous experience of thematic context. studying Welsh at university level, a good first degree, preferably in the humanities or social You study for an MA in Welsh by the traditional sciences, is required. However, applicants will be route of examination and dissertation. The first judged on their individual merits and all relevant part (examination) comprises three course experiences will be considered. essays (3 x 4,000-6,000 words) which should display a solid grasp of the broad outlines of your chosen field of study; the second part is the dissertation (20,000 words) comprising original research based in part on primary material. During Semester 1 you will also follow an induction course on research methodology in the field of Welsh.

nature, linking the study of Welsh with areas such as English literature, medieval studies, European languages, language revitalization, Arthurian studies, history, religion, philosophy, gender studies, political theory and nationalism. Course Modules: • Individual Study I • Individual Study II • Individual Study III • Dissertation CAREER PROSPECTS Wales is a bilingual country in which English and Welsh are legally recognised as oﬃcial languages. In ﬁelds as varied as education, language planning, media and journalism, the civil service, the heritage industry, public relations and marketing there is a great demand for graduates who have competence in Welsh and an ability to work in a bilingual environment.

For further course details, please see: The great strength of our MA course is its www.bangor.ac.uk/go/pg/welsh ﬂexibility and the fact that it allows a free choice of topics within the broad parameters of the discipline. If you are primarily interested in medieval Welsh literature – the Gododdin, the Mabinogion, or Dafydd ap Gwilym, for example – your course will be structured and tailored accordingly and you will have a dedicated course supervisor who will be an expert in your chosen ﬁeld of study. If, on the other hand, you wish to undertake a study of modern Welsh literature and culture, or aspects relating to the language itself, we will be able to accommodate your academic interests. We also warmly welcome students who wish to embark on a structured Welsh MA course which may be comparative in

58 BANGOR UNIVERSITY POSTGRADUATE PROSPECTUS

39450 BU PG Prospectus 2015_2018 2014-09-10 10:35 AM Page 59

Cymraeg/ Welsh PhD/MPhil COURSE DURATION PhD: 3 years full-time; 5 to 6 years part-time; MPhil: 2 years full-time; 4-5 years part-time. ENTRY REQUIREMENTS Entry to our PhD/MPhil programme requires a good ďŹ rst degree and an MA in Welsh, Celtic Studies, or a closely related area.

COURSE DESCRIPTION An MPhil allows for two full academic years of research, leading to a dissertation of up to 30,000 words. You are free to pursue your own course of research, decided upon in consultation with the School and your academic advisor.

The School of Welsh runs an exchange programme with Harvard University's Department of Celtic Languages and Literatures, enabling students from each institution to spend a semester studying at the other. Harvard is recognised as one of the leading educational establishments in the world, and in addition to world-leading research facilities in most areas of the Humanities, its libraries contain outstanding collections of Welsh and Welsh-language materials.

Our PhD programmes are usually 3 years of fulltime study with a 60,000 to 100,000 word thesis being submitted at the end of the third year. Recent PhDs have been completed in ďŹ elds covering the whole range of Welsh-language literature, from the Middle Ages (e.g. court poetry, For further course details, please see: medieval Welsh proverbs, bardic lore and www.bangor.ac.uk/go/pg/welsh education) to the work of living contemporary authors, and on areas as diverse as popular culture, the history of Welsh and language planning, feminist studies and the editing of eighteenth-century Interludes. Welsh-language research is of course not limited to the geography of Great Britain, and Bangor has produced much important research into the literature and culture of the Welsh-speaking Americas.

BANGOR UNIVERSITY POSTGRADUATE PROSPECTUS 59

39450 BU PG Prospectus 2015_2018 2014-09-10 10:35 AM Page 60

60 BANGOR UNIVERSITY POSTGRADUATE PROSPECTUS

39450 BU PG Prospectus 2015_2018 2014-09-10 10:35 AM Page 61

School of Lifelong Learning About the School The School of Lifelong Learning provides high quality and ﬂexible part-time educational opportunities across north Wales. Our parttime postgraduate courses are aimed both at working people looking for professional and career development, and at those wishing to study at a higher level for more general personal challenge and development. The School is involved in a wide range of action research and projects related to various aspects of lifelong learning. Our key areas of interest are: • Community issues • Learning for change • Womens’ issues • Global citizenship • Older learners Our action research and projects complement our teaching activity, enabling us to develop new learning materials and to extend our activities to reach a wider range of learners across north Wales. We work in partnership with other organisations across the region and have developed links with a variety of European partners. The School is developing a series of postgraduate professional practice courses and Summer Schools for 2015/16. Please contact us for more details.

Overview of the academic areas covered within the School: The Community Development Programme benefits from the expertise of academic and practitioner tutors brought together to ensure a learning-for-change process that has critical reflection, research based and applied practice at its core. A key element of this course is the accredited study visit programme to communities and regions across Europe and the seminar series delivered by critical experts in the field. The Women’s Studies Programme is unique in Wales and has been taught at Bangor since 1994. Within the programme, participants gain critical insight into the issues facing women in contemporary Wales and benefit from the expertise of academic tutors and keynote speakers. The knowledge and understanding gained has enabled women to progress their work and lives successfully. Dissertation texts also add to the depth and wealth of information on women’s lives in Wales. The MA Fine Art Programme builds on the successful undergraduate programme and through three phases of part-time study enables independent studio practice to develop over a longer period of time than conventional degrees. The programme is designed to engage you in substantial studio based research and you will review, develop and strengthen your position as a practising artist.

COURSE LIST: MA/Diploma/Certiﬁcate • Community Development (part-time) • Fine Art (part-time) • Women's Studies (part-time)

TO FIND OUT MORE: Tel: +44 (0) 1248 382475 E-mail: ll@bangor.ac.uk www.bangor.ac.uk/ll

“Having the opportunity to study the postgraduate course was invaluable to me… As someone who works on the ﬁeld, the content was totally relevant to my day to day work. It greatly increased my self-conﬁdence, my knowledge and skills.” Eirian P. Jones, MA Community Development

BANGOR UNIVERSITY POSTGRADUATE PROSPECTUS 61

39450 BU PG Prospectus 2015_2018 2014-09-10 10:35 AM Page 62

Community Development MA/PgDip/PgCert COURSE DURATION MA: up to 5 years part-time; PgDip: 1 year part-time; PgCert: 1 year part-time. ENTRY REQUIREMENTS Non-traditional entry encouraged based on a minimum of 3 years experience in the ﬁeld/in a related ﬁeld. Traditional entry is a minimum of a 2.ii undergraduate degree.

COURSE DESCRIPTION The main aim of the taught sections of the Postgraduate Programme is to increase the critical understanding, practical knowledge and skills of workers (paid and voluntary) in community development and related fields. The dissertation element provides an opportunity to carry out a sustained and intensive investigation into a relevant topic. The taught Postgraduate Certificate consists of six, 10 credit compulsory modules: Understanding Community, Community Analysis, Community Development Practice, Community Enterprise, Study Visit (1 week long residential), Sustainable Communities. The taught Postgraduate Diploma will follow a similar pattern of 6 x 10 credit modules: Community and Regional Development, Community Development Theory, Community Planning, a eight-day residential European Study Visit, Critical Reflections and finally Research Methodology. The Dissertation is the final element of the MA and you are encouraged to develop your topics during the previous year with your course tutor. Each student will be allocated a dissertation tutor. We encourage you to publish dissertations that earn merit or distinction in Lifelong Learning’s online Community Development Monograph Series.

RESEARCH LINKS/LINKS WITH INDUSTRY All programme staff are actively involved in Community Development practice and all students undertake short periods of study visits to specific communities, community agencies and community policy offices in Wales and Europe. You are encouraged to base all your written work in community settings facilitated by community development groups, NGOs and government offices and to express your findings in ways relevant to both academia and the workplace. CAREER PROSPECTS The programme will enable you to develop your capabilities in guiding and facilitating social change through community development within a wide range of policy, managerial and practice settings. Career prospects include working as local facilitators and community project officers and managers; county level and regional project directors and senior officers in progressive development and social enterprises. For further course details, please see: www.bangor.ac.uk/go/pg/lifelonglearning

Feedback is positive from employers, students and external examiners.

Fine Art MA COURSE DURATION MA: 5 years part-time.

Modules include: The course is divided into three phases each lasting one year of part-time study.

ENTRY REQUIREMENTS Admission to the course is by an honours degree Part One: • Research Practice 1 of an approved University or a non-graduate (Orientation and Context) qualification which is of satisfactory standard for The emphasis is on critical experimentation, rethe purpose of postgraduate admission. In establishing practice through research, and a addition, applicants are asked to attend an questioning of established routines. interview with a portfolio of previous work and make a proposal for study, including contextual • Research Practice 2 reference (around 500 words) that will outline (Context and Practice) your intentions. The emphasis is on critical experimentation and a questioning of established routines COURSE DESCRIPTION through an objective deconstruction of existing The ethos of the programme is to enable you to practice. acquire a confident individual expertise and the advanced skills to develop your creative potential Part Two: beyond the course through developing your knowledge and understanding of the contexts of • Advanced Studio Practice 1 (Application and Collaboration) critical and professional sustainable practice. In this module the application of studio practice is considered and you will be encouraged to The part-time programme allows reflective develop a collaboration project with a partner studio practice to develop over a longer period of organisation, institution, group or individual time than conventional degrees and therefore, practitioner. helps you to effectively balance study and work or other commitments. • Advanced Studio Practice 2 (Towards Resolution) Your research will be supported by supervisory This module provides an opportunity to develop guidance, tutorials, mentoring, seminars, visiting skills in research and critical reflection building lectures, case studies and peer group learning, on knowledge acquired so far on the course, all combining to create a critical environment in and to use these skills to develop a proposal for preparation for further professional practice in the MA project and exhibition. the creative industries.

62 BANGOR UNIVERSITY POSTGRADUATE PROSPECTUS

Part Three: • Exhibition Practice (Resolution and Synthesis) Part 3 involves the development and production of a substantive manifestation of coherent and critically robust original work that will represent the level achieved through individual creative practice. RESEARCH LINKS/LINKS WITH INDUSTRY The programme has excellent working relations with galleries and institutions in the region and since 2006 all our degree shows have been held in dedicated public exhibition galleries. CAREER PROSPECTS It is expected that graduates from the MA Fine Art will be equipped to contribute to the cultural and creative industries. This may be through independent studio practice as artist makers, engaging in socially responsive practice, public art projects, cross disciplinary collaborations, international and national commissions and residencies, exhibitions and art projects or as employees of art organisations and institutions. For further course details, please see: www.bangor.ac.uk/go/pg/lifelonglearning

39450 BU PG Prospectus 2015_2018 2014-09-10 10:35 AM Page 63

Women’s Studies MA/Diploma COURSE DURATION MA: up to 5 year part-time; Diploma: 5 semesters. ENTRY REQUIREMENTS Applicants are accepted on to the course with degrees in any subject (2:ii or above), or who have other relevant experience. The majority of our students work full-time and the course is designed to ﬁt in with work and other commitments.

COURSE DESCRIPTION Taught at Bangor since 1994, the programme has a reputation for being both intellectually stimulating and practically relevant. The course has six compulsory modules beginning with Contemporary Women’s Studies which sets the scene and explores the concepts and theories surrounding women’s issues and lives. This is followed by Discovering Women’s History which has a focus on active researching and analysing of Welsh women’s history. Two 30 credit modules then focus on the cultural Representing Women (literature, film and art) and Women in Practice (women in education, work and enterprise). These modules provide an opportunity to explore in more detail specific areas of interest and issues of intersectionality in the field. The final taught element is Researching Women’s Lives, this module introduces you to research methodologies and to feminist critiques and analyses, research ethics, and the political context of feminist research methodology. It provides you with a framework to develop your dissertation proposal and design and plan your research. The final part of the MA is the Dissertation, a piece of independent research based work and gives you an opportunity to investigate and write about an issue in greater depth.

RESEARCH LINKS/LINKS WITH INDUSTRY Topics such as equal opportunities and gender equality duty, and issues relating to education, health and enterprise are important and relevant issues for different employers. You develop valuable transferable skills in research, analysis and writing. Students often carry out dissertations in areas directly related to their field of work and may be supported by their employers in that. We have a working relationship with ‘Chwarae Teg‘ who carry out periodic research in matters relating to women and the economy in Wales. Staff and past students also sit on the board of WEN (Women’s Equality Network) and WAW (Women’s Archive Wales). Past dissertation work has informed the public sector and third sector research and staff are actively involved with a range of these organisations in terms of research, training and policy development.

The programme scored between 95% and 100% across various indicators in the most recent postgraduate student satisfaction survey and receives positive feedback from students and external examiner alike.

For further course details, please see: www.bangor.ac.uk/go/pg/lifelonglearning

CAREER PROSPECTS Most of our students are already in work and are looking to develop their career prospects. Course content is useful in particular in terms of work in the arts, education and social sector based work. The programme also develops your transferable skills, in particular relating to qualitative research and analysis and writing.

BANGOR UNIVERSITY POSTGRADUATE PROSPECTUS 63

39450 BU PG Prospectus 2015_2018 2014-09-10 10:35 AM Page 64

COLLEGE OF BUSINESS, LAW, EDUCATION AND SOCIAL SCIENCES The College of Business, Law, Education and Social Sciences is a forward-looking and expanding College, bringing together four related disciplines to form a College with a sound research base which delivers the highest quality courses at both undergraduate and postgraduate level. With a combined faculty of around 180 staﬀ, and a teaching base in the city of London, we can also provide you with the excellent personal support for which Bangor is well recognised, nationally and internationally.

Our teaching is informed by world-class inter-disciplinary research. The College achieved an excellent set of results during the most recent Research Assessment Exercise, with the Business School leading the UK table ahead of all other universities conducting research in the area of Accounting, Banking and Finance. This result has enabled the Business School to take its first-class education and expertise to the city of London, offering innovative MSc, MA and MBA degrees in Banking and Finance from its centre in London’s financial district.

STAFF PROFILE

Our research centres provide collaborative opportunities for both staﬀ and research students, and provide the backdrop to our postgraduate taught programmes.

Top researchers and senior staff within the College also teach on our Masters programmes. This means that students will have the opportunity to study with and receive lectures from academic staff who are pushing back the frontiers of research. The College of Business, Law, Education and Social Sciences is committed to providing quality facilities and resources to support and promote students’ learning experience, which includes dedicated Postgraduate study areas with individual workstations and networked access. The College also benefits from a world-class training and conference centre, which offers part-time executive and professional management training in high quality state-of-the-art teaching facilities. These complement the excellent resources offered centrally by the University such as extensive IT, library and archive facilities. Amongst these is a virtual learning environment where recordings of lectures, notes, reading materials and many other resources are made available for students to access.

Professor Phil Molyneux Dean of the College of Business, Law, Education and Social Sciences Professor of Banking and Finance PhD (Economics) MA (Economics) Professor Phil Molyneux’s main area of research is on the structure, efficiency and performance of banking markets and he has published widely in this area. He is series editor of the Palgrave Macmillan Studies in Banking and Financial Institutions and co-editor of the Oxford University Press Handbook of Banking. In 2002, he was appointed as an Expert Adviser on financial services legislation to the European Parliament Committee of Economic and Monetary Affairs. He has also undertaken contract research on policy formation commissioned by the European Commission (2005) and the Spanish Savings Banks Foundation (2003-2006). He has acted as consultant to the New York Federal Reserve Bank, World Bank, UK Treasury, Citibank Private Bank, Barclays Wealth, Credit Suisse and various other international banks and consulting firms. He was appointed Danielsson Chair of Banking and Finance at the University of Gothenburg and the Swedish School of Economics in 2002-2003; in 2005-2006, he was appointed Levob Special Chair of Financial Services at Erasmus University, Rotterdam. In 2013, Prof. Molyneux was awarded the Distinguished Academic Award by the British Accounting and Finance Association (BAFA) in recognition of his significant contribution to teaching and research.

64 BANGOR UNIVERSITY POSTGRADUATE PROSPECTUS

39450 BU PG Prospectus 2015_2018 2014-09-10 10:35 AM Page 65

Bangor Business School About the School Bangor Business School is one of the major European university schools for financial and banking studies, offering a full range of disciplines from undergraduate to doctoral level. It is currently the top Business School in the UK for research in Accounting and Finance following the most recent Research Assessment Exercise and amongst the top 20 institutions in the world for banking research (RePEc, as of July 2014). Students are attracted by our reputation for high quality and expertise, particularly in the area of Banking and Financial Services, in which Bangor is a leading European centre which houses one of the largest PhD schools of any business school in the UK. Staff research papers and articles are published regularly in leading journals and their books published to a worldwide audience. Bangor Business School’s teaching and research have not only been highly rated by external agencies, but also by our students and the businesses that employ our former students. We have a proven track record in producing highly skilled and highly employable postgraduates, with the broad range of abilities that employers require from new recruits. Staff and facilities Bangor Business School’s top researchers and senior staff, who were responsible for achieving the No. 1 position in the UK for Accounting, Banking and Finance research, also teach on Masters programmes. This means that students will receive lectures from academic staff who are pushing back the frontiers of research. During recent years, Bangor Business School staff have undertaken policy work and consultancy linked to their research for organisations as diverse as the European Commission, World Bank, IMF, UK Treasury, European Central Bank, Deutsche Bundesbank, Spanish Savings Bank Association, and many other national and international organisations.

Consumer Psychology, Computer Science and Law. The Business School also runs a highly successful programme for students who wish to study for the research degrees of MPhil or PhD.

COURSE LIST:

Bangor Business School oﬀers a number of attractive Scholarships and Bursaries to encourage well-qualiﬁed and talented students to reach their full potential.

MA • Banking and Finance • Banking and Law • Business and Marketing • Business with Consumer Psychology • Finance • Islamic Banking and Finance • Management and Finance

Career Prospects Graduates have excellent prospects for pursuing employment in a wide range of roles in the accounting, business, banking and ﬁnancial sectors of the global economy. The programmes’ emphasis on practical insights enhances students’ employability and enables students to develop a range of transferable skills which are widely sought in the above sectors. For example, students develop technical skills in conducting independent research and in working in a team.

MSc • Accounting • Accounting and Banking • Accounting and Finance • Banking and Finance • Business with Consumer Psychology • Finance • International Banking • International Finance • International Media Management • Investment Management • Islamic Banking and Finance • Management and Finance

Graduates of Bangor Business School have an impressive track record of employability and some of our alumni are now employed in senior positions across the globe, from Downing Street and Deutsche Bank to Accenture Luxembourg and the Cayman Islands Monetary Authority.

MBA • Banking and Finance • Banking and Law • Environmental Management • Finance • Information Management • International Business • International Marketing • Islamic Banking and Finance • Law and Management • Management

Links with Industry The Business School places significant value on its links with industry. Our academic staff have a wide range of links with business, banks and international financial institutions. We also enjoy strong links with professional bodies such as the ACCA, whose courses we deliver, and the Chartered Institute of Marketing through our CIM Student Chapter, aimed at helping students develop marketing skills and competences. Demonstrating our commitment to teaching of the highest quality and developing student career opportunities, distinguished guest speakers are regularly invited to the Business School to deliver lectures and to share their experiences with our students.

Overview of the academic areas Bangor Business School’s excellent record in postgraduate teaching is reflected in the innovative nature of our degree programmes, and the performance of our students at Masters and PhD levels. Bangor Business School established the first MA in Banking and Finance offered by any UK university in 1973, and was more recently the first to offer MBAs in Banking and Finance and Islamic Banking and Finance.

Bangor Business School English Language requirements International applicants are normally required to provide evidence of English language proﬁciency. The minimum English requirements are: • IELTS 6.0 (with no individual score lower than 5.5). For research PhD/MPhil: • IELTS 7.0 (with no individual score lower than 6.5).

Postgraduate students at Bangor Business School can choose between several types of higher degree programmes and subjects. These include taught MSc, MA and MBA degrees in the ﬁelds of Accounting, Banking, Finance, Islamic Banking and Finance, Business, Management, Marketing,

All module information is correct at the time of going to print and is subject to change. Please refer to the website for the most current information: www.bangor.ac.uk/business

PhD/MPhil • Accounting, Banking, Economics, Finance, Management Studies Bangor Business School London Centre Bangor Business School has a centre in the city of London offering a portfolio of specialist financial MBA, MA and MSc degrees. See page 97 for further details. The Bangor Business School’s Management Centre offers first class professional training courses and conference facilities: www.bangor.ac.uk/management_centre

TO FIND OUT MORE: Tel: +44 (0) 1248 383231 E-mail: business.pg@bangor.ac.uk www.bangor.ac.uk/business

BANGOR UNIVERSITY POSTGRADUATE PROSPECTUS 65

39450 BU PG Prospectus 2015_2018 2014-09-10 10:35 AM Page 66

Accounting MSc COURSE DURATION Compulsory Modules: • Accounting Theory MSc: 1 year full-time. This programme is available to start in either January or September. This module critically evaluates the various theories in accounting. Students will gain ENTRY REQUIREMENTS understanding of how these theories can be Applicants should have a good first degree (2.ii or used to explain the behaviour of preparers and higher) or equivalent from a university or another users of accounting information. approved degree-awarding body. Non-graduate qualifications deemed to be of a satisfactory • Research Methods standard for the purpose of postgraduate This module develops knowledge of admission may also be considered. Work intermediate and advanced research methods, experience is desirable. and provides a basis in research methodology for those who may eventually wish to pursue Prior study of accounting (as part of the first research degrees. degree, for example) or experience of working within the field of accounting is essential. • International Taxation: Policy and Practice This module aims to identify the distinctive International applicants are normally required to characteristics of tax system design; to review provide evidence of English language proficiency the principles of taxation; to examine tax policy – please see page 65. and public economics; to compare international tax systems; to evaluate tax administration; and COURSE DESCRIPTION to calculate capital, income and consumption The MSc in Accounting aims to develop an tax liabilities for individuals and businesses. individual’s understanding of the role of accounting for decision-making both inside and • Financial Analysis outside organisations. On this module, students will analyse the techniques that are used to evaluate a The course involves advanced study of company’s financial position and performance, organisations, their management, the role of and develop a critical awareness of the uses of accounting for internal and external users, and financial data by capital markets for valuation the changing external context in which they purposes. operate. Students will develop the ability to apply knowledge and understanding of accounting to • Management Accounting complex issues. This module will enable students to understand appropriate management accounting techniques and methods and provide them with the ability to apply them.

• Advanced Financial Reporting This module will enhance students’ understanding of advanced topics in ﬁnancial reporting and regulation within the context of International Accounting Standards and GAAP. Optional Modules – choose 2: • Corporate Social Responsibility • Corporate Risk Management • Advanced Auditing and Assurance • International Financial Management • Islamic Accounting and Financial Reporting CAREER PROSPECTS Graduates of Bangor Business School programmes have excellent prospects for pursuing employment in a wide range of roles. Please see page 65 for more information. For further course details, please see: www.bangor.ac.uk/go/pg/business

Accounting and Banking MSc COURSE DURATION Compulsory Modules: • Accounting Theory MSc: 1 year full-time. This programme is available to start in either January or September. This module critically evaluates the various theories in accounting. Students will gain ENTRY REQUIREMENTS understanding of how these theories can be Applicants should have a good first degree (2.ii or used to explain the behaviour of preparers and higher) or equivalent from a university or another users of accounting information. approved degree-awarding body. Non-graduate qualifications deemed to be of a satisfactory • International Banking standard for the purpose of postgraduate This module examines the origins of admission may also be considered. Work international banking, the activities of experience is desirable. Prior study of accounting international banks, the markets in which they (as part of the first degree, for example) or participate, and the sources of risk in experience of working within the field of international banking. accounting is essential. • Research Methods International applicants are normally required to This module develops knowledge of provide evidence of English language proficiency intermediate and advanced research methods, – please see page 65. and provides a basis in research methodology for those who may eventually wish to pursue COURSE DESCRIPTION research degrees. The MSc in Accounting and Banking will enable students to develop an advanced knowledge of • Financial Analysis accounting and banking, which will be of On this module, students will analyse the particular interest to students who wish to techniques that are used to evaluate a pursue a career in the financial industry. company’s financial position and performance, and develop a critical awareness of the uses of The overall aim of the course is to develop an financial data by capital markets for valuation integrated understanding of the role of banking purposes. and accounting for decision-making both inside and outside organisations. Students will undertake an advanced study of organisations, including financial institutions, their management, the role of accounting for internal and external users, and the changing external context in which they operate. Students will develop the ability to apply their knowledge and understanding of accounting and banking to complex issues.

66 BANGOR UNIVERSITY POSTGRADUATE PROSPECTUS

• Advanced Financial Reporting This module will enhance students’ understanding of advanced topics in ﬁnancial reporting and regulation within the context of International Accounting Standards and GAAP. • Bank Financial Management This module provides a grounding in the nature, strategic context and managerial functions of financial management in banks, and other financial services firms. Optional Modules – choose 2: • Corporate Risk Management • Management Accounting • International Financial Management • Financial Intermediation • Financial Institutions Strategic Management CAREER PROSPECTS Graduates of Bangor Business School programmes have excellent prospects for pursuing employment in a wide range of roles. Please see page 65 for more information. For further course details, please see: www.bangor.ac.uk/go/pg/business

39450 BU PG Prospectus 2015_2018 2014-09-10 10:35 AM Page 67

International Finance MSc The MSc International Finance programme is objective is to familiarise students with the latest also offered at Bangor Business School’s strategic, managerial and industrial London Centre. Please see page 101 for details. developments in the international financial services industry. COURSE DURATION MSc: 1 year full-time. Compulsory Modules: • Current Issues in International Finance ENTRY REQUIREMENTS This module provides an advanced level of Candidates should have a good first degree (2.ii understanding of the most important current or higher) or equivalent from a university or issues in international finance, with focus being another approved degree-awarding body. Nonplaced on current research findings and graduate qualifications deemed to be of a published papers from the top international satisfactory standard for the purpose of journals. postgraduate admission may also be considered. Work experience is desirable. • International Financial Markets This module provides an introduction to finance International applicants are normally required to theory, and its practical applications for provide evidence of English language proficiency investors, analysts and portfolio managers. – please see page 65. • Research Methods COURSE DESCRIPTION This module provides the student with The MSc in International Finance develops a knowledge of intermediate and advanced broad vision and understanding of the changing qualitative and quantitative research methods, role and nature of international finance within the and provide a basis in research methodology. context of globalised markets. The programme offers students a unique opportunity to develop • International Financial Management an appreciation of the causes and significance of This module analyses the financial current developments in the global financial management of multinational companies, and sector, and to study advanced theory and practice the influence of the macroeconomic, fiscal, relating to international financial markets and currency and political environments on international financial management. financial decision-making. The programme provides management and business training at an advanced level covering the latest developments in international finance. Students will acquire an understanding of practical managerial issues surrounding the running of international financial institutions, analysing the main features of international financial systems and markets. An important

• Investment Strategy and Portfolio Management This module analyses portfolio strategies which can eﬀectively control risk and enhance returns; develops intellectual skills and research expertise in the area of investment analysis and portfolio management; and demonstrates appropriate modelling techniques for investment decision-making and risk management. • Financial Econometrics This module provides advanced coverage of econometric methods and practices that are used to model ﬁnancial and business data, and develops a critical awareness of the strengths and limitations of modelling techniques. Optional Modules – choose 2: • International Taxation: Policy and Practice • Financial Modelling • Islamic Finance • Financial Engineering • Behavioural Finance CAREER PROSPECTS Graduates of Bangor Business School programmes have excellent prospects for pursuing employment in a wide range of roles. Please see page 65 for more information. For further course details, please see: www.bangor.ac.uk/go/pg/business

Investment Management MSc The MSc Investment Management programme Students will acquire advanced, specialised is also offered at Bangor Business School’s knowledge and skills across a range of London Centre. Please see page 102 for details. investment applications at strategic and operational levels. They will develop intellectual COURSE DURATION skills and research expertise in the area of MSc: 1 year full-time investment analysis and portfolio management; technical skills relevant to financial markets’ ENTRY REQUIREMENTS operation and management; critical skills in Candidates should have a good first degree (2.ii examining advanced level theories and empirical or higher) or equivalent from a university or evidence; computational skills in financial service another approved degree-awarding body. Nonactivity; and analytic skills in exploring the graduate qualifications deemed to be of a efficient markets hypothesis. satisfactory standard for the purpose of postgraduate admission may also be considered. Compulsory Modules: Work experience is desirable. • Current Issues in International Finance This module provides an advanced level of International applicants are normally required to understanding of the most important current provide evidence of English language proficiency issues in international finance, with focus being – please see page 65. placed on current research findings and published papers from the top international COURSE DESCRIPTION journals. The MSc in Investment Management offers students a sound knowledge of the theoretical • International Financial Markets foundations that underpin modern investment This module provides an introduction to finance and risk management techniques, and prepares theory, and its practical applications for them for entry into the fast-growing investment investors, analysts and portfolio managers. management industry. The programme aims to cover the traditional syllabus of a Masters degree • Research Methods in Finance whilst providing students with This module provides the student with advanced level management and business knowledge of intermediate and advanced training in specialised areas of investment, such qualitative and quantitative research methods, as the management of equity and bond and provide a basis in research methodology. portfolios; trading techniques; risk management; management of foreign exchange and derivative • Financial Modelling securities; and emerging markets investment. This module provides an introduction to Students will benefit from a unique opportunity techniques of financial modelling and the to use various online databases available in practical implementation of financial models in Bangor Business School, such as Bloomberg, Microsoft Excel. DataStream and SNL.

• Investment Strategy and Portfolio Management This module analyses portfolio strategies which can effectively control risk and enhance returns; develops intellectual skills and research expertise in the area of investment analysis and portfolio management; and demonstrates appropriate modelling techniques for investment decision-making and risk management. • Financial Analysis This module analyses the techniques that are used to evaluate a company’s financial position and performance, and develops a critical awareness of the uses of financial data by capital markets for valuation purposes. Optional Modules – choose 2: • International Financial Management • Financial Econometrics • Financial Engineering • Behavioural Finance • Financial Stability CAREER PROSPECTS Graduates of Bangor Business School programmes have excellent prospects for pursuing employment in a wide range of roles. Please see page 65 for more information. For further course details, please see: www.bangor.ac.uk/go/pg/business

BANGOR UNIVERSITY POSTGRADUATE PROSPECTUS 67

39450 BU PG Prospectus 2015_2018 2014-09-10 10:35 AM Page 68

Accounting and Finance MSc The MSc Accounting and Finance programme is accounting and financial training, with the also offered at Bangor Business School’s knowledge and skills necessary to pursue a London Centre. Please see page 100 for details. senior level professional career in accounting, financial services or related sectors of the COURSE DURATION economy. MSc: 1 year full-time. This course offers both January and September intakes. The programme is designed to develop your existing skills through a scheme of specialist ENTRY REQUIREMENTS advanced study. An important objective is to Entry to the MSc Accounting and Finance provide you with relevant analytical training, so programme requires a good undergraduate that you are familiar with the latest theoretical degree in a relevant subject, (e.g. Accounting, and practical developments relating to Banking, Finance, Business, Management and accounting and finance. The programme provides Marketing) from a university, or a similar a coherent theoretical framework for the various qualification from any other institution. subject areas, but the emphasis throughout is on Alternatively, possession of a suitable advanced practical application of accounting and professional qualification and relevant practical financial techniques in a real-world setting. experience may also be accepted. In general, however, applicants are judged on their individual Compulsory Modules: merits. Work experience and other factors are • Research Methods also considered. This module develops knowledge of intermediate and advanced research methods, International applicants are normally required to and provides a basis in research methodology provide evidence of English language proficiency for those who may eventually wish to pursue – please see page 65. research degrees. COURSE DESCRIPTION Changes in the business environment create the need for individuals wishing to pursue a senior management role to be aware of contemporary accounting and finance developments. Understanding these theoretical and practical issues is critical for managers who often have to make rapid and far-reaching decisions about the short term financial operations and long term strategies of firms. The MSc in Accounting and Finance offers you a unique opportunity to develop an appreciation of the causes and significance of current developments in the financial and corporate sectors, and to study advanced theory and practice relating to accounting and finance. The aim of the programme is to provide graduates, and other individuals who have practical

• Accounting Theory This module critically evaluates a widespread and widely based set of theories that underpin any explanation of accounting behaviour and accounting regulatory output.

• Financial Analysis This module analyses the techniques that are used to evaluate a company’s financial position and performance. • Management Accounting This module provides an understanding of the uses of financial data in measuring and evaluating business performance, and in setting the strategic aims of the organisation. Optional Modules - choose 2: • Corporate Risk Management • Islamic Accounting and Financial Reporting • Islamic Finance • Financial Econometrics • International Financial Management • Investment Strategy and Portfolio Management CAREER PROSPECTS Graduates of Bangor Business School programmes have excellent prospects for pursuing employment in a wide range of roles. Please see page 65 for more information. For further course details, please see: www.bangor.ac.uk/go/pg/business

Bangor Business School is ranked No.1 in the UK for Accounting, Banking and Finance research (most recent government Research Assessment Exercise). “Coming to Bangor was the best decision of my life. The Business School was recommended to me by a senior member of the banking industry, and what I learnt during my time has given me a very solid foundation for my career. Each module on the MBA Banking and Finance programme is wellstructured and designed to suit both the experienced professional and the novice student. The research-based curriculum really made me think outside the box and taught me the importance of keeping up to date with the latest market trends and developments. I have to say that the best thing about the learning experience was the interaction with the teaching staﬀ. They were readily available to help on a one-to-one basis.” SHANKY SINGH, Business Analyst, Syntel, India

68 BANGOR UNIVERSITY POSTGRADUATE PROSPECTUS

“I first came to Bangor as an exchange student. I enjoyed the experience so much that I decided to return to pursue my Masters degree in Accounting and Finance. The low cost of living in Bangor and the Business School’s reputation as the best in the UK for research convinced me that this was definitely the right decision. I particularly enjoyed the structure of the course, the classes and the friendly and helpful atmosphere of the School. The small class sizes meant that it was easy to get in touch with lecturers and to ask for help – you are always guaranteed to find someone to help you at Bangor! I am now undertaking a PhD in Accounting and Finance. I enjoy living in Bangor as everything feels familiar and is within walking distance.” ANNIKA BEELITZ, from Germany, studied an MSc in Accounting and Finance

39450 BU PG Prospectus 2015_2018 2014-09-10 10:35 AM Page 69

Banking and Finance MSc/MA/MBA All three streams are also available at the Bangor Business School London Centre. Please see page 98, 99 and 101 for details.

Compulsory Modules (MSc): • Research Methods This module develops knowledge of intermediate and advanced research methods, COURSE DURATION and provides a basis in research methodology MSc/MA/MBA: 1 year full-time. All three streams for those who may eventually wish to pursue offer both January and September intakes. research degrees.

• International Financial Management In this module the financial management of multinational companies and the influence of macroeconomic, fiscal, currency and political environments on business and financial decision-making are examined in an international and global context.

ENTRY REQUIREMENTS Entry to the MSc/MA/MBA Banking and Finance requires a good undergraduate degree in a relevant subject, (e.g. Accounting, Banking, Finance, Business, Management and Marketing) from a university, or a similar qualification from any other institution. Alternatively, possession of a suitable professional qualification and relevant practical experience may also be accepted. In general, however, applicants are judged on their individual merits. Work experience and other factors are also considered. For MBA degrees, whilst work experience is desirable, it is not essential.

• Bank Financial Management This module provides a grounding in the nature, strategic context and managerial functions of financial management in banks, and other financial services firms.

Optional Modules (MA) - choose 2: • Islamic Finance • Corporate Risk Management • Financial Institutions Strategic Management • Financial Analysis • Investment Strategy and Portfolio Management • Islamic Banking

• Financial Modelling This module develops a combined theoretical and practical approach to mathematical modelling for specialists in finance.

Compulsory Modules (MBA): • Organisations and People This module examines key issues arising from contemporary research in organisational behaviour and human resource management.

International applicants are normally required to provide evidence of English language proficiency – please see page 65.

• International Banking This module examines the origins of international banking, the activities of international banks, the markets in which they participate, and the sources of risk.

• Management Research This module analyses the philosophical basis for research in the management sciences, and examines a number of key methodological issues and approaches.

• Financial Econometrics This module provides advanced coverage of econometric methods and practices that are used to model financial and business data.

• Bank Financial Management This module provides a grounding in the nature, strategic context and managerial functions of financial management in banks and other financial services firms.

COURSE DESCRIPTION Banking and financial services represents a highly competitive and rapidly changing sector in every modern economy. Changes in customer requirements, technology, competitive conditions and regulation create the need for managers, traders and analysts to make rapid and often farreaching decisions about their short term operations and long term strategies. The MSc, MA and MBA Banking and Finance degree courses at Bangor offer you a unique opportunity to study advanced theory and practice relating to financial services, and to develop an appreciation of the causes and significance of current developments in this vitally important and dynamic sector of the economy. The MSc/MA/MBA Banking and Finance programmes are designed to develop your existing skills through a scheme of specialist advanced study. An important objective is to provide you with relevant analytical training, so that you are familiar with the latest theoretical and practical developments relating to banking, finance and capital markets. These programmes provide a coherent theoretical framework for the various subject areas, but the emphasis throughout is on advanced practical application of financial techniques in a real-world setting. The MSc degree may be more suitable for applicants with some previous background in mathematics, statistics or econometrics, while the MA degree is more suitable for applicants who prefer to adopt a predominantly nonquantitative approach to their studies. The MBA will develop knowledgeable and capable executives, who will move quickly into key positions in the financial sector. The degree focuses on the financial and strategic management of banks and other financial institutions. Case studies and contemporary issues figure prominently in the MBA programme. ESRC Recognition The MSc/MA Banking and Finance programmes are recognised by the Economic and Social Research Council (ESRC) as the first year of a 1+3 PhD training programme.

• International Financial Markets This module provides an overview of financial instruments in a multi-currency world.

• Financial Crises and Bank Regulation This module examines why banks and financial • International Banking This module examines the origins of markets are inherently vulnerable to crises, international banking, the activities of and analyses the role of policy makers and international banks, the markets in which they institutions. participate, and the sources of risk. Optional Modules (MSc) - choose 1: • Financial Institutions Strategic Management • Islamic Finance This module examines the main theoretical and • Financial Institutions Strategic Management practical issues concerning banking business. • Financial Analysis • Financial Engineering • Investment Strategy and Portfolio Management Optional Modules (MBA) - choose 3: • International Strategic Management# • Islamic Banking • Marketing Financial Services • Islamic Finance Compulsory Modules (MA): • Contemporary Issues in Management • Research Methods • Banking and Development This module develops knowledge of • International Financial Management intermediate and advanced research methods. • Islamic Banking • Marketing Strategy # • Merger and Acquisition • Bank Financial Management This module provides a grounding in the nature, # Your optional modules must include strategic context and managerial functions of International Strategic Management and financial management in banks, and other Marketing Strategy. financial services firms. • International Financial Markets This module provides an overview of financial instruments in a multi-currency world. • International Banking This module examines the origins of international banking, the activities of international banks, the markets in which they participate, and the sources of risk.

CAREER PROSPECTS Graduates of the Bangor Business School programmes have excellent prospects for pursuing employment in a wide range of roles. Please see page 65 for more information. For further course details, please see: www.bangor.ac.uk/go/pg/business

• Financial Crises and Bank Regulation This module examines why banks and financial markets are inherently vulnerable to crises, and analyses the role of policy makers and institutions.

BANGOR UNIVERSITY POSTGRADUATE PROSPECTUS 69

39450 BU PG Prospectus 2015_2018 2014-09-10 10:35 AM Page 70

Banking and Law MA/MBA COURSE DURATION MA/MBA: 1 year full-time. These courses offer both January and September intakes. ENTRY REQUIREMENTS Entry to the MA/MBA in Banking and Law requires a good undergraduate degree in a relevant subject, (e.g. Law, Banking, Economics, Finance, Accounting or Management) from a university, or a similar qualification from any other institution. Alternatively, possession of a suitable professional qualification and relevant practical experience may also be accepted. In general, however, applicants are judged on their individual merits. Work experience and other factors are also considered. For MBA degrees, whilst work experience is desirable, it is not essential. International applicants are normally required to provide evidence of English language proficiency – please see page 65.

Compulsory Modules (MBA): • Organisations and People This module examines key issues arising from contemporary research in organisational behaviour and human resource management.

• Management Research This module analyses the philosophical basis • Bank Financial Management for research in the management sciences, and This module provides a grounding in the nature, examines a number of key methodological strategic context and managerial functions of issues and approaches. financial management in banks, and other financial services firms. • Bank Financial Management This module provides a grounding in the nature, • International Banking strategic context and managerial functions of This module examines the origins of financial management in banks and other international banking, the activities of financial services firms. international banks, the markets in which they participate, and the sources of risk. • International Banking This module examines the origins of • Financial Institutions Strategic Management international banking, the activities of This module examines the main theoretical and international banks, the markets in which they practical issues concerning banking business. participate, and the sources of risk.

COURSE DESCRIPTION In today’s global competitive marketplace, the successful corporate executive needs to understand how the legal system and legal regulation can impact on their own area of expertise. Accordingly, the Bangor Business and Law Schools have combined to offer an innovative suite of interdisciplinary MBA and MA programmes.

• Financial Crises and Bank Regulation • Financial Institutions Strategic Management This module examines why banks and financial This module examines the main theoretical and markets are inherently vulnerable to crises, practical issues concerning banking business. and analyses the role of policy makers and institutions. • International Banking & Capital Markets Law This module will provide a sound • International Banking & Capital Markets Law understanding of the law and practice of This module will provide a sound modern international banking. understanding of the law and practice of The MA in Banking and Law is an intermodern international banking, including the Optional Modules (MA and MBA) - choose 2: disciplinary programme that will enable you to regulation and prudential supervision of banks • Comparative Corporate Governance study key legal and regulatory developments in the UK and EU in the areas of capital • International Commercial Arbitration affecting the financial sector. This includes the adequacy and risk management. • Intellectual Property Law regulation of financial services, security • World Trade Law instruments, corporate finance, arbitration and • Competition Law other issues affecting modern banks at UK, EU • Industrial Property Law and international level. The MA degree is suitable • International Insurance Law for those who wish to adopt a predominantly • International Taxation Law non-quantitative approach to their studies. • Employment Law • International Environmental Law The MBA in Banking and Law will develop • Credit and Security Law knowledgeable and capable banking executives • International Corporate Finance Law and and banking lawyers who will move quickly into Merger Regulation Law key positions in the financial sector. The degree • Consumer Law focuses on the financial and strategic management of banks and other financial CAREER PROSPECTS institutions as well as the increasingly complex Graduates of the Bangor Business School legal and regulatory structures within which programmes have excellent prospects for banks and their executives have to operate. The pursuing employment in a wide range of roles. legal issues will cover a wide range of topics at Please see page 65 for more information. UK, EU and international level with which a modern banker needs to be familiar. Case For further course details, please see: studies and contemporary issues figure www.bangor.ac.uk/go/pg/business prominently in the programme, particularly focusing on the lessons to be learnt from the recent ‘credit crunch’ and the issues for international financing and regulation that this has thrown up.

“Bangor Business School provided me with a solid academic grounding in economics and business. What I learned at Bangor I still use today in my position as Chief UK Economist at Deutsche Bank in London. The standard of teaching was excellent. Bangor Business School set me up for life, and has helped me enormously in my subsequent studies and my career.” Dr George Buckley, Chief UK Economist, Deutsche Bank, London

70 BANGOR UNIVERSITY POSTGRADUATE PROSPECTUS

39450 BU PG Prospectus 2015_2018 2014-09-10 10:35 AM Page 71

Business and Marketing MA COURSE DURATION MA: 1 year full-time. This course offers both January and September intakes.

changing external environment in which they • Management Research operate, and develop your ability to take a This module analyses the philosophical basis strategic overview of business and for research in the management sciences, and organisational issues. An important objective is examines a number of key methodological to provide relevant analytical training in the latest issues and approaches. strategic, managerial and industrial ENTRY REQUIREMENTS developments in marketing both the public and • New Venture Creation Entry to the MA in Business and Marketing private sectors. We look at marketing at local, This module examines the advantages and programme requires a good undergraduate national and global levels, developing skills in disadvantages of the various routes to business degree in a relevant subject, (e.g. Accounting, strategic analysis, problem-solving and decision start-up. Banking, Finance, Business, Management and making. Marketing) from a university, or a similar • Marketing Communication qualification from any other institution. The programme will prepare you for a career in This module examines the processes by which Alternatively, possession of a suitable marketing or in business and management. You integrated marketing communications professional qualification and relevant practical may choose to undertake a dissertation in a programs are planned, developed and experience may also be accepted. In general, business or marketing topic. The Bangor executed. however, applicants are judged on their individual Business School has a Chartered Institute of merits. Work experience and other factors are Marketing student chapter which enables our • Entrepreneurial Marketing also considered. students to become involved in real life issues This module explores relationship marketing and enjoy hands-on experience of marketing. theory and practice in a range of global International applicants are normally required to environments and business contexts. provide evidence of English language proficiency Compulsory Modules: – please see page 65. • Organisations and People Optional Modules - choose 1: This module examines key issues arising from • Knowledge Management COURSE DESCRIPTION contemporary research in organisational • Contemporary Issues in Management This degree is designed for graduates wishing to behaviour and human resource management. • European Business start, or further develop, careers in marketing. It • Public Sector Management explores the principles, theoretical concepts and • International Strategic Management practice of marketing within the context of This module analyses strategic decisionCAREER PROSPECTS business and management and will focus on making within business. Graduates of the Bangor Business School developing academic and applied skills in programmes have excellent prospects for marketing including advertising, brand • Marketing Strategy pursuing employment in a wide range of roles. management and loyalty, customer service, This module critically evaluates the Please see page 65 for more information. public relations and market research. contributions of various schools of thought in marketing, and examines the relevant For further course details, please see: The programme will also develop your analytical models and management practices, www.bangor.ac.uk/go/pg/business knowledge and skills across a broader range of with emphasis on the strategic importance of business and management subjects, including marketing to all organisations. organisations, their management and the

Business with Consumer Psychology MA/MSc COURSE DURATION MSc/MA: 1 year full-time.

thinking? Will the internet change the face of urban and suburban shopping areas?

ENTRY REQUIREMENTS Entry to the MSc/MA in Business with Consumer Psychology programme requires a good undergraduate degree, preferably in a related subject (e.g. Business, Psychology, Marketing, Finance, Management) from a university, or a similar qualification from any other institution. Alternatively, possession of a suitable professional qualification and relevant practical experience may also be accepted. In general, however, applicants are judged on their individual merits, work experience and other factors are also considered.

You may choose between the MSc or MA routes, which are differentiated by the nature of the dissertation. The MSc dissertation will involve undertaking empirical research, whilst the MA dissertation will involve an extended literature review.

International applicants are normally required to provide evidence of English language proficiency – please see page 65. COURSE DESCRIPTION This joint Masters degree is designed for graduates wishing to start, or further develop, careers in Consumer Psychology and Business. The programme is delivered by Schools which enjoy an international reputation in their field. The marriage of both disciplines is a natural one, as understanding behaviour and specifically consumer behaviour in the world of business can be crucial to the success of businesses. Today’s successful businesses and organisations need highly trained people who can help them understand their consumers and understand issues such as: What makes them choose one product over another? Do brand names and advertising really affect our

The MA/MSc Consumer Psychology with Business option involves specialisation in Consumer Psychology, leading to a Dissertation in this subject area. Compulsory Modules: • Consumer Psychology: Theory This module is an introduction to consumer science as it is currently practiced in the marketplace. • Nudges and Behaviour Change This module will examine how we can shape and/or modify behaviours in both the shortterm and the long-term and understand some of the psychological mechanisms at work. • Marketing Strategy This module critically evaluates the contributions of various schools of thought in marketing, and examines the relevant analytical models and management practices, with emphasis on the strategic importance of marketing to all organisations.

• Management Research This module analyses the philosophical basis for research in the management sciences, and examines a number of key methodological issues and approaches. • Applied Consumer Psychology This module’s aim is to provide practical research experience in consumer psychology and involves hands-on work with viable commercial enterprises. You are partnered with local companies and are required to design and conduct a practical consumer research project, typically involving fieldwork. Optional Modules - choose 3: • European Business • New Venture Creation • Contemporary Issues in Management • Finance for Managers • Enterprise by Design • Marketing Communication • Entrepreneurial Marketing CAREER PROSPECTS Graduates of the Bangor Business School programmes have excellent prospects for pursuing employment in a wide range of roles. Please see page 65 for more information. For further course details, please see: www.bangor.ac.uk/go/pg/business

BANGOR UNIVERSITY POSTGRADUATE PROSPECTUS 71

39450 BU PG Prospectus 2015_2018 2014-09-10 10:35 AM Page 72

International Business MBA COURSE DURATION MBA: 1 year full-time (also available on a parttime basis). This course oﬀers both January and September intakes.

Compulsory Modules: • Marketing Strategy This module introduces the fundamentals of marketing, by illustrating strategies in a wide range of situations, and covering the various schools of thought in marketing, together with relevant analytical models and management practices.

ENTRY REQUIREMENTS Candidates should have a good first degree (2:ii or higher) or equivalent from a university or another approved degree-awarding body. Nongraduate qualifications deemed to be of a • International Strategic Management satisfactory standard for the purpose of This module explores the link between postgraduate admission may also be considered. strategic and operational management, Work experience is desirable. discusses strategic management as a core management process, and places strategic International applicants are normally required to decision making in a culturally defined, provide evidence of English language proficiency dynamic environment. – please see page 65. • Management Research COURSE DESCRIPTION This module examines key methodological The aim of the MBA in International Business is to issues and approaches to research in provide students with an international outlook on management studies, and critically evaluates business and an understanding of the particular the strengths and limitations of data gathered demands and restrictions of conducting and from interviews, case studies, focus groups, managing business globally. surveys and experiments. On this course students will develop advanced, specialised knowledge and skills across a broad • Organisations and People range of business and management subjects, This module provides an integrated analysis of developing knowledge and understanding of management, organisations and people, international organisations, their management developing the conceptual, strategic and and the changing global external environment in practical skills necessary for managers in which they operate; thus developing a strategic complex, global organisational contexts, by overview of business and organisational issues. drawing on key issues arising from Students will also develop advanced theoretical contemporary research in organisational knowledge of international business and behaviour and human resource management. management subjects including finance, marketing and entrepreneurship and how these • Finance for Managers are affected by culture. This module enables students to gain a basic understanding of accounting and financial management, by examining basic principles

and concepts in accounting statements and ﬁnancial information so that they can be used to improve the quality of decision-making. • Global Business and Culture The aim of the module is to enable students to gain an understanding of culture as a major force in international business within the context of a global economy. The module focusses on the complex task of capturing and assessing the cultural encounter, presents empirical evidence, and provides illustrative examples from global business and sample cultural combinations. • International Business This module establishes the relevance of globalisation to all organisations, and recognises the diﬀering objectives of governments and commercial organisations, as well as the opportunities and challenges of integration between nations. Optional Modules – choose 1: • International Financial Management • Contemporary Issues in Management • International Marketing • Consumer Behaviour in a Global and Digital World CAREER PROSPECTS Graduates of Bangor Business School programmes have excellent prospects for pursuing employment in a wide range of roles. Please see page 65 for more information. For further course details, please see: www.bangor.ac.uk/go/pg/business

Environmental Management MBA COURSE DURATION MBA: 1 year full-time (2.5 years part-time). This course offers both January and September intakes.

The programme includes highly topical case studies from across these sectors reflecting changing strategies and alternative approaches. It is suitable for graduates in a wide range of disciplines, including Environment, Engineering, Finance, Social Sciences and other subjects.

ENTRY REQUIREMENTS Entry to this programme requires a good undergraduate degree in a relevant subject, (e.g. Compulsory Modules: Environmental Science or Business Studies) from • Organisations and People a university, or a similar qualification from any This module examines key issues arising from other institution. Alternatively, possession of a contemporary research in organisational suitable professional qualification and relevant behaviour and human resource management. practical experience may also be accepted. In general, applicants are judged on their individual • International Strategic Management merits, work experience and other factors are This module analyses strategic decisionalso considered. For MBA degrees, whilst work making within business. You will develop a experience is desirable, it is not essential. critical understanding of the strategic processes of business management, and the Non-native English speakers are normally interconnections with the functional domains. required to provide evidence of English language proficiency – please see page 65. • Management Research This module analyses the philosophical basis COURSE DESCRIPTION for research in the management sciences, and The role of the corporate environmental manager examines a number of key methodological is becoming increasingly complex and strategic. issues and approaches. Corporate social and environmental responsibility is becoming prominent in • Business Planning for the Green Economy consumer demand and a pre-requisite for tender This module explores the process of eligibility. This necessitates a more sophisticated establishing a venture from idea generation to environmental manager who can interpret the completion of a business plan which legislative and audit requirements and deliver incorporates environmental planning and them in a manner conducive to continued management. economic development, whilst recognising the market trends. • Finance for Managers This module is designed for those who aim to The aim of this programme is to develop skills in achieve a basic understanding of financial the delivery of economic activities related to the management and control, and who require an environment, green technology and understanding of finance in order to manage an sustainability. organisation effectively.

72 BANGOR UNIVERSITY POSTGRADUATE PROSPECTUS

• Strategic Environmental Management This module is designed to provide an understanding of the principles of sustainable development, environmental legislation, environmental auditing and assessment, and green technological development. • Green Technology This module reviews the environmental consequences of economic activities, including energy generation, waste management, food and water supply and consumer goods. CAREER PROSPECTS There are an increasing number of roles in Environmental Management and Consultancy available. An Environmental Manager oversees the environmental performance of private, public and voluntary sector organisations. They develop, implement and monitor environmental strategies, policies and programmes that promote sustainable development. There are also many other roles in commercial and public sector organisations carrying out impact assessments to identify, assess and reduce an organisation’s environmental risks and financial costs. For further course details, please see: www.bangor.ac.uk/go/pg/business

39450 BU PG Prospectus 2015_2018 2014-09-10 10:35 AM Page 73

Finance MSc/MA/MBA The MSc and MBA Finance programmes are also offered at the Bangor Business School London Centre. Please see page 98 and 100 for details. COURSE DURATION MSc/MA/MBA: 1 year full-time. All three programmes offer both January and September intakes. ENTRY REQUIREMENTS Entry to the MSc/MA/MBA Finance requires a good undergraduate degree in a relevant subject (e.g. Accounting, Banking, Finance, Business, Management and Marketing) from a university, or a similar qualification from any other institution. Alternatively, possession of a suitable professional qualification and relevant practical experience may also be accepted. In general, however, applicants are judged on their individual merits. Work experience and other factors are also considered. For MBA degrees, whilst work experience is desirable, it is not essential. International applicants are normally required to provide evidence of English language proficiency – please see page 65. COURSE DESCRIPTION The ever-changing nature of financial markets, financial institutions and business firms has made it increasingly important for finance experts to have a clear understanding of the theory and practice relating to financial market operations and corporate financial strategy. Familiarity with the most recent developments in risk appraisal, portfolio analysis, the engineering of synthetic products, modelling techniques, financial analysis and valuation are essential requirements for all those involved directly in financial activities or who wish to gain a deeper understanding of this important area of business management. The MSc/MA/MBA Finance programmes at Bangor offer you a unique opportunity to develop an appreciation of the causes and significance of current developments in the financial and corporate sectors, and to study advanced theory and practice relating to financial markets and the financial management of business firms.

Compulsory Modules (MSc): • Research Methods This module equips you with knowledge of intermediate and advanced research methods, which you will encounter in other modules and in your dissertation.

derivatives that are designed to achieve optimal risk-return outcomes, and examines the measurement and evaluation of the performance of a portfolio of investments. • International Financial Management In this module the financial management of multinational companies and the influence of macroeconomic, fiscal, currency and political environments on business and financial decision-making are examined in an international and global context.

• International Financial Markets This module provides an overview of financial instruments in a multi-currency world, taking account of insights from portfolio theory concerning the relationship between risk and return, the diversification of risk, and the pricing Optional Modules (MA) - choose 2: of assets. • Financial Modelling • Islamic Finance • Financial Modelling • Accounting Theory This module develops a combined theoretical • Advanced Financial Reporting and Regulation and practical approach to mathematical • Financial Institutions Strategic Management modelling for specialists in finance. • Financial Analysis • Islamic Banking • Financial Engineering This module develops a combined theoretical and practical approach to derivatives pricing Compulsory Modules (MBA): and financial engineering. • Organisations and People This module examines key issues arising from • Financial Econometrics contemporary research in organisational This module provides advanced coverage of behaviour and human resource management. econometric methods and practices that are used to model financial and business data. • Management Research This module analyses the philosophical basis • Financial Crises and Bank Regulation for research in the management sciences, and This module examines why banks and financial examines a number of key methodological markets are inherently vulnerable to crises, issues and approaches. and analyses the role of policy makers and institutions. • Global Financial Markets This module provides an overview of financial • Investment Strategy and Portfolio markets and instruments in a global context, Management taking account of insights from portfolio theory This module evaluates the development of concerning the relationship between risk and investment strategies for bonds, equities and derivatives that are designed to achieve optimal return, the diversification of risk, and the pricing of assets. risk-return outcomes, and examines the measurement and evaluation of the • Portfolio Management performance of a portfolio of investments. This module evaluates the development of investment strategies for bonds and equities, Optional Modules (MSc) - choose 1: which are designed to achieve optimal risk• Corporate Risk Management return outcomes. • Islamic Finance • International Financial Management • International Financial Management • Financial Institutions Strategic Management In this module the financial management of • Financial Analysis multinational companies and the influence of macroeconomic, fiscal, currency and political Compulsory Modules (MA): environments on business and financial • Research Methods decision making are examined in an This module develops knowledge of international and global context. intermediate and advanced research methods, and provides a basis in research methodology Optional Modules (MBA) – choose 3: for those who may eventually wish to pursue • International Strategic Management# • Marketing Financial Services# research degrees. • Islamic Finance • Financial Modelling • International Financial Markets • Financial Institutions Strategic Management This module provides an overview of financial • Financial Crises and Bank Regulation instruments in a multi-currency world, taking • Contemporary Issues in Management account of insights from portfolio theory • Islamic Banking* concerning the relationship between risk and return, the diversification of risk, and the pricing # Your optional modules must include Strategic of assets. Management or Marketing Financial Services or both. • Corporate Risk Management *Islamic Finance is a pre-requisite for Islamic This module provides an analysis of pure risk Banking. and its management.

The availability of parallel MSc and MA degrees in Finance allows you to choose between registering for a more technical MSc degree (including a compulsory element in Financial Econometrics), and a less technical MA degree (for which Financial Econometrics is optional). The MSc degree may be more suitable for those with some previous background in mathematics, statistics or econometrics, while the MA degree is more suitable for those who prefer to adopt a predominantly non-quantitative approach to their studies. The MBA in Finance will develop knowledgeable and capable executives, who will move quickly into key positions in the financial sector. The degree focuses on the operation of financial markets and the strategic management of financial entities. You will gain practical insight and skills in a range of financial and strategic management topics in financial services and markets. You will develop an appreciation of the causes and significance of current developments • Financial Crises and Bank Regulation in the financial and corporate sectors. Case This module examines why banks and financial studies and contemporary issues figure markets are inherently vulnerable to crises, prominently in the programme. and analyses the role of policy makers and institutions. ESRC Recognition The MA/MSc Finance programmes are recognised by the Economic and Social Research • Investment Strategy and Portfolio Management This module evaluates the development of Council (ESRC) as the first year of a 1+3 PhD investment strategies for bonds, equities and training programme.

CAREER PROSPECTS Graduates of the Bangor Business School programmes have excellent prospects for pursuing employment in a wide range of roles. Please see page 65 for more information.

BANGOR UNIVERSITY POSTGRADUATE PROSPECTUS 73

39450 BU PG Prospectus 2015_2018 2014-09-10 10:35 AM Page 74

Information Management MBA COURSE DURATION MBA: 1 year full-time. This course offers both January and September intakes.

Compulsory Modules: • Organisations and People This module examines key issues arising from contemporary research in organisational behaviour and human resource management.

ENTRY REQUIREMENTS Entry to the MBA in Information Management programme requires a good undergraduate • International Strategic Management degree in a relevant subject (e.g. Business or This module analyses strategic decisionScience) from a university, or a similar making within business. qualification from any other institution. Alternatively, possession of a suitable • Management Research professional qualification and relevant practical This module analyses the philosophical basis experience may also be accepted. In general, for research in the management sciences, and however, applicants are judged on their individual examines a number of key methodological merits. Work experience and other factors are issues and approaches. also considered. For MBA degrees, whilst work experience is desirable, it is not essential. • Web Technologies This module provides an understanding of the International applicants are normally required to basic technologies and structures for provide evidence of English language proficiency developing web applications, including internet – please see page 65. resource creation, search techniques and programming languages for creating web COURSE DESCRIPTION content. Effective information management is key to the success of any organisation. The MBA • Finance for Managers Information Management develops This module is designed for those who aim to knowledgeable and capable executives who will achieve a basic understanding of financial become managers in the IT/computing industry, management and control, and who require an or in companies in other sectors. The aim of the understanding of finance in order to manage an programme is to provide you with a range of organisation effectively. management knowledge and skills, together with a thorough foundation in information • Databases management, information technology, and its This module shows how to design a database commercial applications. The programme and intelligently query a database using SQL, includes topical case studies, and reflects and provides an introductory level of contemporary developments within the sector. understanding in database systems. The course is suitable for graduates in a wide range of disciplines, including Engineering, Finance, IT and other subjects.

• Technologies for Internet Systems This module introduces technologies and tools for Internet Systems and e-commerce systems. • Information Systems This module examines the major types and components of Information Systems, their functions, benefits and limitations. CAREER PROSPECTS Graduates of the Bangor Business School programmes have excellent prospects for pursuing employment in a wide range of roles. Please see page 65 for more information. For further course details, please see: www.bangor.ac.uk/go/pg/business

International Banking MSc The MSc International Banking programme is also offered at Bangor Business School’s London Centre. Please see page 99 for details.

COURSE DESCRIPTION • Research Methods Banking services represents a highly competitive This module develops knowledge of and rapidly changing sector in today’s global intermediate and advanced research methods, economy. This course offers students a unique and provides a basis in research methodology opportunity to study advanced theory and practice COURSE DURATION for those who may eventually wish to pursue relating to the international banking sector, and to MSc: 1 year full-time. research degrees. develop an appreciation of the causes and significance of current developments in this vitally • Bank Financial Management ENTRY REQUIREMENTS important and dynamic sector of the economy. Candidates should have a good first degree (2:ii This module provides a grounding in the nature, or higher) or equivalent from a university or strategic context and managerial functions of The MSc in International Banking provides another approved degree-awarding body. Nonfinancial management in banks, and other advanced level management and business graduate qualifications deemed to be of a financial services firms. training relating to practical issues in satisfactory standard for the purpose of postgraduate admission may also be considered. international banking, with particular reference • Financial Intermediation to issues pertaining to developing countries and Work experience is desirable. This module provides a theoretical foundation emerging markets. This involves understanding for the theory of financial intermediation, and International applicants are normally required to the practical managerial issues surrounding the examines core empirical papers in the banking provide evidence of English language proficiency running of banking/financial firms, such as bank literature. financial and strategic management; bank and – please see page 65. corporate performance; and the analysis of • Financial Engineering financial systems and markets. Also under This module provides an introduction to the key consideration will be the interactions between concepts of financial engineering and financial economic development and the design, growth, innovation from a practical perspective. operation and performance of the financial system in emerging markets. Optional Modules – choose 2: • Islamic Finance Compulsory Modules: • Financial Econometrics • Banking and Development • Financial Institutions Strategic Management This module evaluates the theory underlying • Financial Stability the policy of financial liberalisation, and examines its implementation, primarily in CAREER PROSPECTS developing countries. Graduates of Bangor Business School programmes have excellent prospects for • International Banking pursuing employment in a wide range of roles. This module examines the origins of Please see page 65 for more information. international banking, the activities of international banks, the markets in which they For further course details, please see: participate, and the sources of risk in www.bangor.ac.uk/go/pg/business international banking.

74 BANGOR UNIVERSITY POSTGRADUATE PROSPECTUS

39450 BU PG Prospectus 2015_2018 2014-09-10 10:35 AM Page 75

International Media Management MSc COURSE DURATION MSc: 1 year full-time or 2 years part-time. This course offers both January and September intakes. ENTRY REQUIREMENTS Entry to this programme requires a good undergraduate degree in a relevant subject from a university, or a similar qualification from any other institution. Alternatively, possession of a suitable professional qualification and relevant practical experience may also be accepted. In general, however, applicants are judged on their individual merits. Work experience and other factors are also considered. International applicants are normally required to provide evidence of English language proficiency – please see page 65.

COURSE DESCRIPTION The creative industries play a vital role in economic growth worldwide, accounting for some 7% of gross domestic product across Europe, over 11% in the US and up to 17-20% elsewhere. This phenomenal rate of growth provides excellent opportunities for individuals with the skills and background to take up executive roles within the sector.

Compulsory Modules: • Organisations and People This module examines key issues arising from contemporary research in organisational behaviour and human resource management. • Intellectual Property Law This module equips you with an understanding of the fundamentals of intellectual property law; the definition and scope of copyright; the authorship, ownership, duration and qualification for copyright protection; the rights of copyright owners; actions for infringement of copyright; and the defences to an infringement action.

Bringing together three outstanding Schools at Bangor University (Business; Law; Creative Studies and Media), the MSc International Media Management provides you with the intellectual development and training to develop a senior management career in this area. You will study topics such as International Strategic • Marketing Strategy Management, Marketing Strategy, Organisations This module introduces you to the and People, Intellectual Property Law, ‘fundamentals’ of marketing, by illustrating Comparative Corporate Governance, Employment strategies in a wide range of situations, and Law, Research Methods and Creative Industries, covering the various schools of thought in and will undertake a media-focussed marketing, together with relevant analytical dissertation designed to investigate and models and management practices. interrogate theory and practice in the creative economies locally and/or globally. • Creative Industries This module gives students the opportunity to analyse the development and current state of the creative industries globally.

• Research Methods The module equips you with an understanding and critical overview of key methodological issues associated with various types of research enquiry in the media, cultural and creative industries, in preparation for the dissertation. CAREER PROSPECTS Graduates of the Bangor Business School programmes have excellent prospects for pursuing employment in a wide range of roles. Please see page 65 for more information.

BANGOR UNIVERSITY POSTGRADUATE PROSPECTUS 75

39450 BU PG Prospectus 2015_2018 2014-09-10 10:35 AM Page 76

Islamic Banking and Finance MSc/MA/MBA COURSE DURATION MSc/MA/MBA: 1 year full-time. These courses offer both January and September intakes

Compulsory Modules (MSc): • Research Methods This module equips you with knowledge of intermediate and advanced research methods, ENTRY REQUIREMENTS which you will encounter in other modules and Entry to the MSc/MA/MBA in Islamic Banking and in your dissertation. Finance programmes requires a good undergraduate degree in a relevant subject (e.g. • International Financial Markets Accounting, Banking, Finance, Business, This module provides an overview of financial Management and Marketing) from a university, or instruments in a multi-currency world, taking a similar qualification from any other institution. account of insights from portfolio theory Alternatively, possession of a suitable concerning the relationship between risk and professional qualification and relevant practical return, the diversification of risk, and the pricing experience may also be accepted. In general, of assets. however, applicants are judged on their individual merits. Work experience and other factors are • Islamic Finance also considered. For MBA degrees, whilst work This module provides an insight into topical experience is desirable, it is not essential. issues relating to Islamic financial instruments and related risk management issues. International applicants are normally required to provide evidence of English language proficiency • Islamic Banking – please see page 65. This module provides an insight into the key features of Islamic banking business. COURSE DESCRIPTION Over the past two or three decades or so, Islamic • International Banking banking and finance has emerged as another This module examines the origins of viable way of financial intermediation. It has international banking, the activities of gained credibility and has spread worldwide and international banks, the markets in which they is the preferred way of banking for one fifth of participate, and the sources of risk. the world’s population. These taught MSc/MA/MBA degrees offer an opportunity to • Financial Econometrics study the structure of the Islamic banking and This module provides advanced coverage of finance industry, including its theoretical econometric methods and practices that are foundations, products, performance, Islamic used to model financial and business data. financial instruments and risk management issues. These and other topics will be studied Optional Modules (MSc) - choose 2: within the wider context of the banking and • Islamic Accounting and Financial Reporting finance industry worldwide. • Corporate Risk Management • Financial Institutions Strategic Management The MSc is suitable for those with some previous • Investment Strategy and Portfolio Management background in mathematics, statistics or • Islamic Insurance econometrics, while the MA is suitable for those who prefer a less quantitative approach to their studies. The MBA aims to develop executives who Compulsory Modules (MA): • Research Methods will progress quickly to senior management This module develops knowledge of positions in financial institutions that transact intermediate and advanced research methods, business on Islamic principles. and provides a basis in research methodology for those who may eventually wish to pursue research degrees. • International Financial Markets In this module the financial management of multinational companies and the influence of macroeconomic, fiscal, currency and political environments on business and financial decision-making are examined in an international and global context. • Islamic Finance This module provides an insight into topical issues relating to Islamic financial instruments and related risk management issues. • Islamic Banking This module provides an insight into the key features of Islamic banking business. • International Banking This module examines the origins of international banking, the activities of international banks, the markets in which they participate, and the sources of risk. • Financial Crises and Bank Regulation This module examines why banks and financial markets are inherently vulnerable to crises, and analyses the role of policy makers and institutions.

76 BANGOR UNIVERSITY POSTGRADUATE PROSPECTUS

Optional Modules (MA) - choose 2: • Islamic Accounting and Financial Reporting • Corporate Risk Management • Bank Financial Management • Financial Institutions Strategic Management • Investment Strategy and Portfolio Management • Islamic Insurance Compulsory Modules (MBA): • Organisations and People This module examines key issues arising from contemporary research in organisational behaviour and human resource management. • Management Research This module analyses the philosophical basis for research in the management sciences, and examines a number of key methodological issues and approaches. • Islamic Finance This course provides an insight into topical issues relating to Islamic financial instruments and related risk management issues. • Islamic Banking This module provides an insight into the key features of Islamic banking business. • International Banking This module examines the origins of international banking, the activities of international banks, the markets in which they participate, and the sources of risk. Optional Modules (MBA) - choose 2: • International Strategic Management# • Marketing Financial Services# • Islamic Accounting and Financial Reporting • Contemporary Issues in Management • Banking and Development • Islamic Insurance • Marketing Stratergy • Merger and Acquistion CAREER PROSPECTS Graduates of the Bangor Business School programmes have excellent prospects for pursuing employment in a wide range of roles. Please see page 65 for more information. For further course details, please see: www.bangor.ac.uk/go/pg/business

39450 BU PG Prospectus 2015_2018 2014-09-10 10:35 AM Page 77

Law and Management MBA COURSE DURATION MBA: 1 year full-time. This course offers both January and September intakes ENTRY REQUIREMENTS Entry to the MBA in Law and Management programme requires a good undergraduate degree in a relevant subject, (e.g. Law, Management, Economics, Finance, Business), from a university, or a similar qualification from any other institution. Alternatively, possession of a suitable professional qualification and relevant practical experience may also be accepted. In general, however, applicants are judged on their individual merits, work experience and other factors are also considered. International applicants are normally required to provide evidence of English language proficiency – please see page 65. COURSE DESCRIPTION In today’s global competitive marketplace, the successful corporate executive needs to understand how the legal system and legal regulation can impact on their own area of expertise. Accordingly, Bangor Business School and Bangor Law School have combined to offer an innovative suite of interdisciplinary MBA and MA programmes.

have the opportunity to examine the law and regulation that affects business in a wide range of key areas. An important objective is to provide relevant analytical training in the latest strategic, managerial, legal and commercial developments in both public and private sectors. Compulsory Modules: • Organisations and People This module examines key issues arising from contemporary research in organisational behaviour and human resource management. • Management Research This module analyses the philosophical basis for research in the management sciences, and examines a number of key methodological issues and approaches. • Comparative Corporate Governance This module examines the major corporate scandals in the US, Europe and the UK that have occurred in recent years and which have raised questions about the organisation and governance of companies, in particular large multinational organisations.

Optional Modules - choose 4#: • Marketing Strategy • International Strategic Management • Knowledge Management • Contemporary Issues in Management • New Venture Creation • Credit and Security Law • International Corporate Finance Law and Merger Law • Consumer Law • International Commercial Arbitration • Intellectual Property Law • World Trade Law • Competition Law • Industrial Property Law • International Insurance Law • International Taxation Law • Employment Law • International Environmental Law #

Your optional modules must include either Marketing Strategy or International Strategic Management and at least 2 Law options. CAREER PROSPECTS Graduates of the Bangor Business School programmes have excellent prospects for pursuing employment in a wide range of roles. Please see page 65 for more information.

• Finance for Managers This module is designed for those who aim to achieve a basic understanding of financial For further course details, please see: management and control, and who require an The MBA in Law and Management emphasises understanding of finance in order to manage an www.bangor.ac.uk/go/pg/business both professional and vocational development as organisation effectively. well as an awareness of key legal and regulatory issues that play a central role in the successful management of modern enterprises of all types and sizes. You will develop an understanding of higher-level managerial skills and concepts, and their application in practical situations. You will

Management MBA COURSE DURATION MBA: 1 year full-time. This course offers both January and September intakes

modular MBA programme which focuses on contributions of various schools of thought in developing your academic and managerial skills marketing, and examines the relevant in areas such as organisational behaviour, analytical models and management practices, marketing strategy, e-business and new venture with emphasis on the strategic importance of ENTRY REQUIREMENTS creation. An important objective is to provide marketing to all organisations. Entry to the MBA Management course requires a relevant analytical training to familiarise you with good undergraduate degree in a relevant subject, the latest strategic, managerial and industrial • Management Research (e.g. Accounting, Banking, Finance, Business, developments in both the public and private This module analyses the philosophical basis Management and Marketing) from a university, or sectors. for research in the management sciences, and a similar qualification from any other institution. examines a number of key methodological Alternatively, possession of a suitable The course provides a coherent analytical issues and approaches. professional qualification and relevant practical framework for the study of business and experience may also be accepted. In general, enterprise from a management perspective. • Finance for Managers however, applicants are judged on their individual The emphasis throughout the programme is on This module is designed for those who aim to merits, work experience and other factors are the application of contemporary, financial, achieve a basic understanding of financial also considered. managerial and strategic developments that management and control, and who require an affect real-world decision-making in the global understanding of finance in order to manage an International applicants are normally required to market place. organisation effectively. provide evidence of English language proficiency – please see page 65. We recognise that a thorough understanding of • New Venture Creation recent developments in management, This module examines the advantages and COURSE DESCRIPTION entrepreneurship, strategy, marketing and disadvantages of the various routes to business An MBA is now the globally recognised finance are essential requirements for all those start-up. qualification for senior personnel and executives involved in a management role (or those who within both the private and public sectors. As the wish to gain a deeper understanding of these Optional Modules - choose 2: impact of change, the importance of strategy and important business and management areas). • Knowledge Management intensification of competition increases, • Contemporary Issues in Management organisations are demanding managers who can Compulsory Modules: • International Financial Management contribute a depth of understanding in the • Organisations and People • European Business business community as a whole. The growing This module examines key issues arising from • Public Sector Management economic importance of entrepreneurship has contemporary research in organisational also re-emphasised the need for a clearer behaviour and human resource management. CAREER PROSPECTS understanding of the theory and practice relating Graduates of the Bangor Business School to business and management in both new and • International Strategic Management programmes have excellent prospects for existing organisations. This module analyses strategic decisionpursuing employment in a wide range of roles. making within business. Please see page 65 for more information. The MBA in Management aims to build on our long-established expertise in the area of • Marketing Strategy For further course details, please see: postgraduate training by offering a one-year This module critically evaluates the www.bangor.ac.uk/go/pg/business BANGOR UNIVERSITY POSTGRADUATE PROSPECTUS 77

39450 BU PG Prospectus 2015_2018 2014-09-10 10:35 AM Page 78

Management and Finance MSc/MA COURSE DURATION MSc/MA: 1 year full-time. These courses offer both January and September intakes

Compulsory Modules (MSc): • Research Methods This module develops knowledge of intermediate and advanced research methods, ENTRY REQUIREMENTS and provides a basis in research methodology Entry to the MSc/MA in Management and Finance for those who may eventually wish to pursue programme requires a good undergraduate research degrees. degree in a relevant subject (e.g. Accounting, Banking, Finance, Business, Management and • Organisations and People Marketing) from a university, or a similar This module examines key issues arising from qualification from any other institution. contemporary research in organisational Alternatively, possession of a suitable behaviour and human resource management. professional qualification and relevant practical experience may also be accepted. In general, • International Strategic Management however, applicants are judged on their individual This module analyses strategic decisionmerits. Work experience and other factors are making within business. also considered. • International Financial Markets International applicants are normally required to This module provides an overview of financial provide evidence of English language proficiency instruments in a multi-currency world, taking – please see page 65. account of insights from portfolio theory concerning the relationship between risk and COURSE DESCRIPTION return, the diversification of risk, and the pricing The ever-changing nature of business firms and of assets. the markets in which they operate has made it increasingly important for corporate managers • International Financial Management to have a clear understanding of the theory and In this module the financial management of practice relating to strategic management, and multinational companies and the influence of the interrelationships between the firm, its macroeconomic, fiscal, currency and political employees and its markets, and the implications environments on business and financial for corporate financial strategy. Familiarity with decision-making are examined in an the most recent developments in risk appraisal, international and global context. valuation, marketing, human resource management (HRM), organisational behaviour • New Venture Creation and strategic management are essential This module examines the advantages and requirements for all those involved directly in disadvantages of the various routes to business business, or in financing business activities, or start-up. those who wish to gain a deeper understanding of these important areas. • Financial Econometrics This module provides advanced coverage of The MA/MSc Management and Finance econometric methods and practices that are programmes at Bangor are designed to develop used to model financial and business data. your existing skills through a scheme of specialist advanced study. An important objective Optional Modules (MSc) - choose 1: is to provide you not only with an insight into • Islamic Finance organisational behaviour and strategic choices in • Financial Modelling HRM and marketing, but also with an • Knowledge Management understanding of theoretical developments • Behavioural Finance relating to corporate finance and the capital • Contemporary Issues in Management markets, and competence in the techniques • International Business required to assess the consequences for • Financial Analysis business management. These programmes • Investment Strategy and Portfolio Management provide a coherent theoretical framework for the various subject areas, but the emphasis throughout is on advanced practical application of business management and financial techniques in a real-world setting. The availability of parallel MSc and MA degrees in Management and Finance allows you to choose between registering for a more technical MSc degree (including a compulsory element in Financial Econometrics), and a less technical MA degree (for which Financial Econometrics is optional). The MSc degree may be more suitable for those with some previous background in mathematics, statistics or econometrics, while the MA degree is more suitable for those who prefer to adopt a predominantly non-quantitative approach to their studies. ESRC Recognition The MSc/MA Management and Finance programmes are recognised by the Economic and Social Research Council (ESRC) as the first year of a 1+3 PhD training programme.

78 BANGOR UNIVERSITY POSTGRADUATE PROSPECTUS

Compulsory Modules (MA): • Research Methods This module develops knowledge of intermediate and advanced research methods, and provides a basis in research methodology for those who may eventually wish to pursue research degrees. • Organisations and People This module examines key issues arising from contemporary research in organisational behaviour and human resource management. • International Strategic Management This module analyses strategic decisionmaking within business. • International Financial Markets This module provides an overview of financial instruments in a multi-currency world, taking account of insights from portfolio theory concerning the relationship between risk and return, the diversification of risk, and the pricing of assets. • International Financial Management In this module the financial management of multinational companies and the influence of macroeconomic, fiscal, currency and political environments on business and financial decision-making are examined in an international and global context. • New Venture Creation This module examines the advantages and disadvantages of the various routes to business start-up. Optional Modules (MA) - choose 2: • Islamic Finance • Knowledge Management • Behavioural Finance • Contemporary Issues in Management • Financial Analysis • Investment Strategy and Portfolio Management • Public Sector Management. CAREER PROSPECTS Graduates of the Bangor Business School programmes have excellent prospects for pursuing employment in a wide range of roles. Please see page 65 for more information. For further course details, please see: www.bangor.ac.uk/go/pg/business

39450 BU PG Prospectus 2015_2018 2014-09-10 10:35 AM Page 79

International Marketing MBA COURSE DURATION MBA: 1 year full-time. This course offers both January and September intakes ENTRY REQUIREMENTS Entry to the MBA in International Marketing course requires a good undergraduate degree in a relevant subject (e.g. Accounting, Banking, Finance, Business, Management and Marketing) from a university, or a similar qualification from any other institution. Alternatively, possession of a suitable professional qualification and relevant practical experience may also be accepted. In general, however, applicants are judged on their individual merits. Work experience and other factors are also considered. International applicants are normally required to provide evidence of English language proficiency – please see page 65. COURSE DESCRIPTION This degree is designed for graduates wishing to start, or further develop, careers in marketing. It explores the principles, theoretical concepts and practice of marketing within the context of business and management and will focus on developing academic and applied skills in marketing including advertising, brand management and loyalty, customer service, public relations and market research. The programme will also develop your knowledge and skills across a broader range of business and management subjects, including organisations, their management and the changing external environment in which they

operate. You will develop the ability to take a • Management Research strategic overview of business and organisational This module analyses the philosophical basis issues. An important objective is to provide for research in the management sciences, and relevant analytical training in the latest strategic, examines a number of key methodological managerial and industrial developments in issues and approaches. marketing both the public and private sectors. We look at marketing at local, national and global • Finance for Managers levels developing skills in strategic analysis, You will achieve a basic understanding of problem-solving and decision making. financial management and control, and an understanding of finance in order to manage an Bangor Business School has a Chartered organisation effectively. Institute of Marketing student chapter which enables our students to become involved in real • International Marketing Communication life issues and to enjoy hands-on experience of This module examines the processes by which Marketing. integrated marketing communications programmes are planned, developed and Compulsory Modules: executed. • International Marketing This module provides an overview of Optional Modules - choose 2: contemporary international marketing issues Must include ONE of the following: and trends as well as the international • International Strategic Management marketing planning process. • Organisations and People • Consumer Behaviour in a Global & Digital World This module will introduce students to the main theories which purport to explain consumer behaviour from the perspective of gaining an understanding of the consumer as an individual, as well as how consumers are influenced by their cultural environment.

Plus choose ONE of the following: • New Venture Creation • Knowledge Management • Contemporary Issues in Management • Marketing Financial Services • Public Sector Management • Global Business and Culture • International Business

• Marketing Strategy This module critically evaluates the contributions of various schools of thought in marketing, and examines the relevant analytical models and management practices, with emphasis on the strategic importance of marketing to all organisations.

CAREER PROSPECTS Graduates of the Bangor Business School programmes have excellent prospects for pursuing employment in a wide range of roles. Please see page 65 for more information.

Accounting / Banking / Economics / Finance / Management Studies PhD/MPhil Bangor Business School’s PhD programme has been described by external experts as ‘second to none in the UK’. In the most recent Research Assessment Exercise (RAE), Accounting and Finance at Bangor was rated as the best in the UK for the quality of research conducted by its staff, and we also have ESRC recognition for our research training (MA to PhD) in Banking and Finance. Our current and recent PhD students are a lively and friendly community. Their areas of research are as diverse and interesting as their backgrounds.

COURSE DESCRIPTION For a PhD degree, you are expected to present the results of your research in a thesis, which represents a significant original contribution to knowledge in the subject area studied, and to undergo a viva voce examination. For an MPhil (Master of Philosophy) degree, you are expected to successfully complete an approved programme of supervised research, and to present your results in a thesis. You can also do a one-year Masters by Research on a specific research topic.

ENTRY REQUIREMENTS Applicants for entry to an MPhil degree should hold a first or upper second-class degree in a relevant subject, such as economics, finance, accounting, business or management. Applicants for entry to a PhD degree must hold a Masters degree in a relevant subject – normally, a distinction is required. It is possible to register initially for an MPhil degree, and subject to satisfactory progress, to transfer the registration to a PhD degree at the end of the first year.

All research students are allocated a supervisor with a research interest in the chosen topic of study. Your supervisor will provide advice and guidance on your choice of topic; advice on the literature in your field and how to access it; advice on your choice of research methods; advice on thesis structure, content and presentation; critical appraisal of drafts of your thesis; and in the case of PhD students, advice on preparation for your viva voce examination.

International applicants are normally required to provide evidence of English language proficiency – please see page 65.

Bangor Business School is now ranked amongst the world’s top 15 institutions for research in the field of Banking. (RePEc, July 2014)

BANGOR UNIVERSITY POSTGRADUATE PROSPECTUS 79

STAFF PROFILE

39450 BU PG Prospectus 2015_2018 2014-09-10 10:35 AM Page 80

Professor Dermot Cahill, Head of Bangor Law School and Deputy Head of the College of Business, Law, Education and Social Sciences Professor Dermot Cahill is a graduate of the College of Europe and the National University of Ireland, and is a Solicitor. His books are published by Oxford University Press (European Law); Cambridge University Press (Competition Law); and Round Hall Sweet & Maxwell (Corporate Finance Law). His co-edited book, European Law, recently celebrated the publication of its 5th edition. Professor Cahill has a considerable record as a leading funded researcher. His most recent success is his award by the European Union INTERREG programme of a €3.7 million Major Research Grant (for the Winning in Tendering Project). The grant was awarded to conduct research into EU and national public procurement law barriers and related process issues in Ireland and Wales, in conjunction with Dublin City University. Professor Cahill is Inaugural Director of the

80 BANGOR UNIVERSITY POSTGRADUATE PROSPECTUS

Institute for Competition and Procurement Studies at the Law School. In recognition of his expertise, he was invited to chair the Inside Government conference at Westminster in London in April 2012 on Transforming Public Sector Procurement. His co-authored ‘Barriers to Procurement Opportunity Report’ has been formally adopted as part of Welsh Government policy to help reform public procurement in Wales. Professor Cahill teaches on both the LLB and LLM programmes at the Law School.

39450 BU PG Prospectus 2015_2018 2014-09-10 10:35 AM Page 81

Bangor Law School About the School Bangor Law School is an innovative and expanding international law school. The academic experience is enriched both by a programme of regular distinguished guest lectures and seminars and the activities of the award-winning Bangor Students' Law Society. A hallmark of the Bangor LLM programme is small class sizes with frequent staff contact with students. Our courses address contemporary issues relevant to the business and political environment worldwide and they will equip students with the knowledge and skills required for operating successfully in the global marketplace. Staff and facilities Bangor Law School’s staff are graduates of many of the world’s leading universities, such as Cambridge, College of Europe, Queen Mary, Renmin, Tufts and Queens Belfast. Several have been previously employed as professionals within the legal sector in roles such as judge, solicitor and magistrate. This expertise is reflected in the teaching of Masters courses, as well as extensive research activity and projects such as the €3.7 million ‘Winning in Tendering’ public procurement research project, led by Head of School Professor Dermot Cahill. Coupled with this rich combination of backgrounds, staff members’ research reflects expertise in fields such as EU Law, Corporate Finance Law, Maritime Law, International Law, Commercial Law, Company Law, Administrative Law, Law and Religion, Child and Family Law, Intellectual Property Law, Maritime Law, International Criminal Law and International Human Rights Law. Developing young professionals through MPhil and PhD research training is central to the School’s mission and the doctoral programme makes an important contribution to the training of future researchers. In order to support our students throughout the course of their studies, both the Law School and the University provide a range of learning resources supported by experienced staff. Facilities include an extensive Law Library which has benefited from substantial investment and is overseen by a dedicated Law Librarian who provides specialist support and advice to students. It includes printed and electronic resources that reflect current teaching and research within the School. The collection includes reference, statutes, law reports, journals, books and pamphlets, official publications, newspapers, European Documentation Centre and online databases.

Overview of academic areas We offer a suite of LLM programmes reflecting the School's expertise and commitment to high level postgraduate teaching. These include a range of LLM degrees, focusing in particular on International Commercial and Business Law; Banking Law; Intellectual Property Law; Global Trade Law; Criminology; International Law; Public Procurement Law and Strategy and Maritime Law. The School also provides expert PhD and MPhil supervision in a range of legal areas. The Law School has also joined forces with Bangor Business School, which has been ranked No1 in the UK for research in Accounting, Banking and Finance, to offer four joint Masters degrees combining Law with Banking and Management disciplines. These programmes will prepare key executives who will play a central role in the successful management of modern enterprises, and capable banking executives and banking lawyers who will move into key positions in the financial sector. We also offer a general LLM which allows students to select from a range of modules on offer by the School. To help students achieve their full potential, the School offers a range of scholarships and bursaries for postgraduate students. Links with Industry Through our continuous work in developing contacts with legal practitioners across the UK, the School is able to offer students an impressive programme of work placements. Work placements offer a unique opportunity to experience the type of careers Law graduates might wish to pursue, from Solicitors' Practices to Local Government. Placements enable students to make informed decisions about what to do after graduation, be it to continue with their legal studies, pursue research in a particular field or embark on their career. Bangor Law School arranges a regular programme of careers talks aimed at encouraging students to think about the career paths they wish to pursue and to help them take the next step towards their particular goals. Career Prospects Graduates of Bangor Law School Masters degrees will have excellent prospects for employment in a range of roles in law firms, local government, the civil service, industry, management, international organisations and more. Graduates will also be equipped to pursue further research (PhD/MPhil) if they so wish.

COURSE LIST: LLM • Executive LLM in Public Procurement Law and Strategy • International Commercial and Business Law • International Intellectual Property Law • International Law • International Law (specialising in European Law) • International Law (specialising in Global Trade Law) • International Law (specialising in International Criminal Law and International Human Rights Law) • Law (General) • Law and Banking • Law and Criminology • Law of the Sea • Maritime Law • Public Procurement Law and Strategy MA • Banking and Law • Criminology and Law MBA • Banking and Law • Law and Management PhD/MPhil/LLM by Research • Law

TO FIND OUT MORE: Tel: +44 (0) 1248 383231 E-mail: law.pg@bangor.ac.uk www.bangor.ac.uk/law

English Language requirements International applicants are normally required to provide evidence of English language proﬁciency. LLM degrees: • IELTS 6.5 (with no individual score lower than 6.0 MBA and MA degrees: • IELTS 6.0 (with no individual score lower than 5.5) PhD/MPhil/LLM by Research: • IELTS 6.5 (with no individual score lower than 6.0) Applicants who have not achieved the required level can take English language courses at the University’s English Language Centre prior to their course.

All module information is correct at the time of going to print and is subject to change. Please refer to the website for the most current information: www.bangor.ac.uk/law

BANGOR UNIVERSITY POSTGRADUATE PROSPECTUS 81

39450 BU PG Prospectus 2015_2018 2014-09-10 10:35 AM Page 82

International Commercial and Business Law LLM COURSE DURATION LLM: 1 year full-time. This course offers both January and September intakes.

Compulsory Module: • Legal Research Methods This module addresses the development of the necessary legal skills and research methods to ENTRY REQUIREMENTS enable the study of legal systems and specific We accept applications from graduates of LLB legal issues at Masters level. (Exemptions from this module may be granted if (Single and Joint Honours) and related subjects a student has achieved the learning outcomes in such as Accountancy, Finance, Banking and another way, e.g. already having completed an Management Studies, Politics, International Relations and Social Sciences. For LLB graduates LLM or LLB with a research or dissertation element). and those with a related degree, we normally require a minimum of a lower second class degree from an approved University. Applications Optional Modules - choose 5: • Competition Law with degrees in unrelated disciplines will be considered on a case by case basis. Alternatively, • Industrial Property Law • International Property Law possession of a suitable professional qualification or relevant practical experience may • Intellectual Property Law be accepted. In general, all applicants are judged • International Banking Law • International Commercial Arbitration Law on their individual merits. Work experience and • International Sales Law other factors are also taken into consideration. • World Trade Law International applicants are normally required to • Comparative Corporate Governance provide evidence of English language proficiency. • International Taxation Law • Employment Law See page 81 for more details. • International Environmental Law • EU Internal Market Law COURSE DESCRIPTION An exciting, commercially-relevant programme CAREER PROSPECTS that provides an in-depth curriculum and Graduates of Bangor Law School have excellent thorough training in law, policy and legal prospects for pursuing employment in a wide regulation that governs key areas of commerce range of roles. Please see page 81 for more and industry worldwide. This course is information. particularly relevant for those who anticipate careers in business and industry, or intend to For further course details, please see: specialise in legal practice in the commercial www.bangor.ac.uk/go/pg/law area, and wish to develop expertise and handson ability to address and manage business development within a legal framework, whether in the UK or internationally.

“After completing the course at Bangor Law School, I returned to China to prepare for the Chinese National Judicial Examination. I am now a fully qualified Chinese Lawyer with a major International firm based in China. I am so grateful for everything that Bangor and the Law School have offered me. At Bangor, I enjoyed one of the most wonderful experiences of my life and I have known the most sincere and helpful people that I have ever met. Without their help and knowledge, I would not have achieved all this.” HONGBO HEI, from China

International Intellectual Property Law LLM COURSE DURATION LLM: 1 year full-time. This course offers both January and September intakes. ENTRY REQUIREMENTS We accept applications from graduates of LLB (Single and Joint Honours) and related subjects such as Accountancy, Finance, Banking and Management Studies, Politics, International Relations and the Social Sciences. For LLB graduates and those with a related degree, we normally require a minimum of a lower second class degree from an approved University. Applications with degrees in unrelated disciplines will be considered on a case by case basis for students with degrees in other subjects. Alternatively, possession of a suitable professional qualification or relevant practical experience may be accepted. In general, all applicants are judged on their individual merits. Work experience and other factors are also taken into consideration.

COURSE DESCRIPTION This programme will enable you to develop your expertise in Intellectual Property Law. The course will include comparative studies of various national jurisdictions, providing national and international perspectives on Intellectual Property Law and International Trade Law. You will develop a deep knowledge and understanding of Intellectual Property theory, and also the rationale for Intellectual Property Rights protection. Through studies of various jurisdictions, you will develop an understanding of why Intellectual Property protection varies in different parts of the world. Through studies of Case Law from different jurisdictions, you will develop an understanding of how the social context can impact on International Intellectual Property Law issues. Comparative Law assessment skills will be developed to a high level as you will be studying both national and international law regimes.

International applicants are normally required to Compulsory Modules: provide evidence of English language proficiency. • Legal Research Methods See page 81 for more details. This module addresses the development of the necessary legal skills and research methods to enable the study of legal systems and specific legal issues at Masters level. • Intellectual Property Law This module will consist of seminars on the fundamentals of intellectual property law: the definition and scope of copyright; and the authorship, ownership, duration and qualification for copyright protection.

82 BANGOR UNIVERSITY POSTGRADUATE PROSPECTUS

• Dissertation A dissertation on any topic within International Intellectual Property Law. Optional Modules - choose 3: • EU Internal Markets Law • Global Trade Law • Comparative Corporate Governance • International Commercial Arbitration • International Sales Law • International Environmental Law CAREER PROSPECTS Graduates of Bangor Law School have excellent prospects for pursuing employment in a wide range of roles. Please see page 81 for more information. For further course details, please see: www.bangor.ac.uk/go/pg/law

39450 BU PG Prospectus 2015_2018 2014-09-10 10:35 AM Page 83

International Law LLM COURSE DURATION LLM: 1 year full-time. This course offers both January and September intakes.

effectiveness in a globalising world. The programme will equip you to respond effectively to the wide range of intellectual and professional challenges facing contemporary International Lawyers. The LLM in International Law will equip you to deal with both case work and policy making.

CAREER PROSPECTS Graduates of Bangor Law School have excellent prospects for pursuing employment in a wide range of roles. Please see page 81 for more information.

ENTRY REQUIREMENTS We normally require a minimum of a 2.ii degree from an approved university in a related subject For further course details, please see: (e.g. Law, Management Studies, Politics, www.bangor.ac.uk/go/pg/law International Relations, the Social Sciences). Compulsory Modules: Applications with degrees in unrelated • Legal Research Methods disciplines will be considered on a case by case This module addresses the development of the basis. Alternatively, possession of a suitable necessary legal skills and research methods to professional qualification or relevant practical enable the study of legal systems and specific experience may be accepted. In general, all legal issues at Masters level. applicants are judged on their individual merits. Work experience and other factors are also taken • Public International Law into consideration. This module will teach you about the fundamental values, principles and rules of International applicants are normally required to Public International Law. This will be a provide evidence of English language proficiency. balanced course, with the essential elements of See page 81 for more details. history, theory, law and practice being presented. COURSE DESCRIPTION This programme is designed to equip you with a • Dissertation general yet comprehensive education in a range A dissertation on any International Law topic. of areas within International Law. The course will enable you to master the basic principles of the Optional Modules - choose 4: discipline and to explore advanced level theories, • International Criminal Law as well as understand the many traditional and • International Human Rights Law contemporary challenges in International Law. • Children’s Rights in Domestic and You will have a wide range of International Law International Law options to choose from, and may therefore • EU Internal Markets Law acquire broad as opposed to specialised • Competition Law knowledge. • Global Trade Law • Comparative Corporate Governance Through carefully designed course work and • International Banking Law varied teaching approaches, you will acquire the • International Commercial Arbitration intellectual open-ness, technical expertise and • Intellectual Property Law critical thinking abilities that are necessary for • International Law of Armed Conﬂict

International Law (specialising in European Law) LLM COURSE DURATION LLM: 1 year full-time. This course offers both January and September intakes.

Through carefully designed course work and varied teaching approaches, you will acquire the intellectual open-ness, technical expertise and critical thinking abilities that are necessary for effectiveness in a globalising world. The programme will equip you to respond effectively to the wide range of intellectual and professional challenges facing those working on European legal issues. The LLM in International Law (specialising in European Law) will equip you to deal with both case work and policy making.

ENTRY REQUIREMENTS We normally require a minimum of a 2.ii degree from an approved university in a related subject (e.g. Law, Management Studies, Politics, International Relations, the Social Sciences). Applications with degrees in unrelated disciplines will be considered on a case by case basis. Alternatively, possession of a suitable professional qualification or relevant practical Compulsory Modules: experience may be accepted. In general, all • Legal Research Methods applicants are judged on their individual merits. This module addresses the development of the Work experience and other factors are also taken necessary legal skills and research methods to into consideration. enable the study of legal systems and specific legal issues at Masters level. International applicants are normally required to provide evidence of English language proficiency. • Public International Law See page 81 for more details. This module will teach you about the fundamental values, principles and rules of COURSE DESCRIPTION Public International Law. This will be a This programme will focus on developing balanced course, with the essential elements of expertise within European Law, on top of a broad history, theory, law and practice being understanding of International Law. You will presented. develop the skills and knowledge required to operate as a European legal specialist. • EU Internal Markets Law This module examines the main body of legal In addition to the foundational courses in Legal principles which underpin the creation of the Research Methods and Public International Law, EU Internal Market. you will be required to study EU Internal Markets Law, Competition Law, and write a dissertation • Competition Law on a topic within European law. The remaining This module considers the theory of courses can be chosen from a range of relevant competition as well as comparative competition options. law regimes.

• Dissertation A dissertation on any topic within European Law. Optional Modules – choose 2: • European Human Rights Law • Global Trade Law • International Commercial Arbitration • Intellectual Property Law • Internatioal Environmental Law CAREER PROSPECTS Graduates of Bangor Law School have excellent prospects for pursuing employment in a wide range of roles. Please see page 81 for more information.

BANGOR UNIVERSITY POSTGRADUATE PROSPECTUS 83

39450 BU PG Prospectus 2015_2018 2014-09-10 10:35 AM Page 84

International Law (specialising in International Criminal Law and International Human Rights Law) LLM COURSE DURATION LLM: 1 year full-time. This course offers both January and September intakes.

Through carefully designed course work and varied teaching approaches, you will acquire the intellectual open-ness, technical expertise and critical thinking abilities that are necessary for effectiveness in a globalising world. The programme will equip you to respond effectively to the wide range of intellectual and professional challenges facing those working on legal issues concerning the human person in International Law. The LLM in International Law (specialising in International Criminal Law and International Human Rights Law) will equip you to deal with both case work and policy making.

ENTRY REQUIREMENTS We normally require a minimum of a 2.ii degree from an approved university in a related subject (e.g. Law, Management Studies, Politics, International Relations, the Social Sciences). Applications with degrees in unrelated disciplines will be considered on a case by case basis. Alternatively, possession of a suitable professional qualification or relevant practical experience may be accepted. In general, all applicants are judged on their individual merits. Compulsory Modules: Work experience and other factors are also taken • Legal Research Methods into consideration. This module addresses the development of the necessary legal skills and research methods to International applicants are normally required to enable the study of legal systems and specific provide evidence of English language proficiency. legal issues at Masters level. See page 81 for more details. • Public International Law COURSE DESCRIPTION This module will teach you about the This programme is designed to help you become fundamental values, principles and rules of an expert in the areas of International Law that Public International Law. This will be a balanced directly concern the human person course, with the essential elements of history, International Criminal Law and International theory, law and practice being presented. Human Rights Law - whilst mastering the discipline of International Law of which they are • International Criminal Law part. In addition to the foundational modules in This module will provide you with a balanced Legal Research Methods and Public International and thorough understanding of the Law, you will be required to study International fundamentals of International Criminal Law. Criminal Law, International Human Rights Law and write a dissertation on a topic within • International Human Rights Law International Criminal Law or International The objective of this module is to provide you Human Rights Law. The remaining modules can with a broad yet thorough understanding of be chosen from a range of relevant options. International Human Rights Law, covering various aspects of history, theory, politics, law and practice.

• Dissertation A dissertation on any topic within International Criminal Law or International Human Rights Law. Optional Modules - choose 2: • Children’s Rights and the Law • International Law of Armed Conﬂict • International Environmental Law CAREER PROSPECTS Graduates of Bangor Law School have excellent prospects for pursuing employment in a wide range of roles. Please see page 81 for more information. For further course details, please see: www.bangor.ac.uk/go/pg/law

International Law (specialising in Global Trade Law) LLM COURSE DURATION LLM: 1 year full-time. This course offers both January and September intakes.

COURSE DESCRIPTION • Global Trade Law This programme is designed to help you become This module studies aspects of the regulation of an expert in Global Trade Law, whilst mastering international trade through the General the discipline of International Law of which it is Agreement on Tariffs and Trade (GATT) and the ENTRY REQUIREMENTS part. The programme will focus on key aspects of World Trade Organisation. We normally require a minimum of a 2.ii degree International Law and Global Trade Law and the from an approved university in a related subject development of skills and knowledge required to • Public International Law (e.g. Law, Management Studies, Politics, operate as International Lawyers in an This module will teach you about the International Relations, the Social Sciences). increasingly globalised world. fundamental values, principles and rules of Applications with degrees in unrelated Public International Law. This will be a disciplines will be considered on a case by case Global Trade Law and Public International Law balanced module, with the essential elements basis. Alternatively, possession of a suitable will be compulsory modules, and a range of of history, theory, law and practice being professional qualification or relevant practical carefully designed optional modules will allow presented. experience may be accepted. In general, all you to focus more on your areas of interest. applicants are judged on their individual merits. Throughout the course, basic principles and • Dissertation Work experience and other factors are also taken advanced level theories will be studied and the A dissertation on any topic within Global Trade into consideration. many traditional and contemporary challenges Law in International Law and Global Trade Law will International applicants are normally required to be explored. The course will combine a balanced Optional Modules - choose 3: provide evidence of English language proficiency. approach to law, theory, politics and practice. • EU Internal Markets Law See page 81 for more details. • Competition Law Through carefully designed course work and • International Commercial Arbitration varied teaching approaches, you will acquire the • Intellectual Property Law intellectual open-ness, technical expertise and • Comparative Corporate Governance critical thinking abilities that are necessary for • International Banking and Capital Markets Law effectiveness in a globalising world. The programme will equip you to respond effectively CAREER PROSPECTS to the wide range of intellectual and professional Graduates of Bangor Law School have excellent challenges facing contemporary International prospects for pursuing employment in a wide Trade Lawyers. The LLM in International Law range of roles. Please see page 81 for more (specialising in Global Trade Law) will equip you information. to deal with both case work and policy making. For further course details, please see: Compulsory Modules: www.bangor.ac.uk/go/pg/law • Legal Research Methods This module addresses the development of the necessary legal skills and research methods to enable the study of legal systems and specific legal issues at Masters level.

84 BANGOR UNIVERSITY POSTGRADUATE PROSPECTUS

39450 BU PG Prospectus 2015_2018 2014-09-10 10:35 AM Page 85

Law (General) LLM COURSE DURATION LLM: 1 year full-time. This course offers both January and September intakes. ENTRY REQUIREMENTS We accept applications from graduates of LLB and other disciplines. For LLB graduates, we normally require a minimum of a lower second class degree from an approved university. Applications with degrees in unrelated disciplines will be considered on a case by case basis. Alternatively, possession of a suitable professional qualification or relevant practical experience may be accepted. In general, all applicants are judged on their individual merits. Work experience and other factors are also taken into consideration.

COURSE DESCRIPTION For the non-specialist student, this general LLM permits you to pick and mix modules from the specialist schemes. The general LLM consists of a compulsory module in Legal Research Methods plus taught modules, selected from the list below. The dissertation could be on any legal topic subject to approval by the Law School.

CAREER PROSPECTS Graduates of Bangor Law School have excellent prospects for pursuing employment in a wide range of roles. Please see page 81 for more information. For further course details, please see: www.bangor.ac.uk/go/pg/law

Compulsory Module: • Legal Research Methods This module addresses the development of the necessary legal skills and research methods to enable the study of legal systems and specific legal issues at Masters level. (Exemptions from this module may be granted if a student has achieved the learning outcomes in another way, e.g. already having completed an International applicants are normally required to LLM or LLB with a research or dissertation provide evidence of English language proficiency. element). See page 81 for more details. Optional Modules: • Competition Law • Marine Insurance • Intellectual Property Law • International Banking and Capital Markets Law • International Commercial Arbitration • International Sales Law • Global Trade Law • Comparative Corporate Governance • International Taxation Law • Employment Law • Law and Devolution in Wales and Europe • International Environmental Law • EU Internal Market Law • Carriage of Goods by Sea

Law and Banking LLM COURSE DURATION LLM: 1 year full-time. This course offers both January and September intakes.

• The main banking reforms brought about by the • Employment Law credit crunch • International Environmental Law • The Eurozone sovereign debt crisis • Islamic Finance • Islamic Banking ENTRY REQUIREMENTS This programme will highlight the many • Investment Strategy and Portfolio Management We accept applications from graduates of LLB challenges facing banking policy formulators and (Single and Joint Honours) and related subjects will enable you to discuss and debate potential CAREER PROSPECTS such as Accountancy, Finance, Banking and solutions to such problems. You will have a wide Employment opportunities for graduates of this Management Studies, Politics, International range of modules to choose from, and may programme will include work with international Relations and the Social Sciences. For LLB therefore acquire broad as opposed to law firms; banks or investment firms (as ingraduates and those with a related degree, we specialised knowledge. house counsel); specialised banks or central normally require a minimum of a lower second banks e.g. European Investment Bank, EBRD, the class degree from an approved university. Compulsory Modules: ECB (the EU’s central bank), the African Applications with degrees in unrelated • Legal Research Methods Development Bank, the IMF and the World Bank; disciplines will be considered on a case by case This module addresses the development of the national financial regulatory authorities and basis. Alternatively, possession of a suitable necessary legal skills and research methods to international organisations such as the World professional qualification or relevant practical enable the study of legal systems and specific Trade Organisation and the European Union; experience may be accepted. In general, all legal issues at Masters level. international courts and tribunals; ‘think tanks’ applicants are judged on their individual merits. and research centres, and government (e.g. Work experience and other factors are also taken • International Banking & Capital Markets Law Ministry of Finance). Having taken one of our into consideration. International applicants are This module will provide you with a sound programmes, there will, of course, also be normally required to provide evidence of English understanding of the law and practice of possibilities for academically inclined students to language proficiency. See page 81 for more modern international banking. pursue careers in teaching and research. details. • Dissertation For further course details, please see: COURSE DESCRIPTION A dissertation on any topic within Law and www.bangor.ac.uk/go/pg/law This programme is designed to equip you with a Banking. general yet comprehensive education in a range of areas within International Banking Law. The Optional Modules - choose 6: course will enable you to master the basic • Competition Law principles of the discipline (viewed from an • International Commercial Arbitration international perspective) and to explore in more • Global Trade Law depth themes including: • Comparative Corporate Governance • The role and powers of regulatory bodies and • EU Internal Market Law central banks (principally, the UK, EU and US) • Maritime Insurance • Analysis of the UK and EU banking systems, to • Financial Institutions Strategic Management include the notion of ‘passporting’ of credit • Banking and Development institution and investment firm activities within • International Banking the EU • Corporate Risk Management BANGOR UNIVERSITY POSTGRADUATE PROSPECTUS 85

39450 BU PG Prospectus 2015_2018 2014-09-10 10:35 AM Page 86

Law and Criminology LLM / Criminology and Law MA COURSE DURATION MA: 1 year full-time. LLM: 1 year full-time. This course offers both January and September intakes.

COURSE DESCRIPTION • International Case Studies in Criminology The LLM Law and Criminology and the MA and Criminal Justice Criminology and Law are offered by the Law This module aims to provide an internationally School in co-operation with the School of Social comparative perspective on key areas of Sciences and will provide you with postgraduate criminological concern. ENTRY REQUIREMENTS level knowledge and skills in the interdisciplinary We accept applications from graduates of area of criminology and law. They build on • Forensic Linguistics in Court Criminology and Criminal Justice, of LLB (Single criminological and legal skills and knowledge so This module focuses on established principles and Joint Honours) and related subjects such as as to provide specialist training in criminology, and theories of Linguistics as they apply to Politics, and the Social Sciences. Normally, we criminal justice and legal research. The course discourse which occurs in the court room, the require a good undergraduate degree. An upper programmes enable you to develop an use of forensic linguistics as an expertise, and second class (or equivalent) is desirable, but international perspective on crime, justice and the analysis of the different types of language applications from candidates with a lower law through national and cross-national which take place in the court room. second class degree and professional approaches and case studies of other societies, qualifications and/or appropriate experience will and/or ‘cutting edge’ issues in contemporary • International Criminal Law also be considered. In general, all applicants are criminology and law. You will also acquire a wide This module will provide you with a balanced judged on their individual merits. Work range of transferable skills. and thorough understanding of the experience and other factors are also taken into fundamentals of International Criminal Law. consideration. Those undertaking the LLM programme will be required to submit a Law-based dissertation, • International Law of Armed Conﬂict (MA only) International applicants are normally required to whilst those on the MA degree will complete a This module aims to advance critical provide evidence of English language proficiency. Criminology-based dissertation. understanding of the principles of International See page 81 for more details. Law applicable to armed conflicts. Compulsory Modules: • Key Issues in Crime and Justice CAREER PROSPECTS This module is organised into four main Graduates of Bangor Law School have excellent sections which offer a thorough grounding in prospects for pursuing employment in a wide key issues of comparative criminology and range of roles. Please see page 81 for more criminal justice. information. • Legal Research Methods (LLM only) For further course details, please see: The course aims to familiarise you with the key www.bangor.ac.uk/go/pg/law disciplinary methodologies employed in legal, socio-legal and commercial studies, and to equip you with the necessary skills to write reports, essays and research papers in any one of these fields, with the final aim of adequate preparation for carrying out an independent research project of your own (the dissertation).

Law and Management MBA COURSE DURATION MBA: 1 year full-time. This course offers both January and September intakes. ENTRY REQUIREMENTS Entry to the MBA in Law and Management programme requires a good undergraduate degree in a relevant subject, (e.g. Law, Management, Economics, Finance, Business) from a university, or a similar qualification from any other institution. Alternatively, possession of a suitable professional qualification and relevant practical experience may also be accepted. In general, however, applicants are judged on their individual merits. Work experience and other factors are also taken into consideration.

International applicants are normally required to • Management Research provide evidence of English language proficiency. This module analyses the philosophical basis See page 81 for more details. for research in the management sciences, and examines a number of key methodological COURSE DESCRIPTION issues and approaches. In today’s global competitive marketplace, the successful corporate executive needs to • Comparative Corporate Governance understand how the legal system and legal Major corporate scandals in the US, Europe and regulation can impact on their own area of the UK in recent years have raised questions expertise. Accordingly, Bangor Business School about the organisation and governance of and Bangor Law School have combined to offer companies, in particular large multinational an innovative suite of interdisciplinary MBA and organisations. MA programmes. • Finance for Managers The MBA in Law and Management emphasises This module is designed for those who aim to both professional and vocational development as achieve a basic understanding of financial well as an awareness of key legal and regulatory management and control, and who require an issues that play a central role in the successful understanding of finance in order to manage an management of modern enterprises of all types organisation effectively. and sizes. You will develop an understanding of higher-level managerial skills and concepts, and their application in practical situations. You will

86 BANGOR UNIVERSITY POSTGRADUATE PROSPECTUS

Optional Modules - choose 4#: • International Corporate Finance Law and Merger Regulation Law • Consumer Law • Marketing Strategy • Strategic Management • Knowledge Management • Contemporary Issues in Management • New Venture Creation • International Commercial Arbitration • Intellectual Property Law • World Trade Law • Competition Law • Industrial Property Law • International Insurance Law • International Taxation Law • Employment Law • International Environmental Law #

Your optional modules must include either Marketing Strategy or Strategic Management and at least 2 Law Options. CAREER PROSPECTS Graduates of Bangor Law School have excellent prospects for pursuing employment in a wide range of roles. Please see page 81 for more information. For further course details, please see: www.bangor.ac.uk/go/pg/law

39450 BU PG Prospectus 2015_2018 2014-09-10 10:35 AM Page 87

Banking and Law MA/MBA COURSE DURATION Compulsory Modules (MA): MA/MBA: 1 year full-time. This course offers both • Research Methods January and September intakes. This module develops knowledge of intermediate and advanced research methods, ENTRY REQUIREMENTS and provides a basis in research methodology Entry to the MA/MBA in Banking and Law for those who may eventually wish to pursue requires a good undergraduate degree in a research degrees. relevant subject, (e.g. Law, Banking, Economics, Finance, Accounting or Management) from a • Bank Financial Management university, or a similar qualification from any This module provides a grounding in the nature, other institution. Alternatively, possession of a strategic context and managerial functions of suitable professional qualification and relevant financial management in banks, and other practical experience may also be accepted. In financial services firms. general, however, applicants are judged on their individual merits. Work experience and other • International Banking factors are also taken into consideration. For This module examines the origins of MBA degrees, whilst work experience is international banking, the activities of desirable, it is not essential. international banks, the markets in which they participate, and the sources of risk. International applicants are normally required to provide evidence of English language proficiency. • Financial Institutions Strategic Management See page 81 for more details. This module examines the main theoretical and practical issues concerning banking business. COURSE DESCRIPTION The MA in Banking and Law is an • Financial Crises and Bank Regulation interdisciplinary programme that will enable you This module examines why banks and financial to study key legal and regulatory developments markets are inherently vulnerable to crises, affecting the financial sector. This includes the and analyses the role of policy makers and regulation of financial services, security institutions. instruments, corporate finance, arbitration and other issues affecting modern banks at UK, EU • International Banking & Capital Markets Law and international level. The MA degree is suitable This module will provide a sound for those who wish to adopt a predominantly understanding of the law and practice of non-quantitative approach to their studies. modern international banking, including the regulation and prudential supervision of banks The MBA in Banking and Law will develop in the UK and EU in the areas of capital knowledgeable and capable banking executives adequacy and risk management. and banking lawyers who will move quickly into key positions in the financial sector. The degree focuses on the financial and strategic management of banks and other financial institution as well as the increasingly complex legal and regulatory structures within which banks and their executives have to operate. The legal issues will cover a wide range of topics at UK, EU and international level with which a modern banker needs to be familiar. Case studies and contemporary issues figure prominently in the programme.

Compulsory Modules (MBA): • Organisations and People This module examines key issues arising from contemporary research in organisational behaviour and human resource management. • Management Research This module analyses the philosophical basis for research in the management sciences, and examines a number of key methodological issues and approaches. • Bank Financial Management This module provides a grounding in the nature, strategic context and managerial functions of financial management in banks and other financial services firms. • International Banking This module examines the origins of international banking, the activities of international banks, the markets in which they participate, and the sources of risk. • Financial Institutions Strategic Management This module examines the main theoretical and practical issues concerning banking business. • International Banking & Capital Markets Law This module will provide a sound understanding of the law and practice of modern international banking. Optional Modules (MA and MBA) - choose 2: • Comparative Corporate Governance • International Commercial Arbitration • Intellectual Property Law • World Trade Law • Competition Law • Industrial Property Law • International Insurance Law • International Taxation Law • Employment Law • International Environmental Law • International Corporate Finance Law and Merger Regulation Law • Consumer Law CAREER PROSPECTS Graduates of Bangor Law School have excellent prospects for pursuing employment in a wide range of roles. Please see page 81 for more information. For further course details, please see: www.bangor.ac.uk/go/pg/law

PhD, MPhil and LLM by Research The Law School provides expert PhD and MPhil supervision in a range of legal areas. For a PhD degree, candidates are expected to present the results of research in a thesis which represents a significant original contribution to knowledge in the subject area studied, and to undergo a viva voce examination. For an MPhil degree, candidates are expected to successfully complete an approved programme of supervised research, and to present the results in a thesis. As an alternative to a one-year taught LLM, you can do a one-year LLM by Research on a specific research topic and submit a 30,000 word dissertation on that topic.

All research students are allocated a supervisor with a research interest in your chosen topic of study. Your supervisor will provide advice and guidance on your choice of topic; the literature in your field and how to access it; your choice of research methods; thesis structure, content and presentation; critical appraisal of drafts of your thesis; and, in the case of PhD students, advice on preparation for your viva voce examination.

Prospective applicants are encouraged to consult the Law School website for details of Bangor Law School staff, their areas of expertise and research interests, and the areas in which the School offers research supervision: www.bangor.ac.uk/law/staff For further course details, please see: www.bangor.ac.uk/go/pg/law

BANGOR UNIVERSITY POSTGRADUATE PROSPECTUS 87

39450 BU PG Prospectus 2015_2018 2014-09-10 10:35 AM Page 88

Law of the Sea LLM COURSE DURATION LLM: 1 year full-time. This course oﬀers both January and September intakes.

Compulsory Modules: • Legal Research Methods This is a practical module designed to develop the necessary legal research skills to support ENTRY REQUIREMENTS study and research at LLM level. The emphasis We normally require a minimum of a 2.ii degree of the course will be on the knowledge and in a relevant subject from an approved university. skills needed to draft a good quality Masters’ Alternatively, possession of a suitable dissertation and research papers. professional qualification or relevant practical experience may be accepted. In general, all • Public International Law applicants are judged on their individual merits. This module provides foundational Work experience and other factors are also taken understanding of Public International Law, into consideration. which is essential for progress to more advanced study of the various specialised areas International applicants are normally required to of the discipline, such as Global Trade Law, provide evidence of English language proficiency European Human Rights Law or International – please see page 81. Human Rights Law. Through this module, students will learn about the fundamental COURSE DESCRIPTION values, principles, and rules of Public The course will appeal to applicants who are International Law. interested in the law of the sea and international law, but who do not necessarily want to study the • Law of the Sea commercial aspects of a Maritime Law degree. This module is focused on the international law of the sea, with particular focus on emerging The course focuses predominantly on regulatory problems at sea. Students will be international law, with a particular emphasis on introduced to the United Nations Convention on the law of the sea. Students will acquire the Law of the Sea (LOSC), which essentially expertise in the multifaceted interface between regulates most matters at sea and at the the different fields of international law, whilst conclusion of the module they will be able to also developing specialist knowledge of the law distinguish between the different maritime pertaining to the sea. The skills learnt on this zones set out by LOSC and how each zone can programme are adaptable to work in differently affect how matters are dealt with. international bodies (e.g. the UN), international courts and tribunals, and international law firms; • Dissertation as well as in roles relating to piracy or marine On any topic within the international law of the pollution (e.g. the ICC Commercial Crime sea. Services, the International Maritime Organisation, the Marine Management Organisation and the Maritime and Coastguard Agency).

Optional Modules – choose 3: • International Environmental Law • International Criminal Law • International Law of Armed Conﬂict • Admiralty Law • International Human Rights Law CAREER PROSPECTS Graduates of Bangor Law School programmes have excellent prospects for pursuing employment in a wide range of roles. Please see page 81 for more information. For further course details, please see: www.bangor.ac.uk/go/pg/law

Maritime Law LLM COURSE DURATION LLM: 1 year full-time. This programme oﬀers both January and September intakes.

Compulsory Modules: • Legal Research Methods This is a practical module designed to develop the necessary legal research skills to support study and research at LLM level. The emphasis of the course will be on the knowledge and skills needed to draft a good quality Masters’ dissertation and research papers.

ENTRY REQUIREMENTS We normally require a minimum of a 2.ii degree in a relevant subject (e.g. Law, Business) from an approved university. Alternatively, possession of a suitable professional qualification or relevant practical experience may be accepted. In general, Students also choose at least three from: all applicants are judged on their individual • Marine Insurance merits. Work experience and other factors are The purpose of this module is to critically also taken into consideration. examine the statutes and case law governing marine insurance practice. International applicants are normally required to provide evidence of English language proficiency • Carriage of Goods by Sea – please see page 81. This module includes two parts: Maritime law relating to the carriage of goods, and maritime COURSE DESCRIPTION casualties and their aftermath. This course provides advanced level knowledge and skills in the areas of Maritime Law and • Admiralty Law Commercial Law. Students will develop This module is focused on modern Admiralty international and commercial perspectives on Law, namely ‘wet shipping’ principles and will issues relating to Maritime Law, and will learn to give students a broad understanding of the operate with expertise in the multifaceted topic and will enable them to critically discuss interface between the different areas of the field. and analyse the various elements and principles. The module will give students a Students will acquire a broad understanding of foundation from which to study other maritime Maritime Law, including its fundamental law subjects during their degree. Students will principles and values, the influences upon it, the cover traditional maritime topics such as substantive rules of the discipline and the collisions, salvage, towage and pilotage, in underpinning architecture and institutions; as addition to wider topics including marine well as an understanding of the different areas pollution, jurisdiction and ship arrest. within the discipline, such as wet shipping law and dry shipping law. Critical awareness will be fostered by the study of the latest literature, international legislation, international conventions, EU law, and international case law.

88 BANGOR UNIVERSITY POSTGRADUATE PROSPECTUS

• Law of the Sea This module is focused on the international law of the sea, with particular focus on emerging regulatory problems at sea. Students will be introduced to the United Nations Convention on the Law of the Sea (LOSC), which essentially regulates most matters at sea and at the conclusion of the module they will be able to distinguish between the different maritime zones set out by LOSC and how each zone can differently affect how matters are dealt with. Optional Modules: • Global Trade Law • International Environmental Law • International Sales Law • Intellectual Property Law • Competition Law • International Commercial Arbitration CAREER PROSPECTS Graduates of Bangor Law School programmes have excellent prospects for pursuing employment in a wide range of roles. Please see page 81 for more information. For further course details, please see: www.bangor.ac.uk/go/pg/law

39450 BU PG Prospectus 2015_2018 2014-09-10 10:35 AM Page 89

Public Procurement Law and Strategy LLM COURSE DURATION LLM 1 year full-time. ENTRY REQUIREMENTS We normally require a minimum of a second class degree from an approved university in a related subject (e.g. Law, Business, Finance, Management). Applications with degrees in unrelated disciplines will be considered on a case by case basis. Alternatively, possession of a relevant professional qualification (e.g. CIPS or IIPMM) and relevant practical experience may be accepted (please enquire). In general, all applicants are judged on their individual merits. Work experience and other factors are also taken into consideration. Candidates without a relevant degree or professional qualification should, however, have a minimum of 3 years’ relevant work experience. International applicants are normally required to provide evidence of English language proficiency. See page 81 for more details. COURSE DESCRIPTION Bangor University is a major international research centre in relation to the operation of national and European law and policies on public procurement law. A strategic element of this programme is the presentation of learning from the perspectives of both the public procurement function and private sector supplier organisations, to help advance understanding of the complex issues faced by organisations involved in public sector tendering, and to develop more creative legally-compliant public procurement solutions.

This is achieved through carefully designed module options and collaborative teaching involving the use of academic and expert procurement law and strategy specialists.

LINKS WITH INDUSTRY Those on the LLM Procurement Law and Strategy are required to complete an Applied Procurement Research Project which will see you placed in the procurement department of a Compulsory Modules: business for a two week period. At the end of • Public Procurement Research & Writing Skills your placement you will be familiarised with a The purpose of this module is to provide you broad range of current themes in Public with the fundamentals of public procurement Procurement Law and Strategy. research and the writing process. The programme is enriched by regular expert • National and European Public Procurement guest lecturers and a dedicated Procurement Law Week which will feature presentations, This module is designed to expose participants workshops and seminars by leading to an understanding of national and procurement professionals. In addition, the supranational regimes for public procurement delivery team will be complemented by industry in Ireland, the UK and other EU member states. contacts, including experts from public sector organisations, central and local government, • Applied Procurement Research Projects leading law firms and SMEs. This module comprises a work placement and research project and any topic within the CAREER PROSPECTS programme. The LLM programme will open up exciting opportunities for graduates including career Optional Modules - choose 5: opportunities with public and private sector • Contract Design and Management organisations, law firms, research centres and • Innovation in Public Procurement international organisations such as the United • Procurement Litigation Nations, the World Bank, the World Trade • International Procurement Regimes Organisation (WTO) and the EU. You may also find • Strategic Procurement and Leadership employment opportunities with social and • European Internal Market Law environmental rights groups, many of whom • Risk Management in Public Procurement view procurement as a way of advancing social • Sustainable and Social Procurement and environmental agendas. • Litigation Strategies and the Remedies Regime • Procurement Relationships and Ethics For further course details, please see: www.bangor.ac.uk/go/pg/law

Executive LLM in Public Procurement Law and Strategy LLM Teaching on the Executive programme is by block • Managment in Public Procurement Work release to enable busy professionals to This module will help you undertake proper participate on the programme whilst minimising risk analysis prior to tender specification and to the amount of time spent away from the manage procurement risks. ENTRY REQUIREMENTS workplace. The programme is designed for those We normally require a minimum of a second working as procurement practitioners, policy • Applied Procurement Research Projects class degree from an approved university in a makers, public servants, legal advisers and in This module comprises a wrok placement and related subject (e.g. Law, Business, Finance, similar positions. research project(s) on any topic within the Management). Applications with degrees in programme. unrelated disciplines will be considered on a case Compulsory Modules: by case basis. Alternatively, possession of a • Public Procurement Research & Writing Skills Optional Modules - choose 1: relevant professional qualification (e.g. CIPS or The purpose of this module is to provide you • Strategic Procurement and Leadership IIPMM) and relevant practical experience may be accepted (please enquire). with the fundamentals of public procurement • International Procurement Regimes research and the writing process. In general, all applicants are judged on their RESEARCH LINKS/LINKS WITH INDUSTRY individual merits. Work experience and other • National & European Public Procurement Law As part of your studies you are required to factors are also taken into consideration. This module is designed to expose you to an complete an Applied Procurement Research Candidates without a relevant degree or understanding of national and supranational Project, which will see you placed in the professional qualification should, however, have regimes for public procurement in Ireland, the procurement department of a business for a two a minimum of 3 years’ relevant work experience. UK and other EU member states. week period. COURSE DURATION Executive LLM: 2 years part-time.

International applicants are normally required to provide evidence of English language proficiency (see page 81).

• Contract Design and Management This module will develop your contract drafting, design and management skills, and enables you to appreciate the significance of different contract clauses.

COURSE DESCRIPTION Bangor University is a major international research centre in relation to the operation of • Sustainable and Social Procurement national and European law and policies on public This module is expected to enhance your procurement law. A strategic element of the understanding of sustainable procurement programme is the presentation of learning from issues, including the legal context for the perspectives of both the public procurement introducing social agendas in public function and private sector supplier procurement. organisations, to help advance understanding of the complex issues faced by organisations • Innovation in Public Procurement involved in public sector tendering and to develop You will examine EU procurement procedures more creative legally-compliant public which support the procurement of innovation. procurement solutions.

The course is enriched by regular expert guest lecturers and a dedicated Procurement Week which will feature presentations, workshops and seminars by leading procurement professionals. In addition, the School’s delivery team will be complemented by industry contacts, including experts from public sector organisations, central and local government, leading law firms and SMEs. CAREER PROSPECTS The Executive LLM programme is specifically designed for those already working in public procurement. It will develop your expertise in procurement law and strategy issues in order to enhance your career development prospects, upgrade your procurement skills, and significantly develop your procurement competencies and knowledge. BANGOR UNIVERSITY POSTGRADUATE PROSPECTUS 89

STAFF PROFILE

39450 BU PG Prospectus 2015_2018 2014-09-10 10:35 AM Page 90

Dr Catherine Robinson, Head of School of Social Sciences Dr Catherine Robinson is the Head of the School of Social Sciences, Professor of Social Policy Research and Co-Director of the Centre for Mental Health and Society.

Dr Robinson is a Bangor graduate; her ﬁrst degree is in Psychology and her ﬁrst research post was in the School of Psychology. A few years working in the NHS in England followed, returning to Bangor in the early 1990s to take up a new research post in the Centre for Social Policy Research and Development (CSPRD).

Dr Robinson and her research team joined the College of Business, Law, Education and Social Sciences in 2008 as part of a wider Bangor University strategy to strengthen the team’s research focus and complement the existing research streams within the School of Social Sciences.

Between 1999 and 2004 Dr Robinson was responsible for the North Wales Research and Development Support Service (NWRDSS) and for a small research team focused on social care research. She maintained links with the School during this time and completed her social policy focused PhD in 2003.

“What attracted me to study at the School of Social Sciences was its strong focus on research. The staff are very experienced in their areas and, between them, they offer a broad range of subjects and areas of expertise. One of the best aspects about my course is the flexibility - the structure of the course allows me to work from home and to manage my own research project while having access to help and support from my project supervisors. Another highlight has been the networking opportunities I‘ve been fortunate enough to attend a number of courses and to meet new people. The amount of support given is truly excellent.” ELIZABETH HEYWORTH, from Wrexham, studied a PhD in Sociology & Social Policy

90 BANGOR UNIVERSITY POSTGRADUATE PROSPECTUS

39450 BU PG Prospectus 2015_2018 2014-09-10 10:35 AM Page 91

School of Social Sciences About the School Established in 1966, the School of Social Sciences is a thriving centre for teaching and research in the fields of Criminology and Criminal Justice, Social Policy, Social Work, Language Policy, Sociology and Health and Social Care. Our Masters degrees offer thorough training in the principles and practice of social research, whilst allowing students to follow their interests through a range of specialised modules. We are known for the thoroughness of our teaching and our care for students. We also have a reputation for research of national and international excellence and the products of this research are continually fed into our courses. Many publications and articles by staff have international reputation in particular fields, and the same staff also supervise MA, MPhil and PhD students in their own specialist areas. This means that you will be taught by tutors who are actively researching and publishing in areas you will study. All of our degree schemes offer a thorough training in the basic principles of social science, a wide choice of specialised subjects, training in the practice of social research and preparation for a wide variety of career opportunities. The School of Social Sciences offers bursaries for MA and PhD students. Strengths and expertise The most recent Research Assessment Exercise concluded that almost all the research submitted by the School of Social Sciences was worthy of international recognition, and some was world leading in terms of originality, significance and rigour. Research in the School of Social Sciences has four main themes: Communities and Social Networks; Minority Languages and Cultures; Policy Evaluation Research and Crime and Civic Society. These have provided the platform for more focused, collaborative activity based around the Schools research centres: • Wales Institute of Social & Economic Research, Data and Methods (WISERD) • Centre for Mental Health and Society (CFMHAS) • All Wales Academic Social Care Research Collaboration (ASCC) Overview of academic areas covered We offer a portfolio of Masters programmes reflecting the School's expertise and commitment to high level postgraduate teaching. These include a range of MA degrees, focusing in particular on Comparative Criminology and Criminal Justice; Sociology; Language Policy and Planning; Social Research and Social Policy; Policy Research and Evaluation; Criminology and Law and Social Work.

The Masters by Research, MPhil and PhD are higher degrees awarded on successful completion of advanced training and research leading to a thesis. The aim of a research degree is to provide broadly based social science training as well as specific training in specialised subject areas that are relevant to the research project. Overall, the training provides the context and the skills for the student to undertake an original investigation, culminating in the preparation of a thesis which represents an independent and original contribution to knowledge. Career Prospects A postgraduate qualification in Social Sciences prepares graduates for careers within sectors as varied as criminal justice, law enforcement, policy making and development, youth services, drug treatment centres, social policy and government agencies. Those pursuing a Masters in Social Work or International Social Work will find themselves equipped to work in a wide range of health or social care settings such as hospitals, community development projects, non-statutory organisations perhaps supporting refugees and asylum-seekers, or working with young parents in need of support. Experienced social workers will be able to quickly progress into management and training in the care professions. Masters graduates may also progress to research posts which may inform future policy, and to academic careers at universities. Research Links/Links with Industry The School of Social Sciences is a member of WISERD (Wales Institute of Social and Economic Research, Data and Methods), a collaborative venture between the Universities of Aberystwyth, Bangor, Cardiff, South Wales and Swansea. WISERD’s mission is to strengthen social science capacity across Wales through co-operation, joining projects and associated links with centres across the UK and beyond. It brings together social scientists from across Wales who work together to develop a more detailed picture of the people of Wales through the collection, analysis and dissemination of data in areas from economic activity and growth to education, community participation, health and social care. Our industry links are a key element of the delivery of the MA Social Work programme, which is run in partnership with the Local Authorities of Gwynedd, Anglesey and Conwy. The partner local authorities contribute to teaching and assessment and also provide work placements as part of students’ MA studies.

COURSE LIST: MA • Comparative Criminology and Criminal Justice • Criminology and Law • Criminology and Sociology • International Social Work • Language Policy and Planning • Policy Research and Evaluation • Social Research and Social Policy • Social Work LLM • Law and Criminology MARes • Criminology, Criminal Justice, Social Policy, Sociology PhD/MPhil • Criminology, Criminal Justice, Social Policy, Sociology

TO FIND OUT MORE: Tel: +44 (0) 1248 383231 E-mail: socialsciences.pg@bangor.ac.uk www.bangor.ac.uk/so

School of Social Sciences English Language requirements International applicants are normally required to provide evidence of English language proﬁciency. We normally require: For MA: • IELTS 6.0, (no single element below 5.5) For MA Criminology • IELTS 6.5, (no single element below 6.0) For Research degrees (PhD, MPhil): • IELTS 6.5, (no single element below 6.0) Applicants who have not achieved the required level can take English language courses at ELCOS, the University’s English Language Centre, prior to the beginning of the academic programme.

All module information is correct at the time of going to print and is subject to change. Please refer to the website for the most current information: www.bangor.ac.uk/so

BANGOR UNIVERSITY POSTGRADUATE PROSPECTUS 91

39450 BU PG Prospectus 2015_2018 2014-09-10 10:35 AM Page 92

Comparative Criminology and Criminal Justice MA COURSE DURATION 1 year full-time, 2.5 years part-time. ENTRY REQUIREMENTS A single or joint honours degree of at least 2.i classification, or in exceptional cases a good 2.ii in Criminology, Sociology, Law, Political Science, Social Studies, Social Policy, or a related academic discipline. Applications from candidates who have relevant professional experience in lieu of a bachelor degree will also be considered. All applicants in this category will be invited for interview.

incorporate your particular research interests and areas of enquiry in comparative criminological and criminal justice research.

CAREER PROSPECTS Graduates of the School of Social Sciences have excellent prospects for pursuing employment in a wide range of roles. Please see page 91 for more information.

Compulsory Modules: • The Research Process This module provides postgraduate level For further course details, please see: training in the main varieties of both www.bangor.ac.uk/go/pg/socialsciences quantitative and qualitative research in the social sciences. The module begins by locating the research process in the context of epistemology in order to show how research design is unavoidably grounded in assumptions about the nature of the phenomena to be investigated.

International applicants are normally required to provide evidence of English language proficiency. • Key Issues in Crime and Justice See page 91 for more details. This module is organised into four main sections which offer a thorough grounding in COURSE DESCRIPTION key issues of comparative criminology and This course was one of the first to take an criminal justice. internationally comparative perspective across a broad range of criminology and criminal justice • Applied Research in Criminology issues. It is designed to meet the needs of three This module aims to provide specialist training groups of potential students: those requiring a in criminological research. It is taught over two thorough research training specialising in semesters and draws upon generic social criminology and criminal justice; those who are science research skills and knowledge and interested in pursuing criminology and criminal applies them to an empirical group project. The justice to an advanced level; and practitioners in module also involves three sessions of the criminal justice field who wish to expand introduction to legal research. their horizons from national to international levels. • International Case Studies This module aims to provide an internationally The programme consists of a generic research comparative perspective on key areas of module for training in qualitative and quantitative criminological concern. These include research methods in the Social Sciences; questions of crime and deviance, criminological specialised training in Applied Research theory and the operation of systems of criminal Criminology; and a module on international case justice. studies in Criminology; which allows you to

Criminology and Law MA / Law and Criminology LLM COURSE DURATION LLM/MA: 1 year full-time. Both courses oﬀer January and September intakes.

COURSE DESCRIPTION • International Case Studies in Criminology and The MA Criminology and Law and the LLM Law Criminal Justice and Criminology are offered by the School of This module aims to provide an internationally Social Sciences in co-operation with the Law comparative perspective on key areas of ENTRY REQUIREMENTS School. They will provide you with postgraduate criminological concern. We accept applications from graduates of level knowledge and skills in the interdisciplinary Criminology and Criminal Justice, of LLB (Single areas of criminology and law. They build on • Forensic Linguistics in Court and Joint Honours) and related subjects such as criminological and legal skills and knowledge so This module focuses on established principles Politics, and the Social Sciences. Normally, we as to provide specialist training in criminological, and theories of Linguistics as they apply to require a good undergraduate degree. A 2.i or criminal justice and legal research. The discourse which occurs in the court room, the equivalent is desirable, but applications from programmes will enable you to develop an use of forensic linguistics as an expertise, and candidates with a 2.ii degree and professional international perspective on crime, justice and the analysis of the different types of language qualifications and/or appropriate experience will law through national and cross-national which take place in the court room. also be considered. In general, all applicants are approaches and case studies of other societies; judged on their individual merits. Work and study ‘cutting edge’ issues in contemporary • International Criminal Law experience and other factors are also taken into criminology and law. You will also acquire a wide This module will provide you with a balanced consideration. range of transferable skills. and thorough understanding of the fundamentals of International Criminal Law. International applicants are normally required to Students undertaking the MA programme will be provide evidence of English language proficiency. required to submit a Criminology-based • International Law of Armed Conflict (MA only) See page 91 for more details. dissertation, whilst those on the LLM degree will This module aims to advance critical complete a Law-based dissertation. understanding of international law applicable to armed conflicts. Compulsory Modules: • Key Issues in Crime and Justice CAREER PROSPECTS This module is organised into four main Graduates of the School of Social Sciences have sections which offer a thorough grounding in excellent prospects for pursuing employment in key issues of comparative criminology and a wide range of roles. Please see page 91 for criminal justice. more information. • Legal Research Methods (LLM only) This module aims to familiarise you with the key disciplinary methodologies employed in legal, socio-legal and commercial studies, and to equip you with the necessary skills to write reports, essays and research papers in any of these fields, with the final aim of carrying out an independent research project of your own (the dissertation).

92 BANGOR UNIVERSITY POSTGRADUATE PROSPECTUS

For further course details, please see: www.bangor.ac.uk/go/pg/socialsciences

39450 BU PG Prospectus 2015_2018 2014-09-10 10:35 AM Page 93

Criminology and Sociology MA COURSE DURATION MA: 1 year full-time, 2.5 years part-time.

On completion of the course, you will be able to: • Demonstrate advanced, specialised knowledge and skills across a range of criminology and ENTRY REQUIREMENTS sociology applications, including an A single or joint honours degree of at least 2.i understanding of community cohesion and classification or, in exceptional cases, a good 2.ii social identities and of criminal behaviour, its in Criminology, Sociology, Law, Political Science, causes and consequences, its prevention and Social Studies, Social Policy, or a related the response by criminal justice agencies. academic discipline. • Conduct empirical research projects. You will have developed specialist research skills and Applications from candidates who have relevant critical thinking across a range of professional experience in lieu of a bachelor criminological and sociological areas and an degree will also be considered. All applicants in understanding of the complex contexts in which this category will be invited for interview. criminologists and sociologists work. • Demonstrate the ability to problem solve and International applicants are normally required to reason scientifically, even in complex contexts provide evidence of English language proficiency. using appropriate qualitative and quantitative See page 91 for more details. skills. You will have the ability to create, evaluate and assess a range of options, and COURSE DESCRIPTION apply ideas and knowledge to a range of The MA in Criminology and Sociology combines situations. our expertise in criminology and sociology and • Demonstrate knowledge and understanding of explores the sociological context of issues in advanced level theories and empirical evidence criminology. concerning crime, its causes and consequences, including the definition of A broad range of criminology and sociology deviant behaviour; public opinion; the media subjects are studied which develop knowledge and fear of crime; political reactions to crime; and understanding of a broad spectrum of topics support for victims; offender management and within this field including; crime, organisations related topics. and administrations in the field of criminal • Demonstrate knowledge and understanding of justice, the social causes and consequences of advanced level sociological theories and crime, social change and social structures, sociological findings, related to topics like the culture and identity and related issues. functioning of public sector organisations, The broad yet specialised nature of this degree social stratification, political and social allows you to develop advanced and specialised movements, social values, consensus and knowledge and skills in criminological and conflicts, culture, community and identity and sociological research. the social function of law.

Compulsory Modules: • The Research Process This module introduces the main varieties of both quantitative and qualitative research in the social sciences and addresses the principles of research design and issues of data collection. • Key Issues in Crime and Justice This module focuses on four main themes: comparative criminology, comparative criminal justice, comparative victimology, and criminological perspectives. • International Case Studies in Criminology This module provides an internationally comparative perspective on key areas of criminological concern. These include questions of crime and deviance, criminological theory and the operation of systems of criminal justice. Optional Modules - choose 2: • Researching Community • Case Study • Social Theories of Culture • Nationalism and Minorities CAREER PROSPECTS Graduates of the School of Social Sciences have excellent prospects for pursuing employment in a wide range of roles. Please see page 91 for more information. For further course details, please see: www.bangor.ac.uk/go/pg/socialsciences

International Social Work MA COURSE DURATION 1 year full-time, 2.5 years part-time. ENTRY REQUIREMENTS In order to gain entry onto the course, applicants must have a professional qualification in social work, which may be one of the following: • A Social Work degree (at a 2.ii or above, or equivalent level). • A Social Work qualification, which is acceptable for the purposes of registration with the regulatory body. • IELTS and Internet-based TOEFL test scores of no less than 6.0 overall (no less than 5.5 in individual components) and 75. COURSE DESCRIPTION This course is designed to offer professional career development to qualified and practicing Social Workers. It aims to equip you with the specialist knowledge and skills you may need to enhance your performance and to advance your career within the social work sector. You will develop your research skills and critical thinking across a range of social work areas and will deepen your understanding of the complex context in which social work exists. The programme will develop advanced and specialist knowledge and skills including social policy, community research and theories of culture, and will address a broad range of social work areas, such as a comparative study of social work in other European countries. You will take part in the fortnightly lecture series of the School of Social Sciences, in which visiting speakers and Bangor staff present topics related to social policy, criminology and sociology.

CAREER PROSPECTS On completion of this programme, individuals are expected to obtain employment in a variety of careers in Social Work and Social Care, as well as to advance their careers (if experienced Social Workers) into management and training in the care professions.

• Dimensions of Social Policy Research This module will develop your understanding of For further course details, please see: the political context of social policy research, www.bangor.ac.uk/go/pg/socialsciences enhance your abilities to evaluate policy outcomes and policy impacts, distinguish the roles of practitioner and researcher, and develop skills in engaging with users in collaborative research. • Key Issues in Social Policy This module extends and deepens knowledge and understanding of key issues in contemporary social policy. • Key Issues in International Social Work The purpose of this module is to widen your understanding of the differing models, traditions and welfare contexts of social work. Optional Modules - choose 1: • Researching Community • Social Theories of Culture

BANGOR UNIVERSITY POSTGRADUATE PROSPECTUS 93

39450 BU PG Prospectus 2015_2018 2014-09-10 10:35 AM Page 94

Language Policy and Planning MA COURSE DURATION MA: 1 year full-time, up to 4 years part-time.

which will provide you with an understanding of the theoretical as well as applied questions of Language Planning.

CAREER PROSPECTS This programme equips students to work in a variety of fields – in the public, private and third sectors – including language officers, policy development, management and marketing. Students will also be prepared for doctoral level study in the broad field of language planning.

ENTRY REQUIREMENTS Entry to the MA in Language Policy and Planning Compulsory Modules: normally requires a 2.ii undergraduate degree or • Language Planning above in a relevant subject and/or relevant This module will place language planning in its professional experience with evidence of recent international context, by examining various study. All applicants will be interviewed. For further course details, please see: examples of language planning in different www.bangor.ac.uk/go/pg/socialsciences countries. International applicants are normally required to provide evidence of English language proficiency. Plus either: See page 91 for more details. • The Research Process This module aims to provide postgraduate level COURSE DESCRIPTION training in the main varieties of both The number of bilingual and multilingual quantitative and qualitative research in the communities and workplaces is on the rise, and social sciences. language planning is a field of growing OR importance. For this reason, there is an increased • Research Methods in Education demand for individuals with the necessary This module introduces students to quantitative knowledge and skills to put in place effective and qualitative research in education and strategies and systems that promote linguistic prepares students to undertake research for equality. As considering ‘language’ becomes a their dissertation. priority for many fields – development, planning, AND education, health, IT, marketing – staff in a wide • Statistics for Postgraduate Research range of professions require skills and an This module will give students a thorough understanding of language planning. understanding of the statistical analysis programme (SPSS). Furthermore, the introduction of the Welsh Language Wales Measure in 2011 has changed Optional Modules - choose 3: the legal framework concerning the use if Welsh, • Work Based Learning leading to the increased demand for a bilingual • Current Issues in Bilingualism and versatile workforce. • Aspects of Bilingualism# • History of the Welsh Language# • Language Rights# The MA in Language Policy and Planning offers an innovative and comprehensive exploration of a • Nationalism and Minorities • Public Sector Management field that is of growing importance in Wales and beyond. The programme benefits from Bangor # Available only through the medium of Welsh. University’s unique combination of expertise,

Policy Research and Evaluation MA COURSE DURATION MA: 1 year full-time, 2.5 years part-time.

Evidence-based policy and practice are imperatives of the public, independent and voluntary sector organisations nationally and ENTRY REQUIREMENTS internationally. Evaluation research is one of the Entry to the MA in Policy Research and Evaluation cornerstones of evidence based work both locally normally requires a single or joint honours and nationally. A deeper understanding of degree at 2.ii classification or above in monitoring and evaluation is important right Criminology, Sociology, Law, Political Science, across local government and public and Social Studies, Social Policy, or a related independent sector organisations. The ability to academic discipline. understand, conduct or commission evaluative work is increasingly important as organisations Applications from candidates who have relevant consider their effectiveness, efficiency and equity. professional experience in lieu of a bachelor degree will also be considered. All applicants in Compulsory Modules: this category will be invited for interview. • The Research Process This module introduces the main varieties of International applicants are normally required to both quantitative and qualitative research in the provide evidence of English language proficiency. social sciences and addresses the principles of See page 91 for more details. research design and issues of data collection. COURSE DESCRIPTION • Key Issues in Social Policy Monitoring and evaluation of policy initiatives has This module extends and deepens knowledge become increasingly important across the public, and understanding of key issues in independent and voluntary sector in health and contemporary social policy. social care and other service settings such as education or criminal justice. Policy makers, • Policy Research and Evaluation practitioners and service users are all concerned This module will develop your understanding of with effectiveness, efficiency and equity. evaluation and will consider the definitions and purpose of evaluation of policy This programme aims to meet the needs of the implementation. You will be introduced to a public service sector in Wales and further afield range of evaluation strategies and models. by developing in individuals the skills required to successfully undertake specialist research and Optional Modules – choose 2: robust evaluation that will inform future policy. • Researching Community • Social Theories of Culture • Dimensions of Social Policy Research • Case Study

94 BANGOR UNIVERSITY POSTGRADUATE PROSPECTUS

CAREER PROSPECTS Graduates of the School of Social Sciences have excellent prospects for pursuing employment in a wide range of roles. Please see page 91 for more information. For further course details, please see: www.bangor.ac.uk/go/pg/socialsciences

39450 BU PG Prospectus 2015_2018 2014-09-10 10:35 AM Page 95

Social Research and Social Policy MA COURSE DURATION MA: 1 year full-time; 2 years part-time.

COURSE DESCRIPTION Our MA in Social Research and Social Policy offers an exceptional combination of excellent ENTRY REQUIREMENTS training in social research methods and applied Entry to the MA in Social Research and Social social policy. The course is designed to provide Policy programme normally requires a 2.i you with a broad range of advanced research undergraduate degree in a related subject (e.g. skills, policy analysis skills and an ability to apply Criminology, Sociology, Law, Political Science, your research knowledge in policy settings at Social Studies, Social Policy), or two years local, national and international levels. The relevant experience. course is recognised by the Economic and Social Research Council (ESRC) and as such it is tailored International applicants are normally required to to meet the needs of those requiring a thorough provide evidence of English language proficiency. research training specialising in social policy, See page 91 for more details. those who are interested in pursuing social policy to an advanced level, and practitioners who wish to expand their existing knowledge. The course is underpinned by an emphasis on interdisciplinarity study and encourages you to adopt national and cross-national perspectives to key areas of social policy. The programme consists of a generic research module (The Research Process) for training in qualitative and quantitative research methods in the Social Sciences; specialised training in Social Policy research; and a theoretical module on Key Issues in Social Policy.

Compulsory Modules: • The Research Process This module aims to provide postgraduate level training in the main varieties of both quantitative and qualitative research in the social sciences. • Key Issues in Social Policy This module aims to link theoretical analysis in welfare to empirical enquiry and offers you an opportunity to explore key issues, debates and concepts, as well as social policy analysis and evaluation. • Health Policies in Britain This module adopts a comparative approach to the study of health policies in Britain and internationally. Starting with international comparisons you will consider the political economy of health and develop an understanding of the dynamics of power between professionals, managers and patients. Optional Modules • Researching Community • Dimensions of Social Policy Research • Nationalism and Minorities CAREER PROSPECTS Graduates of the School of Social Sciences have excellent prospects for pursuing employment in a wide range of roles. Please see page 91 for more information. For further course details, please see: www.bangor.ac.uk/go/pg/socialsciences

BANGOR UNIVERSITY POSTGRADUATE PROSPECTUS 95

39450 BU PG Prospectus 2015_2018 2014-09-10 10:35 AM Page 96

Social Work MA COURSE DURATION MA: 2 years full-time.

COURSE DESCRIPTION The School of Social Sciences works in partnership with Gwynedd, Anglesey and Conwy ENTRY REQUIREMENTS Local Authorities to develop, deliver and manage A single or joint honours degree at 2.ii or above. this Social Work programme. Partner local Candidates who can demonstrate extensive authorities are involved in recruitment, student strong relevant experience of at least 6 months selection, contributing to teaching and will be considered. We also require GCSE grade C undertaking assessment of students. The or equivalent in Maths and English/Welsh first primary partners also provide practice learning language. The ability to communicate through the opportunities along with other employing medium of Welsh is desirable. agencies, and ensure that you develop a strong understanding of social work practice in north All applicants must pass checks deemed Wales alongside your academic development. necessary for registration as a student social worker with the Care Council for Wales (including You will undertake three placements of 20 days, 80 days, and 100 days during your studies. Each health and criminal conviction checks). Additionally, all applicants will be interviewed to student is hosted by one of the local authorities ascertain their suitability and capacity for social (Gwynedd, Conwy or Anglesey), in an arrangement which supports your development work practice. towards being a competent social worker. Most practice learning opportunities will be within the We welcome applicants who have a full driving three counties, but some students will be able to licence as the majority of the practice learning benefit from opportunities further afield. opportunity settings require drivers.

Modules Year 1: • Social Policy for Social Work Practice • Knowledge and Skills Base for Social Work • The Life Course • Values and Ethics for Social Work Practice • The Research Process • Practice Learning Opportunity Year 2: • Social Work Dissertation • Legal Imperatives for Social Work • Social Work with Children, Young People and Families • Community Care • Practice Learning Opportunity

CAREER PROSPECTS After qualifying, you will be able to work in a wide range of health or social care settings, often working alongside other professionals such as occupational therapists or psychologists, in multidisciplinary teams. As well as statutory social work settings like Children and Families The programme offers the opportunity to study entirely through the medium of Welsh or entirely teams, older people teams and community mental health teams, social workers may be through the medium of English. The University employed in hospitals, in community and its partners are committed to providing development projects, with non-statutory bilingual learning opportunities, both during university based learning and during the Practice organisations perhaps supporting refugees and Learning Opportunities. Welsh speaking students asylum-seekers, or working with young parents in need of support. will be allocated Welsh speaking tutors and will be encouraged to study their modules through the medium of Welsh. All assessed work may be For further course details, please see: submitted in Welsh or English and will be marked www.bangor.ac.uk/go/pg/socialsciences and feedback given in the language selected. Those who do not speak Welsh will be encouraged to develop basic skills, and supported to develop their understanding of the Welsh context and linguistic sensitivity.

Criminology / Criminal Justice / Social Policy / Sociology PhD/MPhil/MARes COURSE DURATION PhD: 3 years full-time, 5 years part-time; MPhil: 2 years full-time, 3 years part-time; MARes: 1 year full-time, 2 years part-time. ENTRY REQUIREMENTS MARes: The criteria for admission onto the programme would normally be a minimum of an Upper Second Class Honours degree or equivalent, a satisfactory proposal for research, and the ability of the School to effectively supervise the proposed dissertation. PhD/MPhil: A good honours degree in a related discipline is required. Students without a Masters degree in a relevant discipline will be required to undertake a taught research training programme in the first year. Applicants should submit a research outline which must be approved by the Course Director. International applicants are normally required to provide evidence of English language proficiency. See page 91 for more details. COURSE DESCRIPTION The PhD, MPhil and MARes are higher degrees awarded on successful completion of advanced training and research leading to a thesis. The aim of a research degree is to provide broadly-based social science training as well as specific training in specialised subject areas that are relevant to the research project. Overall, the training provides the context and the skills for you to undertake an original investigation, culminating in the preparation of a thesis which represents an independent and original contribution to knowledge.

96 BANGOR UNIVERSITY POSTGRADUATE PROSPECTUS

The School of Social Sciences provides a stimulating and supportive environment for postgraduate training. The emphasis is on small groups, close working relationships between students and supervisors, and development towards full professional participation in the subject area. For research students we are able to provide both a full ESRC research training programme and high quality expert supervision across a broad spectrum of subjects.

Current graduate students are conducting research on: • Women’s accounts of their violent behaviour • An ethnographic study of cannabis use in a north Wales community • Identity fraud • Social problems and juvenile delinquency in Malawi • Restorative justice and rehabilitation • Accommodating sex offenders after prison • The social organisation of net-based learning The MARes is a one year programme, undertaken • Migration, ideas of national belonging and entirely by research on a topic proposed by the policy responses in Wales and Ireland candidate and approved by the University. A • The economic and social significance of the supervisor will be appointed who will provide SARS outbreaks formal research supervision to the candidate for • Wales in a global neighbourhood a 12 month period. At the end of the period, you • Categorisation and special educational needs: will be expected to present a piece of work implementing the SEN code of practice approximately 40,000-50,000 words in length. • The social construction of Welsh identity • The use of the Welsh language in the voluntary The period of registration for the MPhil is 2 years sector in Wales full-time (3 years part-time). Award of the MPhil • The role of programme evaluation in the public is based on submission of a thesis of 60,000 sector organisation words in length of acceptable standard and satisfactory performance in a viva voce CAREER PROSPECTS examination involving an external examiner. Graduates of the School of Social Sciences have excellent prospects for pursuing employment in The period of registration for the PhD is 3 years a wide range of roles. Please see page 91 for full-time (5 years part-time). Award of the PhD is more information. based on the submission of a thesis not exceeding 100,000 words in length of acceptable For further course details, please see: standard and satisfactory performance in a viva www.bangor.ac.uk/go/pg/socialsciences voce examination involving an external examiner.

39450 BU PG Prospectus 2015_2018 2014-09-10 10:36 AM Page 97

Bangor Business School London Centre About the centre Building on its no.1 position in the UK for research in Accounting, Banking and Finance, (most recent Research Assessment Exercise), Bangor Business School brings its first-class education and research expertise to the heart of London's financial district. The London Centre offers a portfolio of specialist MBA, MA and MSc degrees to individuals who wish to live and study in London whilst benefitting from Bangor Business School’s expertise and international reputation. Bangor expertise ‘Bangor’ is a name synonymous with excellence in business education. In the most recent Research Assessment Exercise (RAE), the School was rated as the best in the UK for the quality of staff research in Accounting, Banking and Finance. This means that students are taught by internationallyrenowned experts whose work is shaping the future of the financial industries. Coupled with this commitment to excellence in research is a real dedication to high-quality teaching. Bangor is also in the top 15 in the world for Banking research (RePEc, as of July 2014). London experience Located in the heart of London’s financial district, Bangor Business School London Centre enables students to immerse themselves in one of the world’s most exciting cities. We are situated within the impressive Broadgate Tower – currently the fourth tallest building in London – which is only a few minutes’ walk from Liverpool Street Station and famous landmarks such as St Paul’s Cathedral, the Tower of London and the Bank of England. Staff and facilities The same experts in Banking and Finance who teach in Bangor also teach at the London Centre, giving confidence to Students that programmes are of the same high quality as those offered at the Bangor campus, and that lectures are delivered by academic staff who are pushing back the frontiers of research.

Scholarships All individuals who are made an offer of admission on to a course at Bangor Business School London Centre will be eligible to apply for a scholarship worth up to £10,000. All applicants will also be automatically considered for a £2,000 bursary. Career prospects Graduates of the London Centre programmes have excellent prospects for pursuing employment in a wide range of roles in the accounting, business, banking and financial sectors of the global economy. The programmes’ emphasis on practical insights enhances students’ employability. The programmes enable students to develop a range of transferable skills which are widely sought in the above sectors. For example, students develop technical skills in accounting, research methods, econometrics and statistical software. They also develop skills in conducting independent research and in working in a team. The Centre offers specialist advice to students at various points in the programme in order to prepare them for securing employment after the completion of their studies. Links with Industry The Centre places significant value on its links with industry, and its location at the heart of London’s financial district is a key element in this. Academics who teach at the Centre have a very wide range of links with business, banks and international financial institutions. A range of guest speakers from industry are invited to speak at the Centre and to share their experiences with the students. A recent example involved a group of students being invited to presentations at Bloomberg offices near the Centre.

COURSE LIST: MSc • Accounting and Finance • Banking and Finance • Finance • International Banking • International Finance • Investment Management MA • Banking and Finance MBA • Banking and Finance • Finance

TO FIND OUT MORE: Tel: +44 (0) 207 596 2873 E-mail: londonenquiries@bangor.ac.uk www.bangor.ac.uk/londonbusiness

Bangor Business School - London Centre English Language requirements International applicants are normally required to provide evidence of English language proﬁciency. The minimum English requirements are: • IELTS 6.0 (with no individual score lower than 5.5).

All module information is correct at the time of going to print and is subject to change. Please refer to the website for the most current information: www.bangor.ac.uk/londonbusiness

Our academic staﬀ are also actively engaged in high-level consultancy work for leading organisations such as the European Commission, the World Bank and the UK Treasury. Through continuous engagement with business, industry and external organisations, we enhance the academic environment for students. Every student is provided with a set of core text books and a laptop, which provides access to blackboard, Bangor University’s online learning resource, and to the University Library Services’ electronic reading materials such as e-books and ejournals. Students will also have free access to City Business Library, which is located within a short distance to Broadgate Tower, and all city of London libraries.

BANGOR UNIVERSITY POSTGRADUATE PROSPECTUS 97

39450 BU PG Prospectus 2015_2018 2014-09-10 10:36 AM Page 98

Banking and Finance MBA COURSE DURATION MBA: 1 year full-time. This course offers both January and September intakes.

COURSE DESCRIPTION • International Banking The Banking and Finance MBA is designed to This module examines the origins of help ambitious executives accelerate their international banking, the activities of professional development by providing advanced international banks, the markets in which they ENTRY REQUIREMENTS training focussed on the managerial issues faced participate, and the sources of risk. We welcome applications from good graduates in by modern financial services firms. The relevant disciplines (e.g. Economics, Finance, programme places particular emphasis on the • Financial Institutions Strategic Management Accounting or Management) and from those with application of financial, managerial and strategic This module examines the main theoretical and equivalent professional qualifications and work developments that affect real-world decision practical issues concerning banking business. experience. making in the global financial industry. Alongside practical insight and skills, you will • International Financial Management A 2.ii honours degree or higher from a reputable gain analytic training in order to familiarise In this module the financial management of university is required, or equivalent overseas yourself with the latest strategic, managerial and multinational companies and the influence of qualification and grade. Alternatively, possession industrial developments in the financial services macroeconomic, fiscal, currency and political of a suitable professional qualification and sector. With Bangor staff at the forefront of the environments on business and financial relevant practical experience may also be latest research, you have the added reassurance decision-making are examined in an accepted. that teaching is contemporary and reflective of international and global context. the current industrial climate. International applicants are normally required to Optional Modules – choose 2: provide evidence of English language proficiency. Compulsory Modules: • International Strategic Management See page 97 for more details. • Organisations and People • Financial Intermediation This module examines key issues arising from • Banking and Development contemporary research in organisational behaviour and human resource management. CAREER PROSPECTS Graduates of the London Centre programmes • Management Research have excellent prospects for pursuing This module analyses the philosophical basis employment in a wide range of roles. See page for research in the management sciences, and 97 for more information. examines a number of key methodological issues and approaches. For further course details, please see: www.bangor.ac.uk/go/pg/businesslondon • Bank Financial Management This module provides a grounding in the nature, strategic context and managerial functions of financial management in banks and other financial services firms.

Finance MBA COURSE DURATION MBA: 1 year full-time. This course offers both January and September intakes.

Compulsory Modules: • Organisations and People This module examines key issues arising from contemporary research in organisational behaviour and human resource management.

ENTRY REQUIREMENTS Entry to the MBA Finance programme requires a • Management Research 2.ii undergraduate degree in a relevant subject This module analyses the philosophical basis (e.g. Economics, Finance, Accounting, for research in the management sciences, and Management) from a reputable university, or examines a number of key methodological equivalent overseas qualification and grade. issues and approaches. Alternatively, possession of a suitable professional qualification and relevant practical • Global Financial Markets experience may also be accepted. In general, This module provides an overview of financial however, applicants are judged on their individual markets and instruments in a global context, merits and work experience and other factors taking account of insights from portfolio theory are also taken in to consideration. concerning the relationship between risk and return, the diversification of risk, and the pricing International applicants are normally required to of assets. provide evidence of English language proficiency. • Investment Strategy & Portfolio Management See page 97 for more details. This module evaluates the development of investment strategies for bonds and equities, COURSE DESCRIPTION which are designed to achieve optimal riskThe MBA in Finance will develop knowledgeable return outcomes. The module builds on the and capable executives who will move quickly foundations provided in ‘Global Financial into key positions in the financial sector. The Markets’. degree focuses on the operation of financial markets and the strategic management of • International Financial Management financial entities. You will gain practical insight In this module the financial management of and skills in a range of financial and strategic multinational companies and the influence of management topics in financial services and macroeconomic, fiscal, currency and political markets, whilst developing an appreciation of the environments on business and financial causes and significance of current developments decision making are examined in an in the financial and corporate sectors. Case international and global context. studies and contemporary issues figure • International Financial Markets prominently in the programme. This module examines both the financing and investment decisions of a financial manager operating within a multinational organisation.

98 BANGOR UNIVERSITY POSTGRADUATE PROSPECTUS

Optional Modules - choose 3: • International Strategic Management • Financial Modelling • Financial Institutions Strategic Management • Financial Crises and Bank Regulation • Islamic Finance CAREER PROSPECTS Graduates of the London Centre programmes have excellent prospects for pursuing employment in a wide range of roles. Please see page 97 for more information. For further course details, please see: www.bangor.ac.uk/go/pg/businesslondon

39450 BU PG Prospectus 2015_2018 2014-09-10 10:36 AM Page 99

Banking and Finance MA COURSE DURATION MA: 1 year full-time. This course offers both January and September intakes.

The availability of parallel MSc and MA degrees in Banking and Finance allows you to choose between registering for a more technical MSc degree (including a compulsory element in ENTRY REQUIREMENTS Financial Econometrics), and a less technical MA We welcome applications from good graduates in degree. relevant disciplines and from those with equivalent professional qualifications and work The MSc version of the degree may be more experience. A 2.ii degree from a reputable suitable for applicants with some previous university is required, or an equivalent overseas background in mathematics, statistics or qualification and grade. Alternatively, possession econometrics, whilst the Banking and Finance of a suitable professional qualification and MA is more suitable for applicants who prefer to practical experience may also be accepted. adopt a less quantitative approach to their studies. See page 101 for details of the MSc International applicants are normally required to stream. provide evidence of English language proficiency. See page 97 for more details. Compulsory Modules: • Research Methods COURSE DESCRIPTION This module develops knowledge of Banking and financial services represents a intermediate and advanced research methods, highly competitive and rapidly changing sector in and provides a basis in research methodology every modern economy. Changes in customer for those who may eventually wish to pursue requirements, technology, competitive conditions research degrees. and regulation create the need for managers, traders and analysts to make rapid and often far- • Bank Financial Management reaching decisions about their short term This module provides a grounding in the nature, operations and long term strategies. strategic context and managerial functions of financial management in banks, and other The MA in Banking and Finance offers you a financial services firms. unique opportunity to study advanced theory and • International Financial Markets practice relating to financial services, and to develop an appreciation of the causes and This module provides an introduction to finance significance of current developments in this theory, and its practical applications for vitally important and dynamic sector of the investors, analysts and portfolio managers. economy.

• International Financial Management This module analyses the financial management of multinational companies, and the influence of the macroeconomic, fiscal, currency and political environments on financial decision-making. • International Banking This module examines the origins of international banking, the activities of international banks, the markets in which they participate, and the sources of risk in international banking. Optional Modules – choose 3: • Financial Analysis • Financial Institutions Strategic Management • Investment Strategy and Portfolio Management • Financial Crises and Bank Regulation • Financial Intermediation CAREER PROSPECTS Graduates of Bangor Business School London Centre programmes have excellent prospects for pursuing employment in a wide range of roles. Please see page 97 for more information. For further course details, please see: www.bangor.ac.uk/go/pg/businesslondon

International Banking MSc COURSE DURATION MSc: 1 year full-time.

consideration will be the interactions between economic development and the design, growth, operation and performance of the ﬁnancial system in emerging markets.

ENTRY REQUIREMENTS Candidates should have a good first degree (2.ii or higher) or equivalent from a university or Compulsory Modules: another approved degree-awarding body. Non• Banking and Development graduate qualifications deemed to be of a This module evaluates the theory underlying satisfactory standard for the purpose of the policy of financial liberalisation, and postgraduate admission may also be considered. examines its implementation, primarily in Work experience is desirable. developing countries.

• Financial Engineering This module provides an introduction to the key concepts of ﬁnancial engineering and ﬁnancial innovation from a practical perspective. Optional Modules – choose 2: • Financial Econometrics • Financial Institutions Strategic Management • Financial Modelling CAREER PROSPECTS Graduates of Bangor Business School London Centre programmes have excellent prospects for pursuing employment in a wide range of roles. Please see page 97 for more information.

International applicants are normally required to • International Banking provide evidence of English language proficiency This module examines the origins of – please see page 97. international banking, the activities of international banks, the markets in which they COURSE DESCRIPTION participate, and the sources of risk in For further course details, please see: Banking services represents a highly competitive international banking. www.bangor.ac.uk/go/pg/businesslondon and rapidly changing sector in today’s global economy. This course offers students a unique • Research Methods opportunity to study advanced theory and This module develops knowledge of practice relating to the international banking intermediate and advanced research methods, sector, and to develop an appreciation of the and provides a basis in research methodology causes and significance of current developments for those who may eventually wish to pursue in this vitally important and dynamic sector of the research degrees. economy. • Bank Financial Management The MSc in International Banking provides This module provides a grounding in the nature, advanced level management and business strategic context and managerial functions of training relating to practical issues in financial management in banks, and other international banking, with particular reference financial services firms. to issues pertaining to developing countries and emerging markets. This involves understanding • Financial Intermediation the practical managerial issues surrounding the This module provides a theoretical foundation running of banking/financial firms, such as bank for the theory of financial intermediation, and financial and strategic management; bank and examines core empirical papers in the banking corporate performance; and the analysis of literature. financial systems and markets. Also under

BANGOR UNIVERSITY POSTGRADUATE PROSPECTUS 99

39450 BU PG Prospectus 2015_2018 2014-09-10 10:36 AM Page 100

Accounting and Finance MSc COURSE DURATION MSc: 1 year full-time. This course offers both January and September intakes. ENTRY REQUIREMENTS Entry to the MSc Accounting and Finance programme requires a good undergraduate degree in a relevant subject, (e.g. Economics, Finance, Accounting or Management) from a university, or a similar qualification from any other institution. Alternatively, possession of a suitable professional qualification and relevant practical experience may also be accepted. In general, however, applicants are judged on their individual merits and work experience and other factors are also considered.

The aim of the programme is to provide graduates and other individuals that have practical accounting and financial training with the knowledge and skills necessary to pursue a senior level professional career in accounting, financial services or related sectors. Compulsory Modules: • Research Methods This module develops knowledge of intermediate and advanced research methods, and provides a basis in research methodology for those who may eventually wish to pursue research degrees.

• Accounting Theory This module critically evaluates a widespread International applicants are normally required to and widely based set of theories that underpin provide evidence of English language proficiency. any explanation of accounting behaviour and See page 97 for more details. accounting regulatory output. COURSE DESCRIPTION Changes in the business environment create the need for individuals wishing to pursue a senior management role to be aware of contemporary accounting and finance developments. Understanding these theoretical and practical issues is critical for managers who often have to make rapid and far-reaching decisions about the short term financial operations and long term strategies of firms. The MSc in Accounting and Finance offers you a unique opportunity to develop an appreciation of the causes and significance of current developments in the financial and corporate sectors, and to study advanced theory and practice relating to accounting and finance.

• Management Accounting This module provides an understanding of the uses of financial data in measuring and evaluating business performance, and in setting the strategic aims of the organisation. Optional Modules - choose 2: • Financial Econometrics • International Financial Management • Investment Strategy and Portfolio Management • Islamic Finance CAREER PROSPECTS Graduates of the London Centre programmes have excellent prospects for pursuing employment in a wide range of roles. Please see page 97 for more information. For further course details, please see: www.bangor.ac.uk/go/pg/businesslondon

Finance MSc COURSE DURATION MSc: 1 year full-time. This course offers both January and September intakes.

understanding of this important area. • Investment Strategy and Portfolio This programme offers the opportunity to Management develop an appreciation of the causes and This module evaluates the development of significance of current developments in the investment strategies for bonds, equities and ENTRY REQUIREMENTS financial and corporate sectors, and to study derivatives that are designed to achieve optimal Entry to the MSc Finance requires a good advanced theory and practice relating to financial risk-return outcomes, and examines the undergraduate degree in a relevant subject, (e.g. markets and financial management. measurement, and evaluation of the Economics, Finance, Accounting or Management) performance of a portfolio of investments. from a university, or a similar qualification from Compulsory Modules: any other institution. Alternatively, possession of • Research Methods Optional Modules: a suitable professional qualification and relevant This module equips you with knowledge of • Financial Analysis practical experience may also be accepted. In intermediate and advanced research methods, • Islamic Finance general, however, applicants are judged on their which you will encounter in other modules and • Financial Crises and Bank Regulation individual merits and work experience and other in your dissertation. • International Financial Management factors are also considered. • Financial Institutions Strategic Management • International Financial Markets International applicants are normally required to This module provides an overview of financial CAREER PROSPECTS provide evidence of English language proficiency. instruments in a multi-currency world, taking Graduates of the London Centre programmes See page 97 for more details. account of insights from portfolio theory have excellent prospects for pursuing concerning the relationship between risk and employment in a wide range of roles. Please see COURSE DESCRIPTION return, the diversification of risk, and the pricing page 97 for more information. The ever-changing nature of financial markets, of assets. financial institutions and business firms has For further course details, please see: made it increasingly important for finance • Financial Modelling www.bangor.ac.uk/go/pg/businesslondon experts (including financial managers in This module develops a combined theoretical multinational companies, investment analysts in and practical approach to mathematical securities firms, lending officers in banks and modelling for specialists in finance. other financial institutions, and traders in capital markets and dealing rooms) to have a clear • Financial Engineering understanding of the theory and practice relating This module develops a combined theoretical to financial market operations and corporate and practical approach to derivatives pricing financial strategy. and financial engineering. Familiarity with the most recent developments in • Financial Econometrics risk appraisal, portfolio analysis, the engineering This module provides advanced coverage of of synthetic products, modelling techniques, econometric methods and practices that are financial analysis and valuation are essential used to model financial and business data. requirements for all those involved directly in financial activities or who wish to gain a deeper

100 BANGOR UNIVERSITY POSTGRADUATE PROSPECTUS

39450 BU PG Prospectus 2015_2018 2014-09-10 10:36 AM Page 101

Banking and Finance MSc COURSE DURATION MSc: 1 year full-time. This course offers both January and September intakes.

Compulsory Modules: • Financial Modelling This module develops a combined theoretical and practical approach to mathematical modelling for specialists in finance.

ENTRY REQUIREMENTS We welcome applications from good graduates in relevant disciplines and from those with • Financial Econometrics equivalent professional qualifications and work This module provides advanced coverage of experience. econometric methods and practices that are used to model financial and business data. A good degree from a reputable university is required, or equivalent overseas qualification and • Research Methods grade. Alternatively, possession of a suitable This module equips you with knowledge of professional qualification and practical intermediate and advanced research methods, experience may also be accepted. which you will encounter in other modules and in your dissertation. International applicants are normally required to provide evidence of English language proficiency. • Bank Financial Management See page 97 for more details. This module provides a grounding in the nature, strategic context and managerial functions of COURSE DESCRIPTION financial management in banks, and other Banking and financial services represent a highly financial services firms. competitive and rapidly changing sector in every modern economy. Changes in customer • International Financial Markets requirements, technology, competitive conditions This module provides an overview of financial and regulation create the need for managers, instruments in a multi-currency world, taking traders and analysts to make rapid and often far- account of insights from portfolio theory reaching decisions about their short term concerning the relationship between risk and operations and long term strategies. return, the diversification of risk, and the pricing of assets. The MSc Banking and Finance offers you a unique opportunity to study advanced theory and • Financial Intermediation practice relating to financial services, and to This module provides a theoretical foundation develop an appreciation of the causes and for the theory of ﬁnancial intermediation, and significance of current developments in this examines core empirical papers in the banking vitally important and dynamic sector of the literature. economy.

• International Banking This module examines the origins of international banking, the activities of international banks, the markets in which they participate, and the sources of risk. Optional Modules: • Financial Analysis • Financial Institution Strategic Management • Financial Modelling • Financial Engineering • Islamic Finance • Investment Strategy & Portfolio Management • Financial Crises & Bank Regulation CAREER PROSPECTS Graduates of the London Centre programmes have excellent prospects for pursuing employment in a wide range of roles. Please see page 97 for more information.

International Finance MSc COURSE DURATION MSc: 1 year full-time.

Compulsory Modules: • Financial Econometrics • Current Issues in International Finance This module provides advanced coverage of This module provides an advanced level of econometric methods and practices that are ENTRY REQUIREMENTS understanding of the most important current used to model financial and business data, and Candidates should have an undergraduate issues in international finance, with focus being develops a critical awareness of the strengths degree (2.ii or higher) or equivalent from a placed on current research findings and and limitations of modelling techniques. university or another approved degree-awarding published papers from the top international body. Non-graduate qualifications deemed to be journals. • Financial Modelling of a satisfactory standard for the purpose of This module provides an introduction to postgraduate admission may also be considered. • International Financial Markets techniques of financial modelling and the Work experience is desirable. This module provides an introduction to finance practical implementation of financial models in theory, and its practical applications for Microsoft Excel. International applicants are normally required to investors, analysts and portfolio managers. provide evidence of English language proficiency • Financial Engineering – please see page 97. • Research Methods This module introduces basic concepts and This module provides the student with methods of financial engineering involving COURSE DESCRIPTION knowledge of intermediate and advanced options, futures and other derivatives. The MSc in International Finance develops a qualitative and quantitative research methods, broad vision and understanding of the changing and provide a basis in research methodology. CAREER PROSPECTS role and nature of international finance within the Graduates of Bangor Business School London context of globalised markets. The programme • International Financial Management Centre programmes have excellent prospects for offers students a unique opportunity to develop This module analyses the financial pursuing employment in a wide range of roles. an appreciation of the causes and significance of management of multinational companies, and Please see page 97 for more information. current developments in the global financial the influence of the macroeconomic, fiscal, sector, and to study advanced theory and practice currency and political environments on For further course details, please see: relating to international financial markets and financial decision-making. www.bangor.ac.uk/go/pg/businesslondon international financial management. The programme provides management and • Investment Strategy and Portfolio business training at an advanced level covering Management the latest developments in international finance. This module analyses portfolio strategies which Students will acquire an understanding of can effectively control risk and enhance practical managerial issues surrounding the returns; develops intellectual skills and running of international financial institutions, research expertise in the area of investment analysing the main features of international analysis and portfolio management; and financial systems and markets. An important demonstrates appropriate modelling objective is to familiarise students with the latest techniques for investment decision-making and strategic, managerial and industrial risk management. developments in the international financial services industry. BANGOR UNIVERSITY POSTGRADUATE PROSPECTUS 101

39450 BU PG Prospectus 2015_2018 2014-09-10 10:36 AM Page 102

Investment Management MSc COURSE DURATION MSc: 1 year full-time

Students will acquire advanced, specialised • Investment Strategy and Portfolio knowledge and skills across a range of Management investment applications at strategic and This module analyses portfolio strategies which ENTRY REQUIREMENTS operational levels. They will develop intellectual can effectively control risk and enhance Candidates should have an undergraduate skills and research expertise in the area of returns; develops intellectual skills and degree (2.ii or higher) or equivalent from a investment analysis and portfolio management; research expertise in the area of investment university or another approved degree-awarding technical skills relevant to financial markets’ analysis and portfolio management; and body. Non-graduate qualifications deemed to be operation and management; critical skills in demonstrates appropriate modelling of a satisfactory standard for the purpose of examining advanced level theories and empirical techniques for investment decision-making and postgraduate admission may also be considered. evidence; computational skills in financial service risk management. Work experience is desirable. activity; and analytic skills in exploring the efficient markets hypothesis. • Financial Analysis International applicants are normally required to This module analyses the techniques that are provide evidence of English language proficiency Compulsory Modules: used to evaluate a company’s financial position – please see page 97. • Current Issues in International Finance and performance, and develops a critical This module provides an advanced level of awareness of the uses of financial data by COURSE DESCRIPTION understanding of the most important current capital markets for valuation purposes. The MSc in Investment Management offers issues in international finance, with focus being students a sound knowledge of the theoretical placed on current research findings and Optional Modules – choose 2: foundations that underpin modern investment published papers from the top international • International Financial Management and risk management techniques, and prepares journals. • Financial Econometrics them for entry into the fast-growing investment • Financial Engineering management industry. The programme aims to • International Financial Markets cover the traditional syllabus of a Masters degree This module provides an introduction to finance CAREER PROSPECTS in finance whilst providing students with theory, and its practical applications for Graduates of Bangor Business School London advanced level management and business investors, analysts and portfolio managers. Centre programmes have excellent prospects for training in specialised areas of investment, such pursuing employment in a wide range of roles. as the management of equity and bond • Research Methods Please see page 97 for more information. portfolios; trading techniques; risk management; This module provides the student with management of foreign exchange and derivative knowledge of intermediate and advanced For further course details, please see: securities; and emerging markets investment. qualitative and quantitative research methods, www.bangor.ac.uk/go/pg/businesslondon Students will benefit from a unique opportunity and provide a basis in research methodology. to use various online databases available in Bangor Business School, such as Bloomberg, • Financial Modelling DataStream and SNL. This module provides an introduction to techniques of financial modelling and the practical implementation of financial models in Microsoft Excel.

102 BANGOR UNIVERSITY POSTGRADUATE PROSPECTUS

39450 BU PG Prospectus 2015_2018 2014-09-10 10:36 AM Page 103

School of Education About the School The School of Education has an established reputation in the field of teacher training. The School also has well-established partnerships with Primary and Secondary schools to provide varied and supportive training environments. Under the guidance of enthusiastic staff, the School also provides a wide range of other progressive courses leading to a range of postgraduate qualifications. You can pursue courses through the medium of Welsh or English or bilingually. In the European context this bilingual expertise gives an exciting dimension to all our courses and provides students with opportunities to develop European links. The School has a friendly atmosphere and students from all regions and different backgrounds quickly settle in. We offer a lively and enriching working and social environment with unrivalled resources for your study. The School is regularly involved in much developmental work, including the field of Welsh-medium education. Staff and facilities To help you in your studies we provide a range of learning resources supported by experienced staff. In our Education Library we have an extensive collection of books and journals and many of the journals are available on-line in full-text format. We also have computer labs on site and dedicated postgraduate study rooms for full-time students where they can study, hold seminars and gather to discuss their research in a supported learning environment.

“Studying at Bangor was a choice that became evident as my son has also undertaken a graduate course here at Bangor University. Moreover I found the overall environment here at Bangor conducive to learning. As I was previously involved in the profession of teaching, I was awaiting the opportunity to further my academic skills in this regard and therefore decided to take this course that would not only further my understanding of the field of education but would enable me to enhance my teaching skills within this field. The course comprised four taught modules that covered areas of Bilingualism and Bilingual education, TESOL, World Citizenship and Research methods. In a way I am really grateful to the course director and our tutors for selecting these modules as they have allowed us to develop an insight into different disciplines that can be further explored. In other words the students have been afforded an opportunity through this academic experience to broaden their horizons. For my Masters project both the Research

Overview of the academic areas covered within the School For almost forty years, Bangor has offered a flexible, part-time, modular Master of Arts/Master of Education which meets both the professional and the personal needs of teachers, health workers, social care staff and other professionals. Our part-time postgraduate courses are aimed both at working people looking for career developments, and at those wishing to study a subject at a more advanced level. When reviewing applications, we take professional and personal experience into account, and consider all students on merit. The content of the taught elements of the MA and EdD programmes reflect the expertise and experience of staff within the School. A wide variety of modules are on offer and include Bilingual Education, TESOL, Inclusion/Special Educational Needs, Diversity in Education, Counselling, Early Years Education, Children’s Rights and Educational Leadership. You will also receive training in Research Methods.

COURSE LIST: Postgraduate Certiﬁcate in Education – PGCE • Primary Education • Secondary Education MA • Education Studies (full-time) • Education Studies (part-time) EdD • Education Doctorate Programme

TO FIND OUT MORE: Tel: +44 (0) 1248 382933 E-mail: postgrad-education@bangor.ac.uk www.bangor.ac.uk/education

The School oﬀers full and part-time PhD, MPhil and EdD research supervision in a wide range of Educational areas focusing on the research expertise within the School which include Bilingualism/Bilingual Education, Inclusion/Special Educational Needs and Professional Aspects of Teaching in Schools and in Higher Education.

methods and the Bilingual education modules although challenging, have allowed me to explore the bilingual attitudes and perspectives of the Pakistani Pashtun community towards their heritage language whilst residing in a Welsh/English society such as Bangor. This experience in itself has enabled me to try to fill a small gap in an ongoing process of researching linguistic minorities of the UK. Further education has many advantages. As mentioned earlier, it broadens one’s horizons allowing one to be able to reach one’s full potential. It definitely boosts self confidence and helps in deciding as to how a future career can be attained in the field of education and learning. I feel immensely blessed with the tutors I had during this course. They were not only academically supportive but their mentoring skills helped me overcome the stresses I was experiencing during this time. Their overall encouraging attitude made this course achievable.”

FRIHA YASMEEN KHAN from Anglesey, studying an MA Education Studies

BANGOR UNIVERSITY POSTGRADUATE PROSPECTUS 103

39450 BU PG Prospectus 2015_2018 2014-09-10 10:36 AM Page 104

Postgraduate Certificate in Education (PGCE) Primary Education (leading to Qualified Teacher Status) COURSE DURATION PGCE: 1 year full-time. ENTRY REQUIREMENTS Applicants should hold an initial degree that is relevant to the primary curriculum in addition to a grade B or higher in GCSE English Language and GCSE Mathematics and a grade C or higher in GCSE Science on application. For applicants who secure a place on the course, we will run an equivalence test if you do not already have the GCSE or equivalent qualiﬁcations.

COURSE DESCRIPTION • Module 3: Dissertation The PGCE course prepares you for teaching in In the Dissertation module you need to submit a primary schools. It is an intensive 38-week Special Study (6,000-8,000 words). The course for graduates who aim to develop and learning outcomes for this module will reflect foster the teaching and learning skills required of work expected at Level 7 (Masters). a primary school teacher. Additional Components: You may specialize in early years’ education (3-7) • Professional Studies or in the junior phase (7-11). Emphasis is placed • Foundation Phase Areas of Study A and B on the National Curriculum and its (Lower Primary) implementation in the classroom. • Core Subject Studies (Upper Primary) • Non-core Subject Studies (Upper Primary) The school-based component consists of around • School Experience eighteen weeks in partnership schools and the placements are designed to offer contrasting CAREER PROSPECTS experiences. This is the core of the course and Successful trainees will possess the teaching consists of regular contact with pupils. Lectures skills which meet the statutory standards for and seminars in the School are closely linked to awarding Qualified Teacher Status (QTS). this teaching experience. You are assessed in You will have developed the appropriate learning school by experienced mentors (teachers) as skills which enable you to become reflective well as the School of Education link tutors. practitioners who, in your planning and teaching, can analyse, synthesise, use and manage, and It is possible to follow the course through the evaluate materials and procedures and medium of Welsh or English. professional practices. The transferable skills acquired through this course will be beneficial Modules include: throughout your career. • Module 1: Learning to Teach 1 – Introduction to Teaching Skills For further course details, please see: The content of this module is based on the www.bangor.ac.uk/go/pg/education basic knowledge, skills, and application needed to become an effective primary school teacher. • Education Studies (Part-time) • Module 2: Learning to Teach 2 – Development of Teaching Skills The content of this module builds on Learning to Teach 1 and helps to enhance, develop, and refine your knowledge and application of the higher teaching skills.

Postgraduate Certificate in Education (PGCE) Secondary Education (leading to Qualified Teacher Status) COURSE DURATION PGCE: 1 year full-time. ENTRY REQUIREMENTS A first degree of a United Kingdom higher education institution or equivalent qualification. A standard equivalent to a grade B or above in the GCSE examination in English and in mathematics. For applicants who secure a place on the course, we will run an equivalence test if you do not already have the GCSE or equivalent qualifications.

COURSE DESCRIPTION The PGCE Secondary course is a one year initial teacher training course specialising in Secondary education. The course places an emphasis on developing practical teaching skills together with an understanding and awareness of relevant theoretical issues. The course normally runs from early September to the end of June and trainee teachers are based in schools for the equivalent of 24 weeks. This will involve both classroom teaching and schoolbased activities under the guidance of both trained school mentors and university tutors. During the year trainee teachers will have the experience of teaching in at least two different secondary schools in addition to spending time in a primary school. The following subjects are offered at Bangor: Art and Design / Mathematics / Music / Outdoor Activities / Physical Education / Religious Education / Biology / Chemistry / Physics / Welsh. Modules: Module 1: Learning to Teach 1 – Introduction to teaching skills This module provides an introduction to the theory and practice of teaching in the secondary school through main subject method work and practical teaching. Module 2: Learning to Teach 2 – Development of teaching skills This module builds on the aims and learning outcomes of Learning to Teach 1 by revisiting, refining, developing and expanding the skills needed to become an effective teacher.

104 BANGOR UNIVERSITY POSTGRADUATE PROSPECTUS

Module 3: Professional Studies This module provides an overview of the professional requirements expected within teaching and addresses a range of professional matters related to learning and teaching within the wider school context. Trainees will be trained to teach either the 11-16 or 11-18 age range depending on their qualifications. For some subject areas trainees may follow an additional option subject in addition to their main subject. The Professional Studies Module is offered at Master’s level. CAREER PROSPECTS Teaching is an important and rewarding career offering excellent career prospects and development opportunities. Being a teacher is about developing professional relationships with pupils and inspiring them to learn within a dynamic and creative environment. It offers great job satisfaction and can be a fulfilling, exciting and varied career with a good starting salary. For further course details, please see: www.bangor.ac.uk/go/pg/education

39450 BU PG Prospectus 2015_2018 2014-09-10 10:36 AM Page 105

Education Studies MA COURSE DURATION MA: 15 months full-time. ENTRY REQUIREMENTS A 2.ii honours degree is required and relevant work experience as a teacher/lecturer or teaching assistant is preferred. Applicants who are not native-English speakers should have either an IELTS result of 6.0 or above, with no individual score lower than 5.5. Students with lower scores may undertake a pre-sessional English course at ELCOS the University’s English Language Centre. Applicants may be required to be interviewed in person. COURSE DESCRIPTION Our full-time course is a 15 month programme that caters for the needs of those who wish to gain an MA degree through intensive full-time study. The course has been designed to appeal to both home and international students. • Curriculum Development (30 credits) • Assessment (30 credits) • Leadership and Management (30 credits) • Research methods (30 credits) • Dissertation (60 credits) • Placement module (students will have a period of placement in local schools) (20 credits)

Placements You will be placed at either a primary, secondary, nursery or further education college where you will observe classroom teaching, the learning strategies used by teachers and have ﬁrst-hand experience of the UK education system. Placements will also allow you to reﬂect on your studies and observe how the theory is put into practice, which will help your further development and professional competence. All students must complete the placement module successfully to pass the course. *Students must ensure they bring all documentation for a criminal record check to the School of Education at the start of the course. Students cannot be placed at school without the required criminal record check. Core Modules: • Research Methods • Placement • Dissertation

ATTENDANCE You are expected to have a full attendance record. Absence from sessions can only be permitted with very good reason and must be notified in writing to either the Module Convenor or Course Administrator. EXIT AWARD You can exit the programme with a Postgraduate Certificate, having gained 60 credits, or with a Postgraduate Diploma having gained 120 credits. CAREER PROSPECTS Our graduates are highly desired in many areas of employment. Most of them find employment in schools and universities. Some enter companies to become trainers for their staff. Some become administrators and education officers in government departments. For further course details, please see: www.bangor.ac.uk/go/pg/education

For the Curriculum development module, students will be able to choose to specialize in either Music education or Science education. Some teaching may take place at the weekend and late afternoon.

Education Studies MA (part-time) COURSE DURATION MA: 3-5 years part-time. ENTRY REQUIREMENTS Applicants must have either an initial degree, a recognised equivalent qualification, or have at least three years’ relevant professional experience. All applicants will be asked to provide the name of a referee, who can vouch for the ability of the applicant to study at Master’s level. Occasionally, applicants may be asked to attend for interview before an offer of a place can be confirmed.

COURSE DESCRIPTION The well-established part-time MA Programme gives you flexible opportunities to study modules in an extensive range of subject areas to enhance your own professional development. The five-weekends-per-year format around which the Master’s programme is organised suits both local people and those travelling from further afield, and offers a supportive, friendly atmosphere in which to learn.

Modules include: • Language in the Early Years • Research Methods Some modules may stipulate an additional, • Behaviour Management speciﬁc entry requirement, for example, previous • Theoretical Background to Dyslexia teaching experience. • Principles and Methodology in the Teaching of Dyslexic Learners • The Adult Learner: Theories and Models • Towards Inclusive Education • Sociology of Childhood • Teaching English to Speakers of Other Languages

CAREER PROSPECTS Most students on this course are practising teachers, counsellors or social workers for whom a Master’s level qualiﬁcation is an excellent way to develop their careers. With a free module choice, you can select the topic areas relevant to the work you are already doing, or to the work you aspire to do. This part-time Master’s degree in Education Studies will give you the conﬁdence and competence to take on new responsibilities, or to embark on a complete change of direction in your career. For further course details, please see: www.bangor.ac.uk/go/pg/education

Successful completion of four taught modules allows you to progress to your research dissertation and a full Master’s degree. A postgraduate certiﬁcate, or a postgraduate diploma, is available as an exit award for those students wanting to study only the taught modules.

BANGOR UNIVERSITY POSTGRADUATE PROSPECTUS 105

39450 BU PG Prospectus 2015_2018 2014-09-10 10:36 AM Page 106

Doctorate in Education Studies EdD

COURSE DURATION EdD: 3 years full-time; 5 years part-time.

COURSE DESCRIPTION Part One – Taught modules Six modules are taken in the first year by fulltime students and in the first two years by partENTRY REQUIREMENTS Prior study at Masters’ level is normally required time students. The six modules include: for entry on to the EdD Compulsory Modules: • Research Methods in Education Applicants who are not native English speakers • Thesis Proposal should have either an IELTS result of 6.5 or above, with no individual score lower than 6.0. Optional Modules: You choose 4 level-7 modules from those offered Applicants are requred to submit a research (for details, see MA in Education studies proposal and to be interviewed in person or by Programme on page 105). These modules are other means. taught during weekdays or at weekends depending on whether you are a full-time of parttime student. Part Two – Thesis You must have successfully completed Part 1 before you can progress to Part 2. The thesis is an in-depth work on a specialist topic to be completed within 2-4 years for full-time students or within 3-5 years for part-time students. You are expected to present a thesis that meets the criteria set by Bangor University. It should have a maximum length of 50,000 words. You will be required to defend it in oral examination attended by two examiners (one internal and the other external) appointed by the College.

106 BANGOR UNIVERSITY POSTGRADUATE PROSPECTUS

EXIT AWARDS You can exit the programme with the EdM degree having gained 180 credits in Part 1. CAREER PROSPECTS The EdD degree is regarded the same as a PhD degree and are highly desired in today’s society. Many of our graduates work in schools and universities. Some become administrators and education oﬃcers in government departments. Some will also work in diﬀerent industries. For further course details, please see: www.bangor.ac.uk/go/pg/education

39450 BU PG Prospectus 2015_2018 2014-09-10 10:36 AM Page 107

BANGOR UNIVERSITY POSTGRADUATE PROSPECTUS 107

39450 BU PG Prospectus 2015_2018 2014-09-10 10:36 AM Page 108

COLLEGE OF NATURAL SCIENCES The College of Natural Sciences is one of the leading centres in the UK for teaching and research in biology, environmental sciences and ocean sciences. Our aim is to educate and train a new generation of scientists aware of societal needs in a world-class, research-led environment. Our international links are extensive and our research interests extend across a range of habitats with global significance from coral reefs to the polar ice caps. The College is made up of three schools: The School of Biological Sciences, which offers postgraduate courses in biology, molecular biology, natural sciences and ecology; the School of Environment, Natural Resources and Geography, which offers courses in environmental sciences, conservation and forestry; and the School of Ocean Sciences, which offers courses in marine biology, ocean sciences and marine geoscience. The College has an international research reputation in areas critical to society, such as research into the causes of cancer, the implications of climate change, the promotion of sustainable development and the description and conservation of biodiversity. The advantages of combining research and teaching include students being taught by scientists at the forefront of their field, and lively interactions between students and staff. Our research is organised into the following research groups: • Living with Environmental Change • Development and Disease • Molecular Ecology and Evolution • Plants, Soil and Ecosystems • Land-Ocean Systems Science • Sustainable Production and Development Bangor provides a superb range of marine, freshwater, wild and farmed terrestrial environments. We have first-class research and teaching facilities including molecular biology and DNA sequencing facilities, a Botanic Garden, experimental grounds, a University-based farming business and experimental areas for forestry, as well as a state-of-the-art seagoing research vessel – the Prince Madog. The Centre for Applied Marine Science (CAMS), is a major contributor to knowledge transfer and enterprise in the College. The College is also associated with the Environment Centre Wales, a research institute for the integration of environmental sciences which is a partnership venture between Bangor University and the Natural Environment Research Council’s Centre for Ecology and Hydrology (CEH). The Centre is housed in a state-of-the-art building using energy efficiency measures, natural light and renewable energy technologies. The building has an international reputation as an exemplar building of sustainable design and construction, and is one of only three buildings worldwide to have received a commendation for its sustainable credentials. Our Graduate School provides dedicated support to graduate students and offers the finest environment for personal and academic development for students across disciplines and from different backgrounds and countries.

108 BANGOR UNIVERSITY POSTGRADUATE PROSPECTUS

“The modules I have taken, especially Genomes with Molecular Genetics, work in harmony with my medical qualifications and have allowed me to appreciate the pathogenesis of medical illnesses more deeply. The information is novel and fits accurately with the remit of the MSc. The success of the course is due primarily to a high commitment from the organisers and staff involved in teaching the degree.” Dr. RASHA ALI AL-KHAFAJI, from Baghdad, studying the Medical Molecular Biology with Genetics MSc degree

39450 BU PG Prospectus 2015_2018 2014-09-10 10:36 AM Page 109

BANGOR UNIVERSITY POSTGRADUATE PROSPECTUS 109

39450 BU PG Prospectus 2015_2018 2014-09-10 10:36 AM Page 110

STAFF PROFILE

The School of Biological Sciences has its own Natural History Museum with a large collection of vertebrate and invertebrate specimens and an extensive marine aquarium and a freshwater aquarium. Dr Anita Malhotra Senior Lecturer, School of Biological Sciences Director of Graduate Studies, College of Natural Sciences Based at Bangor University for the last 20 years, Dr Anita Malhotra is primarily an evolutionary biologist and molecular ecologist working on reptiles and the evolution of reptile venom. She developed the first robust molecular phylogenies for Asian pitvipers based on both mitchodondrial and nuclear markers, which has revealed new cryptic species and resulted in the radical revision of the taxonomy of the group. She is using this phylogeny to test hypotheses about the evolution of specific toxic components such as the phospholipase A2 enzymes, using a collaborative multidisciplinary approach. She is also actively involved in projects to translate the findings of recent systematic and biochemical research on venomous snakes into a rational strategy for the treatment of snakebite in India, which has one of the highest incidences of snakebite mortality in the world. Her other research interests include understanding how molecules and organisms adapt to their environments, the role of adaptation in speciation, and the population genetics of invasive species.

110 BANGOR UNIVERSITY POSTGRADUATE PROSPECTUS

39450 BU PG Prospectus 2015_2018 2014-09-10 10:36 AM Page 111

School of Biological Sciences COURSE LIST:

STAFF PROFILE

About the School The School of Biological Sciences oﬀers a range of postgraduate courses and we pride ourselves on our supportive and friendly atmosphere, the international standard of our research and the high quality of our teaching.

MSc • Medical Molecular Biology with Genetics* • Molecular Biology with Biotechnology • Wetland Science and Conservation • Wetland Science for Pollution Control

The School is home to the North West Cancer Research Fund Institute, a centre of excellence for cancer research in Wales. Staff and facilities Some of our plant biology teaching and research is carried out in the Treborth Botanic Gardens situated along the Menai Strait which offers landscaped gardens, and a range of grassland and woodland habitats. The School is unusual in boasting its own Natural History Museum with a large collection of vertebrate and invertebrate specimens and an extensive marine aquarium, and a new freshwater aquarium. As a postgraduate you can study one-year taught Masters Degrees in Medical Molecular Biology with Genetics, and Molecular Biology with Biotechnology. One year MRes degrees, which differ from the taught Masters programmes by placing more emphasis on the research project, are available in Ecology and Natural Sciences. Overview of the academic areas Research degrees are available in subjects covering the full spectrum of our research expertise, including molecular ecology, fisheries genetics, molecular cancer studies, biodegradation and bioremediation, plant systems and technology, wetland biogeochemistry, neuroscience, animal energetics and ecophysiology.

MRes • Ecology • Natural Sciences Dr Anil Shirsat, Senior Lecturer, School of Biological Sciences Dr Shirsat is a plant molecular biologist who completed his first degree in Biological Sciences at the University of East Anglia in Norwich. After a brief interlude at Cardiff University Medical School, he went on to pursue a PhD in Plant Molecular Biology at Durham University – his PhD dissertation was on the cloning and analysis of seed storage protein genes. His current research is mainly concerned with the role of the cell wall in plant defence – the wall is the first barrier which pathogens have to surmount and many defence pathways are initiated at the wall. In many cases, the composition of the wall alters in response to pathogen attack thereby creating a barrier to pathogen entry – he is investigating this using a transgenic approach. He is also interested in the public understanding of science and frequently gives lectures on different aspects of molecular biology. He is the organiser of the MSc in Molecular Biology with Biotechnology.

PhD/MPhil • Biological Sciences

* From 2015, this course will be part of the School of Medical Sciences, see page 139 for School information.

TO FIND OUT MORE: Tel: +44 (0) 1248 382527 E-mail: postgradenquiries@sbs.bangor.ac.uk www.bangor.ac.uk/biology

We receive substantial ﬁnancial support from the Research Councils, charities, government departments and British and overseas industry. Our diverse interests facilitate a wide exchange of interdisciplinary ideas and techniques and promote collaborations both within the School and with colleagues in institutions and industry. School of Biological Sciences English Language requirements International applicants are normally required to provide evidence of English language proﬁciency. The minimum English requirements are: • IELTS 6.0 (with no individual score lower than 5.5) or equivalent.

BANGOR UNIVERSITY POSTGRADUATE PROSPECTUS 111

39450 BU PG Prospectus 2015_2018 2014-09-10 10:36 AM Page 112

Medical Molecular Biology with Genetics MSc/Diploma COURSE DURATION MSc: 1 year full-time; Diploma: 30 weeks fulltime.

bacteria, viruses and parasites and the potential applications of ‘beneﬁcial parasitic infection’ in medical research.

• Medical and Molecular Laboratory Techniques* This module develops a set of key molecular research techniques in a two-week geneENTRY REQUIREMENTS • Bioinformatics Tools for Gene and cloning ‘mini-experiment’. You will develop Entry normally requires a minimum qualification Protein Analysis experimental analysis skills and the ability to equivalent to a UK 2.ii BSc degree in a relevant Bioinformatic analysis of genes and proteins are produce a standardized scientific research subject area; e.g. molecular biology, biology, key skills in modern research and industry. This report. biochemistry, medical sciences or Biomedical module teaches you how to apply bioinformatics sciences. However, all applications are judged on tools to topical biological problems. • Research Project Preparation Plan* their individual merits considering evidence of Topics covered include the scientific report relevant work experience, possession of other • Medical Biotechnology writing, seminar and presentation skills and suitable professional or academic qualifications. This module exposes you to cutting-edge knowledge/practical experience you medical biotechnology. A number of seminars specifically require for your research project COURSE DESCRIPTION are delivered by invited international/worldand thesis. You are assigned a research topic The application of molecular biology in medical renowned scientists who present topics on and supervisor who provides help and guidance sciences has led to huge advances in the bioinformatics in medicine, stem cells in to appropriate areas for literature review and understanding, diagnosis and treatment of regenerative medicine, biomaterials in any specialised practical techniques required. human disease. Those studying the Medical regenerative medicine and pharmacogenomics Projects primarily focus on areas of stem cell Molecular Biology with Genetics MSc will enjoy a of angiogenesis. and cancer biology. modular course that delivers both theoretical aspects and practical skills required for • Human Immunology & Disease* • Research Project* application in fields of modern medically-related Immunotherapy plays a major role in cutting Research projects are run in the School of molecular biology. edge treatment of major human diseases and Biological Sciences Robert Edwards laboratory disorders. Major topics discussed in this module and the laboratories of the North West Cancer Compulsory Modules: include auto-immunity syndromes and the role Research Institute. Projects comprise 3-months (*indicates a practical component). of the human immune system and immunology (June-August) of laboratory-based research • Genomes and Molecular Genetics in cancer development and treatment. and 1-month to finalise thesis. This module equips you with an in depth understanding of the fundamental principles of • Stem Cells in Therapy & Disease CAREER PROSPECTS medically-related molecular biology and serves This provides an in depth understanding of Successful students can progress into PhD as a basis for the more specialized modules of stem cell biology. Topics include maintenance of research in medical molecular topics and the MSc/Diploma course. stem cells, generation of induced pluripotent employment in the fields of medical molecular stem cells (iPSC) for use in patient specific diagnostics and industry. • Medical Microbes Viruses & Parasites therapies and research, stem cells as the The aim of this module is to develop initiating cells of cancer and the adverse effects From 2015, this course will be part of the School understanding of the medical and molecular of genomic instabilities, associated with long of Medical Sciences, see page 139 for School aspects of bacterial, viral and parasitic term culture of human stem cells on information. infection. Topics include medically important regenerative therapies and disease.

Molecular Biology with Biotechnology MSc COURSE DURATION MSc: 1 year full-time.

of human DNA polymorphisms and DNA ﬁngerprinting.

ENTRY REQUIREMENTS • Marine Biotechnology The normal requirement is for an applicant to This module will address the “Blue Revolution”, have a good Honours degree in a Biological including the potential of marine organisms to Science subject. Applications from mature yield novel pharmacological compounds; the students, without formal qualifications, but with production of fish genetically modified to relevant industrial, commercial, research or other express growth hormone and antifreeze protein experience will be considered. Applicants from genes; the molecular diagnosis of fish, overseas must, in addition, demonstrate crustacean and mollusc diseases; and the use competence in English to an acceptable level. of RNAi as a novel therapeutic approach for the treatment of fish viral diseases. COURSE DESCRIPTION Topics covered include Agrobacterium Ti plasmid • Environmental and Industrial Biotechnology based plant transformation vectors and the This deals with aspects of industrial microbial development of transgenic crops; the analysis of biotechnology including the use of DNA sequences via bioinformatic approaches; the microorganisms to tackle marine oil pollution use of DNA barcoding in fish; bioremediation, and to degrade chlorinated organic pollutants; biomining and the use of bacteria to degrade Metagenomics; metal-microbe interactions; novel organic pollutants and stem cell Biomining; mineral bioprocessing and technologies and the diagnosis of genetic disease bioremediation. using single nucleotide polymorphisms. You will take part in laboratory exercises designed to • Genomes and Molecular Genetics introduce you to essential techniques in Students will gain an in-depth understanding of molecular biology and biotechnology. Most of the the molecules and molecular mechanisms modules have an associated practical component. involved in genome organisation, DNA The Research project will be conducted under the replication, transcription, RNA translation and direct supervision of one of the staff involved in the uses of RNA transcripts. teaching the course. Also see: http://tinyurl.com/Bangor-Msc-Mol-Biol-Biotech • Plant Biotechnology This module will cover plant transformation Modules include: technology in detail, including the development • Techniques of Molecular Biology & and use of plant transformation vectors based Biotechnology on the Agrobacterium Ti plasmid. The biology of The course will start with training in methods major transgenic crops (herbicide resistance, designed to extract and analyse DNA and RNA pest resistance) will be covered in detail as well from animal and plant tissues, restriction as some examples of transgenic crops designed enzyme mapping of plasmids, and the analysis to impart health benefits.

112 BANGOR UNIVERSITY POSTGRADUATE PROSPECTUS

• Bioinformatics Tools for Gene and Protein Analysis Bioinformatic analysis of genes and proteins are key skills in modern research and industry. This module teaches you how to apply bioinformatics tools to topical biological problems. • Medical Biotechnology Topics covered include: bioinformatics in medicine, cancer immunotherapy, stem cells in regenerative medicine, biomaterials in regenerative medicine, pharmacogenomics of angiogenesis, novel antimicrobial agents and their design and other future medical biotechnologies. • Project Preparation This module is designed to enable you to acquire the specific scientific knowledge, practical skills and scientific writing abilities to prepare for a substantial hypotheses-based research project and final thesis production. • Research Project The project addresses a biological question or topic by practical experimentation in a laboratory setting. Experimental work will be conducted either as an individual or as a member of a small group researching related aspects of a single topic. CAREER PROSPECTS Most students go on to PhD studies as well as into employment – we have placed former students in Imperial College London, the Sainsbury Laboratory at the University of East Anglia, Reliance Industries in Mumbai, India and Siemens Diagnostic Healthcare in the UK.

39450 BU PG Prospectus 2015_2018 2014-09-10 10:36 AM Page 113

Wetland Science and Conservation MSc COURSE DURATION MSc: One year full-time.

Modules include: • Research project • Wetland classification and biodiversity The project will address a relevant scientific A detailed investigation into the scientific basis question or topic by practical experimentation ENTRY REQUIREMENTS for classifying global wetlands, critically and data analysis. Experimentation will be The normal requirement is for a good Honours evaluating common classification schemes, and conducted individually or as a member of a degree in a biological science subject. discussing their implications for the small group. It is expected that the research Applications from mature students, without biodiversity and adaptations required for life will form a contribution to a peer reviewed formal qualifications, but with relevant industrial, within wetlands, and the surrounding scientific paper. commercial, research or other experience will be environment. considered. Applicants from overseas must, in CAREER PROSPECTS addition, demonstrate competence in English to • Wetland hydrology and biogeochemistry Successful students will develop the skills and an acceptable level. The environmental and ecological significance experience required to enable progression onto of hydrological and biogeochemical processes PhD studies in a wide-range of biological, COURSE DESCRIPTION in wetlands will be explained in relation to biogeochemical, environmental and conservation This intense course aims to give students a elemental cycling, water quality, carbon based subjects. The course will also allow thorough understanding of all aspects of wetland sequestration, and global climate change. students to seek employment in areas related to science and ecology. Students will gain wetlands, soil science, water treatment and experience and knowledge on the complex • Wetland conservation and management quality, conservation and environmental conservation, restoration and management This module is designed to equip students with consultancy. issues associated with wetlands. Practical field an in-depth understanding of the main and laboratory work will cover the latest theoretical and applied aspects of wetland For further course details, please see: techniques in environmental analysis needed for conservation and management. www.bangor.ac.uk/go/pg/biologicalsciences contemporary wetland monitoring and experimentation. • Wetland ecosystem services This module deals with wetland ecosystem Students will learn a variety of instrumental services in terms of their uses on economic, analysis techniques suitable for ecologists social, cultural and scientific levels, and how interested in environmental analysis and those these can be assigned a practical valuation to studying a wide variety of aquatic and terrestrial drive conservation practices. habitats – not just wetlands. • Project preparation The research project will take place during the This module will enable students to acquire the summer and will be conducted under the direct specific scientific and statistical knowledge, supervision of one of the research-active practical skills and scientific writing abilities members of staff involved in teaching the course. needed to prepare for a substantial hypothesisbased research project and final thesis production.

Wetland Science for Pollution Control MSc COURSE DURATION MSc: One-year full-time. ENTRY REQUIREMENTS The normal requirement is for an applicant to have a good Honours degree in a biological science subject. Applications from mature students, without formal qualiﬁcations, but with relevant industrial, commercial, research or other experience will be considered. Applicants from overseas must, in addition, demonstrate competence in English to an acceptable level. COURSE DESCRIPTION This course will give students a thorough understanding of all aspects of wetland science required for understanding the design and construction of treatment wetlands for bioremediation and pollution control. Students will learn the theoretical and practical skills needed in the application of a range of treatment wetlands for pollution control and water management. Students will learn a variety of instrumental analysis techniques. These will be tailored for constructed wetland engineers and biogeochemists interested in environmental analysis and suitable for those studying a wide variety of aquatic and terrestrial habitats – not just wetlands. The research project will take place during the summer and will be conducted under the direct supervision of one of the research-active members of staﬀ involved in teaching the course.

BANGOR UNIVERSITY POSTGRADUATE PROSPECTUS 113

39450 BU PG Prospectus 2015_2018 2014-09-10 10:36 AM Page 114

Ecology or Natural Sciences MRes The MRes in Natural Sciences is run by the School of Biological Sciences but is open to students in any School of the College of Natural Sciences.

COURSE DESCRIPTION The MRes program is a full-time 1 year degree by research (also available on a part-time basis), and differs from an MSc in being a researchbased degree and therefore placing emphasis on the research project. The MRes in Ecology is built on the strong foundation of the former MSc in Ecology which ran at Bangor for over 40 years and which has an excellent reputation in the UK, and internationally, among employers and academics in the field. This degree will equip you with confidence and competence in the latest research skills and allow you to apply for further research training (PhD) programs or to directly apply for research positions in universities or research institutes.

RESEARCH LINKS/LINKS WITH INDUSTRY Extensive national and international staff contacts mean that you are often able to carry out their research projects in association with commercial consultancies, local councils, environmental organisations (e.g. the Environment Agency, Countryside Council for Wales, RSPB, British Trust for Ornithology, many of whom have regional offices based in Bangor), and government research institutes (e.g. Centre for Ecology and Hydrology) in the UK, and abroad (past projects have involved fieldwork in the West Indies, Africa, Maldives, and various European countries).

COURSE DESCRIPTION The School supports a vigorous research base in a number of areas including animal behaviour, ENTRY REQUIREMENTS endocrinology, energetics and physiology, Applicants should normally have an upper molecular ecology, ﬁsheries genetics, molecular second class Honours degree in a Biological cancer studies, microbial biodegradation and Science subject or equivalent. Applicants from bioremediation, genomics of micro-organisms overseas must, in addition, demonstrate and plants, plant systems and technology, competence in English to an acceptable level. See wetland biogeochemistry, and comparative page 111 for details. neuroscience and development. Research within the School is supported by a range of national and international funding agencies and there are links with industrial and academic partners all over the world.

The School receives substantial ﬁnancial support from the Research Councils, charities, government departments and British and overseas industry. Our diverse interests facilitate a wide exchange of interdisciplinary ideas and techniques and promote collaborations both within the School and with colleagues in institutions and industry.

COURSE DURATION MRes: 1 year full-time or pro-rata part-time. ENTRY REQUIREMENTS Entry requires a good first degree (2.ii or above) in a relevant biological subject from a university, or a similar qualification from any other institution. Alternatively, possession of a suitable professional qualification and relevant practical experience may also be accepted.

CAREER PROSPECTS As well as finding specific employment based on There are 2 parts to the course: the first part the specialist knowledge acquired during consists of introductory generic skills such as postgraduate training, your general employability literature searching, health and safety aspects, will be enhanced by evidence of your ability to grant proposal writing and an introduction to work independently, to think analytically and experimental design and statistical manipulation innovatively, and to conceptualise and question. of data (60 credits), while the second is the During your studies, you will also have the research project itself (120 credits). Because chance to develop essential professional skills many of the elements of the first part of the such as good communication, teamwork and course focus on the development of the research leadership skills and enhance your practical project, we do require you to have arranged a experience. Our past graduates have gone on to mutually agreeable topic with a specific careers in research (both in academia and supervisor in the College of Natural Sciences research institutes) as well as in commercial (CNS) before you apply. There are a wide range of environmental consultancies, DEFRA, water possible topics and further information on staff authorities, scientific publishing, landscape research interests can be found at: architects and many others. http://www.bangor.ac.uk/cns/research. For further course details, please see: You may also approach the Graduate School for www.bangor.ac.uk/go/pg/biologicalsciences further advice.

Biological Sciences PhD/MPhil COURSE DURATION PhD: 3 years full-time; MPhil: 2 years full-time.

Research degrees are available in subjects covering the full spectrum of our research expertise, including molecular ecology, ﬁsheries genetics, herpetology, molecular cancer studies, biodegradation and bioremediation, plant systems and technology, wetland biogeochemistry, neuroscience, animal energetics and ecophysiology. To obtain a PhD, which normally takes 3 years full-time, you are expected to conduct independent research that will make an original contribution to knowledge about that particular subject and present this in the form of a thesis. The MPhil usually takes 2 years full-time to complete, and also involves independent research and completion of a thesis but this may be extension of existing knowledge rather than an original contribution.

114 BANGOR UNIVERSITY POSTGRADUATE PROSPECTUS

For further course details, please see: www.bangor.ac.uk/go/pg/biologicalsciences

39450 BU PG Prospectus 2015_2018 2014-09-10 10:36 AM Page 115

School of Environment, Natural Resources and Geography About the School The School of Environment, Natural Resources and Geography is in an outstanding location in the UK to study the natural environment. We are a friendly School within a compact University-city; committed to delivering teaching of the highest quality. The School carries out international research, with particular expertise in forest ecology and management; environmental and soil science; agricultural systems; agroforestry; biodiversity conservation, tropical ecosystems and river catchments. The research reputation of the School is evident in the number of research projects that it runs; we currently have more than 60 students undertaking research for their PhDs. Their work is undertaken over a threeyear period, and results in the production of a thesis and several scientiﬁc papers. This concentration of postgraduates concerned with environmental and resource management topics makes the School a considerable force in terms of global research. We attract visiting scholars from every corner of the globe, who in turn contribute to a lively and invigorating atmosphere within the School.

The types of research undertaken vary widely across the environment and land use spectrum. Much of our research is undertaken overseas and we have projects in countries as far apart as Vietnam, Ethiopia and Peru.

MRes • Ecology* • Natural Sciences*

• Antarctic ecosystems – partitioning of resources between plants and microbes • Greenhouse gas emissions from lowland peat soils • Sustaining and restoring biocultural diversity of indigenous sacred sites in Ethiopia • Conservation and management of natural resources under the challenges of a changing climate in Bangladesh. English Language Requirements International applicants are normally required to provide evidence of English language proﬁciency. The minimum English requirements for fulltime, on-campus students are: • IELTS 6.0 (with no individual score lower than 5.5) or equivalent. For PhD/MPhil courses: • IELTS 6.5 (with no individual score lower than 6.0). For MSc Distance Learning: • IELTS 6.5 (with no individual score lower than 6.0).

STAFF PROFILE

Overview of academic areas We offer a wide range of degree programmes including Masters programmes in Agroforestry; Conservation and Land Management; Environmental Forestry; Plant Conservation; Sustainable Tropical Forestry; and Sustainable Forestry and Nature Management. We also offer taught postgraduate distance-learning programmes. Research degrees are offered in a wide range of environmental subjects; such as Plant and Soil Science; Natural Resources Ecology, Conservation and Management; and Crop and Forest Science.

COURSE LIST:

Some examples of our current projects include:

Facilities The School has a wide range of modern facilities including a dedicated Research Centre, ﬁve miles outside the city, which is home to long-term experiments in forestry, agroforestry, climate change, crop breeding and ecology. The School hosts other major internationally and nationally recognised research centres such as the Centre for Evidence-Based Conservation, and the Centre for Integrated Research in the Rural Environment. Our location provides unique opportunities for study in the disciplines we cover, particularly the natural environment, land use and conservation. Snowdonia National Park is less than 20 minutes away and this provides a ‘living laboratory’ for much of our teaching and research.

Many of our programmes are professionally accredited, including our forestry-related programmes which are accredited by the Institute of Chartered Foresters (ICF) and our Environmental programmes, which are accredited by the Institution of Environmental Sciences. The Environmental Management course is also accredited by the Institute of Environmental Management and Assessment (IEMA) and some individual modules even give associate membership of the Institute.

MSc • Agroforestry • Conservation and Land Management • Environmental and Business Management • Plant Conservation • Environmental Forestry • Sustainable Forest and Nature Management • Sustainable Tropical Forestry

MSc by Distance Learning • Forestry • Tropical Forestry • Food Security in a Changing Environment* MA/MSc

• Rheolaeth Amgylcheddol Gynaliadwy / Welsh-Medium Sustainable Environmental Management # MBA • Environmental Management PhD/MPhil • Agricultural Systems • Agroforestry • Biodiversity Conservation • Environmental and Soil Science • Forest Ecology and Management • Geography • Renewable Materials * see website for details # gweler y manylion yn y prosepctws Cymraeg / See the Welsh-medium prospectus for details. TO FIND OUT MORE: Tel: +44 (0) 1248 382281 E-mail: senrgy@bangor.ac.uk www.bangor.ac.uk/senrgy

Professor Morag McDonald, Professor of Ecology and Catchment Management and Head of School Morag McDonald completed her undergraduate degree in Agricultural and Environmental Sciences at Newcastle University, followed by a Ph.D. in Forestry from Edinburgh University. She subsequently worked for BBC Scotland as a researcher and radio producer in their farming and environmental unit, before taking up post-doctoral work at the University of British Columbia in Vancouver, Canada. She now holds a personal chair in ecology and catchment management at Bangor University. She is Head of the School of Environment, Natural Resources and Geography which has 400 undergraduate students, 162 masters students, 60 PhD students and 28 members of faculty. She has been an active researcher in international environmental issues for over 20 years, with broad research expertise in soil conservation and fertility; impacts of anthropogenic and natural disturbance on forest ecosystems; tropical forest regeneration; agroforestry systems, water regulating ecosystem services and forest restoration through fallow management. She has ﬁeld experience in 14 countries. She is a founder and consortium member of the joint European MSc programme in Sustainable Tropical Forestry (SUTROFOR), and the global PhD programme in Forest and Nature for Society (FONASO). She is an Associate of the Institute of Environmental Management and Assessment; and a Fellow of the Royal Geographical Society. BANGOR UNIVERSITY POSTGRADUATE PROSPECTUS 115

39450 BU PG Prospectus 2015_2018 2014-09-10 10:36 AM Page 116

Our location provides unique opportunities for study in the disciplines we cover, particularly the natural environment, land use and conservation. Snowdonia National Park is less than 20 minutes away and this provides a ‘living laboratory’ for much of our teaching and research.

116 BANGOR UNIVERSITY POSTGRADUATE PROSPECTUS

39450 BU PG Prospectus 2015_2018 2014-09-10 10:36 AM Page 117

Agroforestry MSc COURSE DURATION MSc: 1 year full-time; Diploma: 30 weeks full-time.

Modules include: • Agroforestry Systems This module explores agroforestry practices worldwide and introduces the concepts behind this land use system. The module explores ecological and biophysical interactions in agroforestry systems, and considers the range of social, economic and ecosystem beneﬁts they deliver.

ENTRY REQUIREMENTS A good first degree in a relevant subject, e.g. Agriculture, Forestry, Environmental Sciences, Ecology, Conservation Sciences, Sustainable Development, Geography or Biological Sciences. Alternatively, a first degree in an unrelated subject plus relevant practical experience may be • Silviculture for Agroforestry accepted. Applicants are judged on their This module develops your understanding of individual merits and age, work experience and the silviculture of single trees and trees in other factors are also considered. complex systems. This module focuses the interaction of tree management systems with COURSE DESCRIPTION the physical environment (soils, climate etc.), The course equips you to deal with the principal with human beings and with the range of forces driving change in farming and forestry, products derived from these systems. from thinking globally about issues like climate change, food security and carbon trading to • Natural Resource Development dealing with practical issues of how to manage This module aims to provide students with the trees on farms at a local level. The course has an skills required to design and plan Agroforestryinternational focus and the University has based Natural Resource Management specific links with agroforestry organisations in interventions that meet the objectives of a Africa, Asia, Europe and the Americas. range of stakeholders and to manage the tradeoffs between these. The taught part of the course provides an opportunity to examine a broad range of topics in • Natural Resource Management detail and develop personal skills and expertise. This module gives you a theoretical A range of assessment methods are used understanding of the systems approach to including reports, presentations, practical writemanaging natural resources, as well as a ups and online and written exams. practical grounding in the ways in which natural resource managers can draw on different kinds June to September is set aside for production of of knowledge sources. a dissertation on a research topic selected by you in consultation with your academic supervisor. Dissertations can have a temperate or tropical focus, and can include field work either locally, elsewhere in the UK, or overseas.

• Research Planning and Communication This module seeks to develop students’ understanding of the role of science and the scientific process in formulating and addressing context relevant questions, and communicating scientific output to different audiences. • Study Tour This module gives you the opportunity to see how the principles of natural resource management that are discussed in earlier parts of your course are put into practice. RESEARCH LINKS/LINKS WITH INDUSTRY Bangor has been recognised internationally as a centre for Agroforestry research for many years and the University has ongoing and productive links with agroforestry organisations in Africa, Asia, Europe and the Americas. Many students choose to conduct their dissertation work in collaboration with the World Agroforestry Centre (ICRAF) based in Nairobi. This degree is accredited by the UK Institute of Chartered Foresters (ICF) and qualifies students for associate membership. CAREER PROSPECTS Agroforester is not a job description that many people would give themselves, however graduates from this course have progressed on to relevant employment in public sector organisations, NGOs and academic institutions both in the EU and overseas. This MSc course has also formed a stepping stone in postgraduate research and has produced high calibre research scientists in the fields of tree biology, agroforestry science, and natural resource management.

Conservation and Land Management MSc COURSE DURATION MSc: 1 year full-time; Diploma: 30 weeks full-time.

A range of assessment methods are used including reports, presentations, practical writeups and online and written exams. June to September is set aside for production of a ENTRY REQUIREMENTS dissertation on a research topic selected by you Entry to the MSc/Diploma Conservation and Land in consultation with your academic supervisor. Management course requires at least a secondclass degree in a relevant subject e.g. agriculture, Modules include: environmental studies, geography, sustainable • Conservation Biology development, economics, law, biological This module reviews the key concepts, which sciences, social sciences and psychology underpin the conservation and management of Applications from mature applicants, who have single species populations, habitats and nature relevant experience in agriculture, forestry, reserves. conservation or land use, are actively encouraged. Applications from people with other • Evidence-Based Conservation backgrounds wishing to develop an This module introduces you to the concept of understanding of rural development issues are evidence-based practice, the theoretical basis welcomed and will be considered on an and methodological approach, including individual basis. systematic review and critical appraisal of evidence. COURSE DESCRIPTION This one-year MSc course in Conservation and • Agriculture and the Environment Land Management is intended for students with a This module reviews the impact of agricultural strong interest in the environment and who want systems and practices on the environment and to increase their knowledge of conservation the scientific principles involved. issues. The course addresses issues concerned with sustainable use of the countryside. It • Management Plan examines habitats, wildlife and landscapes and This module allows you to apply knowledge the natural and human factors influencing them. gained in other modules to write a The course also examines how economic Conservation Management System (CMS) activities such as farming and forestry can be ‘minimum contents’ management plan for a managed in an environmentally acceptable way, Site of Special Scientific Interest. and how human enjoyment of the countryside can be incorporated within an integrated land use • Research Methods approach. This module prepares you for the dissertation stage of your MSc course through the writing of a The taught part of the course provides an research plan and risk assessment. It introduces opportunity to examine a broad range of topics in data collection, modelling, statistical analysis and detail and develop personal skills and expertise. GIS skills required for future research.

• Field Visit This is a scientific study tour visiting different conservation organisations to understand their management objectives and constraints in achieving their objectives. RESEARCH LINKS/LINKS WITH INDUSTRY This MSc course has strong research links with many conservation organisations locally, nationally and internationally e.g. Natural Resources Wales, Environment Agency, The Royal Society for the Protection of Birds (RSPB), Coed Cymru, local farmers and food industries. CAREER PROSPECTS Graduates from this course gained employment with conservation agencies, NGOs and government organisations and with academic institutions both in the EU and overseas. This MSc course has also produced high calibre scientists in the fields of climate change, sustainable agriculture, renewable energy and animal diseases and human health.

“Upon completion of the course I gained employment as a Project Manager with a wildlife conservation charity. Many of the skills I developed as part of the course were essential in my day to day responsibilities.” ANNA JONES, Conservation and Land Management Graduate

BANGOR UNIVERSITY POSTGRADUATE PROSPECTUS 117

39450 BU PG Prospectus 2015_2018 2014-09-10 10:36 AM Page 118

Environmental Forestry MSc COURSE DURATION: MSc: 1 year full-time; Diploma: 30 weeks full-time ENTRY REQUIREMENTS A good first degree in a relevant subject, e.g. Forestry, Environmental Sciences, Ecology, Conservation Sciences, Sustainable Development, Geography or Biological Sciences. Alternatively, a first degree in an unrelated subject plus relevant practical experience may be accepted. Applicants are judged on their individual merits and age, work experience and other factors are also considered. COURSE DESCRIPTION This one-year course will develop your understanding of forest ecosystems and their role in the global environment, and of the goods and services that forests can provide. The course can have a temperate or tropical focus, depending on optional elements chosen. The taught part of the course provides an opportunity to examine a broad range of topics in detail and develop personal skills and expertise. A range of assessment methods are used including reports, presentations, practical writeups and online and written exams. June to September is set aside for production of a dissertation on a research topic selected by you in consultation with your academic supervisor. Dissertations can have a temperate or tropical focus, and can include field work either locally, elsewhere in the UK, or overseas.

Modules include: • Study Tour • Forest Resources & Assessment This module gives you the opportunity to see This module provides an overview of the status how the principles of forest management that of world forests, trends and causes of are discussed in earlier parts of your course deforestation and degradation, consequences are put into practice. for ecosystem services, and policy responses. RESEARCH LINKS/LINKS WITH INDUSTRY • Silviculture Bangor has been recognised internationally as a This module develops an understanding of centre for Forestry research for many years and silviculture and forest management and the the University has ongoing and productive links interaction of management systems with the with a diverse range of organisations in Africa, physical environment. Asia, Europe and the Americas. This degree is accredited by the UK Institute of Chartered • Natural Resource Development Foresters (ICF) and qualifies students for This module aims to provide students with the associate membership. skills required to design and plan Agroforestrybased Natural Resource Management CAREER PROSPECTS interventions that meet the objectives of a Against a sometimes gloomy economic range of stakeholders and to manage the trade- backdrop, natural resource management, and offs between these. forest management in particular, is becoming more important, with the result that there is a • Management Planning generally acknowledged skills shortage in the This module develops an understanding of the forestry profession. The speed with which our management planning process, and its use in graduates gain employment reflects this. the sustainable management of rural resources. Graduates from this course have progressed on You develop management plans for real-world to relevant employment in public sector forestry situations which involves setting organisations, NGOs and academic institutions management objectives, considering landscape both in the EU and overseas. This MSc course has features, devising appropriate monitoring and also formed a stepping stone in postgraduate evaluation techniques and quantifying the costs research and has produced high calibre research of management operations. scientists in the fields of tree biology, forest science, and natural resource management. • Research Planning and Communication This module seeks to develop students’ For further course details, please see: understanding of the role of science and the www.bangor.ac.uk/go/pg/senrgy scientific process in formulating and addressing context relevant questions, and communicating scientific output to different audiences.

Forestry MSc (Distance Learning) COURSE DURATION MSc: 3 years part-time; PG Dip: 2 years part-time; PG Cert: 1 year part-time.

Compulsory Modules: Optional Modules: • Social Issues in Forest Management • Forest Ecosystems The purpose of the module is to consider the The purpose of this module is to present the ways in which social, cultural, economic and occurrence and ecology of different forest political factors influence the shape and scope types. Emphasis will be placed on forest biota ENTRY REQUIREMENTS of forest management systems and how these and soils, nutrient cycling, hydrology and Generally an Honours Degree in a relevant may affect the livelihoods of communities living pollution, climate change, plus forest pests and science or technology subject is required, such as in or close to forests. disease. biology, horticulture, agriculture, law, economics, engineering, environmental science. Applications • Silviculture • Agroforestry Systems and Practice from mature students who do not have higher The purpose of the module is to give you an This module is designed to give you in-depth education qualifications but have relevant work understanding of the principles of silviculture, perspectives of the fascinating interface experience and who have worked for a minimum including species selection according to site between forestry and agriculture. of 2 years in a position of responsibility and conditions, artificial and natural regeneration of relevance to the degree are encouraged. woodlands and interventions. RESEARCH LINKS/LINKS WITH INDUSTRY The course is closely linked with all aspects of COURSE DESCRIPTION • Forest History, Policy and Management the forest industry, both in the UK and beyond. This course is designed to provide you with How has human history influenced forest You are encouraged to seek opportunities and training in the management of forest resources, ecosystems? What is the basis for the current make your own links that relate to your own area understanding of the scientific, academic and emphasis on Sustainable Forest Management? of interest and expertise and you are fully practical principles which underpin forest Are existing laws / governance structures / supported in this process. Students receive management, forest measurement and forest subsidies / tax incentives / management plans regular updates regarding the latest news, jobs, ecosystem function and the interrelationships delivering intended policy goals? This module placements and other opportunities in the between government, industry and communities’ explores these challenging questions. forestry profession. forests and associated land-use aspirations and motiviations. • Forest Inventory, Assessment and Monitoring CAREER PROSPECTS This module considers ways in which forest The part-time nature of this course enables you Teaching and learning for each module is resources can be assessed, measured and to build your career alongside other work or supported by a guided reading handbook plus recorded for their growth and development to personal commitments. Current students and various supplementary materials, such as books, be monitored. recent graduates have secured employment in e-books, journal articles, scientific reports, online organisations including the Woodland Trust, lectures, podcasts, discussion forums and a • Sustainable Use of Non-Timber Forest Forestry Commission, forest management fantastic ‘virtual learning environment’. The wide Products companies, The National Trust, Natural range of backgrounds, expertise, interests and The purpose of the module is to give you an Resources Wales, government departments, skills amongst both the staff and students on the understanding of the ways in which forests may NGO’s and more. The part-time nature of the course make for a hugely enriching learning be managed in ways which recognise the value course opens up numerous opportunities for experience. and enterprise development potential of nonstudy, travel, scholarship and research and you timber forest products (NTFPs). are encouraged to take advantage of these.

118 BANGOR UNIVERSITY POSTGRADUATE PROSPECTUS

39450 BU PG Prospectus 2015_2018 2014-09-10 10:36 AM Page 119

Tropical Forestry MSc (Distance Learning) COURSE DURATION MSc: 3 years part-time; PG Dip: 2 years parttime; PG Cert: 1 year part-time.

Compulsory Modules: mensuration, forest inventory and forest • Tropical Forests, People and Policies resource monitoring. This module takes a people-oriented approach to issues that all natural resources managers in • Sustainable Use of Non-Timber Forest ENTRY REQUIREMENTS developing countries should be familiar with. Products Honours Degree in a relevant science or Emphasis is on the relationships between The purpose of the module is to give you an technology subject is required, such as forestry, people and forest use and conservation in understanding of the ways in which forests may biology, ecology, law, economics, environmental developing countries. be managed in ways which recognise the value science, development studies. Applications from and enterprise development potential of nonmature students without higher education • Participatory Forest Management timber forest products (NTFPs). qualifications but who have relevant work In this module the emphasis is on the political experience and who have worked for a minimum and socio-economic aspects of participatory / RESEARCH LINKS/LINKS WITH INDUSTRY of 2 years in a position of responsibility and community forestry as a means to promote The course is closely linked with all aspects of relevance to the degree will be considered. rural development and conserve forest the forest industry, both in the UK and beyond. resources in an equitable manner. You are encouraged to seek opportunities and COURSE DESCRIPTION make your own links that relate to your own area The MSc Tropical Forestry distance-learning • Preparing Field Work in the Tropics of interest and expertise and you are supported course has been developed in collaboration with This module develops in-depth factual location in this process. Students receive regular updates the prestigious University of Copenhagen. The specific knowledge relevant to tropical forestry regarding the latest news, jobs, placements and course provides part-time students from across issues. other opportunities in the forestry sector. the world with training in the management of forest resources, understanding of the scientific, • Sustainable Tropical Forestry Summer School CAREER PROSPECTS academic and practical principles which This module concentrates on data collection The part-time nature of this course enables you underpin forest management, forest and evaluation methods are applied in the field to build your career alongside other work or measurement and forest ecosystem function and (two weeks at the end of July / beginning of personal commitments. Recent students have the interrelationships between government, August). gone on to gain employment in a broad range of industry and communities’ forests and organisations including national and local associated land-use. • Agroforestry Systems and Practice government, universities, research centres, This module is designed to give you an in-depth international agencies, forest management Teaching and learning is supported by guided perspectives of the fascinating interface companies, NGO’s, consultancies and related reading handbooks plus various supplementary between forestry and agriculture. organisations. Additionally some graduates go on materials, such as books, journal articles, to do PhD research The part-time nature of the scientific reports, online lectures, podcasts, • Forest Inventory, Assessment and Monitoring course opens up numerous opportunities for discussion forums and a ‘virtual learning The purpose of this module is to consider ways study, travel, scholarship and research and you environment’. The wide range of backgrounds, in which forest resources can be assessed and are encouraged to take advantage of these. expertise, interests and skills amongst both the recorded for their growth and development to staff and students on the course make for a be monitored. It will provide you with the For further course details, please see: hugely enriching learning experience. opportunity to acquire knowledge and www.bangor.ac.uk/go/pg/senrgy understanding of the specialist areas of

Food Security in a Changing Environment MSc Distance Learning and Continuing Professional Development (CPD) COURSE DURATION: 1 year (PG Cert); 2 years (PG Dip); up to 5 years (MSc). Modules can also be taken on a stand alone basis. ENTRY REQUIREMENTS First or second class honours degree in a relevant subject, such as Biological Sciences, Environmental Sciences or Agriculture. A lesser degree plus a minimum of two years relevant work experience would be considered, as would mature students without a degree but with at least two years relevant work experience in a position of demonstrable responsibility.

Students may begin their study at the beginning Optional Modules: of any module occurring at the end of September, • Upland Farming Systems the end of January or in mid May. This module will examine the environmental, economic and social viability of alternative Teaching and learning is supported by study upland farming systems. guides with journal articles, online lectures, podcasts, and discussion forums. The wide range • Carbon Footprinting & Life Cycle Assessment of backgrounds and expertise of staff and This module will consider in detail the students make a hugely enriching learning principles and practices of life cycle experience. With students registered from over assessment and carbon footprinting, in relation 20 different countries, this is a truly international to eco-efficiency assessment and improvement course. of pasture based farming systems. Compulsory Modules: • Agriculture and Society This module will study the environmental, economic and social implications of pasture based agriculture from an ethical perspective.

COURSE DESCRIPTION This Food Security in a Changing Environment Course will provide students with a detailed understanding of the principles and processes of sustainable food production, including social and • Global Food Security environmental contexts. It will equip students to This module takes a global perspective on food implement the latest research into sustainable systems and their role in providing food systems thinking. Professionals in the agri-food security. industry, conservation and environment, farmers, and agricultural policy decision makers may be • Climate Change interested in the modules of this degree, as will This module provides a detailed assessment of full-time students wishing to pursue a post current knowledge on climate change – graduate degree that culminates in employability science, impacts, adaptation and mitigation, and in these sectors. how it is perceived by the public. Students can study up to 6 modules per year, depending on their status as part time or full time students. For the Masters degree, students must complete a total of 6 modules of study plus a dissertation project.

• Soil Management This module will provide a practical and theoretical overview of soil management. CAREER PROSPECTS This course will retrain professionals to redirect or enhance their existing capabilities for a career in the agricultural or agribusiness sectors. Graduates can ﬁnd careers in advisory and policy/advocacy roles, executive management, agriculture and agribusiness consultancy, the agricultural ﬁnance sector, land and catchment management agency roles, natural resource management, agricultural education and training and as rural consultants.

• Research Methods This module provides the tools needed for the dissertation: research design, literature review, ethical considerations, GIS, and preparing a research proposal.

BANGOR UNIVERSITY POSTGRADUATE PROSPECTUS 119

39450 BU PG Prospectus 2015_2018 2014-09-10 10:36 AM Page 120

Sustainable Tropical Forestry MSc COURSE DURATION MSc: 2 years full-time; Diploma: 52 weeks fulltime; Certiﬁcate: 30 weeks full-time.

Technology for Life, Food and Environmental Sciences), Montpellier, France; College of Agriculture, University of Padova, Padova, Italy.

ENTRY REQUIREMENTS Entry requires a good ﬁrst degree in a relevant subject, or second class honours degree in a relevant subject or a minimum of two years relevant experience in forestry or related work in a position of demonstrable responsibility. Relevant professional experience should be supported by additional evidence such as authorship of appropriate professional reports or a record of active membership of a relevant professional organisation (e.g. Commonwealth Forestry Association, International Society of Tropical Foresters). In general, however, applicants are judged on their individual merits, work experience and other factors are also considered.

The course consists of a first study year at one of three institutions (Bangor, Copenhagen, Dresden) • Climate Change and Tropical Forestry: and a specialising second study year with Monitoring and Policies different topics offered by each of the five This module focuses on popular discourses on institutions. You are required to spend the second the relationships between climate change, year at a different university to the first year. The forests and livelihoods. aim of the first study year is to provide a thorough and broad introduction to sustainable • Preparing Field Work in the Tropics tropical forestry. The learning outcomes are This module develops in-depth factual location similar for the three first year institutions and specific knowledge relevant to tropical forestry allow you to choose freely among all five issues. specialisation options in the second year. The first year ends with the Joint Summer Module • Sustainable Tropical Forestry Summer School including fieldwork in a tropical country. This module applies data collection and evaluation methods in the field. Specialisation options in the second year are: • Agroforestry systems (Bangor) Optional Modules: • Socio-economics of tropical forestry This is dependent on where the second year of (Copenhagen) study is selected. Please see: • Tropical forest management (Dresden) www.bangor.ac.uk/senrgy/courses/pg/ • Environmental management and policies for www.sutrofor.eu tropical forests (Montpellier) • Ethics in forestry and responsible trade in CAREER PROSPECTS tropical forest products and services (Padova). There are excellent employment opportunities in the broad area of tropical forestry including Compulsory Modules: national government, international organisations • Forest Resource Assessment and consultancies. Many recent graduates have This module provides an introduction to world gone on to do PhD research. forest resources and policy.

COURSE DESCRIPTION The MSc course in Sustainable Tropical Forestry is a two-year world-class integrated course aimed at qualifying graduates to deal with the huge challenges in contemporary tropical forestry. The teaching staff are very active in research and you will profit from our many connections throughout the world. The Sustainable Tropical Forestry course is offered by a consortium of five European universities: Faculty of Science, Copenhagen University, Denmark; School of Environment, Natural Resources and Geography, Bangor University, North Wales, UK; Institute of International Forestry and Forest Products, UK Dresden University of Technology, Tharandt, Germany; AgroParisTech (the Paris Institute of

• Research Methods This module aims to support the dissertation planning process and encourage critical thinking about the research process.

• Silviculture This module develops an understanding of silviculture and tropical forest management and the interaction of management systems with the physical environment.

Sustainable Forest and Nature Management MSc COURSE DURATION MSc: 2 years full-time; Diploma: 52 weeks fulltime; Certificate: 30 weeks full-time ENTRY REQUIREMENTS Entry requires a good first degree in a relevant subject, or second class honours degree in a relevant subject or a minimum of two years relevant experience in forestry, agriculture or other land use related work in a position of demonstrable responsibility. Relevant professional experience should be supported by additional evidence such as authorship of appropriate professional reports or a record of active membership of a relevant professional organisation or International Scientific Society. In general, however, applicants are judged on their individual merits and work experience. COURSE DESCRIPTION This is a two-year world-class integrated course aimed at qualifying graduates to deal with the increasing challenges facing temperate forestry, agriculture and sustainable land use. The teaching staff are research active and the students will benefit from our wide range of research activities and contacts in the UK and overseas. The Sustainable Forest and Nature Management course is offered by a consortium of five European universities: Faculty of Science, Copenhagen University; School of Environment, Natural Resources and Geography, Bangor University, Bangor; Faculty of Forest Sciences and Ecology, University of Göttingen; Southern Swedish Forest Research Centre, Swedish University of Agricultural Sciences; Faculty of Agriculture, University of Padova.

120 BANGOR UNIVERSITY POSTGRADUATE PROSPECTUS

The course consists of a first study year at one of • Location Specific Knowledge and fieldwork in three institutions (Bangor, Copenhagen, temperate forest and nature management Göttingen) and a specialising second study year This module is essentially designed to allow for with different topics offered by each of the five in-depth preparation for field work in institutions. You are required to spend the second temperate forest and nature management. year at a different university to the first year. The aim of the first study year is to provide a • Contemporary temperate forest and nature thorough and broad introduction to sustainable management: climate change and temperate forestry. The first year ends with the management strategies Joint Summer Module including fieldwork in one This module deals with a current hot topic of the partner institutes. and can take in students globally through its e-learning format. Specialisation options in the second year are: • Conservation and Land Management (Bangor) • Preparing Field Work in the Tropics • Management of Forest and Nature for Society This module develops in-depth factual location (Copenhagen) specific knowledge relevant to tropical forestry • Forest and Nature Management in Changing issues. Climate (Göttingen) • Forest Management in Scandinavia and the • Sustainable Temperate Forestry Baltic Region (Alnarp) Management Summer School • Mountain Forestry and Watershed Management This module applies data collection and (Padova). evaluation methods in the field. Compulsory Modules: • Forest Resource Assessment This module provides an introduction to world forest resources and policy. • Silviculture This module examines temperate silviculture and forest management highlighting the interaction of management systems with the physical environment. • Natural Resource Management This module provides a good understanding of the systems approach to managing natural resources to provide various ecosystem services.

Optional Modules: This is dependent on where the second year of study is selected. Links to full module details for the partner institutions are available at: www.bangor.ac.uk/senrgy/courses/pg/ CAREER PROSPECTS There are excellent employment opportunities in the broad area of forestry including national government, international organisations and consultancies. Many recent graduates have gone on to do PhD research.

39450 BU PG Prospectus 2015_2018 2014-09-10 10:36 AM Page 121

Environment and Business Management MSc IEMA Approved for the Associate Certificate in Environmental Management. COURSE DURATION 1 year full-time.

Part One (taught) • Organisations and People To provide an integrated analysis of ENTRY REQUIREMENTS management, organisations and people, At least a 2.ii degree in a relevant subject, e.g. developing the conceptual, strategic and Environmental Science or Business Studies from practical skills necessary for managers in a university, or a similar qualification from any complex, global organisational contexts. other institution is normally required. Alternatively, possession of a suitable • Strategic Management professional qualification and relevant practical This module introduces the language of experience may also be accepted. strategic management and explores the link between strategic and operational COURSE DESCRIPTION management. This course is intended for students with a keen interest in integrating environmental • Finance for Managers management with business practices. This module is designed for those who aim to achieve a basic understanding of financial This course will take an integrated view of management and control, and who require an environmental management within a business understanding of finance in order to manage an context and will provide the specialist organisation effectively. interdisciplinary training that is required to fully • New Venture Creation integrate sustainable development objectives into businesses management. By integrating This module evaluates the role of modules from Bangor Business School and The entrepreneurs and small firms as the lifeblood School of Environment, Natural Resources and of an economy. Geography, it will train students to be sophisticated environmental managers who can • Green Economies interpret legislative and audit requirements and This module explores the process of deliver them in a manner conducive to continued establishing a venture from idea generation to economic development. the completion of a business plan which incorporates environmental planning and management.

• Strategic Environmental Management (accredited by IEMA) This module is designed to provide an understanding of the principles of sustainable development, environmental legislation, environmental auditing and assessment, and green technological development. • Green Technology This module reviews the environmental consequences of economic activities, including energy generation, waste management, food and water supply, consumer goods. CAREER PROSPECTS Graduates have gained employment in private and public sector organisations, NGOs and academic institutions both in the EU and overseas, as well as becoming self-employed consultants in Environmental and Business Management. For further course detail, please see: www.bangor.acv.uk/go/pg/senrgy

Plant Conservation MSc COURSE DURATION 1 year full-time. ENTRY REQUIREMENTS Applicants should normally have at least a 2.ii in a relevant subject. Applications from people with other backgrounds wishing to develop an understanding of plant conservation issues are welcomed and will be considered on an individual basis. COURSE DESCRIPTION The course has a particular focus on interactive learning and you will make extensive use of the university botanic garden (Treborth Botanic Garden) for lectures, seminars and practical classes. We emphasise applied plant conservation in this course, with ﬁeld trips to our partner organisations; National Botanic Garden of Wales, Royal Botanic Gardens Kew and Plantlife International. In addition we make full use of the region’s outstanding plant diversity, from seashore to mountain top.

Subjects covered: • Botany and Ecology Will focus on appreciating and understanding the remarkable diversity of plants from bryophytes to angiosperms. You will gain skills in identification and explore plant community ecology. • Applied Plant Conservation Will draw upon the global expertise of people working in the field. Guest speakers from a wide range of conservation organisations will deliver a series of seminars to discuss their experiences in ‘doing’ plant conservation. • Conservation Science Provides an overview of key concepts which underpin conservation and management of populations, habitats and ecosystems. The roles of ecology, economics and social science in conservation are also covered. • Natural Resource Management Gives students a theoretical understanding of the systems approach to managing natural resources, as well as a practical grounding in the ways in which natural resource managers can draw on different kinds of knowledge sources.

• Field Study Tour Gives students the opportunity to see in situ and ex situ conservation in action at world renowned sites including Royal Botanic Gardens, Kew, Millennium Seed Bank at Wakehurst Place, Plantlife International ﬁeld site on the North Downs and the National Botanic Garden of Wales. CAREER PROSPECTS As a graduate from this course you will be trained to address real world conservation problems enabling you to play a leading role in a variety of organisations such as government environmental agencies, international and national NGO’s, botanic gardens and arboreta. Graduates will be equipped with the skills to continue in academic research. This course will also prepare you for employment at the cutting edge of the global horticultural industry. For further course details, please see: www.bangor.ac.uk/senrgy/courses/pg

• Research Methods Forms a foundation for your dissertation research and will develop your project management skills, statistics and modelling, GIS and other essential skills required to conduct research in a range of ecosystems.

BANGOR UNIVERSITY POSTGRADUATE PROSPECTUS 121

39450 BU PG Prospectus 2015_2018 2014-09-10 10:36 AM Page 122

Environmental Management MBA COURSE DURATION MBA: 1 year full-time; 2.5 years part-time.

Compulsory Modules: • Organisations and People This module examines key issues arising from contemporary research in organisational behaviour (OB) and human resource management (HRM).

ENTRY REQUIREMENTS Entry to this course requires a good undergraduate degree in a relevant subject, e.g. Environmental Science or Business Studies from a university, or a similar qualification from any • Strategic Management other institution. Alternatively, possession of a This module analyses strategic decisionsuitable professional qualification and relevant making within business. You will develop a practical experience may also be accepted. In critical understanding of the strategic general, however, applicants are judged on their processes of business management, and the individual merits and age, work experience and interconnections with the functional domains. other factors are also considered. For MBA degrees, whilst work experience is desirable, it is • Management Research not essential. This module analyses the philosophical basis for research in the management sciences, and COURSE DESCRIPTION examines a number of key methodological The role of the corporate environmental manager issues and approaches. is becoming increasingly complex and strategic. Corporate social and environmental • Business Planning for the Green Economy responsibility is becoming prominent in This module explores the process of consumer demand and a pre-requisite for tender establishing a venture from idea generation to eligibility. This necessitates a more sophisticated the completion of a business plan which environmental manager who can interpret incorporates environmental planning and legislative and audit requirements and deliver management. them in a manner conducive to continued economic development, whilst recognising the • Finance for Managers market trends. This module is designed for those who aim to achieve a basic understanding of financial The aim of this course is to develop skills in the management and control, and who require an delivery of economic activities related to the understanding of finance in order to manage an environment, green technology and sustainorganisation effectively. ability. The course includes case studies from across these sectors reflecting changing • Strategic Environmental Management strategies and alternative approaches. The This module is designed to provide an course is suitable for graduates in a wide range understanding of the principles of sustainable of disciplines, including Environment, Engineerdevelopment, environmental legislation, ing, Finance, Social Sciences and other subjects. environmental auditing and assessment, and

green technological development. Students completing this module successfully will be automatically be eligible for Associate membership of IEMA. • Green Technology This module reviews the environmental consequences of economic activities, including energy generation, waste management, food and water supply and consumer goods. CAREER PROSPECTS There are an increasing number of roles in Environmental Management and Consultancy available. An Environmental Manager is responsible for overseeing the environmental performance of private, public and voluntary sector organisations. They also develop, implement and monitor environmental strategies, policies and programmes that promote sustainable development. There are also many other roles in commercial and public sector organisations carrying out impact assessments to identify, assess and reduce an organisation’s environmental risks and ﬁnancial costs and coordinating all aspects of pollution control, waste management, recycling, environmental health, conservation and renewable energy. Other opportunities lie in environmental education, training and research. For further course details, please see: www.bangor.ac.uk/go/pg/senrgy

PhD/MPhil Courses COURSE DURATION PhD: 3 years full-time or 6 years part-time; MPhil: 2 years full-time or 4 years part-time.

Environmental and Soil Science (PhD/MPhil) Multidisciplinary research into fundamental processes is aimed at the creation of sustainable rural, peri-urban and urban environments; with a ENTRY REQUIREMENTS major focus on climate change, biogeochemistry, A good first degree or MSc in a relevant subject plant ecophysiology, waste management and required. For English language requirements, see restoration. page 115. Forest Ecology and Management (PhD/MPhil) COURSE DESCRIPTIONS Research covers the environmental, economic Agricultural Systems (PhD/MPhil) and social factors underpinning sustainability in Research into agricultural systems and practices forest systems, studying processes ranging from ranging from the science of plant and animal individual ecological interactions to those acting production to rural policy and decision-making; at a landscape level. with a focus on alternative crops, food and nutrition, farmer health, local knowledge and Renewable Materials (PhD/MPhil) rural development. Research is concentrated on the fundamental science of wood and plant fibres, natural fibre Agroforestry (PhD/MPhil) reinforced composites, and the use of plantResearch on the interactions of people, derived materials as chemical feedstocks; agriculture and trees at a range of scales from particular attention is paid to environmental ecophysiological interactions among system impacts. components through to landscape level effects, across both temperate and tropical Geography (PhD/MPhil) environments, with a focus on multipurpose tree Research is focused upon physical and human species and farm trees. environments at a range of spatial and temporal scales, particularly fluvial geomorphology, links Biodiversity Conservation (PhD/MPhil) between climate change and human activities in Conservation is studied from the genetic to global riverine landscapes, pollution in river catchments scales, with a strong emphasis on new and the application of geochemical techniques, approaches to biodiversity assessment, rural geographies, urban spaces and social disturbance impacts, invasive species, economies. restoration of degraded habitats and human perceptions and values.

122 BANGOR UNIVERSITY POSTGRADUATE PROSPECTUS

STUDY OVERSEAS In addition to the fully residential mode of study, in some circumstances we may offer ‘split’ PhD/MPhil programmes for international students with part of the study taking place in the student’s own country or a third country. Many of our British and other European students also carry out fieldwork overseas for their research. FUNDING Funding may be available from the following sources: UK Research Councils (scholarships are advertised) (UK students only); Foreign and Commonwealth Office (via British Council); European Union; University scholarships (UK students only); Charities and Trusts; Commonwealth Scholarships; International agencies; Overseas Government Scholarships. CAREER PROSPECTS Most international students return to their countries of origin and either resume with their former employers, or secure new employment at a higher grade, reflecting their higher qualifications. UK students either move on to a post-doctoral contract in a university or research institute, or obtain work with environmental, agricultural or forestry agencies, generally in the public sector. Practically all our doctoral graduates are successful in securing employment requiring doctoral level skills predominantly in research or education. For further course details, please see: www.bangor.ac.uk/go/pg/senrgy

39450 BU PG Prospectus 2015_2018 2014-09-10 10:36 AM Page 123

School of Ocean Sciences About the School The School of Ocean Sciences at Bangor is one of the largest university marine science departments in Europe and a leading international research institution, which is ideally located on the shores of the Menai Strait in north Wales. The School is home to The Centre for Applied Marine Sciences (CAMS) which has very close links with relevant national and international agencies, governmental bodies and the user community. It also provides policy advice and has had a profound impact on applied shelf sea science through work on particle tracking, oil spill management, and aquaculture and marine conservation. Facilities The School of Ocean Sciences has excellent support facilities for both teaching and research. These range from large, modern, well equipped teaching laboratories to ‘hightech’ research laboratories; from a local area PC based computer network to powerful number crunching workstations used in numerical ocean modelling; from photographic and desktop publishing graphics systems to in-house electrical and mechanical workshops capable of designing and building state of the art oceanographic equipment; from a filtered seawater supply direct from the Menai Strait to tropical and cool water marine aquaria. Our strong seagoing capability is enabled by the RV Prince Madog, a state-of-the-art research vessel, and an inshore boat fleet. All our postgraduate taught programmes have been accredited by the Institute of Marine Engineering, Science and Technology (IMarEST), and as such facilitate your progression to Chartered status in later professional life. One-year taught Masters degrees and research degrees are also offered in a wide range of marine subjects.

Overview of academic areas The School is an actively seagoing research institution with an international reputation for the quality of its research on shelf seas and shallow marine environments. Ocean margins, shelf seas, estuaries and the coastal zone are the key elements of the marine system with respect to climate change impacts (sea level, ecosystem functioning) and anthropogenic interactions. Our activity accordingly encompasses blue skies, strategic and applied research, and active knowledge transfer. The School’s research culture is based on a multi-disciplinary, earth systems, approach to the investigation of shallow marine systems and processes. School of Ocean Sciences English Language requirements International applicants are normally required to provide evidence of English language proﬁciency. The minimum English requirements are: • MSc Marine Biology and MSc Marine Environmental Protection: IELTS 6.5 (with no individual score lower than 6.0) • MSc Applied Marine Geoscience and MSc Physical Oceanography: IELTS 6.0 (with no individual score lower than 5.5). • PhD/MPhil IELTS 6.5 (with no individual score lower than 6.0).

COURSE LIST: MSc • Applied Marine Geoscience • Marine Biology • Marine Environmental Protection • Physical Oceanography PhD/MPhil • Ocean Sciences – Shelf Sea and Coastal Processes; Biogeochemistry and Palaeoceanography; Marine Ecosystems: Conservation and Resource Management

TO FIND OUT MORE: Tel: +44 (0) 1248 382897 E-mail: sos-pg-admissions@bangor.ac.uk www.sos.bangor.ac.uk

"Having grown up in Nigeria, choosing the right university for my postgraduate course in the UK was a huge decision for me. I had to pick a university with a good reputation in the sciences as well as a place I could feel at home. I made the right choice. In addition to world-class training from my professors they also took their time to make me feel at home. Eight years post-graduation; lessons learnt, both academically and socially, have paved the way for a rewarding career in energy and ﬁnance having worked successfully at CGGVeritas and Goldman Sachs in varying roles. In my current role as Business Development Manager, Africa and the Middle East at TGS I still ﬁnd useful lessons learnt. If given the chance, I'd choose Bangor all over again." FOLARIN LAJUMOKE, Business Development Manager, Africa and the Middle East at TGS who graduated in 2004 with an MSc in Marine Geotechnics

BANGOR UNIVERSITY POSTGRADUATE PROSPECTUS 123

39450 BU PG Prospectus 2015_2018 2014-09-10 10:36 AM Page 124

Applied Marine Geoscience MSc COURSE DURATION MSc: 1 year full-time; Diploma: 30 weeks fulltime. ENTRY REQUIREMENTS Successful applicants normally hold, or are expected to be awarded, a First Class or Upper Second Class Honours Degree in a Natural Science or related subject. Alternatively, we will consider applicants with a good and relevant Lower Second Class Honours Degree provided that they have at least one year of additional relevant experience or can show evidence of particular interest in the course. Mature applicants with least two years relevant work experience are also encouraged to apply. COURSE DESCRIPTION The MSc in Applied Marine Geoscience evolved from its predecessor, the Marine Geotechnics course which boasted a 30 year pedigree.

Compulsory Modules: • Geophysical Surveying This module invovles theory and field/lab practice of seismic, electrical, magnetic and gravity surveying. • Sediment Geotechnics This module examines the basic principles of sediment characterisation and of soil mechanics (fluid flow, effective stress, consolidation, shear strength). Strong lab practical component. • Practical Oceanography (geological) This module involves ship and small boat practical acquisition of geophysical data. It also includes supplementary classes on marine acoustics, geodesy, remote sensing along with associated data processing and interpretation using industry standard software.

Optional Modules (in semester 2): • Sedimentary Environments or • Climate and Climate Change RESEARCH LINKS/LINKS WITH INDUSTRY There are strong links with industry. Typically, companies make presentations throughout the year and sometimes conduct interviews in the School. A short course by a professional practitioner is held in semester 2. Many research projects have industrial project partners. The course has been accredited by the Institute of Marine Engineering, Science and Technology (IMarEST) and as such facilitates student progression to Chartered status in later professional life. CAREER PROSPECTS Career prospects are extremely good for this course. From past experience, it is found that students will find employment in the offshore development industry (oil, gas, renewables), geophysical contract companies (particularly those serving engineering contractors), river and harbour boards, the offshore detrital mining industry, and government laboratories. The course may also serve as a conversion to allow a pure science graduate to proceed into postgraduate research in the marine geosciences. Typically, students will have secured employment by early summer during the course. Over the last decade, around threequarters secured work in a geo-related post, whilst the remainder went on to further research (PhD).

• Climate and Climate Change This module introduces the you to the factors A series of modules have been designed to and processes which control the Earth’s past explain the processes that form and characterise and present day climate. Interlinks between a wide variety of sedimentary environments, climate and geological processes are from the littoral zone to the deep ocean. Those emphasised. controls range from the dynamical, chemical, climatic to geological; all are inter-related. You • Literature Review and Project Plan also gain knowledge and understanding of During this module you are individually survey techniques in order to map these supervised to prepare for the practical thesis environments and thereby gain a better project by reviewing background literature, understanding of the processes that shape them. identifying testable ideas and formulating a The ﬁnal facet of the course involves an detailed project plan. explanation of how these sedimentary materials react to imposed loads - how they behave • Research Project geotechnically. This module is a four month individual research For further course details, please see: project based on the syllabus of the course and www.bangor.ac.uk/go/pg/oceansciences your individual preferences.

Marine Biology MSc COURSE DURATION MSc: 1 year full-time; Diploma: 30 weeks fulltime.

seminar room, fully equipped laboratories, computer room and teaching rooms). In addition the school has a suite of research vessels (including the £2.8M, 35m RV Prince Madog), extensive temperate and tropical aquarium facilities and dedicated teaching and research laboratories.

ENTRY REQUIREMENTS Entry to the MSc/Diploma Marine Biology usually requires a good 1st/2.i degree in a relevant subject (e.g. Biology, Zoology, Ecology). However, other degree disciplines and backgrounds will • Multidisciplinary course content, specialist also be considered provided that they have one teaching provision and involvement of year of additional relevant experience. Mature stakeholders and employers students not meeting the entry requirements, will All staff are active researchers in the topics also be considered provided that they have at they teach, allowing them to draw upon case least 2 years of additional relevant experience. studies and personal research. Additional specialist staff are brought in from outside COURSE DESCRIPTION marine science where necessary. The course provides theoretical and practical training in the field and laboratory to provide • Extremely well established and well advanced training and aims to elevate students recognised to the level of being independent marine We have over 60 years experience of teaching biologists. marine science at postgraduate level with an excellent track record, consistently highly rated The School of Ocean Sciences is exceptionally by external examiners. well suited to provide training in Marine Biology because we have: Modules include: • Marine Ecology Skills • Unrivalled location This module provides training in key skills We are situated on the shores of the Menai (experimental and survey design, statistical Strait close to Snowdonia, within an EU Special techniques, taxonomic keys). Area of Conservation, with rocky shores, sand beaches, intertidal sediments, sand dunes, salt • Marine Fisheries marshes, estuaries, shellfish beds, seal haulThis module provides a broad overview of out sites, dolphin pods and Irish Sea on our fisheries and detailed training in the techniques door step. used in the assessment of fish population dynamics. • Outstanding teaching facilities, resources and training environment • Coastal Ecology The course is based in a dedicated 490 m2 suite This module provides an overview of the (which includes a large student common room, diversity and ecology of coastal habitats and

124 BANGOR UNIVERSITY POSTGRADUATE PROSPECTUS

knowledge and understanding of survey techniques used to assess organismal abundance and distribution in these habitats. • Marine Vertebrates This module provides a broad overview of the diversity of fish, seabirds and marine mammals. • Marine Invertebrates This module provides a broad overview of the biology, ecology and culture of marine invertebrates. • Research Project Planning This module allows you to produce a literature review in the general area of your proposed research topic and a research plan for your proposed research project. • Research Project This module involves an independent 16 week investigation of a specific scientific topic resulting in the production of a thesis. ACCREDITATION The course has been accredited by the Institute of Marine Engineering, Science and Technology (IMarEST) and as such facilitates student progression to Chartered status in later professional life. CAREER PROSPECTS Typically graduates have entered employment in the following career paths; PhD research and research assistants in universities and research institutes in the UK and overseas; teaching; private sector employment; public sector employment; non-governmental organisations.

39450 BU PG Prospectus 2015_2018 2014-09-10 10:36 AM Page 125

Marine Environmental Protection MSc COURSE DURATION MSc: 1 year full-time.

Modules include: • Marine Ecology Skills This module examines marine taxonomy and biodiversity; experimental and survey designs; marine benthic survey and key statistical techniques.

ENTRY REQUIREMENTS Successful applicants normally hold, or are expected to be awarded, a First Class or Upper Second Class Honours Degree in a Natural Science or related subject. We do however • Marine Fisheries consider other degree disciplines and This module examines fisheries resources and backgrounds. We will consider applicants with a their assessment and fish population good and relevant Lower Second Class Honours dynamics. Degree provided that they have at least one year of additional relevant experience. Non-graduates • Coastal Habitat Ecology & Survey who are over 25 years in age and have at least This module examines the principles of two years work experience relevant to the course biological survey of coastal habitats along with are also encouraged to apply. survey methodology. COURSE DESCRIPTION The Masters in Marine Environmental Protection was established in 1988 and has developed a reputation over more than two decades for its high quality multi-disciplinary training in applied marine environmental issues. The course recognises diverse threats to the earth’s life support systems through a range of anthropogenic impacts, from destruction of habitat, pollution, and overexploit-ation of resources to the global impact of climate change. It is thus more important than ever to predict impacts accurately and mitigate those impacts accordingly. The course provides graduates with field skills and advanced techniques and technologies needed to operate in the marine environment, quantitative skills to assess resources and to predict threats, a realistic understanding of commerce and governance and communication and inter-personal skills to work together to bring their findings before the decision makers such that future development is sustainable.

“The Marine Environmental Protection course gives you a wide range of knowledge and experience on important subjects related to conservation. You learn about Coastal Zone Management, the use of GIS, fisheries, Environmental Impact Assessments, etc. You learn how to conduct your own surveys and how to critically analyse surveys from others. You gain a lot of experience in the use of statistics as a necessary tool to help you understand the environment. You have the chance of conducting a benthic survey and a fisheries survey on board the RV Prince Madog ship and then process your samples in the lab. It is a great experience. As for student life - you get to know your course mates very well through group work initially and supporting each other during individual assignments. Most of the social life occurs within the MSc coffee area as well as in some pubs around. Everything is within walking distance and very convenient with very friendly locals. If you have time to go outdoors, all the areas around Bangor and Menai Bridge (where the School of Ocean Sciences is based) are absolutely beautiful. Do not miss Snowdonia, Beaumaris, the castles around Wales.” DANIEL FERRER VICENT, from Spain, MSc in Marine Environmental Protection

• Environmental Impact Assessment This module examines marine impacts and their assessment including the process of preparing an Environmental Impact Statement (EIS) to EU directive requirements. • Marine Conservation and Coastal Zone Management This module examines coastal zone law, socioeconomics, geographical information systems, biodiversity, sustainability, marine protected areas, environmental aquaculture, and integrated coastal zone management. • Research Design and Planning This module includes a literature review and project proposal and presentation.

RESEARCH LINKS/LINKS WITH INDUSTRY Links with external bodies are many and varied and reflect the diverse, pure and applied research interests of staff at the School of Ocean Sciences. These links bring numerous opportunities for research projects to locally, nationally and internationally. CAREER PROSPECTS Graduates have entered a diverse range of employment but typically they find employment in higher education and research (e.g. PhD research and Research Assistants in the marine environmental sciences in UK and overseas universities); teaching (e.g. environmental sciences in schools and activity centres); private sector (e.g. companies and consultancies specialising in marine survey and environmental impact assessment, aquaculture, oil industry, tourism and recreation); formation of their own businesses (e.g. in marine environmental consultancy); public sector (e.g. Environment Agency, Nature Conservation Agencies, CEFAS, Sea Fisheries Committees, Local Government Partnerships and County Councils, and comparable organisations abroad); nongovernment organisations and voluntary organisations (e.g. World Wide Fund for Nature, Greenpeace, Wildlife Trusts, Heritage Trust). For further course details, please see: www.bangor.ac.uk/go/pg/oceansciences

• Research Project and Dissertation The MSc research project provides you with the necessary resources and time to independently investigate a specific scientific topic. Projects are chosen by you with appropriate guidance from academic staff and cover topics over a broad range of marine environmental issues.

“Following the completion of a BSc in Marine Biology and Zoology, the decision to return to Bangor University and enrol on an MSc in Marine Environmental Protection was a straightforward one. In addition to its beautiful and diverse surroundings, the School of Ocean Sciences provided a thoroughly enjoyable learning experience, delivered to a high standard by friendly and approachable staff and opportunity to study aboard the RV Prince Madog, a state-of-the-art research vessel. My MSc in Marine Environmental Protection not only allowed me to develop knowledge and experience gained during undergraduate study but also introduced new concepts such as the measurement and quantification of marine resources and the effects of conflicting usage upon them. For my three month research project I was fortunate enough to study the effects of oyster reef habitat complexity on associated fauna at the Virginia Institute of Marine Science in Wachapreague, Virginia, USA. During my time at the institute I met other marine scientists conducting research in a number of fields and gained valuable experience through working in a variety of habitats. I would highly recommend Bangor University to any prospective student.” VICKY PAWSON, from Filey, North Yorkshire, MSc in Marine Environmental Protection graduate

BANGOR UNIVERSITY POSTGRADUATE PROSPECTUS 125

39450 BU PG Prospectus 2015_2018 2014-09-10 10:36 AM Page 126

STAFF PROFILE Dr John Turner, Senior Lecturer, School of Ocean Sciences John Turner (seen above) from the School of Ocean Sciences is working on coral reefs (especially remote ones), and coastal zone management and protection. He teaches tropical marine ecology and conservation and is Director of Postgraduate Studies for the School. His current projects revolve around enhancing marine protected areas in the Cayman Islands in the Caribbean, and the world’s largest marine protected area in the British Indian Ocean Territory. His interests range from micro-algae in symbiosis with corals, through to Environmental Impact Assessment. Current PhD students work on shark cleaning behaviour; stingray ecology; acoustic methods of dolphin monitoring in Special Areas of Conservation; reef resilience and marine protected areas; community based marine protected areas; coral bleaching, and coral reef ecology; and John supervises many MSc projects overseas. John has undertaken large-scale biological surveys for the United Nations Development Programme on the sustainable use of biodiversity of Socotra Archipelago, and on the coastal ecosystems of the Andaman Islands, and Environmental Impact Assessments for major industrial developments such as a Liquid Natural Gas terminal in Oman, and eﬄuent treatment in Mauritius. He leads the UNESCO Network in Marine Biology in East Africa, and is experienced in scientiﬁc diving and underwater surveys, especially in remote places.

126 BANGOR UNIVERSITY POSTGRADUATE PROSPECTUS

39450 BU PG Prospectus 2015_2018 2014-09-10 10:36 AM Page 127

Physical Oceanography MSc COURSE DURATION MSc: 1 year full-time. ENTRY REQUIREMENTS Applicants should normally hold, or expect to obtain, a first or upper second class honours degree in a physical, mathematical or other numerate science. Mature students with at least two years relevant experience are encouraged to apply. COURSE DESCRIPTION The MSc in Physical Oceanography at Bangor has run since 1965 and is specifically designed for those who want to pursue careers as scientists forecasting the impacts of future climate change, in the renewable energy industry or in natural resource exploration. This course is specifically aimed at those with a background in numerical or environmental sciences who have an interest in developing their theoretical knowledge of the oceans and gaining practical skills working at sea. Practical skills are gained through participation in survey work on the University Research Vessel, the Prince Madog, and smaller survey boats. You also learn to programme in MATLAB, and study the development and testing of numerical models. More theoretical modules cover waves, dynamics and tides, shelf sea and estuarine processes and climate and climate change. The taught element of the course runs from October to May, after which you embark on a 3 month individual research project which leads to the production of a thesis. Approximately 30% of the MSc Physical Oceanography student thesis are subsequently published in a peer review scientific journal.

Compulsory Modules: • Estuaries and Shelf Sea Processes • Key Concepts and Techniques This module concerns itself with identifying and This module provides you with some of the key parameterising the processes which determine skills they will need for your Masters course water column structure, circulation and and your project work. These skills include movement of sediment in continental shelf mathematics for scientists, MATLAB seas and estuaries. programming, oceanographic data analysis and an introduction to sediment processes. • Literature Review The purpose of the literature review is to • Practical Oceanography ensure that you are aware of background This module will give you a practical experience literature in the general area of your research of acquiring oceanographic and geophysical project topic. It is an essential step in project data from both the RV Prince Madog and the design. School’s 8m Cheetah Marine catamaran. You will be expected to process, interpret and ACCREDITATION report on the data acquired. Complementing The course has been accredited by the Institute the ship and boat work will be lectures focusing of Marine Engineering, Science and Technology on geodesy and position fixing; marine (IMarEST) and as such facilitates student acoustics; and satellite remote sensing and GIS. progression to Chartered status in later professional life. • Dynamics, Tides and Waves This module introduces the governing CAREER PROSPECTS principles and the application of Newton’s Laws With over 50 years of experience in teaching of motion to geophysical fluids. It covers Physical Oceanography at the School of Ocean classical Hydrodynamics and Waves, the Sciences, Bangor graduates have long been equations of motion and continuity, rotation, recognised as gaining the key skills which stream functions, vorticity, and rotational and employers are looking for. Students find irrotational flow. employment in the offshore hydrocarbons and renewables industries, marine survey contract • Climate and Climate Change companies, river and harbour boards and This module aims to introduce the factors and government establishments. Many students also processes which control the Earth’s present choose to continue to a PhD in Physical day climate, in particular natural climate Oceanography, either staying at Bangor or variability, anthropogenic climate change, moving to another UK or an overseas University. climate change impacts, future climate change and mitigation strategies. For further course details, please see: www.bangor.ac.uk/go/pg/oceansciences

Ocean Sciences PhD/MPhil COURSE DURATION PhD: 3 years full-time; MPhil: 2 years full-time.

• Marine Ecosystems: Conservation and Resource Management The conservation and sustainable use of ENTRY REQUIREMENTS aquatic living resources is crucial given current Applicants should normally have an upper rates of global population expansion. To second class Honours degree in a related understand the extent to which human Science subject or equivalent. Applicants from activities modify marine ecosystems we need a overseas must, in addition, demonstrate fundamental understanding of the processes competence in English to an acceptable level. See that influence biodiversity and ecosystem page 121. functioning. Our research adopts an ecosystem-wide approach and addresses the COURSE DESCRIPTION science that underpins mitigation of human Research Degrees (PhD/MPhil) are available in activities through cultivation of marine the following broad subject areas: resources, restoration of habitats or control of human activities. The integration of • Shelf Sea and Coastal Processes fundamental and applied science has led to Shelf seas represent the transition zone outputs that have influenced international and between land and ocean. Our focus is on the national policy for conservation and sustainable identification of key physical processes, and use of marine resources. their interactions, which drive the fluxes across critical interfaces within this zone. For further course details, please see: Development of new observational techniques, www.bangor.ac.uk/go/pg/oceansciences coupled with our strengths in theory and modelling, have enabled existing paradigms to be challenged, state-of-the-art models to be critically tested and new ideas developed. • Biogeochemistry and Palaeoceanography The group investigates the cycling and fate of carbon and nitrogen across a range of marine systems, in particular the supply of inorganic nutrients and dissolved organic matter (DOM) to coastal waters, and the biogeochemistry of sea ice. Biogeochemistry underpins the validation and application of novel palaeoceanographic proxies, which we have applied to reconstructions of shelf seas and ocean margins.

BANGOR UNIVERSITY POSTGRADUATE PROSPECTUS 127

39450 BU PG Prospectus 2015_2018 2014-09-10 10:36 AM Page 128

COLLEGE OF HEALTH AND BEHAVIOURAL SCIENCES As one of the largest Colleges in the University, we have exceptional strengths in teaching and research and deliver an exceptional student experience. We have formal links with the local NHS trust enabling an integrated approach to developing research, training, medical and healthcare education in north Wales. The College consists of 4 academic Schools: Academic Schools: • School of Psychology • School of Sport, Health and Exercise Sciences • School of Healthcare Sciences • School of Medical Sciences Although each School preserves its speciﬁc identity and subject integrity we are keen on inter-school collaboration and share academic goals and practices. Our teaching is informed by worldclass collaborative research which means that you have the opportunity to study with academics who are at the cutting edge of their academic disciplines, whether that is elite sports performance, nurse training or fMRI brain imaging. Our research covers a broad range of health, biomedical, sports, exercise and performance science, and behavioural science related areas and has been consistently ranked very highly in Research Assessment Exercises. The latest detailed results for the Schools within the College can be seen on their websites.

“We aspire to provide you with a world-class learning experience characterised by scientiﬁc rigour, practical relevance, and in particular a collaborative, multi-disciplinary approach to our teaching and research. Our contributing Schools have achieved top ratings in the UK for delivering supportive, high quality teaching and cutting edge research.” PROFESSOR NICKY CALLOW, Dean of College of Health and Behavioural Sciences

128 BANGOR UNIVERSITY POSTGRADUATE PROSPECTUS

We have a long history in health and behavioural science related research with expertise spanning ageing and dementia, health services and management, chronic disease, brain disorder rehabilitation, cognitive and development psychology, randomised health trials, high performance physiology and psychology, and economic evaluation of public health and pharmacological initiatives. Our commitment to world-class, scientifically rigorous research is confirmed by the substantial investment in laboratories and equipment in biochemistry, hydrodensitometry, cell biology, perceptual motor testing and fMRI brain imaging. Our research ethos is to advance both basic and applied science, challenge current thinking in the health and behavioural science domains and to link this to our teaching and learning provision. There are a large number of specific research units, centres and institutes either within the College, or with close associations to us (or members of our staff), including those listed below: • Bangor Imaging Unit • Centre for Evidenced Based Early Intervention • Centre for Experimental Consumer Psychology • Centre for Health Economics and Medicines Evaluation (CHEME) • Centre for Health-Related Research (CHeRR) • Centre for Mental Health Service Development • Centre for Mindfulness Research and Practice • Daycare Nursery and Centre for Child Development: Tir Na n-Og • Dementia Services Development Centre (DSDC) • Dyslexia Unit • Extremes Research Group • Food and Activity Research Unit • Institute for the Psychology of Elite Performance • Institute of Rehabilitation • North Wales Centre for Primary Care Research (NWCPCR) • North Wales Organisation for Randomised Trials in Health (NWORTH) • Wales Centre for Behaviour Change • Wolfson Centre for Clinical and Cognitive Neurosciences

39450 BU PG Prospectus 2015_2018 2014-09-10 10:36 AM Page 129

Modern Resources and Facilities – as a student you will have access to all the learning resources you will need for success in your studies Research on the frontline: shining a new light on vitamin D Applying innovative physiological measures out in the field: A £1.35 million project funded by the Ministry of Defence Academics within Bangor University’s School of Sport, Health and Exercise Sciences have been awarded a multi-year research contract to investigate the Association of Vitamin D with Injury Risk, Health and Physical Performance in British Army Recruits. Prof Neil Walsh, director of the Extremes Research Group, and his colleagues, Dr Samuel Oliver and Dr Matthew Fortes are undertaking this field-based, multidisciplinary work programme with the British Army at training centres across England.

Vitamin D is formed by the action of UVB sunlight on the skin, having widespread effects beyond those on bone. Emerging evidence indicates an important role for Vitamin D to maintain immune and muscle function. UK Army recruits may be at risk of Vitamin D deficiency largely as a consequence of Britain’s northerly latitude. This could lead to an increased risk of skeletal injury, infection and underperformance contributing to lost training days, back coursing and the medical attrition of recruits.

postgraduate students creates a platform for ongoing debate and critical thinking into new approaches to solve problems. The opportunity to acquire, develop and apply theoretical and laboratory skills in the field has proven to be invaluable to the development of our postgraduate students.”

The application of innovative methods, developed in the laboratory, to measure immune function allow for the report of clinically relevant outcomes. One of the main aims of this research is to support appropriate policy on Vitamin D supplementation for UK, Army recruits. Professor Neil Walsh said: “The contribution from our team of experienced researchers and

BANGOR UNIVERSITY POSTGRADUATE PROSPECTUS 129

39450 BU PG Prospectus 2015_2018 2014-09-10 10:36 AM Page 130

As a postgraduate student with us you’ll be working alongside academics who are at the forefront of their specialist areas. This means you’ll be using the best equipment and techniques and your understanding and subject knowledge will be up-to-date.

130 BANGOR UNIVERSITY POSTGRADUATE PROSPECTUS

39450 BU PG Prospectus 2015_2018 2014-09-10 10:36 AM Page 131

School of Healthcare Sciences About the School The School recognises and values postgraduate students who come to study with pre-existing knowledge, skills, experience, values and beliefs, and these will be taken as a starting point for development. The School of Healthcare Sciences is a friendly and supportive place to study. We pride ourselves on supporting students in an environment that establishes and maintains a high standard of quality and excellence in teaching and learning as well as research. Our novel research focus on knowledge production, synthesis, and utilisation is directed at generating high quality evidence and developing better understanding of the effectiveness and cost effectiveness of interventions, services and organisations. We are also developing and applying novel research methods to synthesise what is known, and to gain better understanding of how and why evidence or knowledge does or does not get used in practice. Our research covers a broad range of clinical topics, and we have high level international expertise across all aspects of research methodology. This expertise includes evidence synthesis; implementation, or closing the gap between evidence and practice; language and cultural sensitivity; economic evaluation and clinical trials. We seek to do so through work characterised by scientific rigour, practical relevance, and collaboration between academic institutions and health and social care providers. To meet today’s health challenges, our research is increasingly multidisciplinary and brings together a staff of health economists, psychologists and statisticians; in collaboration with a wide range of clinical specialties, spanning oncology, pharmacy, rheumatology and public health. Our research units include the Centre for Health Economics and Medicines Evaluation (CHEME); the Dementia Services Development Centre; the North Wales Centre for Primary Care Research; and the North Wales Organisation for Randomised Trials in Health (NWORTH) which is Bangor’s Clinical Trials Unit. These units are home to over 70 research staff and postgraduate research students. Staff and facilities Staff are drawn from a variety of professional backgrounds and our experienced researchers and lecturers in health and social care and wellbeing are committed to our central aim of helping students to achieve the knowledge and skills required for academic and clinical practice delivery. We have strong links with Betsi Cadwaladr University Health Board and other health and social care providers in north Wales and we also offer conferences, seminars and workshops on key health and social care issues. All of our programmes are co-produced with National Health Service and other partners to ensure that the knowledge and skills our students acquire are relevant to future employers.

We are the sole provider of undergraduate professional registration programmes in North Wales. This stunning setting provides our students with the unique opportunity to gain clinical experience in a bilingual context. You will have many opportunities to experience bilingual clinical practice and education, enriching your learning experience and future employability.

COURSE LIST:

We have an extensive health and social care library collection and a dedicated staff to assist you with finding the information you want. We also have an Accreditation of Prior Learning Scheme, so that previous academic experiences may be accredited.

PgCert • Diabetes Management

Overview of academic areas We offer a range of postgraduate pathways which include both pre-registration and post registration programmes i.e. pathways that lead to a professional qualification or further professional development for students who already hold a professional qualification. These pathways are accessed by all health professional groups (e.g. medicine, nursing and the allied health professions), but also staff working in related roles in health service management; social care; and the voluntary sector. Our MSc programmes have been developed in collaboration with health and social care organisations in the UK and in response to our experience and work internationally. This ensures the relevance and credibility of our programmes. All courses are multidisciplinary and inter-professional, enabling you to draw on a range of clinical and service-oriented experiences. Full-time students can complete within 18 months, part-time students typically take 3 years, while associate students may take up to five years to complete their studies. Many programmes comprise both theory and practice elements; these are designed to respond to the changes brought about by research, changes in society, health and social care needs.

Level 6 Award • Fundamentals of Community Practice • Specialist Practice Award General Nursing Practice Level 7 Award • Non-medical Prescribing

MSc/PgDip/PgCert • Advanced Clinical Practice # • Advanced Clinical Practice AHP • Health and Social Care Leadership • Health Science • Public Health and Health Promotion • Risk Management Prof Doc/MRes/PgDip/PgCert • Implementing Evidence in Health and Social Care # MSc by Research • Ageing and Dementia Studies • Health Economics • Health Services Research PhD/MPhil • Health Sciences # • Ageing and Dementia Studies • Health Economics • Health Services Research #

international students are advised to contact the School before applying.

CONTACT DETAILS: School of Healthcare Sciences Tel: +44 (0) 1248 383123 E-mail: admissions.health@bangor.ac.uk www.bangor.ac.uk/healthcaresciences

Our staff typically blend a wide range of teaching and learning methods within academic programmes. Blended learning offers a flexible approach to learning, which gives students choices about when, where and how they learn. Moreover, this provides good opportunities to enhance students’ learning in and about the realities of work in clinical and health environments.

BANGOR UNIVERSITY POSTGRADUATE PROSPECTUS 131

39450 BU PG Prospectus 2015_2018 2014-09-10 10:36 AM Page 132

Advanced Clinical Practice MSc/PgDip/PgCert COURSE DURATION MSc: 1 year full-time, 3 years part-time.

Core Modules: • Physiology and Pathophysiology This module has been developed to enhance your knowledge of the physiological and pathophysiological processes which, together with social and psychological phenomena, underlie health and disease.

ENTRY REQUIREMENTS Please note: Only qualified professionals registered with the National Midwifery Council (NMC) or Health and Care Professionals’ Council (INCPC) in the UK may be admitted onto this course. Entry to the MSc Advanced Clinical • Consultation Skills# This module focuses on communication and Practice programme requires a good first degree using a medical model for taking a clinical in a relevant subject from a recognised history. The consultation is a private and institution. Working professionals with nonintimate interaction and this module aims to graduate qualifications will be considered on an challenge practice and highlight issues such as individual basis by the School. effective engagement and barriers to therapeutic communication. COURSE DESCRIPTION The programme has been developed to enhance the professional knowledge of physiological and • Physical Examination and Diagnostics## This module is designed to equip practitioners pathophysiological processes which, together with skills to enable a lead in advanced access with social and psychological phenomena, in a range of healthcare environments. underlie health and disease. The aim is to develop autonomous postgraduates with advanced professional knowledge and skills who • Methods or e-Research Methods This module is an introduction to research can contribute to the modernisation of the new methods and presents a platform for you to NHS and other organisations in the UK and engage in both quantitative and qualitative internationally. research approaches and develop an ability to utilise specific research techniques. • Dissertation – supervised research project (20,000 words)

Optional Modules (depending on enrolment): • Ill Adult/Medical Management • Pharmacology and Non-Medical Prescribing • Diabetes Management • Work-based Learning • Renal Nursing • Professional Development Portfolio • Leadership, Innovation and Change • Accountability in Health & Social Care • Social and Behavioural Sciences • Epidemiology • Introduction to Health Economics • Public Health Nutrition CAREER PROSPECTS This MSc course has been developed in collaboration with professional health and social care organisations in the UK and includes competencies assessed in the clinical environment. The course has been designed for healthcare professionals who wish to study at an advanced level to increase their knowledge, skills and attributes so that they can contribute to modern day health and social care challenges. For further course details, please see: www.bangor.ac.uk/go/pg/healthcare # Sign off by mentor in practice ## Modules require a minimum 60 hours clinical

log and successful completion of clinical competencies related to end module.

Advanced Clinical Practice (AHP) MSc/PgDip/PgCert COURSE DURATION MSc: 1 year full-time, 3 years part-time ENTRY REQUIREMENTS Please note: Only qualified professionals registered with the Health and Care Professionals Council (HCPC) in the UK maybe admitted onto this course. Entry to this programme requires a good first degree in a relevant subject from a recognised institution. Working professionals with non-graduate qualifications will be considered on an individual basis by the School.

Core Modules: • Leadership, Quality, Innovation and Change This module aims to develop the skills and knowledge required by health care professionals to creatively lead the cultural change required to place patients and clients at the centre of care delivery. • Work-based Learning This module enables learning and personal development through individual work based activities and the dissemination of practice that will improve patient care. • Methods or e-Research Methods This module is an introduction to research methods and presents a platform for you to engage in both quantitative and qualitative research approaches and develop an ability to utilise specific research techniques. • Dissertation – supervised research project (20,000 words)

132 BANGOR UNIVERSITY POSTGRADUATE PROSPECTUS

Optional Modules: • Physiology and Patho-physiology • History Taking and Consultation Skills • Physical Examination and Diagnostics • Epidemiology • Introduction to Health Economics • Accountability in Health and Social Care • Ill Adult Management • Non-medical Prescribing • Diabetes • Nutrition • Professional Development Portfolio CAREER PROSPECTS This course has been developed in collaboration with professional health and social care organisations in the UK and includes competencies assessed in the clinical environment. The course has been designed for nurses who wish to study at an advanced level to increase their knowledge, skills and attributes so that they can contribute to modern day health and social care challenges.

39450 BU PG Prospectus 2015_2018 2014-09-10 10:36 AM Page 133

Health and Social Care Leadership MSc/PgDip/PgCert COURSE DURATION MSc: 1 year full-time, 3 years part-time. ENTRY REQUIREMENTS Entry to the MSc Health and Social Care Leadership programme requires a good first degree in a relevant subject from a recognised institution. Degree subjects acceptable for all programmes: Nursing, Midwifery, Occupational/Speech and Language Therapy, Physiotherapy, Medicine/Dentistry, Psychology, Radiography, Paramedic.

health and social care organisations influence curriculum development in order to develop the skills and knowledge necessary to address issues of strategic organisational and service development. Core Modules: • Realising Service Improvement This module enables development of systems of patient-centred evidence-based care to result in services to better meet needs of all involved in receipt and delivery of care.

English language standard – we ask for an IELTS • Work-based Learning score of 6.5 with no individual score less than 6.0 This module enables learning and personal (or equivalent). This does not apply to all development through individual work based prospective candidates, please ask for advice as activities and the dissemination of practice that your Bachelor degree may be sufficient to meet will improve patient care. this requirement. • Leadership, Quality, Innovation and Change Working professionals with non-graduate This module aims to develop the skills and qualifications will be considered on an knowledge required by health care individual basis by the School. professionals to creatively lead the cultural change required to place patients and clients at COURSE DESCRIPTION the centre of care delivery. Are you interested in gaining the knowledge and skills required for effective, evidence-based, • Research Methods or e-Research Methods clinical practice? This module is an introduction to research methods and presents a platform for students The development in partnership with local NHS to engage in both quantitative and qualitative and social care organisations a programme of research approaches and develop an ability to advanced, post-graduate level, specialist skills utilise specific research techniques. and knowledge across a broad range of applications including: leading and managing • Dissertation – supervised research project service improvements, service level innovation (20,000 words) and change, managing quality, ensuring effective and legal frameworks for governance (organisational assurance) and professional accountability. A collaborative approach ensures

Optional Modules: • Managing and Developing People • Accountability in Health and Social Care • Organisational Behaviour in Health and Social Care Organisations • MDT Working in Risk Management CAREER PROSPECTS This programme of advanced postgraduate level, with specialist skills and knowledge developed in partnership with local NHS and social care organisations, has a broad range of applications including research, collaboration and collaborative problem solving, organisational behaviour, managing and developing people, systems behaviour and analysis, performance and process management, and cultural change; thus developing a key knowledge and understanding of organisations, their leadership and management, and the changing environment in which they operate. This programme is suitable to those experienced and aspiring to leadership and management roles in the NHS and Social Care Sectors, other public, private and voluntary organisations in the Health and Social Care, general leadership and management, and/or research in leadership, management, health, social care and related disciplines. For further course details, please see: www.bangor.ac.uk/go/pg/healthcare

Health Science MSc/PgDip/PgCert COURSE DURATION MSc: 1 year full-time, 3 years part-time.

Core Modules: • Social & Behavioural Sciences This module aims to identify and analyse social, psychological, political and cultural influences affecting public health and health promotion policy and practice.

ENTRY REQUIREMENTS Entry to the MSc Health Science programme requires a good first degree in a relevant subject from a recognised institution. Degree subjects acceptable for all programmes: Nursing, • Introduction to Health Economics Midwifery, Occupational/Speech and Language This module aims to introduce students to Therapy, Physiotherapy, Medicine/Dentistry, different methods for the finance and delivery Psychology, Radiography, Paramedics. English of health care and provide them with language standard – we ask for an IELTS score of international examples drawn from the Europe, 6.5 with no individual score less than 6.0 (or Africa, Arab states, Australia and US. equivalent). This does not apply to all prospective candidates, please ask for advice as your • Epidemiology and Needs Assessment Bachelor degree may be sufficient to meet this This module explores and critically appraises requirement. Working professionals with nonthe key concepts of epidemiology and their graduate qualifications will be considered on an application to public health and health individual basis by the School. promotion. COURSE DESCRIPTION This programme aims to develop postgraduates with the theory and practice of applied research in health sciences and to the principles underpinning health and social care practice.

Optional Modules (depending on enrolment): • Public Health Nutrition • Accountability in Health and Social Care • Person-centred Counselling Skills • Leadership, Innovation and Change • Organisational Behaviour in Health and Social Care Organisations • Work-based Learning CAREER PROSPECTS This programme provides a broad generic Master’s route and has no placements or clinical competencies making it suitable for local and international candidates who wish to study at this level as a career requirement or for academic progression. All staff have links to the local University Health Board to ensure relevance and currency of the modules.

For further course details, please see: • Physiology and Pathophysiology www.bangor.ac.uk/go/pg/healthcare This module has been developed to enhance the healthcare professional’s knowledge of the physiological and pathophysiological processes which, together with social and psychological phenomena, underlie health and disease.

This MSc programme has been developed in collaboration with health and social care • Research Methods or e-Research Methods organisations in the UK. It builds upon theoretical This module is an introduction to research perspectives and research evidence on health methods and presents a platform for students behaviour and health related policy from the to engage in both quantitative and qualitative disciplines of psychology, sociology and health research approaches and develop an ability to and social care management. utilise specific research techniques. Opportunities for an individual programme of study are provided so that a coherent personal development plan can be organized providing a broad base of areas of study with an element of individual choice of areas of focus.

• Dissertation – supervised research project (20,000 words)

BANGOR UNIVERSITY POSTGRADUATE PROSPECTUS 133

39450 BU PG Prospectus 2015_2018 2014-09-10 10:36 AM Page 134

Implementing Evidence In Health and Social Care MRes/ProfDoc/PgDip/PgCert COURSE DURATION MRes: 1 year full-time, 2 years part-time; Prof. Doc.: 6 years part-time; Certificate 30 weeks full-time. ENTRY REQUIREMENTS Entry to the MRes Implementing Evidence in Health and Social Care programme requires a good first degree in a relevant subject from a recognised institution. English language standard – we ask for an IELTS score of 7.0 with no individual score less than 7.0 (or equivalent). This does not apply to all prospective candidates, please ask for advice as your Bachelor degree may be sufficient to meet this requirement. Working professionals with non-graduate qualifications will be considered on an individual basis by the School.

with the opportunity to progress to undertake a signiﬁcant piece of independent research (120 credits). It is the normal expectation that the independent research should be of a publishable standard in a high quality peer reviewed journal. Modules: The taught element of all awards in this programme includes three modules, each of 20 credits, as follows:

data collection and analysis approaches/ techniques. Its overall aim is to enable students to be ‘critical consumers’ of research, to have suﬃcient knowledge to contribute in a knowledgeable way to ongoing quantitative or qualitative research and to develop research questions and projects. The module study days are supported by an interrelated package of elearning resources to inform and guide independent learning.

• Implementing Evidence This module will enable students to enhance their theoretical knowledge and practical skills in the implementation of evidence from research (and other sources) into practice and/ or policy to improve service eﬀectiveness, eﬃciency and service users’ experiences.

• Research Project The ‘heart’ of the MRes or Prof. Doc. is an intensive research or implementation science experience conducted in collaboration with your supervisor that allows you to put your knowledge and skills into practice. In conducting your project, you will develop new skills such as planning, co-operative working, COURSE DESCRIPTION • Evidence Synthesis and the academic skills essential to Implementation research generates knowledge Finding, reviewing and synthesising evidence is understanding and reporting findings to others. about how to close the gap between evidence and a core and complex skill required by health and practice in public services. Our comprehensive social researchers. This module is designed to CAREER PROSPECTS programme is located within a vibrant provide you with a state-of-the art perspective This flexible and innovative programme provides implementation research cluster, and provides a on specific methodologies of systematic review opportunities for students to develop advanced structured and supportive opportunity for high and synthesis of evidence. It will focus on knowledge and expertise in implementation calibre students to advance their understanding selected qualitative, quantitative and mixed practice and research, a cornerstone of quality and skills in implementation research. Graduates method evidence review and synthesis. improvement in health and social care. It is of the MRes/PgDip/PgCert may progress on to therefore well-suited for those wishing to pursue carry out independent research at PhD level or • Research Methods a career where quality is a major focus, for can advance the science of implementation The research methods module provides a example in clinical practice, service management through the Prof. Doctorate. Alternatively this platform to understand the core elements of and leadership. Alternatively the programme will programme would be appropriate for students quantitative and qualitative research, provide a firm foundation for those wishing to who are seeking a stand-alone research based delineating their particular approaches to build a clinical academic career which integrates qualification suitable for a career in research with scientific inquiry, their methodologies and work to improve quality whilst advancing the transferable skills for graduate employment. All related methods. The main focus of the module science of quality through high-quality research. exit awards include a taught component (60 is on the application of quantitative and credits) which covers all aspects of qualitative research methods within the health For further course details, please see: implementation research, and provides students and social care setting, including a range of www.bangor.ac.uk/go/pg/healthcare

Risk Management MSc/PgDip/PgCert COURSE DURATION MSc: 1 year full-time, 3 years part-time.

Each module involves 2 or 3 induction days held at Bangor University. Students are then given ENTRY REQUIREMENTS access to an online community to support their A good first degree in a relevant subject from a study. This is an essential aspect of our recognised institution is required. Degree programme and you will be expected to access subjects acceptable for this programme: Nursing, materials and participate in online seminars Midwifery, Paramedic, Occupational/Speech and throughout the course of your study. Language Therapy, Physiotherapy, Medicine/Dentistry, Psychology, Radiography, Core Modules: Education, Sociology and Social Science. English • Fundamental Principles of Risk Management language standard: IELTS score of 6.5 with no This module aims to develop an understanding individual score less than 6.0 (or equivalent). This of history and underpinning theories and the does not apply to all prospective candidates, process of risk management and their please ask for advice as your Bachelor degree application within complex health and related may be sufficient. Working professionals with contexts. non-graduate qualifications will be considered on an individual basis. • Influences On Risk Management This module examines the nature and COURSE DESCRIPTION behaviour of open systems in order to identify This course is designed to equip students with the key influences on risk management the advanced skills to promote patient and client practice and policy within the learner’s own safety in health and social care settings. Students context and contemporary health and safety will be expected to apply learned theory in the law in relation to healthcare standards and form of work-based projects where an emphasis financial constraints. is placed upon identifying a sound evidence base to support innovative development. The course • MDT Working For Risk Management offers you the opportunity to: This module examines key features and • gain a thorough understanding of state-of-thechallenges to interprofessional working and art risk management and governance theory collaboration. and principles • be introduced to practical approaches and • Leadership, Quality, Innovation and Change techniques that support the implementation of This module aims to develop the skills and positive change in practice. knowledge required by health care • join multidisciplinary study groups to gain a professionals to creatively lead the cultural wider perspective of practical issues change required to place patients and clients at • a part-time study option with online teaching the centre of care delivery. support to minimise time away from the workplace.

134 BANGOR UNIVERSITY POSTGRADUATE PROSPECTUS

• Work-based Learning This module enables learning and personal development through individual work based activities and the dissemination of practice that will improve patient care. • Research Methods or e-Research Methods This module is an introduction to research methods and presents a platform for students to engage in both quantitative and qualitative research approaches and develop an ability to utilise specific research techniques. • Dissertation – supervised research project (20,000 words) CAREER PROSPECTS The programme provides a coherent personal developmental plan for existing and aspiring leaders and managers who are significant agents in delivering a high quality, innovative health and/or social care service. This programme is especially suitable for candidates with experience or aspiring to leadership and management roles (especially in fields related to risk management, quality management, organisational assurance and governance), in the NHS and Social Care Sectors, other public, private and voluntary organisations, general leadership and management, and/or research in leadership, management, risk management, health, social care and related disciplines. For further course details, please see: www.bangor.ac.uk/go/pg/healthcare

39450 BU PG Prospectus 2015_2018 2014-09-10 10:36 AM Page 135

Public Health and Health Promotion MSc/PgDip/PgCert COURSE DURATION MSc: 1 year full-time, 3 years part-time.

The programme aims to develop people who: Education and Health Promotion focussing on • have public health and health promotion policy and practice. knowledge and skills; ENTRY REQUIREMENTS • understand the inter-relationships between the • Research Methods or e-Research Methods Entry to the MSc Public Health and Health factors that influence health; This module is an introduction to research Promotion programme requires a 2.i degree in a • can critically analyse and reflect on public methods and presents a platform for you to relevant subject from a recognised institution. health and health promotion theory, research engage in both quantitative and qualitative Degree subjects acceptable for all programmes: and practice; research approaches and develop an ability to Nursing, Midwifery, Occupational/Speech and • can present evidence on the basis of utilise specific research techniques. Language Therapy, Physiotherapy, underpinning theory and understanding Medicine/Dentistry, Psychology, Radiography. • have the necessary skills, motivation and • Dissertation - supervised research project Other subjects also considered. commitment to engage in lifelong learning and (20,000 words) continuing professional development. English language standard – we ask for an IELTS Optional Modules: score of 6.5 with no individual score less than 6.0 Core Modules: • Public Health Nutrition (or equivalent). This does not apply to all • Social & Behavioural Sciences • Accountability in Health and Social Care prospective candidates, please ask for advice as This module aims to identify and analyse social, • Leadership, Quality, Innovation and Change your Bachelor degree may be sufficient to meet psychological, political and cultural influences • Work-based learning this requirement. affecting public health and health promotion • Person-centred counselling skills policy and practice. • Promoting Mental Health and Wellbeing Working professionals with non-graduate qualifications will be considered on an individual • Introduction to Health Economics CAREER PROSPECTS basis by the School. This module aims to introduce you to different This programme provides a broad view of public methods for the finance and delivery of health health and health promotion and has no COURSE DESCRIPTION care and provide you with international placements or clinical competencies thus making This programme is intended for professionals examples drawn from the Europe, Africa, Arab it suitable for local and international candidates interested in promoting health and wellbeing and states, Australia and US. who wish to study at this level as a career has been developed in collaboration with requirement or for academic progression. It practitioners and specialists in the field of public • Epidemiology provides a basis for students of public health and health and health promotion in the UK. This module explores and critically appraises health promotion to develop skills that can be This programme attracts students from a wide the key concepts of epidemiology and their applied when working with individuals, groups range of health and social care disciplines, application to public health and health and communities in a broad range of public facilitating multi-disciplinary learning. promotion. health and health promotion related careers. It provides opportunity for students to develop their skills to manage change, lead public health • Principles & Practice of Public Health For further course details, please see: programmes, and to work with individuals, Promotion www.bangor.ac.uk/go/pg/healthcare groups and communities. This module identifies the main theoretical principles and critically assesses the models that affect the practice of Public Health, Health

Health Sciences PhD/MPhil ENTRY REQUIREMENTS A first or upper second class honours degree in a relevant subject is required. Alternatively appropriate lengthy experience in health-related research or in a research-oriented post may be relevant. English language standard – we ask for an IELTS score of 7.0 or above (with no individual element below 7.0).

WHY CHOOSE BANGOR? Our innovative research focuses on knowledge production, synthesis and utilization driving forward developments in implementation science. In this way, it is directed at generating high quality evidence and developing better understanding of the effectiveness and costeffectiveness of interventions, services and organisations. The research focus embraces an COURSE DESCRIPTIONS understanding of healthcare from a range of We offer innovative education and research to perspectives including the development of meet the requirements of today’s health services. approaches that seek to engage people in Renowned for delivering excellent courses and interpreting their own experiences. We are also conducting high quality research, the School of developing and applying novel research methods Healthcare Sciences offers a range of to synthesise what is known, and gain better postgraduate opportunities for national and understanding of how and why evidence or international students. knowledge does or does not get used in practice. A feature of the research focus is its PhD/MPhil consideration of cultural context and language Research degrees provide students with a unique sensitivity as part of the complexity of healthcare opportunity to develop an independent practice. programme of research that will contribute to knowledge in their professional field, and provide There are many reasons for pursuing unique opportunities for personal and career postgraduate research opportunities at the development. School of Healthcare Sciences:

RESEARCH LINKS/LINKS WITH INDUSTRY Working together with research centres across the College of Health and Behavioural Sciences and other universities in the UK and internationally, we have built a reputation for our research in evidence-based practice, cultural sensitivity and language awareness, and complex conditions across the lifespan. Using this evidence base, our experienced programme leaders and supervisors deliver up-to-date, clinically relevant courses and supervisory experiences for students from a variety of settings and professions. Our partnerships with world-leading research centres, practice, and policy units provide opportunities for joint teaching, supervision and collaborative projects. We are also committed to the personal and professional development of all students across our programmes.

Applicants are also encouraged to contact the Administrator: Mrs Susan Metcalf (s.metcalf@bangor.ac.uk ) in the ﬁrst instance to register their interest in the Postgraduate Research Programme in Healthcare. We can then Professional Doctorate in Healthcare • A welcoming and supportive academic ensure that the most appropriate member of Higher-level healthcare practice combines theory environment; research staﬀ contacts you personally to discuss and evidence from research with other forms of • Experienced supervisors working at the leading your interests, and keep you abreast of new knowledge, including aesthetics, ethics and edge of their academic and professional fields; opportunities such as studentships. For more personal professional knowledge that is located • Individualised support from supervisory teams information and prior to enquiring further or within varied organisational and political providing complementary expertise to your making an application, it is advisable to explore contexts. The Professional Doctorate provides research; the links with our departmental research centre students with a structured programme to • Dedicated office space and access to and visit the School of Healthcare Sciences advance scholarship within their professional information technology; website. practice. This programme is especially relevant • Attention to both your research training and the for those health professionals in advanced development of other skills such as leadership For further course details, please see: clinical or organisational roles which combine and project management. www.bangor.ac.uk/go/pg/healthcare elements of practice, research and service improvement in healthcare. BANGOR UNIVERSITY POSTGRADUATE PROSPECTUS 135

39450 BU PG Prospectus 2015_2018 2014-09-10 10:36 AM Page 136

Fundamentals of Community Practice Level 6 Award / Specialist Practice Award General Practice Nursing Level 6 Award / Diabetes Management PgCert Fundamentals of Community Practice This post-registration Level 6 module has been developed as a collaborative initiative between the Developing Community Nursing Education steering group (WEDS/WD), all HEI providers (through the curriculum development group), and key stakeholders in Wales. In addition, at a local level, liaison with clinical colleagues from the North Wales Trusts and LHBs has been on-going throughout the moduleâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s development.

The module is designed to prepare community nurses to meet the challenges of nursing in the community in Wales, recognising policy documents such as Towards a Framework for Post-registration Education (DoH, 2007), Role redesign in the NHS in Wales (NHLIAH, 2007), The review of the NHS in Wales (WAG, 2008), Designed to realise our Potential (WAG, 2008), and the forthcoming Community Nursing Strategy.

The development of this new module was driven by the Review of Community Nursing Education for Wales which was undertaken by the Workforce, Education and Develpment Services (WEDS), the findings of which has influenced the commissioning figures for community education for the period 2008/9.

Completion of this module opens a gateway for further modules toward your degree which are also WEDS funded if they are related to community nursing practice and may replace the existing specialist qualifications in community nursing practice (not health visiting).

This specific programme requires the student to be a qualified nurse, registered with the NMC, be in employment in practice nursing, or in a position to attain a secondment in a general practice for the duration of the course part of the bilingual initiative in health care education by encouraging the training and development of bilingual health staff. Applicants should normally possess a Diploma and will be invited to attend for an interview.

Diabetes Management (60 credits Level 6) This postgraduate qualification combines the diabetes management module (40 credits) and a work-based learning module (20 credits) in an innovative course aimed at General Practitioners, Hospital Doctors, Specialist Nurses and other healthcare professionals involved in the care of Specialist Practice Award individuals with diabetes. The programme aims In order to provide education which matches the General Practice Nursing to facilitate development of knowledge and skills This 2 year part-time modular Level 6 course profile of different roles within community for diabetes care and chronic disease encompasses the latest NMC requirements for nursing teams, and which focuses attention on management and development of high quality, specialist practice awards. Four broad areas of the challenges facing community nurses who evidence-based healthcare. Educational aims work in a continuously changing environment, a clinical practice; care and programme include development of innovative strategies for management; clinical practice leadership and new modular approach to community nurse managing this group of patients, identification of clinical practice development and their education has emerged. The Workforce and key principles in the teaching and management associated outcomes form the basis of this Development Services (WEDS), are hosting the of patients with chronic disease and to move course. These outcomes are addressed within Curriculum Development group, one of three forward the bilingual initiative in health care by work streams coordinated by the Steering group, the different programme modules and are linked encouraging the training and development of to, and further developed through fieldwork the other two being the Communications group bilingual health staff. and the Organisational Change and Development practice activity. Demonstration of the achievement of these outcomes exists via group. module assignments and assessed fieldwork practice.

Non-medical Prescribing Level 7 Award (40 credits) COURSE DESCRIPTION This module will enable nurses, pharmacists, physiotherapists, radiographers, podiatrists and other healthcare professionals to develop as competent independent prescribers and to meet the standards set by the Nursing and Midwifery Council (NMC), General Pharmaceutical Council (GPhC) and the Health and Care Professionals Council (HCPC). All participants will undertake theoretical assessment and a period of supervised practice carried out by a designated medical practitioner. Both nurses and pharmacists and other healthcare professionals working in primary and secondary care settings would benefit from this module. It will provide them with both the knowledge and expertise within their particular remit and area of practice to be fully registered as independent prescribers with their regulatory body. This would enable them to work autonomously providing improved patient care and patients being dealt with by the appropriate health care professional.

136 BANGOR UNIVERSITY POSTGRADUATE PROSPECTUS

39450 BU PG Prospectus 2015_2018 2014-09-10 10:36 AM Page 137

Ageing and Dementia Studies MSc by Research COURSE DURATION MSc by Research: 1 year full-time, 2 years parttime. ENTRY REQUIREMENTS Given the high expectations, applicants must have a minimum degree class of 2.i or above / equivalent in a relevant subject. International students must also have IELTS of 7.0 or above (with no individual element below 6.5).

Development Unit. Any taught modules and courses will not count as credits towards this or any other qualification but, if identified as being of developmental value by the student and the supervisory team, will provide the extra skills and knowledge needed to undertake postgraduate research. Dementia Services Development Centre The Dementia Services Development Centre, also known as DSDC, was founded in 1999. In collaboration with Cardiff and Vale UHB, DSDC Wales is one of a network of centres in the DSDC Network throughout the British Isles which conduct research and promote service development and training in the field of dementia care.

COURSE DESCRIPTION The MSc by Research programme will provide a dedicated route for high calibre students who (may have a speciﬁc research aim in mind and) are ready to carry out independent research leading to PhD level study. Alternatively it would be appropriate for students who are seeking a stand-alone research based qualiﬁcation suitable Research is conducted on a local and national for a career in research with transferable skills level within Wales with the research centre in for graduate employment. Bangor being the lead for the Wales Dementias and Neurodegenerative Diseases Research The MSc by Research requires the student to Network (NEURODEM Cymru) but there are also undertake a substantial piece of independent strong collaborative links with researchers research at the cutting edge of ageing and across the UK, Europe and elsewhere in the dementia studies (180 credits). It is the normal world. expectation that the independent research should be of a publishable standard in a high DSDC is active across a wide range of ageing and quality peer reviewed journal. dementia research activities and these can be broadly categorised (i) dementia care (including In addition to the support of the research Alzheimer's disease, family care-giving and project’s supervisors and from fellow psychosocial interventions); (ii) gerontology; and postgraduate research and professional (iii) well-being and resilience across the life-span. researchers within IMSCaR’s Dementia Services Development Centre, there will also be the For further course details, please see: opportunity to undertake taught modules at www.bangor.ac.uk/go/pg/imscar postgraduate level as well as attend workshops and courses provided for postgraduate research students by the University’s Academic

Health Economics MSc by Research COURSE DURATION MSc by Research: 1 year full-time, 2 years parttime. ENTRY REQUIREMENTS Given the high expectations, applicants must have a minimum degree class of 2.i or above / equivalent in a relevant subject. International students must also have IELTS of 7.0 or above (with no individual element below 6.5).

The Centre for Health Economics and Medicines Evaluation The Centre, also known as CHEME, was founded in 2001 and is one of three health economics centres in Wales. Research is conducted on a local and national level within in Wales but there are also strong collaborative links with health services researchers across the UK and Europe.

In addition to the support of the research project’s supervisors and from fellow postgraduate research and professional researchers within IMSCaR’s Centre for Health Economics and Medicines Evaluations, there will also be the opportunity to undertake taught modules at postgraduate level as well as attend workshops and courses provided for postgraduate research students by the University’s Academic Development Unit. Any additional taught modules and courses will not count as credits towards this or any other qualiﬁcation but, if identiﬁed as being of developmental value by the student and the supervisory team, will provide the extra skills and knowledge needed to undertake postgraduate research.

For further course details, please see: www.bangor.ac.uk/go/pg/imscar

CHEME is active across a wide range of health economic research interests and these can be The MSc by Research requires the student to broadly categorised (i) economic evaluation undertake a substantial piece of independent alongside clinical trials; (ii) pharmacoeconomics; research at the cutting edge of health economics and (iii) health service evaluation. The Centre also and medicines evaluation (180 credits). It is the has very close links with Public Health Wales and normal expectation that the independent has expertise in research regarding the health research should be of a publishable standard in a economics of cancer, dementia, sight disabilities high quality peer reviewed journal. and rural health.

BANGOR UNIVERSITY POSTGRADUATE PROSPECTUS 137

39450 BU PG Prospectus 2015_2018 2014-09-10 10:36 AM Page 138

Health Services Research MSc by Research COURSE DURATION MSc by Research: 1 year full-time, 2 years parttime. ENTRY REQUIREMENTS Given the high expectations, applicants must have a minimum degree class of 2.i or above / equivalent in a relevant subject. International students must also have IELTS of 7.0 or above (with no individual element below 6.5). COURSE DESCRIPTION The MSc by Research programme will provide a dedicated route for high calibre students who want to carry out clinical, health or social care research using an evidence-based methodology, including randomised clinical trials, leading to PhD level study. Alternatively it would be appropriate for students who are seeking a stand-alone research based qualiﬁcation suitable for a career in research with transferable skills for graduate employment.

In addition to the support of the research project’s supervisors and from fellow postgraduate research and professional researchers within all of IMSCaR’s three research centres and especially its NWORTH Trials Unit, there will also be the opportunity to undertake taught modules at postgraduate level as well as attend workshops and courses provided for postgraduate research students by the University’s Academic Development Unit. Any additional taught modules and courses will not count as credits towards this or any other qualiﬁcation but, if identiﬁed as being of developmental value by the student and the supervisory team, will provide the extra skills and knowledge needed to undertake postgraduate research.

This MSc by Research programme requires the student to undertake a substantial piece of independent research at the cutting edge of clinical, health or social care (180 credits). It is the normal expectation that the independent research should be of a publishable standard in a high quality peer reviewed journal.

The NWORTH Trials Unit NWORTH, or the North Wales Organisation for Randomised Trials (in health and social care), was founded in 2002 and is one of the original seventeen fully accredited UKCRC clinical trials units registered in 2007 in recognition of being able to provide the full spectrum of expertise required to deliver high quality clinical research and the capability to centrally co-ordinate multicentre trials to the highest standards. NWORTH is active across a wide range of clinical, health and social care research interests by collaborating with research-active specialists in disciplines such as cancer care, children’s health, dementia, dentistry, mental health, obstetrics, oncology, pharmacy and public health. Whilst students need to produce independent research, the NWORTH Trials Unit can provide a wealth of advice and support where appropriate including project design and governance, data collection and management, QA and compliance plus analysis. For further course details, please see: www.bangor.ac.uk/go/pg/imscar

Ageing and Dementia Studies / Health Economics / Health Services Research PhD/MPhil COURSE DURATION PhD: 3 years full-time or 5 years part-time; MPhil: 2 years full-time or 4 years part-time. ENTRY REQUIREMENTS Given the high expectations, applicants must have a minimum degree class of 2.i or above / equivalent in a relevant subject. International students must also have IELTS of 7.0 or above (with no individual element below 6.5). COURSE DESCRIPTION The PhD/MPhil programme will provide a dedicated route for high calibre students who (may have a speciﬁc research aim in mind and) are ready to carry out independent research leading to postdoctoral status. Alternatively it would be appropriate for students who are seeking a high level qualiﬁcation suitable for a career in research with transferable skills for graduate employment. IMSCaR uses the ‘four paper’ model for its PhD programme whereby the thesis comprises four pieces of independent but related research that are of a publishable standard in a high quality peer reviewed journal.

In addition to the support of the research project’s supervisors and from fellow postgraduate research and professional researchers within IMSCaR’s Centre for Health Economics and Medicines Evaluation, there will also be the opportunity to undertake taught modules at postgraduate level as well as attend workshops and courses provided for postgraduate research students by the University’s Academic Development Unit. Any taught modules and courses will not count as credits towards this or any other qualiﬁcation but, if identiﬁed as being of developmental value by the student and the supervisory team, will provide the extra skills and knowledge needed to undertake postgraduate research. For further course details, please see: www.bangor.ac.uk/go/pg/imscar

138 BANGOR UNIVERSITY POSTGRADUATE PROSPECTUS

39450 BU PG Prospectus 2015_2018 2014-09-10 10:36 AM Page 139

School of Medical Sciences About the School The School of Medical Sciences is the focus for medical education at Bangor University. The School oﬀers undergraduate and postgraduate degrees, and a range of medical research opportunities. The School is a partner in the North Wales Clinical School, a partnership between the Higher Education Institutions which operate in north Wales and the Betsi Cadwaladr University Health Board. The North Wales Clinical School therefore provides a collaborative environment for medical education and research within north Wales. We are committed to delivering courses for postgraduate study appropriate for health care and allied professions. Our programmes have been developed in response to educational demands both locally and nationally, employing enthusiastic academics, clinicians and other health professionals from a wide range of specialties.

Overview of academic areas Bangor University has a long history of excellence in health research and teaching. The School of Medical Sciences is building on these strengths. The School is also building on the biomedical research strengths of Bangor University and, in collaboration with other academic departments, is actively developing complementary programmes of translational and clinical research in line with national and local healthcare priorities. The School has been successful in grant capture which promotes clinical research within north Wales in partnership with clinicians within the Betsi Cadwaladr University Health Board. The School oﬀers postgraduate opportunities in medical education and research.

COURSE LIST: MSc by Research • Master of Science by Research MSc • Clinical Sciences • Medical and Molecular Biology with Genetics* PgCert • Medical Education Practice PhD/MPhil • Research Studentships * Please see page 112 for course details.

CONTACT DETAILS: School of Medical Sciences Tel: +44 (0) 1248 383244 E-mail: medsciences@bangor.ac.uk www.bangor.ac.uk/sms

STAFF PROFILE

Staff We employ a number of clinical and nonclinical academic staff who are actively involved in research which aligns with national and local healthcare priorities, particularly in the areas of ageing, chronic disease, cardiovascular disease, cancer and mental health. Our academic staff have a wealth of experience in teaching medical and non-medical undergraduate and postgraduate students. The School academics teach in both the University and health service settings.

Dr John M. Delieu, Lecturer, School of Medical Sciences Dr John M. Delieu is currently a lecturer in Anatomy in the School of Medical Sciences, and the Universities’ Designated Individual (for the Human Tissue Act). He is also an Anatomist within the Robert Jones and Agnes Hunt Orthopaedic Hospital, Shropshire; visiting lecturer of Anatomy at Keele University; Associate Clinical Teacher for Cardiff Medical School; Council Member of the British Association of Clinical Anatomists. He qualified initially as a nurse and worked within the domains of the elderly, paediatrics and as a charge nurse in sexually transmitted diseases. At a later date, he changed direction and studied Anatomy and Cell Biology at the University of Sheffield going on to gain a PhD. “I think what attracted me to north Wales was the rural setting and the friendliness. I still have a genuine buzz when I come to work. In a way it is a hobby.” Dr Delieu’s is involved in on-going collaborative research looking at induced oxidative stress on cells that have been treated with antipsychotic medication. Also he is collaborating in the development of virtual reality environments and prototyping for anatomy teaching.

BANGOR UNIVERSITY POSTGRADUATE PROSPECTUS 139

39450 BU PG Prospectus 2015_2018 2014-09-10 10:36 AM Page 140

MSc by Research COURSE DURATION 1 year full-time, 2 years part-time. ENTRY REQUIREMENTS Given the high expectations, applicants must have a minimum degree class of 2:1 or above / equivalent in a relevant subject. International students must also have IELTS of 7.0 or above.

In addition to the support of the research project’s supervisors and from fellow postgraduate research and professional researchers within the School of Medical Sciences, there will also be the opportunity to undertake taught modules at postgraduate level as well as attend workshops and courses provided for postgraduate research students by the University’s Academic Development Unit. Any additional taught modules and courses will not count as credits towards this or any other qualification but, if identified as being of developmental value by the student and the supervisory team, will provide the extra skills and knowledge needed to undertake postgraduate research.

COURSE DESCRIPTION The MSc by Research programme will provide a dedicated route for high calibre students who (may have a specific research aim in mind and) are ready to carry out independent research leading to PhD level study. Alternatively it would be appropriate for students who are seeking a stand-alone research based qualification suitable for a career in research with transferable skills for graduate employment. For further course details, please see: www.bangor.ac.uk/go/pg/medicalsciences The MSc by Research requires the student to undertake a substantial piece of independent research at the cutting edge of modern medical science (180 credits). It is the normal expectation that the independent research should be of a publishable standard in a high quality peer reviewed journal.

Clinical Sciences MSc/PgDip/PgCert COURSE DURATION MSc: 1 year full-time, 3 years part-time;

Core Modules: • Research Skills (MSc/PgDip) • Clinical and applied Anatomy The module covers material relevant to the (MSc/PgDip/PgCert) design and analysis of both quantitative and ENTRY REQUIREMENTS On this module you will acquire an in-depth qualitative research. It also provides a broad Have been awarded an initial degree by a understanding of the normal/abnormal understanding of the benefits and limitations of recognised Higher Education Institution in the anatomy of the human body. In particular it will various research methods, research designs, following disciplines: Health Care/Nursing, concentrate on structures that are relevant and data collection, instruments and data analysis Natural Sciences, Medical Sciences, Behavioural specific to clinical application and pathology. tools. Students are given the opportunity to Sciences. develop their ability to be critically evaluative. • Clinical and applied Physiology Be in possession of a non-graduate qualification (MSc/PgDip/PgCert) • Dissertation (MSc) which the University has deemed to be of a On this module, students will acquire an inThe dissertation is an independent piece of satisfactory standard for the purpose of postdepth knowledge of the functionality of the research, and acts as the culmination of the graduate admission and be able to demonstrate human body. In particular, it will concentrate on academic challenges faced by the student. The prior relevant professional experience of at least physiological processes that are relevant and module comprises 60 credits (i.e. equivalent to two years duration. Students may be interviewed specific to clinical application. three double modules) and will formally equate prior to acceptance. to some 600 hours of student time. You will • Cellular pathology (MSc/PgDip) work closely with your supervisor to develop International students must also have IELTS This module will introduce cellular pathology by the work on your research proposal submitted of 6.0 or above, with no individual score lower discussing the common diseases and physical during the research module. than 5.5. responses of selected organ systems e.g. cardiovascular, respiratory, hepatic, renal, • Therapeutics (MSc/PgDip/PgCert) COURSE DESCRIPTION gastro- intestinal and endocrine systems. This module will build on previous learning to The course will help students advance their provide a postgraduate course in the theory of knowledge at Masters level in the areas of • Metrology, Medicine & Society (MSc/PgDip) development, actions and use of medicines and clinical sciences. It will create a bridge for The module will provide an in-depth other therapies commonly used in clinical students wishing to crossover disciplines. understanding of the principles and practices of practice The course will encourage students to develop measurement in clinical studies. Students will and evaluate knowledge and skills as fully be able to apply the theory to case studies in For further course details, please see: independent learners and professionals. It will Anatomy and Physiology and understand the www.bangor.ac.uk/go/pg/medicalsciences cultivate an understanding of evidence based need for elimination of error. practice and the importance of research in advancing medical sciences. Students will also develop and undertake a research project in clinical sciences.

140 BANGOR UNIVERSITY POSTGRADUATE PROSPECTUS

39450 BU PG Prospectus 2015_2018 2014-09-10 10:36 AM Page 141

Medical Education Practice PgCert COURSE DURATION PgCert: 1 year part-time. ENTRY REQUIREMENTS Applicants to this Medical Education Practice (Pg Cert) should normally be qualified clinicians, with some experience of, or access to, supervising and / or teaching in their daily work. A degree, degree level qualification, or professional qualification supplemented by relevant experience will normally form part of the applicant’s profile. COURSE DESCRIPTION This Medical Education Practice (PgCert) has been designed to meet the local, regional and national needs in developing the knowledge, skills and competencies of clinical educators and learning facilitators working in health and related clinical services. It will provide a framework in which clinical educators can critically review and develop theoretical perspectives and practical skills in facilitating their students/trainees experience.

• An in-depth knowledge and understanding of specific issues at the forefront of theory and practice in medical education. • A critical understanding of the requirement of clinical performance assessments and appraisal for fitness to practice. • A critical understanding of the standard setting processes. • A critical understanding of the basic tenets of good adult pedagogy. • A practical understanding of the methods used to facilitate learning. • The ability to appraise the goals of assessment and the impact of assessment on student learning. • The ability to evaluate the relevance, validity and reliability of assessment methodologies. • The ability to critically review and reflect on contemporary adult learning and medical education literature relating to the application of simulation teaching technology and apply this to own simulation practice experience. • Reviewing ethical issues relating to teaching and learning facilitation in a clinical context.

Students will systematically and creatively analyse the complexities of clinical education Compulsory Modules: using techniques that build on their own • Clinical Performance Assessment experience. The course will involve active and This module develops a critical understanding reﬂective learning and ensure the integration of of several key concepts around the theory of contemporary theory and practice and it will help assessment of clinical performance. This will prepare clinicians to assume leadership include concepts of reliability and validity as positions in clinical education in their own well as standard setting. profession and cooperate in developing multi professional aspects of clinical education. • Clinical Teaching Evaluation This module concerns the critical evaluation of This programme will equip clinical educators teaching in the clinical setting. It is designed for with a greater breadth and depth of knowledge doctors and other qualiﬁed practitioners in the and understanding of medical education professions allied to medicine. Students will be including: provided with the concepts and critical skills

required to appraise the teaching of clinical material in a wide spectrum of settings. Students will be expected to observe and evaluate teaching in a variety of clinical settings, including teaching they may receive in other modules. • Teaching and Technology This module explores the conditions underlying eﬀective group functioning both in education and the workplace. The primary aim of this module is to help students facilitate learning using small group teaching and simulation techniques as a tool. The module is practically focussed and will consider ways of conducting, reﬂecting upon and evaluating. RESEARCH LINKS/LINKS WITH INDUSTRY The academics involved with this programme have extensive research links with external bodies and the NHS, which are fully utilised in ensuring the modules are relevant to the modern healthcare environment graduates will enter. CAREER PROSPECTS This course will improve employability and enhance career progression for clinicians including advancement onto the consultant grade. For further course details, please see: www.bangor.ac.uk/go/pg/medicalsciences

Research Studentships PhD/MPhil The School of Medical Sciences is always interested to hear from prospective PhD students who have, or are interested in applying for, funding.

Current research interests within the School include: • Rheumatic diseases • Inflammatory arthritis • Systemic lupus erythematosus A list of academic staff within the School of • Behavioural (cognitive) neurology Medical Sciences can be found on the website, • Sensorimotor integration (on eye and limb alternatively, contact medsciences@bangor.ac.uk movements) with an outline of your research proposal, • Higher order sensory processing including actual or prospective funding, and an • Neuro-ophthalmology appropriate academic will be identified within the • Neuro-rehabilitation School. • Cardiac imaging using fMRI • Developing the use of magnetic resonance imaging and rendering • Effects of antipsychotic medication on neutrophil morphology and oxidative stress • Use of quantitive structural activity relations in cellular responses to antipsychotics • History of medicine • Parkinson’s disease • Dementia and neurodegenerative diseases • Evidence based healthcare • Translation of research evidence to practice • Patient reported outcome following hip replacement surgery • Smell and taste pathophysiology, assessment and management

• Assessment of endoscopic sinus surgery • Transnasal fibreoptic flexible laryngo oesophagoscopy • Dizziness assessment and treatment • Catabolic effects of rheumatic diseases and effect on muscle mass and function • Autoimmune rheumatic diseases - prognosis, and assessment of treatment • Assessment of novel anti rheumatic treatment • Respiratory medicine • Orthopaedic surgery • Sports and exercise medicine • Cardiac imaging and intervention • Cortical processes and cardiovascular output • Cardiology and nuclear medicine • Clinical research into the assessment and development of new anti-cancer drugs • Assessment of the effects of chemotherapy • Intensive care medicine • Chronic disease patient care • Cardio-vascular risk factors in the severely mentally ill • Genetic predictors of antidepressant response • Mental illness in primary care patients • Diabetes and vascular disease For further course details, please see: www.bangor.ac.uk/go/pg/medicalsciences

BANGOR UNIVERSITY POSTGRADUATE PROSPECTUS 141

STAFF PROFILE

39450 BU PG Prospectus 2015_2018 2014-09-10 10:36 AM Page 142

Dr Paul Mullins, Director of the Bangor NeuroImaging Unit, Senior MRI Physicist, and Senior Lecturer, School of Psychology Dr Mullins developed an interest in the brain and how brain cells communicate, and respond, to external stimuli, injury and illness whilst studying strokes when working for SmithKline Beecham Pharmaceuticals.

Currently Director of the Bangor NeuroImaging Unit, Senior MRI Physicist, and Senior Lecturer in the School of Psychology, Dr Mullins collaborates with researchers from the College of Health and Behavioral Sciences on neuroimaging study design, data acquisition and processing and resources available to help with their research questions. Dr Mullins is also the course organiser for the Masters in Neuroimaging.

Actively involved in research using magnetic resonance spectroscopy to measure neurochemistry in central nervous system function and disorders, Dr Mullins has 40 publications in the area with a citation count of over 700. In particular, projects are aimed at measuring neurotransmitter (Glutamate, Glutamine and GABA) changes and relationships in response to external and internal stimuli. EU funding for the development of neuroimaging research for dementia studies has recently been secured, involving collaboration with Trinity College Dublin and University College Dublin. Most recently, work has focused on the development of functional MRS to elucidate the neurochemical correlates of neuronal activity. “Research at Bangor has been an extremely enjoyable experience. With world-class facilities including the 3T Magnetic resonacne imaging system, our transcranial magnetic stimulation (TMS) and transcranial direct current stimulation (tDCS) labs, and numerous ERP and EEG equipment, it is the perfect place to study the physiology and neurobiology of cognitive neuroscience. The large number of ﬁrst class psychology and cognitive neuroscience researchers to collaborate with is the icing on the cake.”

“I chose Bangor for my postgraduate studies as it has an excellent reputation for world-class research and has excellent facilities. It is also a very supportive department in a stunning location. My PhD involved the use of fMRI and I also gained experience in EEG two neuroimaging techniques that enable researchers to understand how the brain processes information. My research investigates how people navigate social environments and the decisions they make in those settings. I have had a very supportive supervisory team who have helped me every step of the way. I was also lucky enough to participate in several brain dissections. One great thing about the department is how collaborative staﬀ are, with such diverse expertise if you have an idea staﬀ are happy to collaborate and help you move into new research areas. I have enjoyed my time as a postgraduate student here in Bangor as there is always so much to do. The School of Psychology has a wonderful friendly and sociable atmosphere, which makes it a very

142 BANGOR UNIVERSITY POSTGRADUATE PROSPECTUS

pleasant environment to work in. There are many postgraduate students here and the Research Student Forum organise a multitude of social events. I have enjoyed taking advantage of Bangor’s fantastic location by getting out into the great outdoors and hiking, kayaking and running. If you are new to any of these activities there are many clubs and societies in the Students’ Union, which teach and organize these events. There is so much to do at Bangor - make sure you get involved in new activities, and take advantage of the amazing research facilities and staﬀ, it is a great place to learn new skills and develop your research ideas.” DANIELLE SHORE, from Essex, studied a PhD in Psychology

39450 BU PG Prospectus 2015_2018 2014-09-10 10:36 AM Page 143

School of Psychology About the School As a postgraduate in Psychology, you will be working with internationally renowned researchers and making use of superb research facilities. Our academic members of staff not only teach well, but also produce research of the highest quality, with influences in the public sector (especially Health and Clinical activities) as well as in industry and the academic world. We are rated as being in the top 7 UK psychology departments for research power; with more than double the national average of ‘World Leading’ research output and 65% of the total departmental research output. We are one of the country's largest Psychology departments and have a thriving postgraduate community of over 200 Masters and more than 70 PhD students. We are a truly international department with staff and students drawn from over 20 countries across the world, attracted by our reputation for research and teaching excellence. Our international reputation is well illustrated by our performance in the QS World University Ranking, which listed us as one of the Top 100 departments in 2013. We are also one of a select few UK Departments who are ranked in the CHE European Excellence Ranking for Psychology. Overall the School is one of the largest in the UK in terms of student numbers and this offers a combination of quantity and quality simply not available elsewhere. As well as high academic standards we deliver high standards of student support and guidance and pride ourselves on the fact that our friendly environment is often identified as a major strength. There are a number of academic and social student societies within the department which add a great deal to the overall student experience. We have consistantly been placed in the top five in the UK for overall course satisfaction based on the National Student Survey (NSS). The School forms a large part of the College of Health and Behavioural Sciences, a College which boasts a very strong research and teaching ethos which translates into excellent course provision.

Staff and facilities These centres, as well as being in the vanguard of academic research in these fields, offer you a unique opportunity for project work covering important theoretical and practical elements. Within these research centres staff and students have access to a large number of specialist research labs including a 3T MRI scanner, TMS Labs, ERP, faraday cages, a brain anatomy laboratory, eye tracking facilities and an on-site nursery with observation facilities as well as dozens of computer based testing laboratories.

COURSE LIST:

At Bangor you’ll study under the guidance of academics with international reputations and have access to research facilities that exceed those available in most other departments, either in the UK or internationally.

MSc/PgDip/PgCert • Foundations of Clinical Neuropsychology • Foundations of Clinical Psychology • Neuroimaging • Psychological Research • Psychology

Overview of academic areas The School’s postgraduate programmes cover a number of specialist areas that reflect the mix of research expertise within the department. The department has over 50 Academic Faculty members, many of whom are world leading or internationally renowned experts in their fields. The research areas of staff can be drawn together in the following broad categories: • Clinical, Health and Behavioural Psychology • Language, Bilingualism and Cognitive Development • Perception, Action and Memory • Social Neuroscience

MA/MSc/PgDip/PgCert • Consumer Psychology with Business • Mindfulness-Based Approaches

The School boasts a number of prestigious research centres, including: • The Wolfson Centre for Cognitive Neuroscience • The Bangor Imaging Unit • The Centre for Experimental Consumer Psychology • Miles Dyslexia Centre • Centre for Mindfulness Research and Practice • Wales Centre for Behaviour Change • Centre for Evidence-based Early Intervention

PgCert • Clinical and Functional Brain Imaging (part-time) PgDip • Teaching Mindfulness-Based Courses MSc/PgDip/PgCert • Applied Behaviour Analysis MA/PgDip/PgCert • Psychology

MRes/PgCert • Psychology* MSc by Research • Psychology* PhD • Psychology DClinPsy • Clinical Psychology * Please see the website for course details.

CONTACT DETAILS: School of Psychology Tel: +44 (0) 1248 382629 E-mail: psychology@bangor.ac.uk www.bangor.ac.uk/psychology @PsychBangor

School of Psychology English Language requirements International applicants are normally required to provide evidence of English language proﬁciency. The minimum English requirements are: • IELTS 6.0 (with no individual score lower than 5.5) with some exceptions. • MRes applicants should have an IELTS of at least 6.5 (with no individual score lower than 6.0). Applicants are advised to check online as some Masters courses carry higher entry requirements.

BANGOR UNIVERSITY POSTGRADUATE PROSPECTUS 143

39450 BU PG Prospectus 2015_2018 2014-09-10 10:36 AM Page 144

Neuroimaging MSc COURSE DURATION MSc: 1 year full-time. Can also be studied part-time.

Strong emphasis is placed on developing your practical skills, equipping you for the world of work. In a dedicated computer lab, you will learn and practice analysis and imaging techniques. Under supervision of our world-class academic staﬀ, you’ll design your own imaging based studies, which will be run using the in-house 3T MRI scanner.

ENTRY REQUIREMENTS You must have a single or joint honours degree in Psychology or other relevant discipline (Computer Science, Physics, Mathematics, Engineering, Biology, Medical Sciences or a related subject area) with a Compulsory Modules: minimum degree class of 2.i. • Introduction to Neuroimaging International students will be given individual This module will provide you with a broad consideration, but you must be able to overview of the physiological and demonstrate English language proficiency neurological basis of neuroimaging. equivalent to an IELTS score of 6.5 (with no element below 6.0) and you will be expected to • Advanced Topics in Neuroimaging demonstrate that you have a suitable This module will give you an insight into the academic background for the programme. cellular, metabolic and electrophysiological mechanisms of functional signals COURSE DESCRIPTION The programme is designed to provide you with • Advanced Research Methods the background knowledge and technical skills to This module will provide you with the design, analyse and evaluate imaging data. The statistical skills that you need to conduct and programme focuses on Magnetic Resonance evaluate psychological research. Imaging (MRI) based techniques, including functional MRI, anatomical imaging, Diﬀusion • Communicating Research in Psychology Tensor Imaging, and Spectroscopy. Imaging This will provide you with the advanced techniques will be discussed with reference to writing skills you will need for your relevant Biomedical applications. The core of the dissertation and for getting research MSc consists of two modules on Neuroimaging. published. The ﬁrst module concentrates on methodological aspects. The second module provides an in-depth • Research Dissertation introduction of specialised imaging techniques You will collect, analyse and interpret their used to understand the biology of brain function data, and present your empirical project, in a in health and disease. topic that you have agreed with your supervisor, in a formal thesis. Students will also present their research in a conference.

Optional Modules include: • Introduction to EEG/ERP • Disorders of Neuropsychological Relevance • Clinical Neuropsychology • Practical Programming • Neuroradiology and Lesion Analysis • Biological Bases of Psychological Disorders • Methods in Cognition and Brain Research • Motivation, Act & Health RESEARCH LINKS/LINKS WITH INDUSTRY The academics involved with this programme have extensive research links with external bodies and companies, which are fully utilised in ensuring that the modules are relevant to the modern work and research environment graduates will enter. CAREER PROSPECTS The programme is especially suited for: • students interested in pursuing an academic career in the field of Neuroimaging • students looking to find a job as research staff in industry or academic labs involved in translational research • medical professionals, looking to develop skills in a new emergent technology and research field • students with a background in physics, mathematics or computer science who want to move into cognitive or clinical neuroscience • students with a background in psychology or biology who want to improve your technical skills for a neuroscience career. For further course details, please see: www.bangor.ac.uk/go/pg/psychology

Clinical Psychology DClinPsy COURSE DURATION DClinPsy: 3 years full-time.

One of the distinctive aspects of the North Wales Programme is its close integration into a mainstream academic psychology department ENTRY REQUIREMENTS that is highly rated for both research and Before applying, applicants should have already teaching. The School of Psychology's research obtained a single or joint honours first or good excellence is internationally recognised and was upper second-class psychology degree and ranked in the top 100 departments in the World should be eligible for Graduate Basis for by the Q5 World University Rankings 2013. The Chartered Membership. Due to the level of School has particular strengths in clinical and competition, you will not be short-listed for health psychology, cognitive neuropsychology, interview if you are currently an undergraduate. applied behaviour analysis, and learning and It is expected that candidates will have at least developmental psychology. The School also one year’s relevant paid clinical or relevant prides itself on excellent teaching and during the research experience. most recent internal Quality Audit of the School of Psychology; the North Wales Clinical COURSE DESCRIPTION Psychology Programme was commended for This Doctoral Programme is a collaborative both its teaching and pastoral care of trainees. venture between the Betsi Cadwaladr University The Programme was accredited by the BPS in Health Board (BCUHB) and Bangor University. April 2008 and was commended for the The North Wales Programme was the first to supportiveness and accessibility of the establish the Doctorate in Clinical Psychology in Programme Team, the quality of the graduates, the UK, leading the way for other Programmes. and collaboration with stakeholders, including BCUHB clinical psychologists have close working School of Psychology, commissioners and local links with the Bangor University School of clinicians. The academic base of the Programme Psychology and currently have numerous joint is in Bangor and the trainees have dedicated clinical psychology posts with the University. teaching rooms in the School of Psychology. There are at present about 100 qualified clinical psychologists working in north Wales covering The College of Health and Behavioural Sciences work in adult mental health, older adults, comprises the School of Psychology, the School learning disabilities, child and adolescent clinical of Healthcare Sciences, the School of Sports psychology, forensic psychology, neuropsychHealth and Exercise Science, the School of ology and health psychology. Nearly all are Medical Sciences and the Institute of Medical and involved in the programme through teaching, Social Care Research. This collaboration brings supervision (clinical/research), assessment of expertise and interest in health research academic work and representation at together creating an environment for shared committees. research strategies and health related training activities in terms of professional learning.

144 BANGOR UNIVERSITY POSTGRADUATE PROSPECTUS

RESEARCH LINKS/LINKS WITH INDUSTRY Several leading international researchers have made their base in Bangor, for example in the areas of Older Adults (Robert T. Woods and Linda Clare) and Learning Disabilities and Autism (Richard Hastings). The School is a centre of excellence for training in clinical practice. There is the Centre for Mindfulness Research and Practice (the UK's leading organisation for the delivery of Mindfulness training programmes). Michaela Swales (who is internationally recognised for her expertise in Dialectical Behaviour Therapy and leader of the national Dialectical Behaviour Therapy Training Team) is on the School staﬀ and the School hosts an early intervention parent-training centre directed by Judy Hutchings (which is funded nationally to deliver training throughout Wales). CAREER PROSPECTS Successful candidates will gain a Doctorate in Clinical Psychology that confers eligibility to apply for registration with the Health Professions Council and eligibility for chartered status with the British Psychological Society. For further course details, please see: www.bangor.ac.uk/go/pg/psychology

39450 BU PG Prospectus 2015_2018 2014-09-10 10:36 AM Page 145

Psychology MA COURSE DURATION MA: 1 year full-time. Can also be studied part-time.

Content modules are split between core research foundation modules, which provide you with an in-depth understanding of psychological experimental techniques and optional modules ENTRY REQUIREMENTS that offer you the opportunity to pursue your area You must have a good single or joint honours of interest. Modules are taught by the highest degree in Psychology or other relevant discipline, calibre research academics and we strive to with a minimum degree class of 2.ii. If you do not ensure that we provide you with an excellent have a Psychology degree, you may also be teaching and learning environment through the considered and are encouraged to contact the use of innovative teaching tools, media and School. environments. Some optional modules integrate both undergraduate and graduate classes and so International students will be given individual provide a rich and vibrant atmosphere for consideration, but you must be able to learning and social interactions. demonstrate English language proficiency equivalent to an IELTS score of 6.0 (with no Programme Aims element below 5.5) and you will be expected to – To provide you with a postgraduate foundation demonstrate that you have a suitable academic in psychology and psychological research; background for the programme. – Give you the skills you need to critically evaluate psychological research and study COURSE DESCRIPTION – To provide you with an insight into This course will oﬀer you advanced study in psychological processes and meanings in areas psychology with an emphasis on both research that you are interested in excellence and critical writing skills. Following – To develop the key skills you need to undertake two semesters of academic study, you will write high quality psychological research (scientific a stand-alone literature review in an area of writing, critical analysis, communicating psychology that particularly appeals to you. This research findings etc,) may be an idea or theory that you are already – To enable you to produce a substantial written developing, or may be in an area that you become thesis that demonstrates your ability to interested in during the course. An academic understand, evaluate and integrate supervisor will help you to develop your ideas psychological research in a clear and coherent and hone your writing skills, providing support way. for the literature review.

Core Modules: • MA Dissertation You will compose a literature review on a topic that you agree with your supervisor and develop a proposition that you’ll advance as an argument. • Communicating Research in Psychology This will provide you with the advanced writing skills you will need for your dissertation and are very relevant in the world of work Optional Modules include: • Consumer and Applied Psychology • Nudges and Behaviour Change • Theoretical Models in Clinical Psychology • Bilingualism: Research and Methods • Biological Bases of Psychological Disorders • Methods in Cognition and Brain Research RESEARCH LINKS/LINKS WITH INDUSTRY The academics involved with this programme have extensive research links with external bodies and companies, which are fully utilised in ensuring that the modules are relevant to the modern work and research environment graduates will enter. CAREER PROSPECTS The MA in psychology is especially recommended to graduates who want to pursue a career in psychology-related humanities, the health-care professions and social-sciences such as scientiﬁc journalism, business management, occupational psychology, marketing and medical care. For further course details, please see: www.bangor.ac.uk/go/pg/psychology

Consumer Psychology with Business MA/MSc COURSE DURATION MA/MSc: 1 year full-time. Can also be studied part-time.

In the first semester you will study Consumer Psychology and Business in equal proportions, however in Semester 2 there will be a greater focus on consumer psychology, and your ENTRY REQUIREMENTS dissertation will also be undertaken in this field. You must have a good single or joint honours It is also possible to undertake a Business with degree in Psychology or other relevant discipline, Consumer Psychology Masters degree that will with a minimum degree class of 2.ii. involve a dissertation in Business. You can International students will be given individual choose between the MA or MSc route, which are consideration, but you must be able to differentiated by the nature of the dissertation. demonstrate English language proficiency Your MSc dissertation would involve undertaking equivalent to an IELTS score of 6.0 (with no empirical research, whilst if you did the MA element below 5.5) and you will be expected to dissertation you would undertake an extended demonstrate that you have a suitable academic literature review. background for the programme. Compulsory Modules: These vary slightly between the MSc and MA. COURSE DESCRIPTION • Research Dissertation** If you are wishing to start, or further develop a In this module, you will collect, analyse and career that relates to Consumer Behaviour then interpret data, and present empirical project in this is the course for you! It is delivered by the a formal thesis. Schools of Psychology and Business, both of whom enjoy an international reputation in their • Consumer Psychology: Theory respective fields for the quality of the research This module provides a basic knowledge of they produce. The marriage of both disciplines is market research, practical issues in consumer a natural one, as understanding behaviour and science, and an introduction to some of the key specifically consumer behaviour in the world of psychological perspectives on these problems. business can be crucial to organisational success. Today’s successful businesses and • Nudge Behaviour Change organisations need highly trained people who You will gain an insight based on real-world and can help them understand their consumers and theoretical models of decision-making and understand issues such as: what makes them consumer behaviour in a variety of settings. choose one product over another? Do brand names and advertising really affect our thinking? • Advanced Statistics Will the internet change the face of urban and This module focuses on the statistical suburban shopping areas? This course will make techniques that are used in studying you one of those people. psychology.

• Applied Consumer Psychology* This module provides you with practical research experience in consumer psychology and involves hands-on work with viable commercial enterprises. It is fantastic for employabitity. • Proposal 1+ This module provides you with the practical skills you’ll need to undertake your research. Optional Modules include: • Marketing Strategy • Organisations and People • Management Research • New Venture Creation • International Marketing Communication • Finance for Managers RESEARCH LINKS/LINKS WITH INDUSTRY The academics involved with this programme have extensive research links with external bodies and companies, which are fully utilised in ensuring that the modules are relevant to the modern work and research environment graduates will enter. CAREER PROSPECTS This course is especially recommended if you want to pursue a career in business management, marketing, market research or retail as it provides an unusual skill set that our graduates have found have a strong demand amongst employers. * MA ** MSc For further course details, please see: www.bangor.ac.uk/go/pg/psychology BANGOR UNIVERSITY POSTGRADUATE PROSPECTUS 145

39450 BU PG Prospectus 2015_2018 2014-09-10 10:36 AM Page 146

Psychology PhD

COURSE DURATION PhD: 3 years full-time, 5 years part-time. ENTRY REQUIREMENTS You are expected to have an undergraduate degree in psychology or a related subject, with a minimum degree class of 2.i or equivalent. If you do not already have an MSc degree, then we would normally expect you to complete such a degree prior to starting the PhD programme. International students: IELTS 6.5 (with no element below 6.0) is required.

COURSE DESCRIPTION You will have access to state-of-the-art research and computing facilities and the opportunity to study under world-renowned academic staff in a School that was ranked in the top 100 in the World in the QS World University Ratings 2013. The PhD (or doctorate) is the highest academic qualification available. A PhD degree is designed to provide strong grounding in highly specialised areas through research. Its goal is to enable you to be a researcher in psychology, contributing to academic knowledge and developing work of internationally publishable quality. Bangor Psychology offers PhD supervision in the following specialisms: • Language, Bilingualism and Cognitive Development • Perception, Action and Memory • Social Neuroscience • Clinical, Health and Behavioural Psychology

CHOOSING A RESEARCH TOPIC AND SUPERVISOR If you are considering a PhD degree, one of your first actions – before applying for admission to the programme – is to identify and communicate with a potential supervisor in the relevant area. The research interests and publications of our academic staff are listed within our web pages. Please e-mail the people whose research is most relevant to the area in which you wish to work: http://www.bangor.ac.uk/psychology/research FUNDING Funding for full-time PhD study (tuition fees plus living allowance) is available through a number of sources, including the ESRC, Bangor University, and the School of Psychology, which offers a number of studentships aimed at exceptional candidates from the UK, Europe, and internationally. Our website offers more details on the funding available for PhD students: http://www.bangor.ac.uk/psychology/postgradu ate/doctorate/phd_res For further course details, please see: www.bangor.ac.uk/go/pg/psychology

146 BANGOR UNIVERSITY POSTGRADUATE PROSPECTUS

39450 BU PG Prospectus 2015_2018 2014-09-10 10:36 AM Page 147

Foundations of Clinical Neuropsychology MSc COURSE DURATION MSc: 1 year full-time; Can also be studied part-time.

Compulsory Modules • Behavioural Neurology This module provides a background in clinical neurosciences necessary for the design and conduct of research in experimental neuropsychology.

ENTRY REQUIREMENTS You must have a good single or joint honours degree in Psychology or other relevant discipline, with a minimum degree class of 2.ii. • Disorders of Neuropsychological Relevance International students will be given individual This module will provide you with the basic consideration, but you must be able to facts concerning the epidemiology, pathology, demonstrate English language proﬁciency clinical presentation, diagnostic criteria, and equivalent to an IELTS score of 6.0 (with no neuropsychiatric sequelae of common element below 5.5) and you will be expected to Neurological and Psychiatric disorders. demonstrate that you have a suitable academic background for the programme. • Research Dissertation In this module you will collect, analyse and COURSE DESCRIPTION interpret your data, and present your empirical The course will provide you with a strong project in a formal thesis. foundation of knowledge in the following areas relevant to clinical neuropsychology: • Clinical Neuropsychology • Neuropsychological theory and evidence from This module introduces you to major clinical and experimental studies neuropsychological syndromes following brain • Neuropsychological disorders, including their damage and to a variety of diﬀerent tests and basis in neuroanatomy and neuropathology, assessment procedures. and their impact on individuals and families • Neuropsychological assessment • Communicating Research in Psychology • Neuropsychological rehabilitation This module will focus on written • Research methods communication of research, inclusive of writing • Conducting neuropsychological research. the MSc dissertation and writing for publication. We use a wide range of the latest techniques for understanding brain-behaviour relationships, including functional brain mapping with event related potentials (ERP), transcranial magnetic stimulation (TMS), and functional magnetic resonance imaging (fMRI).

• Advanced Research Methods This module provides you with skills in the statistical techniques that are used when studying psychology.

Optional Modules include: • Introduction to EEG/ERP • Introduction to Neuroimaging • Bilingualism: Research and Methods • Biological Bases of Psychological Disorders • Methods in Cognition and Brain Research • Nudges and Behaviour Change RESEARCH LINKS/LINKS WITH INDUSTRY The academics involved with this programme have extensive research links with external bodies and companies, which are fully utilised in ensuring that the modules are relevant to the modern work and research environment graduates will enter. CAREER PROSPECTS On successful completion of the course, you will be well equipped to undertake further postgraduate study leading to a PhD, or to work in neuropsychological research. The course provides an excellent basis if you are seeking employment in health care, for example as an assistant psychologist or rehabilitation assistant, and for progressing to professional training, for example in clinical psychology or related areas. Established health professionals taking the course will ﬁnd that it provides a valuable opportunity for continuing professional development, which may contribute to future career progression. For further course details, please see: www.bangor.ac.uk/go/pg/psychology

Foundations of Clinical Psychology MSc COURSE DURATION MSc: 1 year full-time, Can also be studied part-time.

range of the latest techniques for understanding brain-behaviour relationships, including functional brain mapping with event related potentials (ERP), transcranial magnetic stimulation (TMS), and ENTRY REQUIREMENTS functional magnetic resonance imaging (fMRI). You must have a good single or joint honours This gives you the chance to use the latest degree in Psychology or other relevant discipline, equipment and techniques. with a minimum degree class of 2.ii. International students will be given individual Compulsory Modules: consideration, but you must be able to • Theoretical Models in Clinical Psychology demonstrate English language proficiency This module will provide you with an in-depth equivalent to an IELTS score of 6.0 (with no understanding of the biopsychosocial frame element below 5.5) and you will be expected to and illustrate the way UK Clinical Psychologists demonstrate that you have a suitable academic understand difference and distress through the background for the programme. use of clinical case formulation. Applicants with degrees of an equivalent • Clinical Neuropsychology standard in a closely related discipline, including This module introduces you to the major qualified health professionals (e.g. clinical neuropsychological syndromes following brain psychologists, psychiatrists, occupational damage and to a variety of different tests and therapists) who have relevant clinical experience, assessment procedures. will also be considered. • Advanced Research Methods COURSE DESCRIPTION This module will provide you with the statistical This course will enable you to apply skills that you need to conduct and evaluate psychological understanding to difficulties psychological research. connected with mental or physical health problems. You will be introduced to the theory • Communicating Research in Psychology and knowledge that underpins effective practice This will provide you with the advanced writing in clinical psychology, will explore this in relation skills you will need for your dissertation and for to a range of conditions, will gain an getting research published and are very understanding of the range of research methods relevant in the world of work. used by clinical psychologists, and will conduct your own research project in a relevant area. • Research Dissertation You will collect, analyse and interpret their data, Close links with other departments, such as the and present your empirical project, in a topic Institute of Medical and Social Care Research and that you have agreed with your supervisor, in a with NHS services will provide you with formal thesis. Students will also present their opportunities for collaborative clinical psychology research in a conference. research. Researchers in the School use a wide

Optional Modules include: Introduction to EEG/ERP Introduction to Neuroimaging Bilingualism: Research and Methods Biological Bases of Psychological Disorders Methods in Cognition and Brain Research Nudges and Behaviour Change

• • • • • •

RESEARCH LINKS/LINKS WITH INDUSTRY The academics involved with this programme have extensive research links with external bodies and companies, which are fully utilised in ensuring that the modules are relevant to the modern work and research environment graduates will enter. CAREER PROSPECTS This course will be of particular interest to you if you are aiming for a career in clinical psychology and do not yet have relevant work experience. Completing the MSc provide you with a sound basis for obtaining employment as an assistant psychologist and later gaining entry to clinical training. If you already have relevant work experience the course provides evidence of your academic and research skills, which is valuable when making applications for clinical training. It is also an excellent preparation if you are keen to pursue research in the area of clinical psychology and for qualiﬁed health professionals with an appropriate academic background, who wishes to extend your understanding of clinical psychology. For further course details, please see: www.bangor.ac.uk/go/pg/psychology

BANGOR UNIVERSITY POSTGRADUATE PROSPECTUS 147

39450 BU PG Prospectus 2015_2018 2014-09-10 10:36 AM Page 148

Psychological Research MSc COURSE DURATION MSc: 1 year full-time, Can also be studied part-time. ENTRY REQUIREMENTS You must have a single or joint honours degree in Psychology or other relevant discipline, with a minimum degree class of 2.i. International students will be given individual consideration, but you must be able to demonstrate English language proﬁciency equivalent to an IELTS score of 6.5 (with no element below 6.0) and you will be expected to demonstrate that you have a suitable academic background for the programme.

area of psychology. You also take three 'skills' modules designed to help you acquire research skills. In addition you take two tutorial modules with your supervisor wherein you develop a research proposal for your thesis. On successful completion of Part One, you'll proceed to Part Two (in the third semester). At this time you complete and write your thesis.

The thesis is the ‘heart’ of the MSc and is an intensive research experience conducted in collaboration with your supervisor that allows you to put your knowledge and skills into practice. In conducting your thesis project, you COURSE DESCRIPTION will develop new skills such as planning, coOur MSc in Psychological Research is exceptional operative working, and the academic skills for its dual emphasis on basic psychological essential to understanding and reporting science and applied issues. The course will findings to others. provide you with a wide range of practical research skills, advanced study in modern Compulsory Modules: psychology, and an opportunity to learn how this • Research Dissertation knowledge is applied in either industrial or In this module you will collect, analyse and clinical settings. The course has been recognised interpret data, and present empirical project in by the Economic and Social Research Council a formal thesis. (ESRC) as providing the transferable skills essential to social science research that will help • Communicating Research in Psychology you when looking for a PhD opportunity. This This module will focus on written course will get a comprehensive research communication of research, inclusive of writing experience working with top international calibre the MSc dissertation and writing for publication. researchers, and an exceptional opportunity to see how modern psychology can be put into • Advanced Research Skills Training practice. You will be embedded in two different labs and will gain a wealth of theoretical knowledge and The course consists of two parts. Part one practical skills that will enable you to produce comprises taught modules over two semesters. your own high class research. You are required to take three 'content' modules, each designed to provide knowledge and promote your understanding in a specific core

Optional Modules include: • Introduction to EEG/ERP • Introduction to Neuroimaging • Practical Programming • Bilingualism: Research and Methods • Biological Bases of Psychological Disorders • Disorders of Neuropsychological Relevance • Methods in Cognition and Brain Research • Nudges and Behaviour Change RESEARCH LINKS/LINKS WITH INDUSTRY The academics involved with this programme have extensive research links with external bodies and companies, which are fully utilised in ensuring that the modules are relevant to the modern work and research environment graduates will enter. CAREER PROSPECTS If you are looking to specialise in a particular area of Psychology prior to undertaking a PhD or are looking for a post as a research assistant then this ESRC accredited Masters is for you. It also provides excellent general research skills that can be used in a range of other employment environments if you’re not thinking of a PhD. For further course details, please see: www.bangor.ac.uk/go/pg/psychology

Clinical and Functional Brain Imaging PgCert COURSE DURATION Pg Cert: 1 year part-time. ENTRY REQUIREMENTS You must have an undergraduate degree in Medicine or Radiography, usually with a minimum degree class of 2.i or equivalent. COURSE DESCRIPTION Neuroimaging is emerging as a new important sub-discipline in the study of the human brain in health and disease. In the Medical sciences it plays a prominent role in the detection and diagnosis of neurological and psychiatric illnesses and in the evaluation of treatments. The techniques are becoming increasingly sophisticated and there is a high demand for well-trained professionals.

The main aims of the programme are to provide radiographers, radiologists and junior doctors with: • A foundation in functional neuroanatomy and common brain diseases • An appreciation of the approach to interpretation of clinical brain CT and MRI • An introduction to the methodologies relevant to imaging for clinical research

The course puts a high emphasis on practical skills in the design and analysis of neuroimaging studies in the research and clinical setting. The laboratory sections accompanying the modules provide the central method for transmitting both subject specific and general skills. Teaching is delivered through formal lectures, small group discussions, laboratory sessions and monthly neuroradiology conferences held at Ysbyty This part-time certificate course offers postGwynedd supervised by Consultant Radiologists qualification training for health professionals. It is and Consultant Neurologists. one of the few courses in the UK that offers a foundation in functional neuroanatomy, Compulsory Modules: diagnostic brain imaging and research skills in • Neuroradiography and Lesion Analysis anatomical and functional brain imaging The primary teaching strategy of the module including: functional MRI, anatomical imaging, will be a preceptorship in which students are Diffusion Tensor Imaging, and spectroscopy. The supervised by a neurologist in a structured programme has a strong emphasis on practical programme aimed at teaching the skills. In a dedicated computer laboratory, the fundamentals of neuroradiological localisation students learn and practice analysis and imaging and diagnosis. techniques. Under supervision of our world-class academic staff, students design their own • Introduction to Neuroimaging imaging studies, which are run on the in-house This module focuses on providing a broad 3T MRI scanner. overview on the physiological and neurological basis of neuroimaging.

148 BANGOR UNIVERSITY POSTGRADUATE PROSPECTUS

• Advanced Techniques in Neuroimaging This module has particular emphasis on cellular, metabolic and electrophysiological mechanisms of functional signals. • Neuroradiology and Lesion Analysis This provides supervised practicals in neuroradiological interpretation of head CY, MRI and lesion analysis Techniques used in neuropsychological research. RESEARCH LINKS/LINKS WITH INDUSTRY The academics involved with this programme have extensive research links with external bodies and the NHS, which are fully utilised in ensuring the modules are relevant to the modern healthcare environment graduates will enter. CAREER PROSPECTS • Consultant Radiologists who seek to develop skills for research in neuroimaging. • Radiographers looking to develop skills in a new emergent technology and research ﬁeld. • Junior doctors seeking additional qualiﬁcations for a career pathway in Radiology. For further course details, please see: www.bangor.ac.uk/go/pg/psychology

39450 BU PG Prospectus 2015_2018 2014-09-10 10:36 AM Page 149

Applied Behaviour Analysis MSc/PgDip/PgCert COURSE DURATION MSc: 1 year full-time, 2 years part-time; PgDip: 30 weeks full-time; PgCert: 15 weeks full-time.

'hands-on' research experience. We provide a • Person Centred Behavioural Procedures high quality teaching and learning environment This module explores person-centred that is intellectually stimulating and that uses the behavioural approaches and ordinary life principles of behaviour analysis. This requires outcomes for people with learning disabilities ENTRY REQUIREMENTS innovative course content and instructional who display challenging behaviour. You must have a good single or joint honours procedures, measurement of learning, flexible degree in Psychology or other relevant communication among students and staff, and a • Clinical Behavioural Interventions discipline, with a minimum degree class of 2.ii. friendly and supportive environment. In this module you will develop advanced International students will be given individual understanding of behavioural approaches to consideration, but you must be able to You may choose to take a smaller number of language and their applied implications. demonstrate English language proficiency modules for a Postgraduate Certificate or equivalent to an IELTS score of 6.0 (with no Diploma, or for CPD purposes. • Ethics and Professional Conduct element below 5.5) and you will be expected to You will gain an in-depth knowledge of demonstrate that you have a suitable Compulsory Modules: clinical behaviour analysis and the ethical academic background for the programme. • Proposal I and professional standards (BACS) required Mature candidates (25+ at the start of the course) You will prepare a research proposal and work of those employed in the UK. with relevant experience who are not graduates out practical methods for research. may also gain entry to the certificate level of the RESEARCH LINKS/LINKS WITH INDUSTRY course. • Research Dissertation The course director, Dr Hughes is an elected You will collect, analyse and interpret data, and Advisor for the Cambridge Centre for Behavioral COURSE DESCRIPTION present empirical project in a formal thesis. Studies, an international organisation devoted to This programme is aimed at those wishing to the dissemination and promotion of the uses of specialise in applied behaviour analysis. The • Principles of Learning and Behaviour behavioural psychology. Dr Hughes is organiser course will enable you to to develop advanced This module explains the theoretical and of the Experimental Analysis of Behaviour Group, theoretical and practical knowledge of the basic philosophical foundation of the science of UK and Europe (EABG); the longest standing principles of behaviour analysis and the behaviour analysis. organisation devoted to behaviour analysis in application of the principles within clinical and Europe and is a founder member of the European research settings. The programme has been • Ethics and Functional Assessment Association of Behaviour Analysis and of the UK developed by Board Certified Behavior Analysts This module will be devoted to establishing Society for Behaviour Analysis. He is also on the (BCBA) in collaboration with the Behavior advanced knowledge of the principle issues advisory board of the UK Autism Education Analysts Certification Board (BACB). It covers involved in the main ethical considerations in Competency framework. He has developed a their entire Task List specifications and is working with people in applied settings, number of strong relationships with outside recognised by the BACB as providing the content measuring behaviour, interpreting and organisations, charities and authorities, such as eligibility criteria necessary for you to to sit the analysing behavioural data. Ambitious about Autism, The Sharland full BCBA exam if you wish. Foundation, local education authorities in north • Advanced Behavioural Research Methods Wales, and Northumberland Tyne and Wear The course consists of two parts. Part One This module provides you with an Foundation NHS Trust. comprises taught modules designed around the understanding of experimental validity and its BACB Task List. On successful completion of Part relationship to experimental design in CAREER PROSPECTS One, you will proceed to Part Two - a clinical behaviour analysis. This BCAB recognised MSc is a highly relevant research study, planned and conducted in qualification for those interested in pursuing a collaboration with your BCBA-qualified research • Behaviour Change Procedures career with special educational or developmental supervisor. This module provides you with an needs in a wide range of settings. understanding of the basic concepts and You will be taught through a combination of procedures used in Applied Behaviour Analytic For further course details, please see: workshops, seminars, specialised computerinterventions. www.bangor.ac.uk/go/pg/psychology based instructional packages and practical

Psychology MSc COURSE DURATION: MSc: 1 year full-time, can also be studied parttime.

In general, we aim to provide a high quality teaching and learning environment through the use of the latest teaching tools, team- taught courses, and closely mentored research with experts in clinical psychology.

ENTRY REQUIREMENTS You must have a good single or joint honours degree in Psychology or other relevant discipline, Compulsory modules: with a minimum degree class of 2.ii. International • Research Methods Skills This will provide you with the statistical skills students will be given individual consideration, that you need to conduct and evaluate but you must be able to demonstrate English language proficiency equivalent to an IELTS score psychological research. of 6.0 (with no element below 5.5) and you will be expected to demonstrate that you have a suitable • Professional Skills Development You will gain an insight into how Psychological academic background for the programme. principles are applied in real world settings focused on your particular areas of interest. COURSE DESCRIPTIONS

• Bilingualism: Research & Methods • Clinical Neuropsychology • Motivation, Action & Health • Practical Programming for Psychologists • Consumer Psychology: Theory • Behaviour Change RESEARCH LINKS/LINKS WITH INDUSTRY The academics involved with this programme have extensive research links with external bodies and companies, which are fully utilised in ensuring that the modules are relevant to the modern work and research environment graduates will enter.

CAREER PROSPECTS The course overlaps with the MSc in The course has been developed for those Psychological Research, but instead of • Research Dissertation interested in developing their knowledge and You will collect, analyse and interpret their data, emphasising research skills, this programme will ability in Psychology in general. It will also be the empower students with a range of professional course that might be a good option for individuals and present your empirical project, in a topic skills. These skills are valuable, and highly that you have agreed with your supervisor, in a who would like to develop their professional and sought after, in a range of different careers. formal thesis. Students will also present their academic skills, but do not intend to pursue a research in a conference. research career in psychology. The programme For further course details, please see: will also allow students to tailor their degree Optional Modules: www.bangor.ac.uk/go/pg/psychology according to their interests, taking modules from • Psychology in Education our wide-range of world-class specialist • Psychosis: A psychological Perspective modules. • Introduction to Neuroimaging • Introduction to EEG/ERP • Biological Bases of Psychological Disorders • Disorders of Neuropsychological Relevance • Methods in Cognition & Brain Research BANGOR UNIVERSITY POSTGRADUATE PROSPECTUS 149

39450 BU PG Prospectus 2015_2018 2014-09-10 10:36 AM Page 150

Mindfulness-Based Approaches MA/MSc COURSE DURATION This is a part-time Masters programme, with most of our 30-credit modules taught over five weekends, spread across the academic year. The full Master’s degree can be completed in 3 years, or up to a maximum of 5 years. ENTRY REQUIREMENTS You must have an initial degree or recognised equivalent qualification, and a professional background with at least 3 years’ professional experience. We prioritise students with personal experience of mindfulness practice in the form taught in Mindfullness Based Approaches (MBAs). Applications are invited for the Foundation module from those with a range of professional backgrounds, as the focus is on personal experience of the practice and the science of mindfulness, with integration of these into one’s life and work. COURSE DESCRIPTION The MSc in Mindfulness-Based Approaches is designed to provide students with a strong experiential and theoretical knowledge base in MBAs as a basis for professional practice, teaching and research in this area. You must have an initial degree or recognised equivalent qualification, and a professional background with at least 3 years’ professional experience. The curriculum is designed to extend your current personal experience of the practice of mindfulness, knowledge of the growing field of MBAs, and skills and understanding in teaching these. The core of the teaching is delivered in the interactive, participatory, collaborative style used

when teaching mindfulness-based approaches in other contexts. This will be supported by some didactic presentations followed by group discussion and individual tutorials/supervision. The programme requires a strong personal commitment from participants to engage in a daily and on going personal mindfulness practice and in depth reﬂections on the experience of this. Compulsory Modules: • Foundation in Mindfulness-Based Approaches This module integrates personal experience of mindfulness practice with a development of understanding of the rationale MBAs. • Research This module includes basic research methodology, the considerations required for eliciting information on MBAs and knowledge of the body of research on Mindfulness-Based Approaches.

RESEARCH LINKS/LINKS WITH INDUSTRY The academics involved with this programme have extensive teaching and research links with external bodies, particularly in connection to implementation of mindfulness within contexts such as health care and social care, education and workplace. These links are fully utilised in ensuring the programmes are relevant to the varied contexts that graduates will enter. CAREER PROSPECTS This course could enable you to develop your career in a number of ways. Students may opt to go on to further postgraduate study leading to a PhD. For qualiﬁed health, social care or education professionals, the course oﬀers an exciting opportunity for continuing professional development.

• Dissertation A research thesis of up to 20,000 words presenting an individual research project conducted on a topic relevant to MindfulnessBased Approaches. Optional Modules • Teaching 1 • Teaching 2 • Mindfulness in Individual Therapy • The Buddhist Background to MindfulnessBased Courses • Neuroscience of Mindfulness

Teaching Mindfulness-Based Courses PgDip COURSE DURATION PgDip: 4 years part-time. ENTRY REQUIREMENTS Applicants will normally have the following: a good degree or equivalent; a professional qualification in a relevant field such as health care, psychology, psychotherapy, counselling, social care, or education, with at least 3 years’ experience in their area of work; a regular mindfulness meditation practice for at least a year; have participated in an 8-week course of MBCT or MBSR. COURSE DESCRIPTION This course has been designed to give a strong experiential and theoretical knowledge base, together with a full training, in teaching Mindfulness-Based Cognitive Therapy (MBCT) or Mindfulness-Based Stress Reduction (MBSR) within the student’s own professional context. The course cannot be accredited because there is no regulatory body for teaching mindfulness, but for qualified health, social care or education professionals it gives the opportunity to gain both an academic award, and in addition a Certificate of Competence in Teaching Mindfulness-Based Courses, which is awarded by the Centre for Mindfulness Research and Practice, internationally acclaimed for standards of excellence in this field. The course programme consists of four compulsory modules all of which have to be taken sequentially over 4 years, the first three being delivered on Saturdays, while the teaching element of the final module is given in a 7-day residential block. From the first year’s

146 BANGOR UNIVERSITY POSTGRADUATE PROSPECTUS

experiential and theoretical foundation in the practice and principles of mindfulness as taught in MBCT and MBSR, the programme gives students the opportunity to gain increasingly indepth levels of understanding and practice in teaching the 8-week mindfulness course; also to be assessed on practical skills learned within the teaching group, as well as on their understanding and skills in critical analysis of the theories and rationales underlying mindfulness-based courses. In the ﬁnal module, Assessed Teaching Practice, students are assessed through their recordings of teaching a mindfulness-based course within their own professional context, as well as through written work. Students are expected to start teaching mindfulness-based courses under supervision, during years 2 and 3 of the programme, and must have taught at least three such courses before embarking on the Assessed Teaching Practice module.

Compulsory Modules: • Foundation in mindfulness-based approaches This module integrates personal experience of mindfulness practice with a development of understanding of the rationale MBAs.

In individual circumstances, it may be possible to change from the Postgraduate Diploma in TMBCs to the MA/MSc in MBAs. In such a case, a student would have to forego the award of Postgraduate Diploma in TMBCs and transfer credits obtained to the Master’s in MBAs programme. Students would then need to complete the compulsory Master’s Research module before registering and completing the research dissertation.

• Teaching 1 This module develops core skills and understanding in the delivery of MBAs. • Teaching 2 This module involves further development of skills and deepening of understanding in delivering MBAs. • Assessed Teaching Practice In this module you will engage in a developmental process that integrates and builds on previous personal, theoretical and skills-based learning in mindfulness issues.

CAREER PROSPECTS Suitable for students already engaged in teaching mindfulness who want to broaden and deepen their skill set in order to further develop their skills in this area. For further course details, please see: www.bangor.ac.uk/go/pg/psychology

39450 BU PG Prospectus 2015_2018 2014-09-10 10:36 AM Page 151

School of Sport, Health and Exercise Sciences About the School The School of Sport, Health and Exercise Sciences (SHES) has been providing highcalibre MSc programmes since 2000. The School attracts approximately 45 students per year from home and abroad, including students from the USA, Singapore, Bahrain, Malaysia and Trinidad and Tobago. The scientific expertise of the School's academics (all of whom are research active) is regularly recognised by research accreditation exercises. The last Research Assessment Exercise (RAE) confirmed the School's now well-established reputation for the highest quality research, with 80% of work being judged as either world leading or at an international level. This placed the School as one of the top ten Sport Science Schools in the UK. The School's excellence in research feeds directly into postgraduate degree programmes, since students are taught by, and work with, the researchers who drive the knowledge base in the subject areas they study. The School values the overall experience of students highly and takes great pride in having a caring and student centred approach. Within a close knit and friendly academic community the School aims to provide a challenging and enjoyable learning environment that is welcoming and supportive of all students. Facilities The School is based in a beautiful Grade II listed building on the banks of the Menai Strait and is well resourced for the scientific study of sport, health and exercise. It has an extensive range of laboratories containing state-of-the-art equipment for sport and exercise physiology, psychology, motor control and learning, and motion analysis. Physiology laboratories are BASES accredited. Facilities include: • exercise physiology laboratories, equipped with an Ultrasound and Isokinetic Dynomometer; • an environmental chamber – to allow testing in extreme temperature and humidity conditions; • a hypoxia chamber – to allow research testing at simulated high altitudes; • dual-energy x-ray absorptiometry (DEXA) scanners – to provide measurements of tissue composition. Bangor University’s was the first UK Sports Science School to install a DEXA; • a motion analysis laboratory – equipped with a state-of–the-art 12-camera passive marker system to analyse whole body movement, and an active marker system to allow for analysis of smaller, part-body movements; • psychology testing laboratories including a driving simulation and observation/ interview suite; • cell biology and biochemistry laboratories.

Overview of Academic Areas The School offers a full range of taught and research sport, health and exercise science postgraduate degrees, from programmes that specialise in performance and health sciences to degrees with a greater vocational element (eg MSc in Applied Sports Science and Outdoor Activities and Exercise Rehabilitation). Which degree you choose will depend on your specific interests and your career aspirations. Research Links The School has a track record of supporting research into exercise and clinical rehabilitation and disease prevention (working with local NHS Boards, Arthritis Care and Research (ACR) etc), elite performance, and talent identification and development (e.g. ongoing projects with the England and Wales Cricket Board). Staff have provided professional support to a number of International sports and Governing Bodies. These include the British Gymnastics Association, National Ice Skating Association, British Orienteering Federation, Welsh Canoeing Association, England Rugby, Golf Wales and the Welsh Yachting Association. Some staff have also provided expertise to the British Olympic Association, the British Olympic Medical Institute, British Association of Sport and Exercise Sciences and the British Psychologcial Society. Within the School's Institute for the Psychology of Elite Performance, staff have worked with the Ministry of Defense's (MoD) Initial Training Group on a successful Leadership Study and are currently working with UK Sport in understanding the developmental journeys of GB's highest achieving athletes. Staff in the Extremes Research Group have also worked with the Ministry of Defense to investigate the effects of energy deficit on physical performance, cognitive function and health during eight weeks of arduous training and have recently been awarded a £1.4M grant to investigate vitamin D and iron deficiency in recruits. Based on the high quality of its research, the School has developed an excellence in enterprise and innovation activities. These activities, including knowledge transfer, involve the School in developing productive and collaborative relationships with the public/private sectors, local communities and other agencies. These relationships provide an opportunity to work with local businesses to facilitate high quality and meaningful student experiences, carry out relevant and applicable research, and contribute to the local community. Examples of existing partners include: Snowdonia Active; Outdoor Partnership; Sports Council for Wales and Rygbi Gogledd Cymru (North Wales Regional Rugby).

COURSE LIST: MSc/MA/PgCert • Applied Sport Science • Applied Sport and Exercise Physiology • Applied Sport and Exercise Psychology • Applied Sport Science and Outdoor Activities • Exercise Rehabilitation MSc • Sport and Exercise Psychology (BPS Accredited) MRes/PgCert • Sport and Exercise Physiology • Sport and Exercise Psychology • Sport and Exercise Science PhD/MPhil • Sport, Health and Exercise Sciences

CONTACT DETAILS: School of Sport, Health & Exercise Science Tel: +44 (0) 1248 388256 E-mail: Taught courses: mscsport@bangor.ac.uk Research courses: shesphds@bangor.ac.uk www.bangor.ac.uk/sport

“The overall quality of Student work is good (excellent for MRes). The best students present articulate, well referenced, critically appraised work demonstrating considerable insight and innovation.” External Examiner, June 2013

BANGOR UNIVERSITY POSTGRADUATE PROSPECTUS 151

39450 BU PG Prospectus 2015_2018 2014-09-10 10:36 AM Page 152

“The assistantship process has been very beneficial both for me and indeed, I hope, for the undergraduates to whom I delivered input. In the first instance, whilst a confident person, the thought of standing in front of a room full of undergraduates was somewhat daunting. Despite my initial reservations, the interaction between us was positive and beneficial to both sides. This opportunity was only possible through the assistantship. For students considering furthering their inter-personal skills or gaining experience in facilitating a lecture, I would strongly recommend considering undertaking an assistantship. The inclusion on a curriculum vitae can only be beneficial too!” TAMMY LEWIS-JONES, BSc (Hons) Graduate Assistant 2013-14

Career Prospects The School's postgraduate programmes prepare students for a career as a sport scientist, working with squads of elite athletes and performers to fine tune their training; in sport science research; working in the public health sector, for example in sports therapy or physiotherapy or to increase motivation towards physical activity; or working in the health/fitness industry generally. Another vocational route is postgraduate study and a career in teaching (after completing a postgraduate certificate of education), research or lecturing. In addition to the above, the Applied Sport Science and Outdoor Activities programme is ideal preparation for those who wish to further their careers in environmental physiology and the psychology of outdoor performance. As well as working with professionals in the outdoor environment, career opportunities also exist in sport science research.

Graduate Assistantships All postgraduate taught applicants (Home/EU/International, full-time and parttime) are eligible to apply to become a Graduate Assistant (GA). Graduate Assistants work with academic staﬀ in a range of teaching, learning and assessment activities to support undergraduate student learning for up to 60 hours each academic year. In exchange students receive the equivalent of approximately £55 a month.

BPS accredited programme in Sport and Exercise Psychology – only students with graduate basis for chartered membership (GBC) will be eligible for this MSc. Students must have completed an accredited BPS undergraduate degree. N.B. The BPS does not accredit MAs or Diplomas.

EU and Overseas students, whose ﬁrst language is not English, are required to take the standardised English Language test (IELTS) at How Graduate Assistantships support career their British Council before the June of their development admission to the course. Students who achieve a SHES postgraduate programmes equip score of 6.0 or above (no individual score below students with the latest knowledge in their 5.5) are eligible for direct entry to the course.

selected field, plus a wide range of transferable skills, and an autonomous approach to learning that keeps them at the cutting edge of their chosen career. Assistantships are an innovative feature that allow students to put some of their learning into practice by supporting School activities, to help develop their personal applied support The Exercise Rehabilitation programme is skills and to enhance their CVs with direct aimed at Sport Science or Health graduates, experience to support their future interested in developing their expertise and employability. Graduate Assistants from the knowledge base in exercise and rehabilitation. School have gone on to work as lecturers and research assistants in FE/HE, teachers, Funding physiotherapists and exercise rehabilitation The School/University offers the following specialists, outdoor instructors/guides and awards to students applying to study on any paramedics. taught postgraduate programme: Further information about the School's First Class Funding – Excellence Award bursaries and assistantships can be found at: (Home/EU Students only) www.bangor.ac.uk/sport/bursaries.php.en The School will reward academic excellence Duration of MSc/MRes Programmes at entry. A fee reduction of £1,000 will be One year full-time/Three years part-time (as applied for self-funding Home/EU students standard, but students can request to study who achieve a first class honours degree (or over two years). equivalent).

The taught modules run from September to March/April and the Research Project from April to September (December to September for MRes students).

152 BANGOR UNIVERSITY POSTGRADUATE PROSPECTUS

Entry Requirements At least a 2.ii in a relevant subject is required.

Application Process MSc Applications Students must first complete a Postgraduate Application Form, available at: www.bangor.ac.uk/courses/postgrad/taught/a pplication.php.en MRes Applications Applicants who are interested in undertaking an MRes programme should first identify and contact a potential supervisor from the staff list available and contact www.bangor.ac.uk/sport to discuss the posiblities of supervision. They should then follow the online application process, which can be found at: www.bangor.ac.uk/courses/postgrad/research /index.php.en In addition, students should prepare a brief outline of their proposed area of research to accompany their application form.

39450 BU PG Prospectus 2015_2018 2014-09-10 10:36 AM Page 153

Sport, Health and Exercise Sciences MSc/MA Degrees The MSc and MA programmes range from those that specialise in performance and health sciences (e.g. Exercise Rehabilitation) to degrees with a greater vocational element (e.g. Applied Sports Science and Outdoor Activities and Exercise Rehabilitation). MA Programmes offer similar programmes but without the empirical research* required for the MSc programmes. *NB - These courses are not appropriate for students wishing to progress onto academic research via a science based PhD. The programmes are delivered using a variety of teaching methods, including lectures, seminars, workshops, group activities, practical work, tutorials and roles play. Each module comprises approximately 200 hours of student time (including formal contact). There are five MSc/MA programmes on offer: • Applied Sport Science • Applied Sport and Exercise Physiology • Applied Sport and Exercise Psychology • Applied Sport Science and Outdoor Activities • Exercise Rehabilitation Plus one MSc only: • Sport and Exercise Psychology (British Psychological Society accredited) Programme Structure and Content MSc degrees offer 120 taught credits and a 60 credit research project. All MSc students undertake compulsory modules: • Research Skills; • Independent Study (a one-to-one supervised programme of work leading to the development of the proposal for the Research Project) • Supervised Experience – this module is tailored to the needs of the individual and could include directed work with a specified client group or individual • Research Project Thesis relevant to the programme being studied • MSc Research Skills Research Skills is a double-credit taught module. The extended nature of the module allows students to study the very broad nature of the research process that will allow them to complete, initially, an appropriate Independent Study (a double module in which a research proposal for the Research Project is completed) and subsequently, a full Research Project. The module covers material relevant to the design and analysis of both quantitative and qualitative research. It also provides an understanding of the benefits and limitations of various research methods, research designs, data collection instruments and data analysis tools. Students have the opportunity to develop their ability to be critically evaluative. Specific content includes: Statistical issues in quantitative research; Simple and multiple (forced entry, moderated and mediated) regression analyses; Single factor analysis of variance with and without repeated measures; Two factor analysis of variance with and without repeated measures; Single factor and two factor multivariate analysis of variance (with and without repeated measures); Repeated measures analysis of variance using the multivariate solution; Doubly repeated measures analysis of variance; Analysis of covariance; Follow-up procedures for all of the above; Assumptions underpinning all of the above and available options for dealing with

violations to these assumptions; Experiments and causal inference; External and construct validity; Experimental and quasi-experimental designs; Correlational and epidemiological research; Reliability and validity in quantitative and qualitative research; Issues in qualitative research and design; Interviews; Single case design and analysis; Observation; Narrative; Ethnography; grounded theory and discourse analysis. • Independent Study The Independent Study module integrates material from the taught modules section of the study programme. It provides, amongst other things, an understanding of the methods that can be used to establish a list of relevant references on a particular topic. Students will be expected to obtain a good deal of the relevant literature by using library-based systems including computerised search methods and inter-library loan services whenever appropriate. You are guided through this process during the preparation of the Independent Study research proposal, and subsequently the Research Project when you are expected to generate your own literature base. The Independent Study research proposal comprises part of the information that will be considered by the Course Team and the Examination Board in the context of student progression to the Research Project phase of each programme. Specifically, the Independent Study should consist of a critical and concise review of the research literature pertaining to a particular research question. A rationale for the proposed research question must be provided, along with a sound methodology for exploring the research question, planned analyses, and expected outcomes. Further, anticipated problems such as resources, equipment, possible ethical issues, informed consent forms, a statement of feasibility of the project and expected costs must be discussed. • Supervised Experience The content of this module will be largely student specific and include activities (workshops, directed reading, client based practiacl work) that will develop the individual’s personal applied support skills. Initially, you complete an individual self-assessment of your current skills/knowledge base and set personal goals to enable you to improve your applied support skills. All students will attend units (workshops) on Ethics in Research and consultancy, communication and counselling skills and how to conduct a needs assessment. Specific physiology and psychology workshops (e.g. Imagery) will also take place. Students will complete a contract of intended activities agreed with their supervisors in the first four weeks of their programme of study. This contract may, where appropriate, include the intention to apply to British Association of Sport and Exercise Science (BASES) to commence a formally logged Supervised Experience.

• Overview and Format of the MSc Research Project module The Research Project is an independent piece of research, and acts as the culmination of the academic challenges you have faced. The module comprises 60 credits (i.e. equivalent to three double modules) and will formally equate to 600 hours of student time. Students work closely with their supervisors to develop the work on their research proposal submitted during the Independent Study module. As External Examiners have noted, throughout this module you receive excellent research training from leaders in the field, with many of the resulting projects being published in international, peer reviewed journals. Specifically, the project will involve a review of research evidence with the aim of formulating an appropriate research question, and will likely involve some refinement and pilot work. Once achieved, you will implement a research design and method suited to the area of enquiry. The supervisor provides excellent expert guidance throughout the process. Multi-disciplinary and interdisciplinary studies, which might involve your ongoing sport/exercise experience, will be encouraged. Each topic will normally involve data collection, analysis and interpretation and allow you to demonstrate your initiative, independence and time management. You will be expected to show a thorough knowledge of the relevant sources of information and the ability to use them with discrimination; to provide full references; to exercise sound and independent judgment; to structure work logically and to express this work with clarity and precision.

‘’The degrees I have examined continue to be among the best in the UK’’ MSc External Examiner MA Programmes have 80 credits of overlap with MSc degrees, plus 100 credits covering MA Research Skills, Dissertation Proposal and Dissertation. MA degrees are especially recommended to graduates who want to: pursue a career in sport or health related fields, such as rehabilitation, coaching, leisure and fitness; pursue a career in related fields such as education and social services; give their CV an additional boost; explore a particular area of sport or health sciences in detail through researching and writing a literature review but not undertake empirical research.

A portfolio will then be developed; the portfolio records activities including meetings with supervisor, attendance at workshops, meetings and a plan of work with at least one client, and thought/evaluations of all meetings and workshops (i.e. evidence of reﬂective practice).

BANGOR UNIVERSITY POSTGRADUATE PROSPECTUS 153

39450 BU PG Prospectus 2015_2018 2014-09-10 10:36 AM Page 154

Sport, Health and Exercise Sciences MSc/MA Degrees continued MA Research Skills This module covers material relevant to the design and analysis of both quantitative and qualitative research. Students study statistical issues in quantitative research and design; assumptions underpinning statistical analysis and variances and the available options for dealing with violations of these assumptions. They also study issues in qualitative research and design, reliability and validity in quantitative and qualitative research and cover interviews, case study design and analysis, observation, narrative and ethnographic research to enable them to critically evaluate statistical procedures that have been used by other quantitative researchers, design and statistically analyse their own experiments, quasi-experiments and non-experimental hypotheses testing studies; and appreciate the assumptions of qualitative research and demonstrate knowledge of data collection and analysis procedures.

Applied Sport and Exercise Physiology – focuses on sport and exercise physiology. In addition to the core modules listed above, you choose an optional module from Sport Psychology; Eﬀective Coaching or Rehabilitation of the Injured Athlete. You also undertake two further compulsory modules in Clinical Exercise Physiology and Performance Physiology.

• The Clinical Exercise Physiology module is a laboratory and seminar based module that examines: the effect of ageing and physical activity on aerobic capacity, body composition, immune and endocrine function, and quality of life; pathophysiology of pulmonary, metabolic, bone and joint, cancer, cardiovascular, neuromuscular and other lifestyle related diseases; symptoms and diagnosis of common clinical conditions; methods and prescription of exercise testing and prescription of people with common clinical conditions; and practical physiological tests that are appropriate to these MA Dissertation Proposal/Dissertation modules conditions. The goal of the Dissertation Proposal module is to fully prepare the student for successful • Performance Physiology reviews the link completion of the subsequent MA Dissertation. between physiology and physical performance, Literature searching, presentation, and scholarly followed by detailed examination of endurance writing skills will be honed. To achieve this, the activities with emphasis on muscle oxygenation student will work alongside a supervisor to and metabolism and the implications for identify a broad topic ripe for review. Upon fatigue. A final consideration will be some development of an initial layout for the alternative models of fatigue in endurance Dissertation, one or possibly two areas of the activities. It also examines other factors that topic are reviewed. Thus a deliberately narrow exert a major influence on performance, such and abbreviated review is conducted better as basic and applied aspects of strength and allowing the student to gain clear and power, and alterations in the immune function. progressive understanding of the levels of thoroughness and critical thinking associated Applied Sport and Exercise Psychology – you with a MA Dissertation. undertake the core modules listed above, plus an optional module from Rehabilitation of the On completion of the Dissertation Proposal, Injured Athlete or Effective Coaching. You also students should formulate a literature search study two additional compulsory modules as strategy; compose a literature review; develop a follows: theoretical argument; present their proposal in writing; succinctly summarise their proposal and • Sport Psychology – covering Group cohesion; present their proposal verbally. Collective efficacy; Leadership; Goals. Catastrophe models; Processing efficiency Students will receive tutorials and guidance in theory; Conscious processing hypothesis; Ironic executing literature searches, completing a effects theory; Attention control theory. literature review, developing a dissertation argument, and preparing an in-depth written • Exercise Psychology – examining some of the report including knowing how to compile a major theoretical and practical issues in working bibliography. This will enable them to applied exercise psychology. Specifically, the demonstrate an understanding of the processes following topics will be explored: the in collecting information from a large body of antecedents and consequences of appearance research literature; demonstrate an in-depth related anxiety; the role of mental skills and knowledge of a chosen research area; concisely confidence in exercising regularly; group and critically review a body of research literature dynamics; motivation and motivationally and develop an argument; effectively synthesise supportive environments; and counselling for and disseminate their research findings in a exercise behaviour change. In addition, a succinct manner via a written report. student-led approach is adopted with students researching and verbally presenting material Students also undertake a range of compulsory on a chosen topic. and optional modules relevant to the programme being studied. Applied Sport Science and Outdoor Activities – this academic programme focuses on the Applied Sport Science – this programme application of physiology and psychology to provides a focus on sport and performance. As outdoor activities. Within the modular structure well as undertaking the core modules listed, you of the degree, you undertake the core modules choose modules from Performance Physiology; listed above and a compulsory Higher Skills Sport Psychology; Exercise Psychology; Clinical module, plus one optional module from Exercise Physiology; Rehabilitation of the Injured Performance Physiology; Sport Psychology; Athlete or Effective Coaching. Effective Coaching or Rehabilitation of the Injured Athlete.

154 BANGOR UNIVERSITY POSTGRADUATE PROSPECTUS

• Higher Skills – is it intended that on completion of this module that you should be sufficiently knowledgeable and skilled to work in scientific and outdoor related disciplines. Due to current industry regulation and insurance requirements, the attainment of nationally recognised vocational qualifications is essential to gain employment in outdoor activities. This module will enable you to progress towards, or actually attain, National Governing Body (NGB) awards in outdoor activities. Pending approval of prior learning/experience, this module may not need to be pursued. However, an additional 20 credits would need to be studied instead. Exercise Rehabilitation – aimed at sport science or health graduates who are interested in developing their expertise and knowledge base in exercise and rehabilitation. You undertake the core modules listed above plus compulsory modules in Clinical Exercise Physiology (see previous) and Rehabilitation of the Injured Athlete. • The Rehabilitation of the Injured Athlete module covers theoretical perspectives in sports injury rehabilitation; psychological response to sports injury including: cognitive responses, emotional responses and behavioural responses; measurement issues in psychological response to sports injury research; the role of confidence in injury and rehabilitation; social support in sports injury rehabilitation; psychological interventions in sports injury rehabilitation; therapeutic modalities and physical techniques used in rehabilitation; exercise, training principles and biomechanics of rehabilitation; the physical rehabilitation of sports injuries (through the use of examples of shoulder, knee and lower limb injuries); the rehabilitation team and the sports-specific rehabilitation plan; returning the athlete to competition; failure to rehabilitate; current trends in injury rehabilitation research and future research directions; and critical assessment of sports rehabilitation research. Sport and Exercise Psychology Accredited by the British Psychological Society (BPS) The School is proud to have been the first to gain BPS postgraduate professional training accreditation for this MSc programme. Completion of this course will form part of a period of study required for registration as a Chartered Psychologist. The programme is aimed at students with BPS graduate basis for chartered membership (i.e. they must have undertaken a BPS accredited undergraduate degree). You will undertake the core/compulsory modules Research Skills, Independent Study, Supervised Experience and Research Project, plus compulsory modules in Sport Psychology and Exercise Psychology (see previous). You also choose one optional module from Rehabilitation of the Injured Athlete or Effective Coaching.

39450 BU PG Prospectus 2015_2018 2014-09-10 10:36 AM Page 155

Sport, Health and Exercise Sciences MRes Degrees MRes degrees are aimed at students who wish to • Peer Reviewing Scientific Research – students gain more extensive training in research in sport, work closely with their supervisor to perform health and exercise sciences. They will undertake an initial review of a previously submitted (and 60 taught credits and then complete a final subsequently published) research article. You compulsory Research Project comprising 120 will then follow the paper along the peer review credits. process, discussing your review with your supervisor, and then be required to adequately The individual programmes have been designed address concerns which have been raised. to provide you with the opportunity to develop a Collectively this will mean that you will cover a critical understanding of the principles and contemporary research topic in a highly application of research design and analytical focused and in-depth manner gaining a methods relevant to their scientific discipline. You comprehensive understanding of how to will also learn about the importance of prepare your own manuscripts (e.g. research conducting research with reference to ethical and proposal, Research Project) and how to regulatory guidelines and develop your evaluate the research of others. In order to theoretical understanding of research at the place your highly specialised knowledge into a forefront of your chosen discipline. These more holistic perspective, you will also attend programmes facilitate the integration of theory the School’s Research Seminar series. and professional practice. Throughout the research process student autonomy of learning • Latent Variable Modelling – this module becomes increasingly important. introduces students to the concepts of Structural Equation Modelling (SEM) and There are three MRes pathways: provides a basic grounding in their implementation. It also covers an introduction • MRes Sport and Exercise Physiology to SEM using LISREL and topics including: • MRes Sport and Exercise Psychology measurement models and structural models; • MRes Sport and Exercise Science exploratory factor analysis; confirmatory factor analysis (CFA); structural modelling with MRes Programme Structure and Content observed and latent variables; conceptual Research skills oriented modules form the issues, common misunderstandings and bedrock of the School’s MRes programmes. As a limitations. result taught modules are aligned with both discipline specific and the (higher) cognitive • Research Project skills. Within a modular structure all students Under the guidance of your supervising tutor(s), undertake compulsory modules in research students will pro-actively determine the content skills totalling 40 credits: of this unit. The initial stages of the Research Project will develop the work of the project • Research Skills (20 credits – see previous proposal and taught phases of the MRes module detail) programmes. This will involve the surveying and reviewing of research evidence with the and 20 credits from the following modules: aim of formulating an appropriate research question, and will likely involve some • How to Conduct Statistics (20 credits) refinement and pilot work. Once achieved, you • Presentation of Statistics (10 credits) will implement a research design and method • Peer Reviewing (10 credits) suited to your area of enquiry. Ethical approval • Latent Variable Modelling (10 credits) of the study will be obtained before data may be collected, thereby introducing you to this plus 20 credits from optional modules and a integral part of the research process. final compulsory Research Project comprising Throughout this module you receive excellent 120 credits. research training from leaders in the field. It is expected that the resulting projects will be • How to conduct Statistics and Presentation of publishable in international, peer-reviewed Statistics modules – the purpose of these two journals. taught modules is to provide you with an indepth understanding and critical appreciation You therefore undertake discipline specific of statistical procedures. As independent study research (e.g. psychology, physiology, medicine, based modules, they will enable you to gain a health); Research design and statistics; Ethics comprehensive understanding of a statistical and Presentation of research findings. procedure of your choosing (following consultation with the staff member responsible for the Multi-disciplinary studies and interdisciplinary module). To this end, you will normally cover (i) work, which might involve your ongoing relevant background issues; (ii) when to use sport/exercise experience, will be encouraged. utilise particular statistical tests; (iii) how to Each topic will normally involve data collection, conduct statistical testing via appropriate analysis and interpretation and allow you to software; (iv) how to correctly interpret demonstrate your powers of imagination, computational output; and (v) how to present initiative, independence and time management. the findings following analysis. You will be expected to demonstrate a thorough knowledge of the relevant sources of Students learn about these themes through a information and the ability to use them with ‘learning by teaching’ paradigm via the discrimination; to provide full references; to development of a statistics oriented verbal exercise sound and independent judgment; to presentation and written assignment structure work logically and to express yourself resembling a book chapter/resource. The with clarity and precision. verbal presentation will be conducted first in order to obtain developmental feedback for the You choose 20 credits from optional modules, written assignment. according to the programme chosen, to make up your total of 60 credits from the taught component of the MRes programmes.

MRes Sport and Exercise Physiology – in addition to the core/compulsory modules you choose a further 20 credits from the following optional modules: Clinical Exercise Physiology; Performance Physiology; or Rehabilitation of the Injured Athlete. MRes Sport and Exercise Psychology – in addition to the core/compulsory modules you choose a further 20 credits from the following optional modules: Sport Psychology; Eﬀective Coaching; Exercise Psychology; or Rehabilitation of the Injured Athlete. MRes Sport and Exercise Science – in addition to the core/compulsory modules you choose a further 20 credits from the following optional modules: Clinical Exercise Physiology; Sport Psychology; Eﬀective Coaching; Exercise Psychology; Performance Physiology; or Rehabilitation of the Injured Athlete.

“Being a postgraduate assistant has been a challenging, yet enjoyable experience and I have gained a number of skills that will look good on my CV. It has enhanced my communication and presentation skills and I have learned how to explain things in a diﬀerent way to make them more easily understood.” Rachel Ellen Cook, MSc Exercise Rehabilitation and Graduate Assistant 2013/14

BANGOR UNIVERSITY POSTGRADUATE PROSPECTUS 155

39450 BU PG Prospectus 2015_2018 2014-09-10 10:36 AM Page 156

Sport, Health and Exercise Sciences MPhil and PhD Programmes

MPhil and PhD programmes are available for students interested in the possibility of pursuing an entirely research-based degree in Sport, Health and Exercise Sciences (MPhil or PhD). Please contact shesphds@bangor.ac.uk to request additional information.

Professional accreditation Students undertaking any programme of postgraduate study (MSc, MRes or PhD/MPhil) may have the opportunity to prepare for the British Association of Sport and Exercise Sciences (BASES) supervisory experience training, which is normally a pre-requisite of the Association's professional accreditation. BASES also organises an annual student conference. Former MSc students have won prestigious awards for ‘Best Postgraduate Verbal Presentation’ and ‘Best Postgraduate Poster Presentation’ at the BASES Student Conferences. These awards are open to MSc, MRes and PhD students from all UK Universities.

“After I ﬁnished my degree I got a job at a renowned sport-scientiﬁc research institute in the Netherlands. After working there for over two years I am now on a PhD scholarship at Victoria University, Australia investigating some psychological skills in relation to performance of talented adolescent athletes and also teaching sport psychology tutorials.” Fleur Van Rens, MSc Sport and Exercise Psychology, graduated in 2009

156 BANGOR UNIVERSITY POSTGRADUATE PROSPECTUS

39450 BU PG Prospectus 2015_2018 2014-09-10 10:36 AM Page 157

BANGOR UNIVERSITY POSTGRADUATE PROSPECTUS 157

39450 BU PG Prospectus 2015_2018 2014-09-10 10:36 AM Page 158

COLLEGE OF PHYSICAL AND APPLIED SCIENCES The College of Physical and Applied Sciences can trace its roots back to the foundation of the University in 1884. It has had a long tradition of excellence in research and teaching and employs many academics who are leaders in their fields. The College comprises three constituent schools, the School of Chemistry, the School of Computer Science and the School of Electronic Engineering. The College is one of the most successful at the University in the quality of its research outputs. Students who study with us are able to receive individual attention for the duration of their time in Bangor. The research quality of the College was confirmed in the most recent Research Assessment Exercise (RAE 2008) which saw all three Schools - Chemistry, Computer Science and Electronic Engineering improve their position both nationally and locally. Electronic Engineering was ranked equal second in the UK. All Schools enjoy valuable and extensive collaborations both within the UK and internationally as evidenced from the high proportion of publications that include co-authors from other UK and international institutions and organisations. Such interactions and collaborations, when added to the expertise and facilities within the College, provide a unique resource for regional businesses and employment opportunities for students. The strategic directions of the College are clear and map well onto the four stated pillars of the Government Higher Education strategy: • Digital Economy (ICT) • Low Carbon Economy • Health and Biosciences • Advanced Engineering and Manufacturing Computer Science has seen rapid expansion in its Visualisation and Medical Graphics activities. The internationally recognised work on Pattern Recognition together with growing activity in Artificial Intelligence and Intelligent Agents forms a second key theme. Systems Modelling, the third theme in Computer Science, provides opportunities for interaction with a number of local industries and with colleagues in the School of Electronic Engineering where the key themes are Optoelectronics and Organic Electronics with continuing activity in Laser Micromachining. Students who study at the College of Physical and Applied Sciences are assured that their work will contribute to and be involved with topical research, and many of our students have papers published during their time at Bangor. Chemistry at the Life Science Interface, Materials Chemistry and Theoretical and computational Chemistry are the major themes at the School of Chemistry. However, the boundaries between these areas are soft and many research projects go across these themes. Strong links to national and international collaborations open opportunities for the future.

158 BANGOR UNIVERSITY POSTGRADUATE PROSPECTUS

ÂŠ GLYN DAVIES

39450 BU PG Prospectus 2015_2018 2014-09-10 10:36 AM Page 159

Students have access to state-of-the-art research equipment, such as the nitrogen glove box facility (seen here), attached to the Class 1000 clean room for handling organic electronic devices which cannot be exposed to oxygen. BANGOR UNIVERSITY POSTGRADUATE PROSPECTUS 159

39450 BU PG Prospectus 2015_2018 2014-09-10 10:36 AM Page 160

160 BANGOR UNIVERSITY POSTGRADUATE PROSPECTUS

39450 BU PG Prospectus 2015_2018 2014-09-10 10:36 AM Page 161

School of Chemistry About the School Chemistry at Bangor has a distinguished history stretching back over 125 years and Chemistry was one of the four founding departments of the University in 1884. Over this period the highest standards in teaching coupled with a strong commitment to research have been the School’s mission. The School of Chemistry combines a traditional approach with a modern curriculum and teaching methods. The result is a modern School which offers a range of solid-based postgraduate degree courses which have been highly rated by our external examiners. The School has an active postgraduate programme with students from the UK and from many different countries around the world. Research work at the School is of the highest quality and creativity spanning the traditional areas of organic, inorganic and physical chemistry grouped together under the three research themes of chemistry at the life science interface, materials chemistry and theoretical chemistry. Staff and facilities The School has a full complement of academic staff working in modern teaching and research facilities. Postgraduate teaching and learning is enhanced by traditional lectures, seminars, IT sessions and laboratory classes with research work being the main emphasis. We have well-equipped laboratories with industry standard instrumentation for students use, including two new NMR instuments, GC, HPLC, MS, spectroscopy (FTIR and UV-vis), TGA, XRD and microscopy. Overview of academic areas The School of Chemistry has a vibrant research community which includes MSc Analytical Chemistry, MSc Environmental Chemistry, MRes, MPhil and PhD students all working under the broad School research themes of materials chemistry, chemistry at the life science interface and theoretical chemistry. We also collaborate with colleagues in other departments both at Bangor University and worldwide. Specific research interests include polymer chemistry, photovoltaics, green chemistry, nature product synthesis, carbohydrate chemistry and other areas of organic and inorganic synthetic chemistry, protein chemistry, nanochemistry, organic electronics, mess-spec of biologically relevant molecules plant analysis and quantum mechanics, biosensors and quantum dynamics. We have many links with both industrial and academic partners around the world, contributing to the School's international reputation for excellence.

The School of Chemistry has been honoured with a Royal Society of Chemistry (RSC) Landmark Award. This is the first for Bangor, and the first of its kind for Wales. The RSC Chemical Landmark Plaque is in recognition of both Professor Ted Hughes’ critical research in Physical Organic Chemistry and the 125 years of excellence in Chemistry at Bangor. Professor Hughes was Head of the School of Chemistry from 1943-8. His research contributed to a greater understanding of organic reaction mechanisms which now underpin university chemistry curricula world-wide. The long-standing relationship forged between the RSC and the School of Chemistry has been extremely important, benefitting all aspects of Chemistry from teaching and research to school events and public lectures. Many of the RSC Local Section officers and Committee members are Bangor Chemistry staff and students. Serving on the RSC committee has also proved invaluable for many students. The RSC has not only enriched the student experience here at Bangor but has helped to excite generations of school children about science.

COURSE LIST: MSc/PgDip • Analytical Chemistry • Environmental Chemistry MRes • Chemistry MSc by Research • Chemistry* PhD/MPhil • Chemistry * Please see the website for course details.

CONTACT DETAILS: School of Chemistry Tel: + 44 (0) 1248 382375 E-mail: chemistry@bangor.ac.uk www.bangor.ac.uk/chemistry

School of Chemistry English Language requirements International applicants are normally required to provide evidence of English language proﬁciency. The minimum English requirements are: • IELTS 6.0 (with no individual score lower than 5.5). For PhD/MPhil/MSc by Research: • IELTS 6.5 (with the following minimum component scores: Writing-6.5; Reading6.5; Speaking-6.0; Listening-6.0.) For MRes: • 7.0 (Speaking-6.5; Listening-6.5; Writing7.0; Reading-7.0).

BANGOR UNIVERSITY POSTGRADUATE PROSPECTUS 161

39450 BU PG Prospectus 2015_2018 2014-09-10 10:36 AM Page 162

Chemistry MRes COURSE DURATION MRes: 1 year full-time.

Compulsory Modules: • Laboratory Health and Safety • Research Thesis This module gives a basic grounding in safety The thesis takes the form of a 120-200 page training. A series of videos/lectures are used to ENTRY REQUIREMENTS (40,000 words maximum) document describing give you awareness of all safety issues which BSc (Hons) 1st class or 2.i (or equivalent) in the background literature to the area of include legal requirements, filling in COSHH Chemistry or suitable science degree. research and the research work undertaken. assessment forms, use of data bases etc. You also participate in an intensive first aid course COURSE DESCRIPTION • Advanced Research and laboratory Skills under the guidance of the Red Cross, the The objective of this MRes programme is to This module comprises 3 main areas: successful completion of which results in produce skilled postgraduates who can act in the (i) project planning certification. increasingly wide research area of chemistry. (ii) literature review The taught element encompasses subject (iii) initial project laboratory work and training Also included is a practical fire fighting course specific critical evaluation of scientific literature, where you learn the basis of fire prevention, the writing and presentational skills as well as As such, this module assesses your ability to correct techniques in the use of and choices of project planning and advanced lab skills (60 work in a laboratory environment and to set in fire extinguishers. Finally you are expected to credits). The research element (120 credits) will place an area of research work. The literature put together a small portfolio to indicate that require students to undertake a major research report takes the form of a 20-30 page review of you have put the knowledge into practice in thesis under direct supervision which will be the background literature to your area of your course - e.g. demonstrate the proper use written up as a thesis. This will be attractive to research and will act as the background and of COSHH assessments etc. This will be backed both KESS funded students and industrial basis to the final MRes thesis. The document up by your supervisor’s/line manager’s input. partners as well as self-funded students. should be word processed and should be prepared in consultation with your project CAREER PROSPECTS supervisor. This will open up postgraduate career opportunities in a broad range of employment areas in the chemical, environmental, pharmaceutical and biotech industries. For further course details, please see: www.bangor.ac.uk/go/pg/chemistry

Analytical Chemistry MSc/PgDip COURSE DURATION MSc: 1 year full-time; Diploma: 30 weeks fulltime.

• Diploma Report The diploma report takes the form of a 40 to 50 page thesis describing the background literature to your area of research and the ENTRY REQUIREMENTS research work performed during the diploma A minimum 2.ii honours degree in Chemistry or a project. chemistry-related subject is required. • Project Thesis COURSE DESCRIPTION The thesis takes the form of a 60 to 100 page This course provides recent graduates with (20,000 words maximum) document describing training in current analytical techniques and the background literature to the area of scientific skills which are of value to a wide range research and the research work undertaken. of sectors including chemical, pharmaceutical, optoelectronics and environmental monitoring. • Literature and Laboratory Skills MSc This programme consists of both a taught This module assesses your ability to work to element and a substantial research project. The initiate and plan a research project. lecture modules cover a broad range of scientific topics as well as transferable skills. The • Modern Analytical Techniques individual research topics may be in either This module contains three analytical applied or fundamental areas of analytical chemistry practicals (UV/Vis, atomic chemistry and wherever possible, projects are absorption, advanced chromatography). Valid designed to tackle real industrial or environanalytical measurement and computer mental problems. statistics packages are also covered in the context of experimental data analysis. Compulsory Modules: • IT Presentation Skills • Laboratory Health and Safety This module is designed to give you a virtual This module gives a basic grounding in safety toolbox of ways to make yourself seen, heard training. and understood. It pulls together a range of the latest in presentation technologies and Optional Modules - choose 1: software applications. • Pollution and Environment • Structure and Reactivity (Organic Chemistry) • Diploma Laboratory Work MSc • Synthetic Glycoconjugates as Biological Probes The diploma laboratory work continues on from • Processes at Interfaces the preliminary first semester literature • Advanced Topics in Inorganic Chemistry module and is intended to enable development • any other Early Research and Development of your laboratory, analytical and spectroscopic Programme chosen in discussion with your skills. Supervisor

162 BANGOR UNIVERSITY POSTGRADUATE PROSPECTUS

RESEARCH LINKS/LINKS WITH INDUSTRY Students that study this degree on the ATM (Access to Masters) programme will be automatically partnered with a local company. The project you undertake on this scheme will relate directly to the work of that company and you will work closely with and under the supervision of the company. To take advantage of the Access to Masters Scheme UK and EU students need to have been living in the convergence area of Wales for at least 3 years. More details on the ATM scheme can be found on the School of Chemistry’s web site. CAREER PROSPECTS This degree could open up a whole world of opportunity for graduates for example some of our students have found careers in the following areas: • Researching pollutant levels in marine and costal environments • Developing new sensors for measuring of organic and inorganic species • Identifying new biomarkers of disease states • Quality Assurance Laboratories • Hi-Tech industry • Postgraduate study in Chemistry, Environmental or related sciences (PhD) • Teaching For further course details, please see: www.bangor.ac.uk/go/pg/chemistry

39450 BU PG Prospectus 2015_2018 2014-09-10 10:36 AM Page 163

Environmental Chemistry MSc/PgDip COURSE DURATION MSc: 1 year full-time; Diploma: 30 weeks fulltime.

• Diploma Report The diploma report takes the form of a 40 to 50 page thesis describing the background literature to your area of research and the ENTRY REQUIREMENTS research work performed during the diploma A minimum 2.ii honours degree in Chemistry or a project. chemistry-related subject is required. • Project Thesis COURSE DESCRIPTION The thesis takes the form of a 60 to 100 page This course provides recent graduates with (20,000 words maximum) document describing training in current analytical techniques, the background literature to the area of scientific and transferable skills applicable for research and the research work undertaken. environmental chemistry research. Individual research topics (which make up a considerable • Literature and Laboratory Skills MSc part of the course) are all in the area of This module comprises 2 main areas: environmental chemistry. Typical projects have (i) project planning included contaminated land/water clean-up, (ii) literature review studies of marine anti-fouling agents and the effect of drought on nutrient cycling in soil. The As such, this module assesses your ability to lectures and teaching cover a broad range of work to initiate and plan a research project. The topics. Coursework is assessed by formal literature report takes the form of a 20-30 page examination, and the MSc is awarded following review of the background literature to your area the examination of a dissertation. of research and will act as the background and basis to the final Diploma report and MSc Compulsory Modules: thesis. • IT Presentation Skills This module is designed to give you a virtual • Modern Analytical Techniques toolbox of ways to make yourself seen, heard This module contains three analytical and understood. It pulls together a range of the chemistry practicals (UV/Vis, atomic latest in presentation technologies and absorption, advanced chromatography). Valid software applications and gives a chance to get analytical measurement and computer hands-on experience with them. statistics packages are also covered in the context of experimental data analysis. • Diploma Laboratory Work MSc The diploma laboratory work in the first and • Laboratory Health and Safety second semester continues on from the This module gives a basic grounding in safety preliminary first semester literature module training. and is intended to enable development of your laboratory, analytical and spectroscopic skills.

Optional Modules - choose 1: • Pollution and Environment • Waste Management and Utilisation • Structure and Reactivity (Organic Chemistry) • Synthetic Glycoconjugates as Biological Probes • Processes at Interfaces • Advanced Topics in Inorganic Chemistry any other Early Research and Development Programme chosen in discussion with your Supervisor. RESEARCH LINKS/LINKS WITH INDUSTRY Students who study this degree on the ATM (Access to Masters) programme will be automatically partnered with a local company. The project you undertake on this scheme will relate directly to the work of that company and you will work closely with and under the supervision of the company. To take advantage of the Access to Masters Scheme, UK and EU students need to have been living in the convergence area for at least 3 years. More details on the ATM scheme can be found on the School of Chemistry’s website. CAREER PROSPECTS Most of our students now have successful careers in the chemical and parmaceutical industry, environmental consultancy, teaching or further PhD studies and academia.

Chemistry PhD/MPhil COURSE DURATION PhD: 2 to 3 years full-time; MPhil: 2 years fulltime. ENTRY REQUIREMENTS A minimum 2.i honours degree in Chemistry or a chemistry-related subject is required. COURSE DESCRIPTION Many research projects are continually investigated. Please check the School’s website. for the most up-to-date list of research conducted within the School. RESEARCH LINKS/LINKS WITH INDUSTRY Some of our students have completed a PhD whilst working within industry and studying parttime. We also offer funding streams for EU students which link students with industry for the duration of their PhD. Students gain invaluable industry experience and the local company is able to take advantage of the latest research. CAREER PROSPECTS Most of our students now have successful careers in the chemical and parmaceutical industry, environmental consultancy, teaching or further PhD studies and academia. For further course details, please see: www.bangor.ac.uk/go/pg/chemistry

BANGOR UNIVERSITY POSTGRADUATE PROSPECTUS 163

39450 BU PG Prospectus 2015_2018 2014-09-10 10:36 AM Page 164

164 BANGOR UNIVERSITY POSTGRADUATE PROSPECTUS

39450 BU PG Prospectus 2015_2018 2014-09-10 10:36 AM Page 165

School of Computer Science About the School The School of Computer Science is a young and lively community of academic staﬀ, undergraduate and postgraduate students and postdoctoral research workers. Computer Science at Bangor is ideally placed to provide the training required for a career in IT in the 21st Century. Our interactions with a wide range of companies ensure our degree courses reﬂect current trends and recent developments in their subjects. Facilities The School has a strong and vibrant postgraduate programme and our students have dedicated laboratories in which to work. The School is well equipped with computer rooms and other specialist equipment (such as a High Performance Visualisation and Medical Graphics laboratory) that are used to support and reinforce information and concepts presented during lectures and seminars. In addition, we aim to ensure that our students use industry-standard hardware and software from the beginning of their studies and we continue to invest in new computer systems and up-to-date software to support our teaching. The School’s strong focus on postgraduate teaching and research means that all our students are involved with current research themes from the outset, working closely with their personal tutors on the latest research.

An innovative cross-disciplinary approach by scientists at the School of Computer Science and the School of Psychology received over £500,000 in funding from two of the UK’s main funding bodies, the Engineering and Physical Sciences Research Councils and the Economic and Social Research Council. The ability to create artificial vision systems as complex as our own human vision has challenged robotics experts for decades. Artificial vision systems able to recognise objects and function beyond a stable, controlled environment would have a range of applications. Working together, the cross-disciplinary project aims to work out the highly complex neural processes involved in simple tasks such as recognising objects, despite variations such as position, light and shadow. Dr Ik Soo Lim from the School of Computer Science explained: “Our input involved translating data from one discipline into the language of another. We will be converting the data being collected in the psychologists’ vision laboratories into computational models that will underpin the development of more complex artificial visual systems.”

COURSE LIST: MSc • Computer Science • Computer Science with Artificial Intelligence • Computer Science with Security • Computer Science with Visualisation MRes • Advanced Visualisation, Virtual Environments and Computer Animation MBA • Information Management (see page 74) PhD/MPhil • Artificial Intelligence and Intelligent Agents • Communication Networks and Protocols • Medical Visualisation and Simulation • Pattern Recognition/Classifiers

CONTACT DETAILS: School of Computer Science Tel: + 44 (0) 1248 382686 E-mail: cs-pg-admissions@bangor.ac.uk www.bangor.ac.uk/cs

The Software Alliance Wales (SAW) project helps to foster collaborations with local IT companies. There are also many opportunities in the IT industry in many sectors due to the presence of a high number of IT companies and SMEs in north Wales. Overview of academic areas Research expertise in the School spans computer graphics, visualization, knowledge discovery, and communications. Expertise in these areas is incorporated into our teaching activities, giving students direct access to the latest Computer Science research. School of Computer Science English Language requirements International applicants are normally required to provide evidence of English language proﬁciency. The minimum English requirements are: • IELTS 6.0 (with no individual score lower than 5.5).

BANGOR UNIVERSITY POSTGRADUATE PROSPECTUS 165

39450 BU PG Prospectus 2015_2018 2014-09-10 10:36 AM Page 166

Computer Science with Visualisation MSc COURSE DURATION MSc: 1 years full-time, 2 years part-time. ENTRY REQUIREMENTS A recognised initial degree in Computer Science is required. Applicants from overseas must in addition demonstrate competence in English to level IELTS 6.0 overall and no element under 5.5. An appropriate ELCOS (Bangor University English Language School) pre-sessional course may be taken to achieve the required English language level.

COURSE DESCRIPTION Students completing this course will have an understanding of the fundamentals underpinning computing and its applications with a specialisation in the area of visualisation. You will be able to describe the operation of such software systems, apply the related principles into the implementation of properly engineered software, and understand the drivers for future trends. Compulsory Modules: • Individual Project (60 credits) • Information Visualisation • Computer Animation • Virtual Environments and Human Perception • Scientiﬁc Visualisation • High Performance Computing • Data Networks and Internet Systems Optional Modules: • AI and Agents • Applied AI • Object Oriented Programming

RESEARCH LINKS/LINKS WITH INDUSTRY Researchers in the School are leaders in the field of visualisation, and are part of the Research Institute in Visual Computing (RIVIC), a collaborative amalgamation of research programmes between the computer science departments in Aberystwyth, Bangor, Cardiff and Swansea Universities. The School has many links with industry (e.g. IBM, EADS) and organisations (North Wales Police, MOD, DSTL). The job market for computer science students with specialist skills in visualisation encompasses all areas of the IT industry since the need for visualisation is fundamental. CAREER PROSPECTS Computer Science at Bangor is regularly ranked amongst the top universities in the UK for employability according to league tables. The Software Alliance Wales (SAW) Project helps to foster collaborations with local IT companies. There are also many opportunities in the IT industry in many sectors due to the presence of a comparatively high number of IT companies and SMEs in north Wales. For further course details, please see: www.bangor.ac.uk/go/pg/computerscience

Computer Science with Security MSc COURSE DURATION MSc: 1 years full-time, 2 years part-time. ENTRY REQUIREMENTS A recognised initial degree in Computer Science is required. Applicants from overseas must in addition demonstrate competence in English to level IELTS 6.0 overall and no element under 5.5. An appropriate ELCOS (Bangor University English Language School) pre-sessional course may be taken to achieve the required English language level.

COURSE DESCRIPTION In 2011, it was estimated that the total cost of cyber crime to the UK was £27 bn. The major financial losses were associated with the theft of Intellectual Property and Industrial Espionage. Critical in the protection of an organisation’s infrastructure are the development of a computer security culture and the adoption of mature security standards/controls and technology.

RESEARCH LINKS/LINKS WITH INDUSTRY Computer Science at Bangor is regularly ranked amongst the top universities in the UK for employability according to league tables. The Software Alliance Wales (SAW) Project helps to foster collaborations with local IT companies. There are also many opportunities in the IT industry in many sectors due to the presence of a comparatively high number of IT companies and SMEs in north Wales.

Students completing this course will have an understanding of the fundamentals underpinning computing and its applications with a specialisation in the area of Security. You will be able to describe the operation of such software systems, apply the related principles into the implementation of properly engineered software, and understand the drivers for future trends.

CAREER PROSPECTS This MSc will equip you with the computer and information security skills needed by any organisation. Those completing the MSc in Computer Science with Security course will definitely be more employable as computer securities become a priority.

Compulsory Modules: • Individual Project (60 credits) • Network Security • Cryptography • Digital Forensics • Data Networks and Communications • High Performance Computing • AI and Agents • Technologies for Internet Systems Optional Modules: • Applied Artiﬁcial Intelligence • Object Oriented Programming

166 BANGOR UNIVERSITY POSTGRADUATE PROSPECTUS

For further course details, please see: www.bangor.ac.uk/go/pg/computerscience

39450 BU PG Prospectus 2015_2018 2014-09-10 10:36 AM Page 167

Computer Science with Artificial Intelligence MSc COURSE DURATION MSc: 1 year full-time, 2 years part-time. ENTRY REQUIREMENTS A recognised initial degree in Computer Science is required. Applicants from overseas must in addition demonstrate competence in English to level IELTS 6.0 overall and no element under 5.5. An appropriate ELCOS (Bangor University English Language School) pre-sessional course may be taken to achieve the required English language level. COURSE DESCRIPTION Artificial intelligence has been used to such great effect in recent years that it has been instrumental in bringing about a change in the way the internet functions and has also been fundamental to the success of many companies. In 2003, Greenpeace published a report entitled “Future Technologies: Today’s choices – Nanotechnology, Artificial Intelligence and Robotics; A technical, political and institutional map of emerging technologies”. They identified five key technologies as “emerging” that offer “hope for the betterment of the human condition”. These five key technologies were: Biotechnology; Nanotechnology; Cognitive Science; Robotics; and Artificial Intelligence. The last three of these technologies are in the Artificial Intelligence area that is addressed by this programme.

Students completing this course will have an understanding of the fundamentals underpinning computing and its applications with a specialisation in the area of Artificial Intelligence. You will be able to apply the related principles into the implementation of properly engineered software, and understand the drivers for future trends. Compulsory Modules: • Individual Project (60 credits) • Project Foundations and Management Tools • AI and Agents • Applied Artificial Intelligence • Natural Language Computing • Pattern Recognition and Neural Networks • Data Networks and Communications

CAREER PROSPECTS To name just two examples of many, Artificial Intelligence technologies used to develop search engines (e.g. Google, Bing) and recommendation software (e.g. Amazon, Facebook) have proved to be game changers in the IT industry spawning billion-dollar sub-industries such as search engine optimisation. Clearly, Artificial Intelligence is an area of fundamental importance to all IT employers. For further course details, please see: www.bangor.ac.uk/go/pg/computerscience

Optional Modules: • Object Oriented Programming • Computer Animation • Virtual Environments and Human Perception • High Performance Computing • Technologies for Internet Systems • Information Visualisation RESEARCH LINKS/LINKS WITH INDUSTRY Computer Science at Bangor is regularly ranked amongst the top universities in the U.K. for employability according to league tables. The Software Alliance Wales (SAW) Project helps to foster collaborations with local IT companies. There are also many opportunities in the IT industry in many sectors due to the presence of a comparatively high number of IT companies and SMEs in north Wales.

Computer Science MSc COURSE DURATION MSc: 1 year full-time. ENTRY REQUIREMENTS A recognised initial degree is required. Applicants from overseas must in addition demonstrate competence in English to level IELTS 6.0 overall and no element under 5.5. An appropriate ELCOS (Bangor University English Language School) pre-sessional course may be taken to achieve the required English language level.

Compulsory modules: • High Performance Computing • Data Networks and Communications • Information Visualisation • Technologies for Internet Systems • AI and Agents • Individual Project Optional modules: • Object Oriented Programming • Natural Language Computing • Pattern Recognition and Neural Networks • Applied Artificial Intelligence • Computer Animation • Scientific Visualisation • Virtual Environments and Human Perception

CAREER PROSPECTS Computer Science at Bangor is regularly ranked amongst the top universities in the UK for employability according to league tables. The Software Alliance Wales (SAW) Project helps to foster collaborations with local IT companies. There are also many opportunities in the IT industry in many sectors due to the presence of a comparatively high number of IT companies and SMEs in north Wales. For further course details, please see: www.bangor.ac.uk/go/pg/computerscience

COURSE DESCRIPTION This MSc takes an immersive approach to learning both the principles and practices of computer systems with much of the material • MSc Research Project (60 credits) based around examples and practical exercises. Students are expected to conduct project work Students completing this course will have a firm that is at near or actual state of the art research grasp of the current practices and directions in level and to present this work as a written computer systems and will be able to design and dissertation. build for example, distributed systems for the Web using Internet, Intranet and other RESEARCH LINKS/LINKS WITH INDUSTRY technologies. Students that study this degree on the ATM (Access to Masters) programme will be automatically partnered with a local company. The project you undertake on this scheme will relate directly to the work of that company and you will work closely with and under the supervision of the company. To take advantage of the Access to Masters Scheme, UK and EU students need to have been living in the convergence area of Wales for at least 3 years. More details on the ATM scheme can be found on the School of Computer Science web site.

BANGOR UNIVERSITY POSTGRADUATE PROSPECTUS 167

39450 BU PG Prospectus 2015_2018 2014-09-10 10:36 AM Page 168

Advanced Visualisation, Virtual Environments and Computer Animation MRes COURSE DURATION MRes: 1 year full-time. ENTRY REQUIREMENTS An honours degree in computer science or engineering/scientific discipline, which included a substantial computing element. COURSE DESCRIPTION This course aims at providing computer science graduates with the knowledge and skills to specialise in advanced computer graphics principles and practice, as well as gaining exposure to research activities in this field. Students completing this course will have a firm grasp of the current practices and directions in computer graphics techniques and be able to apply them to scientific visualization, virtual environments, and computer animation. Compulsory Modules: • Computer Animation • Virtual Environments and Human Perception • Information Visualisation • Scientiﬁc Visualisation • MRes Project CAREER PROSPECTS Computer Science at Bangor is regularly ranked amongst the top universities in the UK for employability according to league tables. The Software Alliance Wales (SAW) Project helps to foster collaborations with local IT companies. There are also many opportunities in the IT industry in many sectors due to the presence of a comparatively high number of IT companies and SME’s in north Wales. For further course details, please see: www.bangor.ac.uk/go/pg/computerscience

Artificial Intelligence and Intelligent Agents / Communication Networks and Protocols / Medical Visualisation and Simulation / Pattern Recognition / Classifiers PhD/MPhil COURSE DURATION PhD: 3 years full-time; MPhil: 2 years full-time. ENTRY REQUIREMENTS • Artifical Intelligence and Intelligent Agents: a good honours degree or equivalent is required. • Communication Networks and Protocols: a good honours degree or equivalent in electronic engineering or computer science is required. • Medical Visualisation and Simulation: a good honours degree or equivalent with computer science is required. • Pattern Recognition/Classifiers: a good honours degree or equivalent with computer science is required. COURSE DESCRIPTIONS Artifical Intelligence and Intelligent Agents Research topics include knowledge-based systems, logic, multi-agent systems, distributed systems, evolutionary algorithms, machine learning, data mining, computational linguistics, natural language processing, information theory and information retrieval, text mining, text categorization, question/answering, machine translation, believable agents (e.g. chatbots), and artificial life agents. Communication Networks and Protocols The main research fields are: network planning and optimization, wireless data networks, and network protocols. There are strong links externally with the other research groups, both within the and internationally, as well as many of the leading companies in the area.

168 BANGOR UNIVERSITY POSTGRADUATE PROSPECTUS

Visualisation and Simulation The main research fields are: medical visualisation; surgical simulation; telemedicine; computer graphics; and visualisation across the computational Grid. There are strong links externally with the other research groups in this field, and the NHS. Pattern Recognition/Classifiers Pattern recognition is a very active field of research intimately bound to machine learning and data mining. Also known as classification or statistical classification, pattern recognition aims at building a classifier that can determine the class of an input pattern. An input could be the ZIP code on an envelope, a satellite image, microarray gene expression data, a chemical signature of an oil-field probe, a financial record of a company and many more. The classifier may take a form of a function, an algorithm, a set of rules, etc. Pattern recognition is about training such classifiers to do tasks that could be tedious, dangerous, infeasible, impractical, expensive or simply difficult for humans. Pattern recognition faces many challenges in the modern era of massive data collection (e.g. in retail, communication and Internet) and high demand for precision and speed (e.g. in security monitoring and target tracking). New methodologies are needed to answer these application-born challenges. The School offers a new and exciting research programme in the area of Pattern Recognition and Classification.

RESEARCH LINKS/LINKS WITH INDUSTRY Some of our students have completed a PhD whilst working within industry and studying parttime. Bangor University also offers various funding streams for local students (the KESS programme) which links students with industry for the duration of their PhD. Students gain invaluable industry experience and the local company is able to take advantage of the latest research. CAREER PROSPECTS There are strong links with industry and with other research groups in this field. Computer Science at Bangor is regularly ranked amongst the top universities in the UK for employability according to league tables. The Software Alliance Wales (SAW) Project helps to foster collaborations with local IT companies. There are also many opportunities in the IT industry in many sectors due to the presence of a comparatively high number of IT companies and SMEs in north Wales. For further course details, please see: www.bangor.ac.uk/go/pg/computerscience

39450 BU PG Prospectus 2015_2018 2014-09-10 10:37 AM Page 169

School of Electronic Engineering About the School The School of Electronic Engineering is at the forefront of education and research in electronics today and conducts world-leading research in optoelectronics, optical communications, organic electronics and bioelectronics. In the most recent Government Research Assessment Exercise the School was ranked 2nd in the UK.

COURSE LIST:

Staﬀ and facilities Since our staﬀ work with companies through joint research projects, knowledge transfer partnerships and as consultants, students can be sure that they are taught by practising professional engineers and scientists.

PhD/MPhil • Electrical Materials Science • Laser Micromachining and Laboratory-ona-Chip • Optical Communications • Optoelectronics • Organic Electronics

The School of Electronic Engineering has excellent facilities for postgraduate students, including access to cutting edge laboratory equipment, from clean rooms to optical communications testbeds. Students will have access to relevant equipment and experimental techniques, and will carry out their project work in the School’s well equipped research laboratories. The hands-on approach to teaching and laboratory work means that all our students will gain invaluable experience of industrystandard techniques, giving you a signiﬁcant edge in the job market. Overview of academic areas Optoelectronics research focuses on understanding the physics of semiconductor optoelectronic devices, with a particular emphasis on the dynamics of optoelectronic systems and on optical chaos synchronisation and chaos communications.

MSc • Broadband and Optical Communications • Electronic Engineering • Nanotechnology and Microfabrication MRes • Electronic Engineering

Sanjay Priyadarshi, from India, was awarded a research scholarship that was oﬀered as part of the University’s 125th anniversary celebrations. He is currently studying for a PhD at the School of Electronic Engineering. “I received the 125th Anniversary Research Scholarship which was a golden opportunity for me to follow my dream of studying further and now I am a PhD student at the School of Electronic Engineering. My area of research is Optical Chaos Communication and the Characteristics of Nonlinear Dynamics of Semiconductor Lasers. The School has excellent facilities and experienced staﬀ that all have the incredible skill of motivating and preparing their students for the challenges of the new high-tech world. Bangor University is among the best research-intensive universities in the UK. The University has excellent research facilities along with excellent teaching and learning resources and support.

The Organic Electronics researchers examine how organic chemicals, with desirable electronic properties, can be manufactured into electronic devices to compete with silicon, with a particular emphasis on organic photovoltaic materials and low-cost plastic electronics.

The best thing about the School for me is the eco-friendly research environment and the fact that I can discuss my thoughts and ideas with the full involvement of the group. My colleagues also provide all the support that I need.

The interaction between electronic and electrical phenomena and biological samples forms the focus of bioelectronic research at the school. Biological measuring instruments can be made by utilising the interplay of cells and miniaturised, structured electric ﬁelds, to build an entire ‘lab on a chip’.

I am working on Optical Chaos, which has a potential application in secure communication. The semiconductor lasers are fascinating sources for secure optical communications using chaos. It is most relevant for today’s increasing requirement for secure data transmission at very fast speed.

School of Electronic Engineering English Language requirements International applicants are normally required to provide evidence of English language proﬁciency. The minimum English requirements are: • IELTS 6.0 (with no individual score lower than 5.5). For Nanotechnology and Microfabriaction MSc: • IELTS 6.5 (with no individual score lower than 6.0).

CONTACT DETAILS: School of Electronic Engineering Tel: + 44 (0) 1248 382686 E-mail: eng-pg-admissions@bangor.ac.uk www.bangor.ac.uk/eng

The School of Electronic Engineering is ranked 2nd in the UK in the most recent government Research Assessment Exercise.

After I complete my studies I hope to work with an optimistic group in a challenging research ﬁeld and also to make the best use of my knowledge for the development of Science and Technology and to utilise it for the wellbeing of mankind.”

BANGOR UNIVERSITY POSTGRADUATE PROSPECTUS 169

39450 BU PG Prospectus 2015_2018 2014-09-10 10:37 AM Page 170

Electronic Engineering MRes Specialist areas of study: Optoelectronics; Optical Communications; Organic Electronics; Polymer Electronics; Micromachining; Nanotechnology; VLSI Design; Bio-Electronics; Microwave Devices. COURSE DURATION MRes: 1 year full-time. ENTRY REQUIREMENTS We welcome applicants who have gained an Honours degree in Electronic Engineering, Physics or a related scientific discipline, at a 2.ii level or higher or the international equivalent. Applicants with initial degrees in other disciplines will be considered on an individual basis, with the assessment based on the applicant’s potential to succeed on, and benefit from, the course.

It is the normal expectation that the independent research thesis (120 credits) should be of at a publishable standard in a high quality peer reviewed journal. Each MRes shares the taught element of the course. After successful completion of the taught element you are then able to specialise in a specific subject for your thesis.

CAREER PROSPECTS Graduates of these courses have gone on to work in various branches of the Electronics industry, for example optical communications and telecommunications companies, government research facilities like GCHQ, and various nanotechnology enterprises, from start-ups to multinational companies.

Compulsory Modules: Many MRes students will continue postgraduate The taught provision has three 15 credit modules study after graduating, going on to MPhil and Phd that concentrate on specific generic skills. aprogrammes. Whatever your final destination, MRes graduates will have demonstrable • Modelling and Design independent research skills and the ability to This module focuses on the simulation and scope and manage complicated technical design of electronic devices using an advanced projects. You will also have developed scientific software package – COMSOL. This powerful and engineering skills specific to your particular commercial software package is extremely area of study, from scanning probe microscopy to adaptable and can be used to simulate and finite element modelling which are of immediate design a very wide range of physical systems. applicability in technical industries.

Applicants from overseas must in addition demonstrate competence in English to level • Project Planning and Management For further course details, please see: IELTS 6.0 overall and no element under 5.5 with a This module focuses on the skills required to www.bangor.ac.uk/go/pg/electronicengineering writing score of 6.5. An appropriate ELCOS scope, plan, execute and report the outcomes of (Bangor University English Language School) a business and research project. pre-sessional course may be taken to achieve the required English language level. • Mini Project This module focuses on applying the skills and COURSE DESCRIPTION techniques to a mini project, whose theme will Each programme is aligned to the research form the basis of the substantial research conducted within the School. The MRes project. programme provides a dedicated route for highcalibre students who (and possibly have a • Research Project specific research aim in mind) are ready to carry After the successful completions of the taught out independent research leading to PhD level component of the programme, the major study or who are seeking a stand alone research- individual thesis will be undertaken within the based qualification suitable for a career in world-leading research groups of the School. research with transferable skills for graduate employment.

Broadband and Optical Communications MSc COURSE DURATION MSc: 1 year full-time.

Compulsory Modules: • Mobile Communications • Data Networks and Communications This module will provide an in-depth This module will provide an in-depth understanding of current and emerging mobile ENTRY REQUIREMENTS understanding of how real communication communication systems, with a particular This degree is aimed at candidates who have networks are structured and the protocols that emphasis on the common aspects of all such gained an Honours degree in Electronic make them work. It will give you the ability to systems. Engineering, Physics or a related scientific explain in detail the process followed to provide discipline, at a 2.ii level or higher or the an end-to-end connection. • RF and Optical MEMS international equivalent. Applicants with initial This module introduces the use and benefits of degrees in other disciplines will be considered on • Modelling and Design miniaturisation in RF and optical Technologies an individual basis, with the assessment based This module focuses on the simulation and and will investigate improvements in on the applicant’s potential to succeed on, and design of electronic devices using an advanced component characteristics and Manufacturing benefit from, the course. software package – COMSOL. This powerful processes. commercial software package is extremely Applicants from overseas must in addition adaptable and can be used to simulate and RESEARCH LINKS/LINKS WITH INDUSTRY demonstrate competence in English to level design a very wide range of physical systems. This course was devised in close consultation IELTS 6.0 overall and no element under 5.5. An with the telecommunications industry, and a appropriate ELCOS (Bangor University English • Project Planning and Management number of modules are taught by guest lecturers Language School) pre-sesional course may be This module focuses on the skills required to with many years of industry experience. taken to achieve the required English language scope, plan, execute and report the outcomes of level. a business and research project. CAREER PROSPECTS Graduates can expect to find employment in the COURSE DESCRIPTION • Advanced Optical Communications fast-developing communications industry, from This course aims to give suitable graduates an The main learning objective of this module is a local-loop service providers to backhaul network in-depth understanding of the technology, and study of the design and operating companies. You will have advanced skills in the the drivers for the technology, in the area of characteristics of optical fibre communication analysis and design of broadband communibroadband and mobile communications. The systems. cation systems and components, with a course will also provide exposure to current particular emphasis on optical communications. research activity in the field. • Mini Project These skills will be immediately applicable in the This module focuses on applying the skills and ever-growing communications industry. Upon completing the programme, you will have a techniques to a mini project. detailed understanding of the current practices For further course details, please see: and directions in this topic, and will be able to • Broadband Communication Systems www.bangor.ac.uk/go/pg/electronicengineering apply them to the task of continuing the roll-out This module aims to provide you with an inof advanced communication services across the depth understanding of current and emerging globe. broadband communications techniques employed in local, access and backbone networks.

170 BANGOR UNIVERSITY POSTGRADUATE PROSPECTUS

39450 BU PG Prospectus 2015_2018 2014-09-10 10:37 AM Page 171

Electronic Engineering MSc COURSE DURATION MSc: 1 year full-time.

Compulsory Modules: • Introduction to Nanotechnology and Microsystems This module focuses on the device fabrication techniques at the nano and micro scale.

CAREER PROSPECTS All graduates of this course will have skills and knowledge in the techniques and ideas of modern electronic systems, with a particular emphasis on the influence of nanotechnology on their design. You will also have developed scientific and engineering skills specific to your particular module choices, from the design of multi-million gate digital circuits to modelling communication systems and optoelectronic devices which are of immediate applicability in technical industries. INDUSTRIAL PLACEMENT Suitably qualified students may be eligible for the Electronic Engineering with Industrial Placement MSc. For further course details, please see: www.bangor.ac.uk/go/pg/electronicengineering

ENTRY REQUIREMENTS This degree is aimed at candidates who have gained an Honours degree in Electronic Engineering, Physics or a related scientific • Modelling and Design discipline, at a 2.ii level or higher or the This module focuses on the simulation and international equivalent. Applicants with initial design of electronic devices using an advanced degrees in other disciplines will be considered on software package – COMSOL. an individual basis, with the assessment based on the applicant’s potential to succeed on, and • Project Planning and Management benefit from, the course. This module focuses on developing tools and techniques for managing projects with an Applicants from overseas must in addition engineering focus. demonstrate competence in English to level IELTS 6.0 overall and no element under 5.5. An • Mini Project appropriate ELCOS (Bangor University English This module focuses on applying the skills and Language School) pre-sessional course may be techniques to a mini project. taken to achieve the required English language level. Optional Modules include: • RF and Optical MEMS COURSE DESCRIPTION • Microengineering This programme aims to provide a broad based • Further Microengineering Electronic Engineering MSc which will enable you • Laser Physics to contribute to the future development of • Optoelectronics electronic products and services. The course • Mobile Communications reflects the School’s highly regarded research • Broadband Communication Systems activity at the leading edge of electronic • Advanced Sensor Systems engineering. The MSc will provide relevant, upto-date skills that enhance the engineering RESEARCH LINKS/LINKS WITH INDUSTRY competency of its graduates and allows a Students following this degree on the ATM broader knowledge of electronic engineering to (Access to Masters) programme will be be acquired by studying important emerging automatically partnered with a local company. technologies, such as, optoelectronics, The project you undertake on this scheme will bioelectronics, polymer electronics and relate directly to the work of that company and micromachining. The course is intended for you will work closely with and under the graduates in a related discipline, who wish to supervision of the company. To take advantage of enhance and specialise their skills in several the Access to Masters Scheme students need to emerging technologies. have been living in the convergence area of

Wales for at least 3 years. More details on the ATM scheme can be found on the School of Electronic Engineering web site.

BANGOR UNIVERSITY POSTGRADUATE PROSPECTUS 171

39450 BU PG Prospectus 2015_2018 2014-09-10 10:37 AM Page 172

Nanotechnology and Microfabrication MSc COURSE DURATION MSc: 1 year full-time.

Compulsory Modules: • Microengineering • Introduction to Nanotechnology and This module provides an introduction to the Microsystems rapidly expanding subject of microengineering. This module focuses on the device fabrication The module investigates clean room-based techniques at the nano and micro scale, as well lithographic and related methods of as introducing some of the diagnostic tools microfabrication, as well as microavailable to test the quality and characteristics manufacturing issues for a range of materials of devices. such as silicon, polymers and metals.

ENTRY REQUIREMENTS This degree is aimed at candidates who have gained an Honours degree in Electronic Engineering, Physics or a related scientific discipline, at a 2.i level or higher or the international equivalent. Applicants with initial degrees in other disciplines will be considered on • Modelling and Design an individual basis, with the assessment based This module focuses on the simulation and on the applicant’s potential to succeed on, and design of electronic devices using an advanced benefit from, the course. software package – COMSOL.

CAREER PROSPECTS Students completing this course will have a firm grasp of the current practices and directions in this exciting area and will have the knowledge and skills to enable you to design and build Applicants from overseas must in addition • Project Planning and Management microscale devices. In particular you will have demonstrate competence in English to level This module focuses on the skills required to strong numerical modelling skills, with expertise IELTS 6.5 overall and no element under 6.0. An scope, plan, execute and report the outcomes of in the newly emerging field of multiphysics appropriate ELCOS (Bangor University English a business and research project. modelling. These skills are immediately Language School) pre-sessional course may be applicable in the growing number of industries taken to achieve the required English language • Advanced Sensor Systems which apply nanotechnology to the design of new level. This module provides you with an products and processes. understanding of more complex sensor COURSE DESCRIPTION systems and a view of current developments in Graduates of these courses have gone on to work This course teaches numerate graduates specific areas of sensor development. in various branches of the Electronics industry, knowledge and skills in the field of for example optical communications and nanotechnology and microfabrication. The course • Mini Project telecommunications companies, government takes an immersive approach to learning both This module focuses on applying the skills and research facilities like GCHQ, and various the principles and practices of nanotechnology techniques to a mini project. nanotechnology enterprises, from start-ups to and microfabrication with much of the material multinational companies. Some MSc students based around examples and practical exercises. • RF and Optical MEMs will continue postgraduate study after External examiners have noted the strong This module introduces the use and benefits of graduating, going on to PhD and MPhil practical element both in the MSc project and in miniaturisation in RF and optical technologies. programmes. the taught part of the course, and have The module will investigate improvements in commended that students on this course do component characteristics, and manufacturing For further course details, please see: significant projects in the clean room. processes. Applications of RF and optical nano www.bangor.ac.uk/go/pg/electronicengineering and microsystems will be discussed using examples.

Electrical Materials Science / Laser Micromachining and Laboratory-on-a-Chip / Optoelectronics / Optical Communications / Organic Electronics PhD/MPhil COURSE DURATION PhD: 3 years full-time; MPhil: 2 years full-time.

Optoelectronics Optoelectronics research is directed at advancing design and system applications of semiconductor ENTRY REQUIREMENTS optoelectronic and organic electro-optic devices A good honours degree or equivalent is required. including laser diodes and optical waveguides. Activities range from: Basic device operating Applicants from overseas must in addition principles through to matters of engineering demonstrate competence in English to level design; Issues in nonlinear dynamics of optical IELTS 6.0 overall and no element under 5.5 with a devices for chaotic optical data encryption. writing score of 6.5. An appropriate ELCOS (Bangor University English Language School) Optical Communications pre-sessional course may be taken to achieve the Research interests include: Advanced optical required English language level. communications systems for long-haul core networks, next-generation high capacity access COURSE DESCRIPTIONS networks and cost-effective local area networks; Electrical Materials Science Optical networking and future all-optical Research interests include: Electronic and networks; Optical and electrical signal dielectric properties of weakly conducting processing. materials; Properties of metal, semiconductor and insulating surfaces; Electrokinetic Organic Electronics manipulation of bioparticles; Hydrocarbon Research is undertaken into: Synthesising new polymers; Lipid films in Langmuir monolayer and monomers and polymers for electronic device bilayer forms; Biological polymers, enzymes and application; Fabrication of polymer MISFETs, cells; Metal dielectric and metal semiconductor Schottky diodes, LEDs, electrical and optical interfaces; Interaction of ultrasound with characterisation of polymers and devices, biological materials. AFM/EFM/Kelvin probe studies on fabricated devices. Laser Micromachining and Laboratory-on-a-chip Research interests include: Electronic and dielectric properties of biological materials; Electrokinetic manipulation of bioparticles; Biological polymers, enzymes and cells; Microfabrication of biofactory and laboratory-ona-chip; Medical therapeutics and diagnostics.

172 BANGOR UNIVERSITY POSTGRADUATE PROSPECTUS

RESEARCH LINKS/LINKS WITH INDUSTRY Some of our students have completed a PhD whilst working within industry with some even studying part-time while employed. Bangor University also offers various funding streams for local students (the KESS programme) which links students with industry for the duration of their PhD. You gain invaluable industry experience and the local company is able to take advantage of the latest research. CAREER PROSPECTS PhD and MPhil graduates in this field have enviable career prospects. Some will go on to Postdoctoral positions, and eventually to academic careers. Others will go on to work in the electronics industry, where both their specialist knowledge and their general research and interpersonal skills are equally valued. For further course details, please see: www.bangor.ac.uk/go/pg/electronicengineering

39450 BU PG Cover_Layout ola 2014-09-10 10:51 AM Page 2

39450 BU PG Cover_Layout ola 2014-09-10 10:51 AM Page 1

CONTENTS

INTRODUCTION

1 Introduction to the University 2 About the University 4 International Research Excellence

LIVING & STUDYING IN BANGOR 6 8 9 12 13 14

Living and Studying in Bangor Accommodation Student Support Library and Archives Service Information Technology Services Social Life and Entertainment

INTERNATIONAL STUDENTS

16 Information for International Students and English Language Requirements

STUDENT FINANCE & APPLYING 18 Student Finance and Fees 20 Applying and Entry Requirements 21 Study Options

GENERAL INFORMATION 173 Useful Contacts

@BangorUni facebook.com/bangoruniversity

If you find it difficult to read the size of print in this prospectus, please look at our website www.bangor.ac.uk for details of our courses and facilities.

22 25 29 35 39 43 47 53 57 61

COLLEGE OF NATURAL SCIENCES School of Biological Sciences School of Environment, Natural Resources and Geography School of Ocean Sciences

128 131 139 143 151

COLLEGE OF HEALTH AND BEHAVIOURAL SCIENCES School of Healthcare Sciences School of Medical Sciences School of Psychology School of Sport, Health and Exercise Sciences

158 161 165 169

COLLEGE OF PHYSICAL AND APPLIED SCIENCES School of Chemistry School of Computer Sciences School of Electronic Engineering

IMPORTANT INFORMATION

USEFUL CONTACTS

The University makes all reasonable eﬀorts to ensure that the information in this brochure is correct at the time of printing (September 2014).

BANGOR UNIVERSITY GWYNEDD LL57 2DG Tel: 01248 351151 Website: www.bangor.ac.uk

The University makes all reasonable efforts to provide the courses, tuition and learning support, research opportunities and other services and facilities with reasonable care and skill and in the way described in this prospectus. However, the University shall be entitled if it reasonably considers it to be necessary (including in order to manage its resources and to improve the quality of its provision) to make reasonable changes to this provision including: • to make change to (for example) the content and syllabus of courses and methods of teaching and assessment (including in relation to placements); • to suspend or discontinue courses (for example, because a key member of staff is unwell or leaves the University and cannot reasonably be replaced). In the unlikely event that the University discontinues or does not provide a course or changes it significantly before it begins, the University will tell the relevant individuals at the earliest possible opportunity. An individual will be entitled to withdraw from the course by telling the University in writing within a reasonable time of being informed of the change. The University will make available to students such learning support and other services and facilities as it considers appropriate but may vary what it provides and how it provides it (for example, the University may consider it desirable to change the way it provides library or IT support). The willingness of the University to consider an application is no guarantee of acceptance. Students are admitted to the University on the basis that the information they provide in their application form is complete and correct.

@prifysgolbangoruniversity

POSTGRADUATE COURSES FAIR: www.bangor.ac/pgfair

DESIGN/IMAGES: COWBOIS/HAMILTON PRINT: W.O. JONES PRINTERS LTD Bangor University Registered Charity No: 1141565

BANGOR UNIVERSITY POSTGRADUATE PROSPECTUS 173